South Magnolia CSO Control Project
Storage Facility
Contract No. C00822C13
Volume 3 of 7
DIVISIONS 16-17
Technical Specifications
July 2013
Department Natural Resources and Parks
Wastewater Treatment Division
Funded in part by the Washington State Department of Ecology
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SOUTH MAGNOLIA CSO CONTROL PROJECT STORAGE FACILITY
CONTRACT C00822C13
VOLUME 1 OF 7
DIVISION 0 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, FORMS AND TERMS AND CONDITIONS
00020 INVITATION TO BID
00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
00120 NON-DISCRIMINATION, EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY, EPA FAIR SHARE
GOALS, GOOD FAITH EFFORT REQUIREMENTS AND APPRENTICESHIP
REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 00120 APPENDIX
GFE WORKBOOK
GFE GUIDANCE DOCUMENT
00130 DAVIS BACON ACT WAGE DETERMINATIONS AND WASHINGTON STATE
PREVAILING WAGE RATES FOR PUBLIC WORK CONTRACTS
00300 FORM OF BID
00310 BID GUARANTY BOND
00410 NONDISCRIMINATION & W-9 TAXPAYER IDENTIFICATION CERTIFICATE FORMS
DUE PRIOR TO CONTRACT EXECUTION BY KING COUNTY
00420 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND
00430 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
00440 QUALIFICATIONS INFORMATION
00500 AGREEMENT
00600 ADDENDA
00700 GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS
00800 SUPPLEMENTAL TERMS & CONDITIONS
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01010 SUMMARY OF WORK
01012 REFERENCE MATERIAL
01014 MILESTONES AND CONSTRAINTS
01025 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
01031 SEISMIC ANCHORAGE AND BRACING
01035 ASBESTOS AND LEAD INFORMATION
01036 GEOTECHNICAL INFORMATION
01050 SURVEY INFORMATION
01062 PERMITS AND EASEMENTS
01063 HEALTH AND SAFETY
01065 SEWER ACCESS
01090 REFERENCE STANDARDS
01130 ESCROW BID DOCUMENTATION
01195 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF PROPERTY AND WORK
01200 CONTRACT MEETINGS
C00822C13
page 1 of 7
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)
C00822C13
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (CONTINUED)
01300 SUBMITTALS PROCEDURE
01310 PROJECT SCHEDULES AND REPORTS
01380 PHOTO IMAGES AND VIDEOS
01410 CONSTRUCTION TESTING
01500 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
01520 PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE FIELD OFFICE
01560 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
01570 TRAFFIC REGULATION
01660 EQUIPMENT TESTING, TRAINING, AND COMMISSIONING
01710 FINAL CLEANING
01720 RECORD DRAWINGS
01725 ASSET DATA
01730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION AND MANUALS
01740 WARRANTY AND GUARANTY
01750 SPARE PARTS
01999 STANDARD FORMS
VOLUME 2 OF 7
DIVISION 2 SITEWORK
02045 CUTTING AND PATCHING
02060 CONTAMINATED SOIL HANDLING AND DISPOSAL
02105 SEWER BYPASSING
02110 SITE CLEARING
02121 SETTLEMENT AND VIBRATION MONITORING AND CONDITION INSPECTIONS
02140 DEWATERING
02160 EXCAVATION SUPPORT SYSTEMS
02200 EARTHWORK
02221 TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
02270 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
02271 SITE WATER DISCHARGE
02371 GABION BASKETS
02513 ASPHALT PAVING
02514 PAVEMENT MARKING
02605 UTILITY STRUCTURES
02616 WATER SERVICE CONNECTION
02720 STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM
02721 BIORETENTION SYSTEMS
02753 CONCRETE DRIVEWAY, SIDEWALKS AND CURBS
02810 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
C00822C13
page 2 of 7
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)
C00822C13
DIVISION 2 SITEWORK (CONTINUED)
02830 CHAIN LINK FENCE AND GATES
02870 SITE FURNISHINGS
02900 LANDSCAPING
02920 LANDSCAPE SOIL PREPARATION
02930 LAWNS AND GRASSES
DIVISION 3 CONCRETE
03100 CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES
03200 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03302 MASS CONCRETE
03310 CONTROLLED DENSITY FILL (CDF)
03400 PRECAST CONCRETE VAULTS
03600 GROUTS AND ADHESIVES
03740 CONCRETE REPAIR CRACK INJECTION
DIVISION 4 MASONRY
04200 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT
DIVISION 5 METALS
05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL
05210 STEEL JOISTS
05310 STEEL DECK
05500 METAL FABRICATIONS
05501 ANCHORAGE TO CONCRETE
05910 HOT-DIP ZINC COATING
DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS
06160 SHEATHING
06510 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP)
06540 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC ENCLOSURES
06630 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) GRATING AND LADDERS
DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07210 BUILDING INSULATION
07250 WEATHER BARRIERS
07411 METAL ROOF PANELS AND SOFFIT PANELS
07560 FLUID APPLIED FLASHING SYSTEM
07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07900 JOINT SEALERS
C00822C13
page 3 of 7
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)
C00822C13
DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS
08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAME
08310 ACCESS HATCHES
08331 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
08513 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
08710 FINISH HARDWARE
08800 GLAZING
DIVISION 9 FINISHES
09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
09653 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
09900 COATING SYSTEMS
09901 FINISHES AND COLORS
DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES
10200 LOUVERS AND VENTS
10405 SIGNS
10520 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS
10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT
11000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT
11009 EQUIPMENT LIST
11021 VIBRATION ISOLATION SYSTEMS
11030 NOISE REQUIREMENTS AND CONTROL
11050 GENERAL EQUIPMENT MOUNTING
11060 ELECTRIC MOTORS
11083 LOW EMISSION DIESEL ENGINE STANDBY GENERATOR SET 150 KW AND
LARGER
11101 CORROSION-RESISTANT SLIDE GATES
11120 COMPOSITE FLAP GATES
11324 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS
11347 SUBMERSIBLE DEWATERING PUMPS
11366 INSTRUMENTATION AIR COMPRESSION SYSTEM AND APPURTENANCES
11710 C2 WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS (NOT USED)
DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13230 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) FABRICATIONS
13231 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) ODOR CONTROL TANK
13234 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) DUCTWORK AND DAMPER
13525 ACTIVATED CARBON
13600 TIPPING BUCKETS
C00822C13
page 4 of 7
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)
C00822C13
DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS
14310 MONORAIL HOISTS
DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL
15050 PIPING SYSTEMS
15056 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE
15061 STEEL PIPE
15062 DUCTILE IRON PIPE
15064 PLASTIC PIPING
15066 COPPER PIPING
15067 STAINLESS STEEL PIPING
15075 JOINT GASKETS
15085 PIPING CONNECTIONS
15092 WALL PENETRATION SEALS
15095 PIPING APPURTENANCES
15096 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15097 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS FOR PIPING
15104 BALL VALVES
15107 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES
15110 SPRING-LOADED SWING CHECK VALVES
15120 REDUCED PRESSURE PRINCIPLE BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
15140 VALVE AND GATE OPERATORS AND OPERATOR APPURTENANCES
15150 SPECIALTY VALVES
15200 HOSES AND NOZZLES FOR UTILITY STATIONS
15260 INSULATION FOR EXPOSED PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
15400 PLUMBING
15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES
15632 ELECTRIC UNIT SPACE HEATERS
15828 CENTRIFUGAL FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) FAN
15835 AIR HANDLING UNITS
15859 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
15889 MIST AND GREASE ELIMINATOR FILTERS
15891 SHEET METAL DUCTWORK
15901 AUTOMATIC HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL
SYSTEMS
15903 GRILLES
15907 SOUND TRAPS AND SILENCERS
15911 DAMPERS AND DAMPER MOTORS
15990 HVAC SYSTEM TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
VOLUME 3 OF 7
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL
16000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
C00822C13
page 5 of 7
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)
16030
16110
16120
16140
16158
16175
16176
16250
16400
16421
16422
16431
16432
16440
16450
16460
16470
16500
16621
16660
16720
16740
16920
C00822C13
ELECTRICAL TESTING
RACEWAYS, BOXES, AND SUPPORTS
600 VOLT CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
WIRING DEVICES
480 VAC VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL DEVICES
LOCAL CONTROL PANELS
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
SERVICE AND METERING
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS) SYSTEM
LIGHTNING AND SURGE ARRESTERS
SHORT CIRCUIT AND COORDINATION REPORT
ARC FLASH REPORT
INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS, METERS, SWITCHES, AND ACCESSORIES
GROUNDING SYSTEM
DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS (600 VOLTS AND LESS)
LIGHTING AND POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
LIGHTING FIXTURES
DIESEL FUEL LEAK DETECTION AND INVENTORY SYSTEM
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM – PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION
GENERAL COMMUNICATIONS
TELEPHONE AND COMPUTER DATA PROVISIONS
LOW-VOLTAGE (480VAC) MCCS
DIVISION 17 INSTRUMENTATION
17000 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
17110 PANELS
17120 ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEMS
17130 POWER SUPPLY AND CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT
17132 SINGLE PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY EQUIPMENT
17211 PROCESS TAPS AND PRIMARY ELEMENTS
17212 TRANSMITTERS
17216 PROCESS SWITCHES
17271 SIGNAL CONDITIONING MODULES
17274 MINIATURE CASE ELECTRONIC PANEL INSTRUMENTS GENERAL
17272 MISCELLANEOUS PANEL INSTRUMENTS
17275 MISCELLANEOUS INSTRUMENTS
17400 SYSTEM LOGIC DESCRIPTIONS
17501 CONTROL STRATEGY – STORAGE TANK FILLING SEQUENCE
C00822C13
page 6 of 7
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)
C00822C13
DIVISION 17 INSTRUMENTATION (CONTINUED)
17502 CONTROL STRATEGY – STORAGE TANK DEWATERING SEQUENCE
17503 CONTROL STRATEGY – STORAGE TANK FLUSHING SEQUENCE
17504 CONTROL STRATEGY – MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEMS
17610 VENDOR-SUPPLIED PACKAGED CONTROL SYSTEM, SMALL
17800 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS
17801 GRAPHICAL OPERATOR INTERFACE
17802 PROGRAMMING
17803 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACES
17804 PLC TESTING
17900 SCHEDULES
17901 INSTRUMENT SCHEDULE
17902 ALARM SCHEDULE
17903 PLC I/O SCHEDULE
17904 METROTEL SCHEDULE
17905 SCADA SIGNAL SCHEDULE
17906 RELAY SCHEDULE
VOLUME 4 OF 7 – CONTRACT DRAWINGS
GENERAL
CIVIL
LANDSCAPE
ARCHITECTURAL
STRUCTURAL
VOLUME 5 OF 7 – CONTRACT DRAWINGS
MECHANICAL
ELECTRICAL
PROCESS AND INSTRUMENTATION
VOLUME 6 OF 7
GEOTECHNICAL DATA REPORT
VOLUME 7 OF 7
PHASE II ENVIRONMENTAL SITE ASSESSMENT
C00822C13
page 7 of 7
Table of Contents
SECTION 16000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies general requirements for electrical work. Detailed requirements for specific
electrical items specified in other sections are subject to the requirements of this Section. The
Electrical Drawings and Schedules included in the specification are functional in nature and do
not specify exact locations of equipment or equipment terminations.
B. All electrical Work included in this Contract including pre-fabricated assemblies shall conform to
the requirements of this Section.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
documents. These references are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of
conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the
requirements of this Section shall prevail.
Reference
Title
ANSI A58.1
Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code (NEC) and local amendments
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
ICEA
Insulated Cable Engineers Association
IBC / IBO
International Building Code
UL
Underwriters Laboratories
B. Identification of Listed Products:
1. Electrical equipment and materials shall be listed and labeled for the purpose for which they
are to be used, by UL or equivalent NRTL agency approved lab as the independent testing
laboratory. Independent testing laboratory shall meet the requirements of the local or state
inspection authority having jurisdiction.
2. When a product is not available with a testing laboratory listing for the purpose for which it is
to serve, the product may be required by the inspection authority to undergo a special
inspection. All costs and expenses incurred for such inspections shall be included in the
original contract price.
3. When the product is an assemblage of individual parts, whether the individual parts are listed
or not, the entire assemblage shall be listed and labeled as a complete unit for the purpose
for which it is to be used.
C. Factory Tests: Where specified in the specification section, perform factory tests at the place of
fabrication. Perform on completion of manufacture or assembly.
D. Qualifications: Not Used
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Catalog cuts of equipment, devices, and materials requested by the specification sections.
1. Catalog information includes technical specifications and application information, including
ratings, range, weight, accuracy, etc.
2. Catalog cuts shall be edited to show only the items, model numbers, and information which
apply to the submittal requirements.
3. Catalog cuts shall be assembled in a folder. Each folder shall contain a cover sheet, indexed
by item, and cross-referenced to the appropriate specification paragraph.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16000 - 1
C00822C13
C. Applicable operation and maintenance information on an item-by-item basis in accordance with
Section 01730. Operation and maintenance information shall be provided at the time of
equipment, device, or material site delivery, or at a certain stage of project completion as required
by Section 01730, whichever is the earlier. Full-size drawings shall be reduced to 11 x 17 inches.
D. Test results for motors and electrical systems on the forms specified in Section 16030 and found
in Section 01999. Maintain a file of the original test results and submit to the Project
Representative prior to Final Acceptance.
E. Description of functional checkout procedures, specified in this specification, 30 days prior to
performing functional checkout tests.
F. Interconnection diagrams depicting all cable requirements together with their actual terminations.
G. Electrical room plan and elevation drawings showing conformance with electrical working
clearances and installation clearances required by selected manufacturer.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Elementary or Schematic Diagram: A schematic (elementary) diagram shows, by means of
graphic symbols, the electrical connections and functions of a specific circuit arrangement. The
schematic diagram facilitates tracing the circuit and its functions without regard to the actual
physical size, shape, or location of the component devices or parts.
B. One-Line Diagram: Shows by means of single lines and graphical symbols the course of an
electrical circuit or system of circuits and the components, devices, or parts used therein.
Physical relationships are usually disregarded.
C. Block Diagram: A diagram of a system, instrument, computer, or program in which selected
portions are represented by annotated boxes and interconnecting lines.
D. Wiring Diagram or Connection System: A wiring or connection diagram includes all of the
devices in a system and shows their physical relationship to each other including terminals and
interconnecting wiring in an assembly. This diagram shall be (a) in a form showing
interconnecting wiring only by terminal designation (wireless diagram), or (b) a panel layout
diagram showing the physical location of devices plus the elementary diagram.
E. Interconnection Diagram:
1. Show all external connections between terminals of equipment and outside points, such as
motors and auxiliary devices.
2. References shall be shown to all connection diagrams which interface to the interconnection
diagrams.
3. Interconnection diagrams shall be of the continuous line type.
4. Bundled wires shall be shown as a single line with the direction of entry/exit of the individual
wires clearly shown. Wireless diagrams and wire lists are not acceptable.
5. Each wire identification as actually installed shall be shown.
6. The wire identification for each end of the same wire shall be identical.
7. All devices and equipment shall be identified.
8. Terminal blocks shall be shown as actually installed and identified in the equipment complete
with individual terminal identification.
9. All jumpers, shielding and grounding termination details not shown on the equipment
connection diagrams shall be shown on the interconnection diagrams.
10. Wires or jumpers shown on the equipment connection diagrams shall not be shown again on
the interconnection diagram.
11. Signal and DC circuit polarities and wire pairs shall be shown.
12. Spare wires and cables shall be shown.
F. Arrangement, Layout, or Outline Drawings: An arrangement, layout, or outline drawing is one
which shows the physical space and mounting requirements of a piece of equipment. It may also
indicate ventilation requirements and space provided for connections or the location to which
connections are to be made.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16000 - 2
C00822C13
1.05 DRAWINGS
A. Prepare drawings specified as part of the work per Section 01720 and submit per Section 01300.
B. Drawings shall be complete with borders and title blocks clearly identifying Contract name,
equipment, and the scope of the drawing.
C. Drawing standard requirements will be supplied by King County.
1.06 SITE CONDITIONS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, size and derate equipment and materials for the ambient
conditions, but not less than an ambient maximum temperature of 40 degrees C at an elevation
ranging from sea level to 3000 feet without exceeding the manufacturer's stated tolerances.
B. Classified Areas:
1. The following areas are designated as Class I Division 1:
a. Storage Facility; storage tank.
b. Storage Facility; wet well.
c. Storage Facility; de-watering pump room.
d. Storage Facility; lower diversion structure.
e. South Magnolia trunk sewer manholes.
2. The following areas are classified as Class I Division 2:
a. Storage Facility; odor control room areas within 3 feet of odor control system leakage
sources when odor control room ventilation is functioning.
b. Odor control carbon vessel vault.
C. Corrosive Areas
1. The following areas are designated as corrosive:
a. Storage Facility; storage tank.
b. Storage Facility; wet well.
c. Storage Facility; lower diversion structure.
d. South Magnolia trunk sewer manholes.
D. Seismic:
1. Electrical equipment and supports: Braced per IBC requirements and Section 01031.
2. Provide calculations for overturning moment and design of the embedded anchors for
securing free-standing equipment to the building structure.
3. Fasten equipment that is front-accessible only to the wall or ceiling as well as the floor.
1.07 STORAGE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Store materials and equipment per Section 00700.
B. Store indoor equipment and materials to be permanently located indoors and seal with plastic film
wrap.
1.08 STATION ELECTRICAL POWER SERVICE
A. Coordinate electrical service with electric power service provider in order to:
1. Position the utility’s transformer on site.
2. Locate the revenue meter.
3. Locate CT enclosure in the electrical room.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16000 - 3
C00822C13
1.09 INDICATING LAMP COLORS
A. Unless otherwise specified, equipment to follow with colored lenses in accordance with the
following schedule:
Color
Function
Example
Red
Run, open valve
Equipment operating, motor running
Green
Ready, closed valve
Equipment ready, end of cycle
White/Clear
Normal condition
Control power on, status OK or clear
Amber/Yellow
Abnormal condition
Failure of equipment or status (yellow)
abnormal, fault condition
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Equipment and materials shall be new and free from defects.
2. All material and equipment of the same or a similar type shall be of the same manufacturer
throughout the work.
3. Standard production materials shall be used wherever possible.
B. Equipment Finish: Unless otherwise indicated, electrical equipment and materials shall be
painted by the manufacturer as specified per Section 09900.
C. Galvanizing: Per Section 05910.
2.02 CONDUCTOR / WIRE MARKERS
A. Identify each power and control conductor at each end of each terminal to which it is connected.
B. Conductors size No. 10 AWG or smaller shall have identification sleeves.
C. Conductors:
1. Identify each end as shown on the Drawings.
2. If not shown on the Drawings, identify conductor ends with the Equipment number, followed
by -Cxx, where xx is a unique number for that wire.
D. Machine print on sleeves with permanent black ink the letters and numbers that identify each
wire.
E. Figures: 1/8-inch high.
F. Sleeves: Yellow or white tubing, sized to fit the conductor insulation.
G. Acceptable Manufacturer:
1. TMS Thermofit Marker System by Raychem Co.
2. Sleeve style wire marking system by W. H. Brady Co.
3. Or Approved Equal.
H. Adhesive strips are not acceptable.
I.
Use cable markers of the locking tab type for conductors No. 8 AWG and larger.
J.
Tabs: white plastic with conductor identification number permanently embossed.
2.03 NAMEPLATES
A. Laminated phenolic plastic.
B. Nominal Size: 3/4 inch high by 2 inches long.
C. Black backgrounds with 3/16-inch white letters.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16000 - 4
C00822C13
D. If abbreviations are required because of space limitations, submit to the Project Representative
prior to manufacture.
E. Fastened using self-tapping stainless steel screws. The use of adhesives will not be permitted on
the outside of enclosures.
2.04 TERMINAL BLOCKS
A. Unless otherwise indicated, panhead strap screw type.
B. Terminals shall be provided with integral marking strips which shall be permanently identified with
the connecting wire numbers as shown on the Drawings.
C. Terminal blocks for P-circuits (power 208-600 volts): Rated not less than the conductor current
rating and less than 600 VAC.
D. Terminal blocks for C-circuits (control and/or power 120 volts or less power) and S-circuits
(signal): Rated not less than 20 amperes and less than 600 VAC.
E. Terminals: Tin-plated.
F. Insulating material: Nylon.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Construction:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, electrical layout drawings are diagrammatic.
2. Coordinate the location of electrical material or equipment with other equipment and work.
3. Make necessary minor changes in location of electrical material or equipment to avoid
interferences with other work prior to installation.
B. Housekeeping:
1. Protect electrical equipment from dust, water and damage.
2. Wipe motor control centers, switchgear, and buses free of dust and dirt on the outside keep
dry and vacuumed on the inside within 30 days of Substantial Completion.
3. Touch up any scratches on equipment as specified in Section 09900.
4. During construction, allow no electrical equipment to be temporarily exposed to weather,
debris, liquids, or damage.
C. Dust Free Areas:
1. Protect electrical, instrumentation and control equipment from dust by wrapping the
equipment in plastic film wrap until installed to prevent dust from entering the equipment.
2. Once electrical, instrumentation and control equipment is installed, protect from dust.
Rewrap the equipment if necessary to keep the equipment dust free.
3.02 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Provide record drawings in accordance with Section 01720. Include the following schedules,
lists, and drawings:
1. Interconnection diagrams (16000).
2. Original submittal drawings (16000).
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16000 - 5
C00822C13
SECTION 16030
ELECTRICAL TESTING
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the acceptance testing of electrical materials, equipment, and systems.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
document. These references are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of
conflict between the requirements of this Section and that of the listed document, the
requirements of this Section shall prevail.
Reference
Title
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
ICEA
Insulated Cable Engineers Association
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
NETA
InterNational Electrical Testing Association [NETA]
B. Qualifications: Testing Contractor shall be NETA certified.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Draft Test Plan and Procedures in accordance with the latest NETA requirements, 90 days prior
to initial functional checkout. Contractor shall use NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications for all
new equipment installed under this contract and NETA Maintenance Testing Specifications for all
existing equipment reused under this contract unless otherwise requested by the Project
Representative.
C. Completed test report Forms 16000-A, 16000-B, 16000-C, 16000-D, and 16000-K contained in
Section 01999.
D. Functional checkout procedures 45 days prior to performing initial functional checkout tests.
E. Final Test Report documenting test results and equipment and device settings.
F. NETA certification of Testing Contractor provided as part of test plan submittal.
1.04 APPLICATION
A. Requirements for testing in accordance with this Section are specified in this and other sections
of Division 16 and 17. Where testing in accordance with this Section is required, the required
tests, including correction of defects and retesting, shall be completed prior to energization of
material, equipment, or systems.
1.05 TEST EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Test instruments shall be calibrated to references traceable to the National Institute of Standards
and Testing Technology and shall have a current sticker showing date of calibration, deviation
from standard, name of calibration laboratory and technician, and date of recalibration.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16030 - 1
C00822C13
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 TESTING
A. General:
1. Prior to energizing the electrical circuits, perform the following tests. Unless otherwise
indicated, a 1,000 volt megohmmeter shall be used for resistance measurements.
2. Record test measurements on the Forms 16000-A and 16000-B.
3. Submit a description of the proposed functional test procedures 45 days prior to the
performance of functional checkout.
B. Insulation Resistance Measurements:
1. General:
a. Make general insulation resistance measurements on conductors and energized parts of
electrical equipment.
b. Unless otherwise indicated, minimum acceptable values of insulation resistance shall be
in accordance with the applicable ANSI, ICEA, NEMA, or NETA standards for the
equipment or material being tested.
c. Record the ambient temperature at which insulation resistance is measured on the test
form.
d. Record insulation resistance measurements on Form 16000-A.
e. Insulation with resistance of less than 100 megohms is not acceptable.
f. Document checks and measurements.
C. Conductor and cable tests:
1. Measure phase-to-ground insulation resistance for all circuits 120 volts and above, except
lighting circuits. Make measurements with motors and other equipment disconnected, except
that solid state equipment shall be disconnected unless the equipment is normally tested by
the manufacturer at voltages in excess of 1000 volts DC.
D. Motor Tests:
1. Complete Form 16000-B for each motor after installation.
2. Measure insulation resistance for all motors before being connected.
3. Motors 50 HP and larger: Make insulation resistance measurements at the time of delivery
and when connected.
4. Insulation resistance values less than 100 megohms are not acceptable.
5. Verify motor phase rotation.
6. Verification may be accomplished by momentarily energizing the motor, provided the
Contractor confirms that neither the motor nor the driven equipment will be damaged by
reverse operation.
7. Measure current on each phase with motor running at full load.
E. Distribution Equipment: Measure insulation resistance for transformers, panelboards, and other
distribution equipment phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground.
1. Functional Checkout:
a. Perform functional testing in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements and the
procedure provided in test plan and procedures.
b. Prior to functional testing, adjust and make operational all protective devices.
c. Have Project Representative witness the testing.
d. Check that circuit breakers, meters and monitors are installed and function properly.
e. Check functional operation of switchboards, motor control centers, control panels,
automatic transfer switches and other electrical equipment.
f. Prior to energization of equipment, perform a functional checkout of the control circuit.
Checkout shall consist of energizing each control circuit and operating each control,
alarm, or malfunction device and each interlock in turn to verify that the specified action
occurs.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16030 - 2
C00822C13
g. Document all test results and device settings in the final test report.
2. Prepare a Test Report summarizing the final test procedures and test results.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16030 - 3
C00822C13
SECTION 16110
RACEWAYS, BOXES, AND SUPPORTS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the electrical conduits, wireways, pull boxes, cable vault, cable trays,
fittings, and supports.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
documents. These references are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of
conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the
requirements of this Section shall prevail.
Reference
Title
ANSI C80.1
Rigid Steel Conduit-Zinc Coated
ANSI C80.3
Electrical Metallic Tubing-Zinc Coated
ASTM A48 REV A
Gray Iron Castings
ASTM A193 REV C
Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High
Temperature Service
ASTM F512
Smooth-Wall Polyvinylchloride Conduit and Fittings for
Underground Installation
FEDSPEC WW-C-581E
Conduit, Metal, Rigid and Intermediate; and Coupling, Elbow,
and Nipple, Electrical Conduit; Zinc Coated
FEDSPEC W-C-1094A
Conduit and Conduit Fitting Plastic, Rigid
NEC 500
Hazardous (Classified) Locations, Classes I, II, and III, Divisions
1 and 2
NEMA ICS 6
Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures
NEMA RN1
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) externally Coated Galvanized Rigid
Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit
NEMA TC2
Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC 40 and EPC
80)
NEMA TC6
PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation
NEMA VE-1
Metal Cable Tray Systems
NEMA 250
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum)
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code (NEC)
NFPA 79
Electrical Standards for Industrial Machinery
UL 1
Flexible Metal Electrical Conduit
UL 6
Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit
UL 360
Liquid Tight Flexible Electrical Conduit
UL 651
Rigid Nonmetal Electrical Conduit
B. Qualifications: Not Used.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Include manufacturer’s catalog cuts as specified by Section 16000. Include general information
and detailed specifications for the products specified in this Section.
C. Certifications and calculations that raceway supports meet the seismic requirements specified in
Sections 16000, 01031, and this Section.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16110 - 1
C00822C13
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 RACEWAY
A. General requirements for raceway materials specified in this Section are listed in the
RACESPECS sheets at the end of this Section. The type of raceway to be used for any given
area and application shall conform to the requirements of Table A in this Section.
2.02 BOXES AND FITTINGS
A. Pull Boxes and Wiring Gutters:
1. Device and junction boxes less than 6 inches square shall be Type FD galvanized cast
ferrous. Boxes larger than FD boxes shall be constructed of sheet steel, galvanized after
fabrication, or NEMA 4X stainless steel or nonmetallic.
2. Outdoor boxes and enclosures shall be provided with neoprene gaskets on the hinged doors
or removable covers.
3. Conduit bodies shall be ferrous alloy with screw taps for fastening covers. Gaskets shall be
made of neoprene.
4. Boxes and enclosures in corrosive areas shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel or nonmetallic.
5. Boxes in classified areas shall be NEMA Class 7 galvanized cast ferrous.
6. Box and gutter sizes, metal thickness, and grounding shall comply with the National Electrical
Code.
7. Bolt-on junction box covers 3 feet square or larger, or heavier than 25 pounds, shall have a
rigid handle.
8. Covers larger than 3 by 4 feet shall be split.
B. Terminal Cabinets:
1. Terminal cabinets located indoors shall be NEMA 4.
2. Cabinets located outdoors and in corrosive areas shall be NEMA 4X.
3. Cabinets shall be provided with hinged doors.
4. Adjustable terminal strip mounting accessories shall be provided.
5. Cabinets shall be provided with channel mounted terminal blocks rated 30 A, 600 Vac.
6. Terminals shall be No. 8 minimum strap-screw type, suitable for ring tongue or locking spade
terminals.
C. Conduit Seals:
1. Install conduit seals in classified areas in conduit runs leaving the space. They shall be of the
EYS or EZS type with male and female hubs.
2. Use PVC-coated fittings with urethane interior coating for PVC-coated GRS; use copper free
cast aluminum for rigid aluminum.
3. The sealing compound shall be as prescribed by the manufacturer of the sealing conduit
body.
4. Use the sealant, such as Chico, in areas that are defined as classified and meet the NEC
requirements for Article 500.
2.03 RACEWAY SUPPORTS
A. Conduit Supports:
1. Provide hot-dip galvanized framing channel with end caps to support groups of conduit.
2. Individual conduit supports shall be one-hole galvanized malleable iron pipe straps used with
galvanized clamp backs and nesting backs where required.
3. Conduit supports for PVC-coated rigid steel and PVC conduit systems shall be one-hole
PVC-coated rigid steel or clamps conduit wall hangers.
B. Ceiling Hangers:
1. Ceiling hangers shall be adjustable galvanized carbon steel rod hangers as specified. Straps
or hangers of plumber’s perforated tape are not acceptable.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, hanger rods shall be 1/2-inch all-thread rod and shall meet ASTM
A193.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16110 - 2
C00822C13
3. Hanger rods in corrosive areas and those exposed to weather or moisture shall be stainless
steel.
C. Suspended Raceway Supports (Racks):
1. Suspended raceway supports shall consist of concrete inserts, galvanized carbon steel rod
hangers, and jamb nuts supporting hot-dip galvanized framing channel or lay-in pipe hangers
as required.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, hanger rods shall be 1/2-inch all-thread rod and shall meet ASTM
A193.
3. Brace all suspended raceway supports at 30-foot intervals (alternating from one side to the
other) to meet specified seismic requirements.
D. Design by Professional Engineer:
1. Raceway supporting systems, structures, and elements shall be designed to meet seismic
and other building structural requirements and to support the static and dynamic load of the
wiring and raceways that they will carry. Systems to be installed shall be prepared by a
Professional Structural Engineer registered in the state of Washington to ensure
conformance with IBC seismic, building, and load requirements.
2.04 CONCRETE ENCASED DUCT BANKS
A. Concrete used for duct banks shall be Type CDF with red oxide added per Controlled Density Fill
(CDF) Section 03310. Concrete used for protective cap shall be Class C with red oxide added as
specified in the Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 03300.
B. Conduit embedded in concrete which is in contact with the earth shall be separated from the
earth by at least 3 inches of concrete. Clearances equal to the nominal conduit diameter, but not
less than 1-1/2 inches, shall be maintained between conduits encased in slabs. Clearances of
less than 1-1/2 inches at conduit crossing and terminating locations are not acceptable.
Expansion fittings shall be provided whenever embedded conduit crosses building expansion
joints, between 2 adjacent structures, and between a duct bank and structure.
C. Duct banks shall be placed on an undisturbed soil base. Use Class Z backfill as specified in
Section 02200 as a base when an undisturbed soil base is not available. Backfill over the duct
bank shall be consistent with the backfill required for the immediate area. The fill shall be brought
up to finish grade.
D. Duct banks where upper surface is required to be exposed thus forming a walkway shall have the
top surface finished smooth and level and free from defects. In these cases, do not add red
pigment to the cement.
E. Locate plastic conduit spacers used in duct bank installations 5 feet on centers. Secure the
spacers to the conduits by wire ties. The duct bank shall be securely anchored to prevent conduit
flotation while the concrete is being placed. Conduit runs shall be watertight.
F. The ends of conduits shall be protected from damage during construction by using plastic plugs.
A 1/4-inch hole shall be drilled in the lower portion of the plug to provide drainage.
2.05 UNDERGROUND MARKING TAPE
A. Provide underground marking tape.
B. Used for early warning protection of digging around reinforced concrete duct banks.
C. Low density polyethylene plastic, nominally 6 inches wide and 4-mil thickness.
D. Plastic Color: Red.
E. Imprinted continuously along the length, with message reading similar to “CAUTION – STOP
DIGGING – BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW.”
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16110 - 3
C00822C13
F. Acceptable Manufacturer:
1. Brady “Identoline.”
2. Services and Materials “Buried Underground Tape.”
3. Somerset (Thomas & Betts) “Protect-A-Line.”
4. Or Approved Equal.
G. Underground Marking Tape for Directly Buried Conduits:
1. 6-inch wide metallic lined tape with red polyethylene film on top and clear polyethylene film
on the bottom.
2. The message shall be clearly printed with black over red tape and shall read “CAUTION
ELECTRIC LINE BURIED BELOW.”
2.06 NAMEPLATES
A. Provide nameplates for all boxes in accordance with the requirements of Section 16000.
Nameplate wording shall be as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Where no wording is specified, the Contractor shall provide the functional description of the
device on the nameplate.
2.07 FIRESTOPS
A. Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Flamemastic 77.
2. Vimasco No. 1-A.
3. Or Approved Equal.
C. Products which are affected by water are not acceptable.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Specific raceway types and applications are indicated on the drawings and/or in the raceway
schedule. When not indicated on the Drawings and/or in the schedule Table A specifies the type
of raceway required for each location and application by RACESPEC sheet. Use fittings, hubs
and boxes as specified by the raceway type in RACESPEC. Unless otherwise indicated, in
Table A, unscheduled conduit shall be galvanized rigid steel, RACESPEC type GRS.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16110 - 4
C00822C13
Location
Indoor noncorrosive
Indoor corrosive
Outdoor
Concealed
Underground
Underground
Underground
Underground
Non-Classified
Underground
Architecturally
finished areas
Indoor
TABLE A
Application/Condition
Exposed
Exposed
Exposed
Embedded in concrete structure or beneath
slab-on-grade
Instrumentation, communications and data
signals encased in concrete, duct bank
Instrumentation, communications and data
signals directly buried
Power and control signals directly buried
Power encased in concrete, duct bank
Final connection to equipment and light
fixtures
Telephone service direct buried
Final connection to light fixtures
PVC8
FLEX
Classified
PGRS
RACESPEC
GRS
PGRS
PGRS
GRS
GRS
PGRS
PGRS
PVC8
LFS
3.02 RACEWAY NUMBERING SYSTEM
A. General:
1. Identify each conduit; rack shall be identified by a unique number shown in the Drawings.
B. Conduit Identification:
1. Pressure stamp conduit numbers into a non-corrosive metal tag. Fix a tag with number to
each end of each conduit and at each manhole, pullbox and handhole with Type 304
Stainless Steel wire.
3.03 CONDUIT
A. General
1. The number of directional changes of a conduit shall be limited to 270 degrees in any run
between pull boxes.
2. Conduit runs shall be limited to a maximum of 400 feet, less 100 feet or fraction thereof, for
every 90 degrees of change in direction.
3. Raceways shall be provided for lighting, receptacles, power, control, fire alarm,
instrumentation, signaling, and grounding systems.
B. Indoor and Outdoor Conduit Systems:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, in general, conduit inside structures shall be exposed.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, the Contractor shall be responsible for determining conduit
routing that conforms to the installation requirements set forth herein.
3. Install conduit to conform to the requirements of the RACESPEC sheets and the following:
a. Install exposed conduit either parallel or perpendicular to structural members and
surfaces.
b. Two or more exposed conduits in the same general routing shall be in parallel with
symmetrical bends.
c. Exposed conduit shall be run on supports spaced not more than 8 feet apart.
d. Where three or more conduits are located in parallel run, space them out from the wall
using framing channel.
e. Where conduits are suspended from the ceiling, support systems shall comply with the
requirements of this Section.
f. Secure conduit rack supports to concrete walls and ceilings by means of cast-in-place
anchors or framing channel concrete inserts.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16110 - 5
C00822C13
g. Conduits shall be at least 6 inches from high temperature piping, ducts, and flues with
temperatures higher than 90 degrees C.
h. Install conduits between the reinforcing steel in walls or slabs which have reinforcing in
both faces. In slabs which have only a single layer of reinforcing steel, place conduits
under the reinforcement.
i. Route conduit clear of structural openings and indicate future openings.
j. Flash and seal watertight those conduits which pass through roofs or metal walls.
k. Neatly group conduit into any openings cut into concrete and masonry structures, and
grout using non-shrink type grout.
l. During construction, cap conduits to prevent entrance of dirt, trash, and water.
m. Terminate exposed conduit stubs for future use with galvanized pipe caps.
n. Determine concealed conduit stubup locations from the manufacturer’s shop drawings.
o. Terminate concealed conduit for future use in equipment or by galvanized couplings
plugged flush with structural surfaces.
p. Where the Drawings indicate future duplication of equipment wired hereunder, provide
concealed portions of conduits for future equipment.
q. Conduit installed horizontally shall allow headroom of at least 7 feet except where it may
be installed along structures, piping, and equipment, or in other areas where headroom
cannot be maintained because of other considerations.
r. Terminate all conduits that enter enclosures by fittings that ensure that the NEMA rating
of the enclosure is not affected or changed.
s. Connect underground metallic or nonmetallic conduit that turns out of concrete, masonry
or earth to a 90-degree elbow of PVC-coated rigid steel conduit before emergence.
t. Transitions from concealed or underground or embedded locations to exposed or
aboveground or above-grade locations shall be made using type PGRS conduit for a
distance of at least 12 inches on either side of transition.
u. Conduit across structural joints where structural movement is allowed shall have an OZGedney “Type DX” or Crouse-Hinds “Type XD,” bonded, weathertight expansion and
deflection fitting of that conduit size.
C. Underground Conduit System:
1. All excavation, backfilling, and concrete work shall conform to respective Sections of these
Specifications. Underground conduit shall conform to the following requirements:
a. Unless otherwise indicated, all underground conduits shall be concrete encased.
b. Concrete shall be Type C, per Section 03300, with red dye mixed throughout mix.
c. Concrete encasement on exposed outdoor conduit risers shall continue to 3 inches
above grade, with top crowned and edges chamfered.
d. Underground conduit bend radius shall be not less than 2 feet at vertical risers nor less
than 3 feet elsewhere.
e. Unless otherwise indicated, underground conduits and conduit banks shall have 2 feet
minimum earth cover.
f. Underground conduit banks through building walls shall be cast-in-place or concreted into
boxouts with waterstops on all sides of the boxout. Waterstops shall be as specified in
the Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 03300.
g. Using a special rubber gasketed sleeve and joint assemblies, or with sleeves and
modular rubber sealing elements, seal watertight those conduits not encased in concrete
and passing through walls that have one side in contact with earth.
h. Immediately upon completion of pouring concrete, thoroughly swab conduits on the
inside. After the concrete has set, and before backfilling, pull a mandrel, having a
diameter equal to the nominal conduit inside diameter minus 1/2 inch, and not less than 4
inches long, through each conduit. If the mandrel showed signs of protrusions on the
inside of the conduit, repair or replace the conduit.
i. Provide all spare raceways with a nylon pull rope.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16110 - 6
C00822C13
3.04 RACEWAY SPECIFICATION (RACESPEC) SHEETS
A. The following RACESPECS are included in this Section:
RACESPEC Symbol
Raceway Description
FLEX
Flexible steel conduit
GRS
Galvanized rigid steel conduit
LFS
Liquidtight flexible steel conduit
PGRS
PVC coated rigid steel conduit
PVC8
Schedule 80 PVC conduit
WW
Wireway and auxiliary gutter
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16110 - 7
C00822C13
Raceway Identification:
Description:
Application:
Compliance:
Construction:
Minimum Size:
Fittings:
Other:
Installation
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
FLEX
Flexible steel conduit.
Final connection to lighting fixtures in architecturally finished areas only.
UL 1.
Spirally wound galvanized steel strip with successive convolutions
securely interlocked.
1/2 inch.
Compression type.
FLEX shall be provided with an internal ground wire.
Flexible steel conduit shall be made up tight and with conductive
“coppershield” thread compound.
16110 - 8
C00822C13
Raceway Identification:
Description:
Compliance:
Finish:
Manufacturers:
Minimum Size:
Fittings:
Unions:
Boxes:
Indoor:
Outdoor and Wet Areas:
Corrosive:
Classified:
Elbows:
3/4 through 1-1/2:
2 through 6:
Conduit Bodies:
3/4 through 4:
5 and 6:
Expansion Fittings:
Manufacturers:
Installation:
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
GRS
Galvanized rigid steel conduit.
ANSI C80.1, UL 6.
Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, inside and outside. Smooth
finished surfaces.
Allied Tube and Conduit Corp., Wheatland Tube Co., or approved
equal.
Unless otherwise specified, 3/4 inch for exposed, 1 inch for
embedded, encased, or otherwise inaccessible.
Hubs: Insulated throat with bonding locknut, hot-dip galvanized. The
hubs shall utilize a neoprene O-ring and shall provide a watertight
connection. O-Z Gedney, CHM-XXT, or approved equal.
Electrogalvanized ferrous alloy type Appleton UNF or UNY, CrouseHinds UNF or UNY, or equal. Threadless fittings are not acceptable.
Type FD cast ferrous for all device boxes and for junction boxes less
than 6 inches square. NEMA 12 welded steel 6 inches square and
larger. Door shall have hinges with clamp locks. Boxes in process
areas shall be NEMA 4 watertight.
Conduit Bodies: Ferrous alloy type with screw taps for fastening
covers. Gaskets shall be made of neoprene.
Type FD cast ferrous for all devices and for junction boxes less than
6 inches square. NEMA 4X stainless steel or nonmetallic for 6 inches
square and larger.
NEMA 4X stainless steel or nonmetallic.
NEMA Class 7 cast ferrous.
Factory fabricated or field bent.
Factory fabricated only.
Malleable iron, hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise noted. Neoprene
gaskets for all access plates. Tapered threads for all conduit entrances.
Electrogalvanized iron or cast iron box.
Expansion fittings in embedded runs shall be watertight and shall be
provided with an internal bonding jumper. The expansion material shall
be neoprene and shall allow for 3/4-inch movement in any direction.
Appleton, Crouse-Hinds, Hubbel, O.Z. Gedney, Or Approved Equal.
Galvanized rigid steel conduit shall be made up tight and with conductive
“coppershield” thread compound. Joints shall be made with standard
couplings or threaded unions. Steel conduit shall be supported away from
the structures using hot-dip galvanized malleable iron straps with nesting
backs.
Conduit entering boxes shall be terminated with a threaded hub with a
grounding bushing.
Exposed male threads on galvanized rigid steel conduit shall be
coated with zinc-rich paint.
16110 - 9
C00822C13
Raceway Identification:
Description:
Application:
Compliance:
Construction:
Minimum Size:
Fittings:
Installation:
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
LFS
Liquidtight flexible steel conduit.
Final connection to equipment subject to vibration or adjustment.
UL 360.
Spirally wound galvanized steel strip with successive convolutions
securely interlocked and jacketed with liquidtight plastic cover.
3/4 inch.
Cadmium-plated malleable iron body and gland nut with cast-in lug,
brass grounding ferrule threaded to engage conduit spiral and O-ring
seals around the conduit and box connection and insulated throat.
Forty-five and 90-degree fittings shall be used where applicable.
The length of flexible liquidtight conduit shall not exceed 15 times the
trade diameter of the conduit. The length of liquidtight conduit shall not
exceed 36 inches.
Liquid-tight flexible steel conduit shall be made up tight and with
conductive “coppershield” thread compound.
16110 - 10
C00822C13
Raceway Identification:
Description:
Compliance:
Finish:
Minimum Size:
Fittings:
Hubs:
Boxes:
Non-Classified:
Classified:
Installation:
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
PGRS
Galvanized rigid steel conduit, corrosion-resistant, polyvinyl chloride
(PVC) coated.
ANSI C80.1, UL 6, NEMA RN1.
PGRS shall be hot dipped galvanized rigid steel conduit. The inside
and outside, as well as the threads shall be galvanized. A minimum
40-mil thick PVC coating shall be bonded to the outside of the conduit
and the inside shall be coated with 2-mil urethane. Coating shall be
free of pinholes. Bending of conduit shall not damage either the
interior or exterior coating. Bond strength shall exceed the tensile
strength of the PVC coat. Elbows shall be factory made and coated.
3/4 inch.
Similarly coated to the same thickness as the conduit and provided
with Type 304 stainless steel hardware. A 2-mil urethane coating shall
be applied to the interior, and the threads of all fittings and couplings.
Conduit and fittings shall be manufactured by the same company.
Hubs for connection of conduit to junction, device, pull or terminal
boxes shall be threaded and made of cast ferrous alloy. Hubs shall be
galvanized steel and have insulating bushings with bonding locknuts.
The hubs shall utilize a neoprene O-ring and shall provide a watertight
connection.
NEMA 250, Type 4X stainless steel or nonmetallic.
NEMA 250, Type 7D cast ferrous.
PVC-coated conduit shall be supported away from the structure using
PVC-coated conduit wall hangers. All conduit threads shall be covered
by a plastic overlap which shall be coated and sealed per
manufacturer’s recommendations. Plastic coated conduit shall be
made tight with special wrenches and fittings designed for tightening
PVC-coated conduit. All threads shall be protected against corrosion
per NEC 300.6 (a) by liberally applying an approved electrically
conductive, corrosion-resistant compound – “coppershield.” Pipe
wrenches and channel locks shall not be used for tightening plastic
coated conduits. Damaged areas shall be patched, using
manufacturer’s recommended material. The area to be patched shall
be built up to the full thickness of the coating. Painted fittings are not
acceptable.
16110 - 11
C00822C13
Raceway Identification:
Description:
Compliance:
Construction:
Minimum Size:
Fittings:
Boxes:
Indoor:
Outdoor and Corrosive:
Installation:
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
PVC8
Rigid nonmetallic conduit, extra heavy wall thickness for all locations
including direct bury under roadways and where exposed to physical
damage.
NEMA TC2, UL 651.
Schedule 80, high-impact, polyvinylchloride (PVC).
3/4 inch exposed; 1 inch embedded or encased.
PVC solvent weld type.
NEMA Class 4, nonmetallic.
NEMA Class 4X, nonmetallic.
Exposed PVC conduit shall be run on supports spaced not more than
3 feet apart for conduits up to 1 inch 5 feet apart for conduits
1-1/4 inches to 2 inches and 6 feet apart for conduits 2-1/2 inches and
larger. PVC conduit shall not be provided where it will be damaged by
heat.
PVC conduit shall have bell ends where terminated at walls.
16110 - 12
C00822C13
Raceway Identification:
Description:
Compliance:
Minimum Size:
Finish:
Application:
WW
Wireway and auxiliary gutter, flanged, oiltight type with hinged covers.
JIC EMP-1.
4-inch by 4-inch.
Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, inside and outside. Smooth
finished surfaces.
As indicated on the Drawings.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16110 - 13
C00822C13
SECTION 16120
600 VOLT CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies conductors and cables rated 600 volts used for power, lighting, receptacle,
signal, and control circuits.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
documents. These references are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of
conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the
requirements of this Section shall prevail.
Reference
Title
ASTM B3
Soft or Annealed Copper Wire
ASTM B8
Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, MediumHard, or Soft
ASTM B33
Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes
ASTM B189
Lead-Coated and Lead-Alloy-Coated Soft Copper Wire for
Electrical Purposes
ICEA S-68-516
Ethylene-Propylene-Rubber-Insulated Wire
IEEE 383
Type Test of Class IE Electric Cables, Field Splices, and
Connections for Nuclear Power Generating Stations
NEMA WC7
Cross-Linked-Thermosetting Insulated Wire and Cable for the
Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy
NEMA WC57/ICEA S-73-532 Standard for Control Cables
NEMA WC70/ICEA S-95-658 Non-Shielded Power Cables Rated 2000 V or less
NEC 310-12
General Conductors Color Code
NFPA 820
Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities
NFPA 70
National Electric Code (NEC)
UL 44
Rubber-Insulated Wires and Cables
UL 83
Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables
UL 1277
Type TC Power and Control Tray Cable
UL 1581
Reference Standards for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible
Cords
B. Qualifications: Not used.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Catalog cuts showing general information of the conductors and cable.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Unscheduled Conductors and Cables:
1. With the exception of lighting, communication, paging, security and receptacle circuits, the
type, size and number of conductors shall be as specified on the Drawings.
2. Lighting and receptacle circuit conductors are not shown on the Drawings and shall be sized
by the Contractor in accordance with the NEC to limit voltage drop to 3 percent.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16120 - 1
C00822C13
3. Minimum size of lighting and receptacle circuits shall be 12 AWG.
4. Number and types of communication, paging, and security cables shall be as required for the
particular equipment provided.
5. Unless otherwise indicated, provide lighting and receptacle circuit conductors in accordance
with CABLESPEC "XHHW-2".
B. Cable Specification Sheets (CABLESPEC): General requirements for conductors and cables
specified in this Section are listed on CABLESPEC sheets in this Section.
2.02 COLOR CODING
A. General:
1. Multiconductor power and control cable colors shall be manufacturer's standard.
2. Single conductor control conductor color shall be yellow, except for the grounded conductor
which shall be white.
B. Power Conductors:
1. Single-conductor power conductors shall be color coded in accordance with the following:
Use
Cable
Color
Three-phase, 480-volt power
or 480/277
Phase A
Brown
Phase B
Orange
Phase C
Yellow
Ground
Green
Neutral
Gray
Three-phase, 120/208-volt
power
Phase A
Black
Phase B
Red
Phase C
Blue
Neutral
White
Ground
Green
Single-phase, 120/240-volt
power
Line 1
Red
Line 2
Black
Neutral
White
Ground
Green
2. Cables sized No. 4 AWG and larger may be black with colored 3/4-inch vinyl plastic tape
applied in 3-inch lengths around the cable at each end.
3. Tag the cables at terminations and in pull boxes, handholes, and manholes.
C. Signal Conductors: Unless otherwise indicated, cables shall be color coded black and white for
pairs or black, red, and white for triads.
D. Control Conductors: Control conductors color coding shall be manufacturer's standard.
2.03 POWER AND CONTROL CONDUCTORS AND CABLE, 600 VOLT
A. Single Conductor:
1. Stranded and used in conduits for power and control circuits.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide in accordance with CABLESPEC "XHHW-2".
B. Multiconductor Cable:
1. Used for power and control circuits routed in cable tray.
2. Cables shall be UL labeled, Type TC, designed for cable tray installation in accordance with
NEC 340.
3. The type of insulation, number of conductors, and size of conductor shall be as specified.
4. Unless otherwise indicated, provide multiconductor power and control cable in accordance
with CABLESPEC "MC".
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16120 - 2
C00822C13
5. Power Cable: Containing three or four conductors, as specified, plus an equipment
grounding conductor.
6. Control Cable: Unless otherwise indicated, shall be size 14 AWG.
7. VFD Cables: Unless otherwise indicated, shall not be sized smaller than 12 AWG.
2.04 SIGNAL CABLES
A. General:
1. Provide signal cable for instrument signal transmission, alarm, communication and other
circuits as specified. Circuit shielding shall be provided in addition to cable shielding.
2. Provide circuits for Type a and b signals specified in Section 17000 in compliance with the
instrument manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Unless otherwise indicated, provide single circuit signal cable in accordance with
CABLESPEC "SIC”.
4. Unless otherwise indicated, provide multicircuit signal in accordance with CABLESPEC
"MIC”.
B. Communication System Cables: Communication, system cables shall be as specified in
Division 17.
2.05 PORTABLE CORD
A. Unless otherwise indicated, provide portable cord in accordance with CABLESPEC "CORD”.
B. Cords shall contain an equipment grounding conductor.
2.06 SPLICING AND TERMINATING MATERIALS
A. Connectors:
1. Tool applied compression type of correct size and UL listed for the specific application.
2. Tin-plated high conductivity copper.
3. For wire sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller: Nylon self-insulated, ring tongue or locking-spade
terminals.
4. For wire sizes No. 8 AWG and larger: One-hole lugs up to size No. 3/0 AWG, and two-hole
or four-hole lugs for size No. 4/0 and larger.
5. Mechanical clamp, dimple, screw-type connectors are not acceptable.
6. Splicing is not allowed without prior approval from the Project Representative.
B. Motor Connection Kits:
1. Shall consist of heat-shrinkable, polymeric insulating material over the connection area and a
high dielectric strength mastic to seal the ends against ingress of moisture and
contamination.
2. Shall accommodate a range of cable sizes for both in-line and stub-type configurations.
3. Shall be independent of cable manufacturer's tolerances.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Identify each power and control conductor at each terminal to which it is connected. The marking
system shall comply with Section 16000.
B. Wire Pulling:
1. Complete the pulling of wire and cable into conduit or trays without damaging or putting
undue stress on the cable insulation.
2. Soapstone, talc or UL listed pulling compounds are acceptable lubricants for pulling wire and
cable.
3. Grease is not acceptable.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16120 - 3
C00822C13
4. Raceway construction shall be complete, cleaned, and protected from the weather before
cable is placed.
C. Whenever a cable leaves a raceway, provide a cable support.
D. When flat bus bar connections are made with unplated bar scratch-brush the contact areas.
Torque bolts to the bus manufacturer's recommendations.
E. Provide and install yellow three-strand copolymer polyolefin pull string in all new conduits. String
shall extend at least 1 foot beyond each end of the conduit and be tied off on bushing or in other
manner acceptable to the Project Representative
3.02 600 VOLT CONDUCTOR AND CABLE
A. Lacing and Bundling:
1. Lace and bundle conductors in panels and electrical equipment, No. 6 AWG and smaller, at
intervals not greater than 6 inches, spread into trees and connected to their respective
terminals.
2. Lacing shall be made up with plastic cable ties.
3. Lacing is not necessary in plastic panel wiring duct.
4. Bundle conductors crossing hinges into groups not exceeding 12 and arrange so that they
will be protected from chafing when the hinged member is moved.
B. Slack:
1. Provide slack in junction and pull boxes, handholes and manholes.
2. Slack shall be sufficient to allow cables or conductors to be routed along the walls of the box.
3. Amount of slack shall be equal to largest dimension of the box.
4. Where plastic panel wiring duct is provided for wire runs, lacing is not required.
5. Do not use plastic panel wiring duct in manholes and handholes.
C. Stranded Conductors:
1. Terminate as described in this Section, except where terminals will not accept such
terminations.
2. In these cases, terminate the conductors directly on the terminal block.
3. Install compression lugs and connectors using manufacturer's recommended tools.
D. Raceway fill limitations shall be as defined by NEC and the following:
1. Lighting and receptacle circuits may be in the same conduit in accordance with derating
requirements of the NEC.
2. However, lighting and receptacle circuits shall not be in conduits with power or control
conductors.
E. Make terminations at solenoid valves, 120 volt motors, and other devices provided with pigtail
leads using self-insulating tubular compression connectors.
3.03 SIGNAL CABLE
A. Circuits:
1. Run as individually shielded twisted pairs or triads.
2. Do not, in any case, make up a circuit using conductors from different pairs or triads.
3. Use triads wherever 3-wire circuits are required.
4. Unless otherwise indicated, provide terminal blocks at instrument cable junctions, and identify
circuits at such junctions.
5. Run signal circuits without splices between instruments, terminal boxes, or panels.
B. Shields are not acceptable as a signal path, except for circuits operating at radio frequencies and
utilizing coaxial cables.
C. Common grounded return conductors for two or more circuits are not acceptable.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16120 - 4
C00822C13
D. Unless otherwise indicated, bond shields to the signal ground bus at the control panel and
isolated from ground and other shields at other locations. Provide terminals for running signal
leads and shield drain wires through junction boxes.
E. Shield Drain Wire:
1. Terminate spare circuits and the shield drain wire on terminal blocks at both ends of the cable
run and cause to be electrically continuous through terminal boxes.
2. Do not ground shield drain wires for spare circuits at either end of the cable run.
F. Terminal Boxes:
1. Provide at instrument cable splices.
2. If cable is buried or in raceway below grade at splice, provide an instrument stand as
specified with terminal box mounted approximately 3 feet above grade.
G. Install and terminate cable for telephone systems in compliance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.04 PORTABLE CORD
A. Portable cord feeding permanent equipment, such as pendant cords, pumps, cranes, hoists, and
portable items shall have a wire mesh cord grip of flexible stainless steel wire to take the tension
from the cable termination.
B. Connect portable cords to permanent wiring with the use of terminals.
C. Use in-line taps and splices only where specified.
3.05 TESTING
A. General: Test conductors and cable in accordance with Section 16000 and Section 16030.
B. Signal Cable:
1. Test each signal pair or triad for electrical continuity.
2. Test each shield drain conductor for continuity. Shield drain conductor resistance shall not
exceed the loop resistance of the pair or triad.
3. Test each conductor (signal and shield drain) for insulation resistance with all other
conductors in the cable grounded.
4. Instruments used for continuity measurements shall have a resolution of 0.1 ohms and an
accuracy of better than 0.1 percent of reading plus 0.3 ohms. Use a 500 volt megohmmeter
for insulation resistance measurements.
3.06 SCHEDULES
A. Cables are scheduled on the Drawings.
3.07 CABLE SPECIFICATION SHEETS (CABLESPEC)
A. General:
1. Conductor and cable types for different locations, service conditions and raceway systems
are specified on individual cable specification sheets (CABLESPECS).
2. Install scheduled and unscheduled conductors and cables in accordance with the
CABLESPECS.
B. CABLESPEC SHEETS: CABLESPEC sheets follow.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16120 - 5
C00822C13
Cable System Identification:
MC
Description:
Multiconductor power and control cable, No. 1/0
AWG and larger, approved for tray installation and in
accordance with UL 1569.
Voltage:
600 volts.
Conductor Material:
Bare annealed copper; stranded in accordance with
ASTM B8.
Insulation:
XHHW-2, 90 degree C dry, 75 degree C wet,
crosslinked polyethylene in accordance with NEMA
WC57 / ICEA S-73-532 (control cable), NEMA
WC70 / ICEA S-95-658 (Power Cable), and UL 44.
Assembly:
Individual conductors cabled together with
nonhydroscopic fillers and binding tape.
Sheath:
Impervious, continuous, corrugated aluminum
welded over cable core. sheath shall meet the
grounding conductor requirements of NEC table
250-95.
Jacket:
50 mil minimum, polyvinylchloride (PVC) in
accordance with UL 1277.
Flame Resistance:
IEEE 383.
Manufacturer(s):
Okonite, Houston Wire & Cable, or approved equal.
Uses Permitted:
Cable tray, direct burial, encased in concrete in
normal or Class 1, Division 2 atmospheres.
Execution:
Installation: Install in accordance with this Section.
Testing: Test in accordance with Section 16000 and
Section 16030.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16120 - 6
C00822C13
Cable System Identification:
TC
Description:
Multiconductor power and control cable, No. 14
AWG minimum through No. 1 AWG, approved for
tray installation and in accordance with UL 1581
600 volts.
Voltage:
Conductor Material:
Bare annealed copper; stranded in accordance with
ASTM B8.
Insulation:
XHHW-2, 90 degree C dry, 75 degree C wet,
crosslinked polyethylene in accordance with NEMA
WC57 / ICEA S-73-532 (control cable), NEMA
WC70 / ICEA S-95-658 (Power Cable), and UL 44.
Assembly:
Individual conductors cabled together with
nonhydroscopic fillers and binding tape.
Jacket:
50 mil minimum, polyvinylchloride (PVC) in
accordance with UL 1581.
Flame Resistance:
IEEE 383.
Manufacturer(s):
Uses Permitted:
Okonite, Houston Wire & Cable, or approved equal.
Cable tray, direct burial, encased in concrete in
normal or Class 1, Division 2 atmospheres.
Execution:
Installation: Install in accordance with this Section.
Testing: Test in accordance with Section 16000 and
Section 16030.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16120 - 7
C00822C13
Cable System Identification:
Description:
XHHW-2
Single conductor Cross-linked polyethylene power
and control cable for sizes No. 14 AWG through
No. 600 kCMIL.
Voltage:
600 volts.
Conductor Material:
Bare annealed copper; stranded in accordance with
ASTM B8.
Insulation:
XHHW-2, 90 degree C dry, 75 degree C wet, crosslinked polyethylene in accordance with NEMA
WC57/ ICEA S-73-532 (control cable), NEMA
WC70/ ICEA S-95-658 (power cable).
Jacket:
None.
Flame Resistance:
N/A.
Manufacturer(s):
Okonite, X-Olene; Cablec, Durasheath XLP; or
approved equal.
Execution:
Installation: Install in accordance with this Section.
Testing: Test in accordance with Section 16000 and
Section 16030.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16120 - 8
C00822C13
Cable System Identification:
SIC
Description:
Single twisted, shielded pair or triad, 16 AWG,
instrumentation cable, UL listed. NEC type TC.
Voltage:
600 volts.
Conductor Material:
Bare annealed copper; stranded in accordance with
ASTM B8.
Insulation:
15 mil, 90°C Dry / 75°C Wet, Polyvinyl chloride
(PVC) with 4 mil nylon conduit or jacket.
Lay:
Twisted on a 2-inch lay.
Shield:
Jacket:
100 percent, 1.35 mil aluminum-Mylar tape with 18
AWG 7-strand tinned copper drain wire.
45 mil polyvinylchloride (PVC).
Flame Resistance:
UL 1277.
Manufacturer(s):
Okonite, Okoseal-N type P-OS; or approved equal.
Execution:
Installation: Install in accordance with this Section.
Testing: Test in accordance with this Section.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16120 - 9
C00822C13
Cable System Identification:
MIC
Description:
Multiple twisted, shielded pairs or triads, 16 AWG,
instrumentation cable, UL listed.
Voltage:
600 volts.
Conductor Material:
Bare annealed copper; stranded in accordance with
ASTM B8.
Insulation:
15 mil, 90°C Dry / 75°C Wet, Polyvinyl chloride
(PVC) with 4 mil nylon conduit or jacket.
Lay:
Twisted on a 2-inch lay.
Shield:
100 percent, 1.35 mil aluminum-Mylar tape with 18
AWG 7-strand tinned copper drain wire.
Overall Shield:
2.35 mil aluminum-Mylar tape with a No. 20 AWG 7strand tinned copper drain wire.
Jacket:
45 mil polyvinylchloride (PVC).
Flame Resistance:
UL 1277.
Manufacturer(s):
Okonite, Okoseal-N type SP-OS; or approved equal.
Execution:
Installation: Install in accordance with this Section.
Testing: Test in accordance with this Section.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16120 - 10
C00822C13
Cable System Identification:
CORD
Description:
Portable Cord, 10 AWG and smaller, UL listed, type
SO; larger than 10 AWG, UL listed type G.
Voltage:
Conductor Material:
600 volts
Flexible rope stranded per ASTM B189 and B33.
Conductors shall be coated except ground
conductors may be uncoated.
Insulation:
Bare annealed copper; stranded in accordance with
ASTM B8. Insulation shall be ethylene propylene
(EPR) as per ICEA S-68-516 and rated for
continuous operation at 90 degrees C.
Jacket:
Heavy-duty neoprene as per ICEA S-68-516.
Manufacturer(s):
Okonite, Okocord; or approved equal.
Execution:
Installation: Install in accordance with Section
16120.
Testing: Test in accordance with Section 16000 and
Section 16030.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16120 - 11
C00822C13
Cable System Identification:
VF
Description:
Voltage:
Variable frequency drive cable, No. 16 AWG
minimum through 4/0 AWG, approved for tray
installation and in accordance with UL 1277, type
MC. Four conductors (three power and one full
sized ground), overall 100% aluminum tape shield,
85% tinned copper braid shield, and tinned copper
drain wire.
.
600 volts.
Conductor Material:
Tinned copper; stranded.
Insulation:
90 degree C dry and wet, crosslinked polyethylene
in accordance with UL TC, XHHW-2.
Sheath
Interlocked armor aluminum. Sheath shall meet the
grounding conductor requirements of NEC table
250.95.
Jacket:
Polyvinylchloride (PVC) in accordance with UL 1581.
Flame Resistance
IEEE 383.
Manufacturer(s):
Belden Variable Frequency Drive Cable, or
approved equal.
Uses Permitted:
Cable tray, direct burial, encased in concrete.
Execution:
Installation: in conduit and cable trays. Install in
accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements, in
this Section, and as indicated on Drawings.
Testing: Test in accordance with Section 16000 and
Section 16030.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16120 - 12
C00822C13
SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies wiring devices consisting of receptacles, plugs, switches, and
appurtenances.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
documents. These references are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of
conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the
requirements of this Section shall prevail.
Reference
Title
NEMA 250
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 volts maximum)
NEMA 5
NEMA WD-1
General Purpose Wiring Devices
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code (NEC)
B. Qualifications: Not used.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Catalog cuts for all materials.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. UL-list wiring devices for the current, voltage, and frequency specified and complying with NEMA
WD-1.
B. Use devices containing provisions for back wiring and side wiring with captively held metallic
binding screws.
C. Devices are to be brown, except those located in finished areas are to be ivory.
D. All to be supplied by a single manufacturer.
E. Enclosures shall meet or exceed requirements of NEMA 250.
2.02 RECEPTACLES AND PLUGS
A. General: Grounding type.
1. Receptacles to be grounding type.
2. Provide outdoor receptacles with weatherproof lift covers, while in use.
B. 120V Receptacles:
1. Indoor, clean areas:
a. Duplex 20 amp NEMA 5-20R that accept NEMA 5-15P or 5-20P plug caps.
b. Acceptable manufacturer:
1) Hubbell 5362.
2) Arrow Hart.
3) Or Approved Equal.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16140 - 1
C00822C13
2. GFIC protected receptacles:
a. Indoor and outdoor areas:
b. Duplex 20 amp NEMA 5-20R that accept NEMA 5-15P or 5-20P plug caps.
c. Tamper and weather resistant.
d. Acceptable manufacturer:
1) Hubbell GFR5362 series.
2) Arrow Hart TWRVGF20 series.
3) Or Approved Equal.
3. Where the manufacturer of cord connected equipment requires an isolated ground, provide a
receptacle with isolated ground.
4. Isolated ground receptacles:
a. Acceptable manufacturers:
1) Hubbell IG-5362.
2) Arrow Hart 6766.
3) Or Approved Equal.
5. Classified Areas:
a. Acceptable manufacturers:
1) Crouse Hinds, FSQ 20 Amps 600 VAC.
2) Appleton, FSQX Series.
3) Or Approved Equal suitable for classified areas.
C. 250V receptacles:
1. Duplex 15-amp NEMA 6-15R that accept NEMA 6-15P plug caps.
2. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Hubbell 5662.
b. Arrow Hart.
c. Or Approved Equal.
D. Three Phase Receptacles and Plugs:
1. Receptacles:
a. Suitable for 480V, 3-phase, 4-wire service, with ampere ratings as specified.
b. Provided complete with cast back box, angle adapter, gaskets, and a gasketed screwtype, weathertight cap with chain fastener.
c. Provide each receptacle with one plug.
2. Receptacles and plugs: Designed so that the grounding pole is permanently connected to
the housing.
3. Contacts:
a. The grounding pole shall make contact before the line poles are engaged when the plug
is connected to the receptacle housing.
b. The plug sleeve shall make contact with the receptacle housing before the line and load
poles make contact.
4. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Crouse-Hinds "Arktite”.
b. Appleton "Powertite".
c. Or Approved Equal.
E. Receptacles for hazardous areas:
1. Rate receptacles for use in hazardous areas in accordance with NEC for the area in which
they are to be located and factory seal.
2. Design receptacles so the plug must be inserted and turned before load is energized.
3. Provide receptacles with mounting box, sealing chamber and compatible plug.
4. Voltage and current ratings to be as specified.
5. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Appleton "U-Line".
b. Crouse Hinds.
c. Or Approved Equal.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16140 - 2
C00822C13
F. Male plug caps for 120V and 250V receptacles:
1. Cord grip armored type with heavy phenolic housing, of the same manufacture as the
receptacle.
2. Rate plug caps at 15 amps.
3. Provide one plug cap for every 4 receptacles, with a minimum of 2 plug caps.
2.03 SWITCHES
A. General Purpose (Indoor, Clean Areas):
1. General purpose switches: Quiet AC type, specification grade, with rated capacities as
required.
2. Match receptacles in color.
3. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Arrow Hart.
b. Hubbell.
c. Or Approved Equal, as follows:
15A, 120-277V
20A, 120-277V
Arrow Hart
Hubbell
Arrow Hart
Hubbell
Single:
1891
1201
1991
1221
Three-way
1893
1203
1993
1223
Four-way
1894
1204
1994
1224
SPST momentary
1895
1995
B. Switches for hazardous areas:
1. Switches for control of lighting and small single-phase power loads in hazardous areas:
Factory assembled and sealed combination general purpose type switch in an explosion
proof housing.
2. Rate the switch in accordance with NEC for the area in which it is to be installed.
3. External operating mechanism: wing-type handle having the "ON" and "OFF" positions
visible from the front.
4. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Crouse Hinds Cat. No. EFS2129, 20 AMP. 277 VAC.
b. Appleton, EDS Series.
c. Or Approved Equal.
C. Switches for outdoor and corrosive areas:
1. Maintained contact switches:
a. Press switch type with a weatherproof hypalon or neoprene cover.
b. Acceptable manufacturers:
1) Arrow Hart.
2) Hubbell.
c. Or Approved Equal.
2. Momentary contact switches: sealed contact pushbutton switches, rated NEMA 4X, mounted
on a NEMA 4X control station.
2.04 DEVICE PLATES
A. Provide with switches.
B. Non-corrosive indoor areas:
1. Type 302 stainless steel device plates on sheet metal boxes. Sheet steel, zinc electroplated
with chrome finish in all other indoor areas.
2. Acceptable Manufacturer:
a. Crouse-Hinds.
b. Appleton.
c. Or Approved Equal.
C. Corrosive or outdoor areas: Impact resistant, marine grade fiberglass.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16140 - 3
C00822C13
D. Factory provided explosion-proof equipment.
E. Provide device plates for instrumentation power supply disconnect switches with general purpose
switches and a lockoff feature with provision for a single padlock.
F. Nameplates:
1. Provide with engraved laminated phenolic nameplates with 1/8-inch white characters on
black background as specified in Section 16000.
2. Switches: Identify panel and circuit number and area served.
3. Receptacles: Identify circuit and also voltage if other than 120V, single phase.
4. Indoor nameplates may be secured by epoxy glue.
5. Secure outdoor or corrosive area nameplates with Type 316 stainless steel screws.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Boxes:
1. Independently support boxes by galvanized brackets, expansion bolts, toggle bolts, or
machine or wood screws as appropriate.
2. Do not use wooden or plastic plugs inserted in masonry or concrete as a base to secure
boxes. Do not use welding or brazing for attachment.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, flush mount receptacles and switches installed in sheet steel boxes.
Locate flush-mounted receptacles 18 inches above the finished floor.
C. Mount switch boxes 48 inches above the floor. Locate receptacles installed in cast device boxes
48 inches above the finished floor.
D. Wire all 480V receptacles to suit the plant's standard phase rotation.
E. Test wiring devices for correct connections.
F. Perform all work in accordance with NFPA 70 and these specifications.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16140 - 4
C00822C13
SECTION 16158
480 VAC VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies variable frequency drive (VFD) controllers, 5 to 500 horsepower. The
controllers include converters, inverters, control functions, instrumentation, filters, harmonic
analysis, protective equipment and accessories necessary to provide the specified functions and
features. The County has preselected this equipment. Refer to Part 2 for the requirements.
B. Equipment List:
EQUIPMENT
Variable Frequency Drive for
Submersible Pump P 851 101 No. 1
Variable Frequency Drive for
Submersible Pump P 851 102 No. 2
Variable Frequency Drive for
Submersible Pump P 851 103 No. 3
EQUIPMENT NO.
VFD 851 101
VFD 851 102
VFD 851 103
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
documents. These references are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of
conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the
requirements of this Section shall prevail.
Reference
Title
ANSI C37.90
Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power
Apparatus
NEMA ICS6
Enclosures for Industrial Control and Systems
NEMA ST20
Dry Type Transformers for General Applications
IEEE 519-1992
IEEE Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic
Control in Electrical Power Systems
UL Standard 508
Industrial Control Equipment
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code
B. Qualifications:
1. The VFD training instructor shall be factory-trained.
C. Source Quality Control:
1. Listed and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL), ETL, or Canadian Standards
Association.
2. All upgrades to specified requirements per UL 508 or ETL.
D. Stand Alone Factory Test: The Project Representative will observe factory tests on the VFD
controller at the project representative's option and expense.
E. Compatibility: VFD controller's performance shall be compatible with and tolerant of disturbances
produced by other VFD controllers and not interfere with each other.
F. Harmonics:
1. All line side harmonic suppression devices used to eliminate or deal with harmonics in any
way shall be contained within the VFD enclosure and shall be integral with the VFD
controller.
2. Use of input line filters external to the VFD shall not be permitted to meet the specified
harmonic levels contained in this specification.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16158 - 1
C00822C13
3. Output filters, used to protect motors from high voltage reflections, may be installed external
to the VFD.
4. VFD controller's performance shall be in compliance with the latest version of IEEE 5191992.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Catalog and technical data indicating the equipment meets the specifications.
C. Installation instructions outline dimensions and weights including filters and/or isolation
transformers, front view drawing identifying control and monitoring devices, nameplate
engravings, and wall mounting requirements for all assemblies.
D. External connection diagram showing function and identification of all terminals requiring field
connections.
E. Operations and Maintenance manuals as specified in Section 01730.
F. Schematics and wiring diagrams.
G. Plan drawings showing conduit entry locations.
H. Current and voltage distortion calculations:
1. Point of Common Coupling (PCC) is the service entrance disconnect.
2. Include first 36 odd current and voltage harmonics: Voltage calculated on line to line basis
3. Provide distortion figures for each harmonic and the total demand distortion.
4. Provide plots of voltage and current waves.
5. Perform calculations for the following criteria:
a. Two 15 hp VFDs operating at full load on utility power.
b. Three 15 hp VFDs operating at full load on utility power.
c. Two 15 hp VFDs operating at full load on 175 kW generator power.
d. Three 15 hp VFDs operating at full load on 175 kW generator power.
I.
Efficiency and power factor calculations:
1. Calculate efficiencies of the VFD controller including the auto-transformer (where applicable),
ventilation fans, control power and all VFD losses.
2. Calculate displacement and total power factor including filter.
3. Perform calculations at 100, 75, and 50 percent speed.
4. Include first 36 harmonics.
J.
Calculations of cooling and ventilation requirements.
K. Provide letters of certification signed by officers of manufacturer and the motor manufacturer that
the specific application has been reviewed and that the motor and drive combination are
compatible and will satisfy operating requirements under all conditions of operation without
adverse impacts on either the motor or VFD.
L. Certified final factory test procedure and results for each drive.
M. Location and description of service center and spare parts stock.
N. Recommended spare parts list.
O. Test procedures as specified in this Section
P. Certified copies of all material test reports.
Q. VFD training instructor qualifications.
R. Training schedule and materials.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16158 - 2
C00822C13
S. Manufacturer's certification that the controller can withstand fault conditions on the load side
based on the assumption that an infinite bus and 5 percent impedance on a 1000kVA delta-towye service transformer exists on the supply side of the controller.
T. Provide written verification to the Project Representative that the factory installed wiring, busing,
metering, relaying, and related equipment are properly connected, aligned, phased and identified.
U. Test instruments used to perform factory testing, including documentation of calibration.
V. Test documentation from post installation field testing.
W. Mounting base design requirements
X. Provide written statement that manufacturer's equipment has been installed and properly
adjusted and is ready for operation by Owner's personnel.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. The equipment in this section has been pre-selected by the County for system standardization.
Contractor shall procure the items required in this section from a vendor authorized to supply
products by the listed manufacturer.
2.02 ACCEPTABLE VFD MANUFACTURER
A. Rockwell Automation / Allen-Bradley.
B. No substitution for the above manufacturer.
2.03 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. General:
1. Minimum Continuous Current Ratings: 1.15 nameplate current of driven motor at full voltage,
torque and speed.
2. Torque Requirements: Variable.
3. The use of isolation transformers is not allowed.
2.04 FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. General Requirements:
1. Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) drive design suitable for use with NEMA design B squirrelcage induction motors rated for inverter duty at 460 volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz with 1.15 service
factor.
2. Converters:
a. For 6-pulse drives VFDs: 6-Pulse, multiple full wave, 3 phase, solid state rectifier bridge
to convert incoming fixed voltage and frequency to a fixed DC voltage. All components
for converters shall be integral to the VFD enclosure.
3. Inverter:
a. Output voltage: Adjustable and controlled by the value of output frequency to maintain a
constant ratio of Volts per Hertz throughout the operating range. The Volts per Hertz
shall be internally field adjustable.
b. Capable of varying the speed of any standard NEMA B or NEMA E design, squirrel cage,
induction motor with a 1.15 service factor.
c. A single unit, with no paralleling of smaller inverters.
d. Suppresses output dV/dT high voltage spikes and shall be compatible with the pump
motors provided under Section 11347.
4. Telephone Interference Requirements: Limit the I-T product at any harmonic as defined in
IEEE 519 to 10,000 at the primary of the station supply transformer for 2 pumps running.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16158 - 3
C00822C13
5. General Features:
a. Inverter output shall be conditioned to prevent high voltage ringing on motor leads.
Output filters are acceptable.
b. Microprocessor controlled pulse width modulation output voltage control strategy.
c. Utilize pulse width modulation control techniques such that the maximum root mean
square motor line current at rated voltage, torque and speed is less than 1.05 times that
motor nameplate current.
d. Power transistor output circuitry shall use insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBT). An
essential 12-pulse design combining two 6-pulse inverters to achieve a 12-pulse output
will not be accepted. Input phase shifting transformer shall be specifically designed for
equal current sharing in VFD applications.
e. Power devices to have peak reverse voltage ratings of 2.5 times line current.
f. Input power devices shall have peak reverse voltage ratings of 2.5 times line voltage.
g. Insensitive to incoming power phase sequence.
6. Ratings:
a. Rated Input Power: 460 Volt, plus 10 percent or minus 10 percent, 3 phase, 48 - 62
Hertz, incoming voltage imbalance of plus or minus 0.5 percent.
b. Rated Output Power: 0-460 Volt, plus or minus 1 percent, 3 phase, 1-90 Hertz.
c. Frequency Drift: Plus or minus 0.5 percent.
d. Voltage Regulation: Plus or minus 1 percent rated value no load to full load.
e. Speed Regulation: 3 percent.
f. Ambient Temperature Range: 0-40 degrees Celsius.
g. Atmosphere: Non-condensing relative humidity to 95 percent.
h. VFD Efficiency: A minimum of 95 percent at 100-percent speed and torque at 40
degrees Celsius ambient based upon measurement of input power versus output power
with all specified components in system.
i. Displacement Power Factor: The minimum displacement power factor the VFD controller
shall present to the AC system shall be 95 percent at all speeds. The unit shall be
designed to inherently provide this minimum power factor.
j. Speed Range: 40:1.
k. Input Speed Signal: A 4-20 mA DC from an external source and a remote pot. Circuitry
shall be isolated.
l. Output Contacts: Three electrically isolated, programmable auxiliary status contacts,
rated 5 amp at 120 VAC, for Ready, Run, and Fault.
7. Frequency control and regulation:
a. Range: 4 mA DC at minimum equipment speed and 20 mA DC at maximum
equipment speed.
b. Accuracy: 1.0 percent of span.
c. Deadband: 0.5 percent of span.
d. Repeatability: 0.5 percent of span.
e. Input signal impedance: 100 Ohms minimum, with isolated two-wire signal follower.
f.
Adjustable minimum and maximum output frequency limits.
g. Independent timed linear acceleration and deceleration functions adjustable from 3 to
300 seconds.
8. Provide program to prevent operation of the VFD at a minimum of two critical speeds.
9. Disconnects:
a. For 6-pulse VFD drives: Provide input fused disconnects or circuit breaker and current
limiter combinations.
b. Provide disconnects or circuit breakers with through-the-door or flange-mounted handle
and include door interlocks with defeater mechanisms.
c. Provide these disconnect switch and circuit breakers as integral components of the
factory built assemblies.
10. VFD overload capacity: 150 percent of continuous current rating for one minute.
B. Microprocessor Digital Control:
1. Drive operating parameters programmable.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16158 - 4
C00822C13
2. Sealed keypad with pushbuttons or sealed membrane type keypad with LED or LCD display,
mounted on door when VFD is inside a NEMA 1 enclosure.
3. Operating parameters, fault, and diagnostic data maintained in non-volatile memory with
historic log of fault and diagnostic data for a minimum of the four most recent events, and is
accessible via keypad and RS232/RS422 serial port.
4. Utilize English messages and engineering units.
5. Menu driven.
6. Password security.
7. Computer Interface via RS232/RS422 Serial Communication Port:
a. Adjust drive-operating parameter.
b. Fault and diagnostic data accessible.
c. Isolated from pump station ground so that no connection of a computer powered by the
pump station power can cause damage to the computer or the VFD serial communication
ports.
8. Display fault and diagnostic data.
9. Ethernet communication capability.
C. Basic Drive Features and Functions:
1. Automatic Restart Feature:
a. Field selectable.
b. Faults:
1) Overload.
2) Overvoltage.
3) Undervoltage.
4) Voltage imbalance.
c. Final fault, requiring manual reset, if restart is not successful after three attempts at 30second intervals between restart attempts.
d. Provide drive with the ability to start into a motor that is spinning in the forward direction
and assume normal operation upon auto restart of the drive.
2. Upon restoration of AC power after a loss of utility or standby power, the VFD controller shall
not attempt to restart until an external start signal is received. The drive shall not require any
type of reset command after a power outage.
3. 30 percent voltage dip ride through capability for one cycle.
4. Controllers shall be compatible and tolerant of disturbances produced by other VFD
controllers and shall not interfere with each other.
D. Adjustments:
1. Maximum frequency: Adjustable 60-90 Hertz.
2. Minimum frequency: Adjustable 6-40 Hertz.
3. Speed: Frequency maximum and frequency minimum.
4. Independent acceleration and deceleration rates: Field adjustable with minimum range of 3300 seconds.
5. Voltage parameters: Minimum and maximum voltage and Volts/Hertz.
6. Current limit: 50 to 150 percent of drive limit for 1 minute.
7. Inverse time overload: NEMA Class 10.
8. Speed shedding: Automatic upon low voltage.
9. Speed profile: Starting ramp, stopping ramp, minimum speed, and maximum speed.
10. Starting boost: 4%.
E. Protective Features and Functions:
1. Current limiting fuses, regulators, or other techniques for both internal and external fault
protection.
2. Overvoltage protection on the incoming AC line.
3. Ground fault protection.
4. Single-phase fault or 3-phase short-circuit on VFD output terminals without damage to any
power component.
5. Over-speed (over-frequency).
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16158 - 5
C00822C13
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Instantaneous overcurrent and overvoltage trip with inverse time overcurrent protection.
Single phase and undervoltage trip.
Power unit over-temperature.
Electronic motor overload protection.
De-saturation circuit protection for the following conditions:
a. VFD fault.
b. Motor protection interlock.
c. Emergency stop.
DC bus discharge circuit for protection of operator and service personnel with indicator lamp.
Transistor assembly overcurrent protection.
Provides safe drive shutdown on following faults:
a. Loss of input power.
b. Sustained input undervoltage (minus 15 percent).
c. Sustained gradual overload.
d. Instantaneous severe overload.
e. Power transistor over-temperature.
f. Blown fuse.
g. Logic power supply failure.
Voltage transients: Provide solid state line transient protection up to 6000 volts peak per
IEEE C62.41-1991.
Overcurrent protection:
a. The VFD system shall provide adjustable electronic current limit. Current shall be
accurate to within 1.0 percent and shall smoothly limit motor speed at whatever value is
necessary to limit motor current to that value.
b. The VFD shall provide motor running overcurrent protection in compliance with NFPA-70.
Short-circuit protection:
a. The VFD shall be fully protected against load faults.
b. Bolted, phase to phase, or phase to ground faults shall not damage the unit.
c. Fault protection shall be based on a power source short circuit capacity of 65,000 Amps
RMS symmetrical at the VFD power input terminals. Any impedance or other current
limiting necessary to meet this requirement shall be provided as part of the VFD system,
and any losses caused by current limiting devices shall be included in efficiency
calculations for the VFD system.
Line voltage: The VFD shall be protected against high and low line voltage on one or more
phases.
Internal faults: The VFD shall incorporate an internal fault monitoring system to detect
malfunctions. This system shall be designed to protect the VFD from transient and sustained
faults and to limit damage that may be caused by these faults.
Motor overtemperature:
a. The VFD shall interface to motor temperature switches and shall shut down if the motor
becomes overheated.
b. The VFD shall include all components necessary to sense a contact opening and
shutdown the affected motor if the motor winding temperature exceeds maximum rated
operating temperature.
c. Drive must be manually reset after a motor over-temperature trip.
d. Install and integrate motor protective relay for motor over temperature. Coordinate with
Section 11347.
Annunciator:
a. The VFD shall be provided with a fault annunciation system that shall indicate the cause
of any shutdown.
b. Annunciation shall identify the first fault in those cases where multiple faults occur
between manual or automatic resets and shall be visible without opening the VFD
cabinet.
c. The annunciation language shall be English.
d. As a minimum, the following faults shall be annunciated:
1) Motor overtemperature.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16158 - 6
C00822C13
2)
3)
4)
5)
Motor overcurrent.
VFD overtemperature.
Line over/under voltage.
VFD overvoltage.
F. Special Features and Functions:
1. Operator interface devices and Human Interface Module (HIM) on door of VFD enclosure:
a. Elapsed time meter (non re-settable),via individual meter.
b. Indication of output voltage in volts, via HIM.
c. Indication of output currents in amps, via HIM.
d. Indication of motor speed in RPM, via HIM.
e. Local/Off/Auto selector switch, via individual switch. When in Auto, the speed is
controlled from an external 4 to 20 mA DC signal, via individual switch In Local, the
speed is controlled from a keypad module, via HIM.
f. Start, Stop pushbuttons (keypad) active in Local mode, via HIM.
g. VFD off but ready indication light (green), via individual light.
h. VFD running indication light (red), via individual light.
i. Power indication light (white), via individual light .
j. VFD failure indication light (amber), via individual light.
k. System stop mushroom head maintained contact pushbutton, via individual switch.
l. Reset pushbutton, via individual switch.
m. Indicating lights per Section 16175.
2. Control power transformer:
a. 120 VAC secondary; 100 VA minimum.
b. Two primary fuses and one secondary fuse with non-fused secondary leg grounded.
c. Door mounted “Control Power On” pilot light.
d. Independent transformer utilized for internal VFD electronic controls.
3. Remote local control interface requirements:
a. Remote run signal from PLC contact closure, two-wire control.
b. Remote: Isolated 4-20 mA DC speed reference input signal; preset speed input is active.
c. Local: 4-20 mA DC inactive; preset speed inactive; reference from interface module.
May be keypad operated.
d. Drive running: 1 form C isolated contacts, 120V, 5 amps (typical).
e. Drive off and ready to run: 1 form C isolated contacts.
f. Drive fault: 1 form C isolated contacts.
g. Drive in remote mode: 1 form C isolated contacts.
4. Preset speed: The drives shall ramp to a pre-programmed speed upon a contact closure,
ignoring the 4 to 20 mA DC normal speed reference signal.
G. Noise Data: Free field noise generated by the VFD shall not exceed 85 dBA at 3 feet from any
point of the VFD cabinet under any normal operating condition.
H. Enclosures:
1. Wall-mounted.
2. NEMA 1 with fan and ventilation provisions that are necessary for equipment cooling and
coordinated with the cooling ductwork provided by others in the pump station building.
3. Painted parts:
a. To undergo phosphatizing, prepaint treatment for rust resistance and paint bond.
b. Paint and process color: Manufacturer's color.
c. Paint: Applied by electrostatic process and baked to a durable hard finish.
4. Nameplates:
a. Provide laminate phenolic nameplates showing the controller designations as specified.
b. Design: Black, with minimum 3/16-inch high white letters. Nominal size shall be 1 inch
high by 3 inches long.
c. Abbreviations: If required because of space limitations, abbreviations shall be submitted
to the Project Representative for approval.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16158 - 7
C00822C13
5. Seismic bracing: The entire assembly, including electronics and controls, shall be braced for
the site seismic criteria listed in Section 01031.
6. Audible noise requirements: See Spec. 11030 and this Section.
7. All components shall be accessible and removable from the front only.
8. Doors:
a. Open at least 90 degrees and shall be provided with 4 point hinges.
b. Door handles: Capable of accepting a padlock with a 3/8-inch shackle to lock the VFD
enclosure closed and the input breaker open.
9. Drive enclosures:
a. Provided with external framework for housing the air filters.
b. Access to the filter media for purposes of replacement or cleaning shall be possible from
the exterior of the drive without the need to open doors on the drive enclosure or
otherwise gain interior access to the drive.
10. Ventilation:
a. When required provide intake and exhaust ventilation in the door of the enclosure.
I.
Maintainability: VFD controller's parts shall be interchangeable and modular for all controllers.
2.05 SPARE PARTS
A. Procedures: Section 01750.
B. The VFD manufacturer shall provide one complete set of all plug-in controller components as
standby components for the VFDs supplied.
C. Label standby components and package in a sturdy container suitable for storage.
D. As a minimum, the standby components include:
1. One set of 3 of each type of power fuse.
2. One set of 12 of each type of control fuse.
3. One set of indicating lights.
4. One complete VFD for each VFD frame size supplied on the project for replacement in an
enclosure.
5. One elapsed time meter.
6. One input ammeter.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Install equipment level and plumb and anchor on wall in accordance with the equipment
manufacturer's instructions and as indicated herein.
C. Wall mount the VFD enclosures with a minimum of ¼” separation between the VFD and masonry
wall.
D. Provide earthquake resistant attachments and supports for equipment.
E. Provide seismic anchorage and bracing per Section 01031.
3.02 HARMONIC ANALYSIS CALCULATIONS
A. Calculate total harmonic distortion at the common node Motor Control Center bus for the
controller units based on the specified impedances and system configuration. Unless otherwise
indicated, determine distortion in accordance with IEEE 519-1992.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16158 - 8
C00822C13
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Employ and pay for services of the equipment manufacturer's field service representative to:
1. Inspect equipment covered by these specifications.
2. Supervise adjustments and installation checks.
3. Conduct startup of equipment and perform operational checks; provide a checklist of all
inspections.
3.04 TRAINING
A. Provide coordinated training course, approved by the Project Representative, to instruct ten
County personnel on variable frequency drives. The training will be conducted at the West Point
Treatment Plant, coordinate with the Project Representative for room location. The training shall
include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Conduct two hours of training to cover general variable frequency drive theory and operation.
2. Conduct six hours of training on operation and maintenance of the variable frequency drives
specific to the supplied VFDs.
3. Training may be split into two identical course covering the above material as directed by the
Project Representative.
3.05 FACTORY TEST
A. Perform standard factory tests on each drive provided.
B. Notify the Project Representative at least 4 weeks in advance of any test. Provide certified
copies of the test reports.
3.06 TESTING AND STARTUP
A. Test Procedure:
1. Prepare test procedure and conduct tests in accordance with the procedure to demonstrate
to the Project Representative the accuracy of the wiring, control, and proper functioning of the
equipment.
2. Submit proposed test procedure for approval at least two weeks prior to the demonstration.
3. All equipment and systems shall be demonstrated as operating properly prior to acceptance
of the work. All protective devices shall be operative during the demonstration.
4. If the demonstration indicates unsatisfactory operation as determined by the Project
Representative or inspecting authorities, correct defects and repeat the demonstration.
B. Phase Relationship Tests:
1. Check connection to all equipment for proper phase relationship.
2. During such check, disconnect all devices that could be damaged by the application of
voltage of reversed phase sequence.
C. Insulation Resistance Tests:
1. Perform insulation resistance tests on conductors, cables, and equipment, signal circuits
exempt.
2. Make tests using 1,000-volt Biddle hand cranked megger insulation resistance tester.
3. Disconnect all equipment that may be damaged by such tests before the tests are made.
4. Tests shall measure insulation resistance from line to ground.
5. Test conductors and cables after placement and the completion of the terminations, but
before connection to equipment.
6. Test 600-volt class circuits and equipment. Minimum acceptable values of insulation
resistance of circuits and equipment shall be 100 megohms.
7. Provide test reports listing test equipment used, person or persons performing the tests, the
date tested, the circuits or equipment tested, and the results of all tests.
8. These tests shall be witnessed by the Project Representative.
9. The Contractor shall notify the Project Representative one week in advance of testing.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16158 - 9
C00822C13
D. High Voltage Ringing on Motor Leads:
1. The contract requires VFDs, or VFDs with output filters, which control the phenomenon of
high voltage reflected voltage waves on motor cable, produced by the high speed switching
of PWM drives.
2. Use an oscilloscope with a 5,000-volt test probe at the motors with the longest length able to
record the amplitude of the voltage at the motor.
3. Voltage spikes plus base 480 volts: Not exceed 1488 Volts peak, per NEMA.
E. Test Equipment: All test instrumentation equipment used during testing shall be NIST traceable
and certified.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16158 - 10
C00822C13
SECTION 16175
MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL DEVICES
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies miscellaneous electrical control and power devices, relays, magnetic
contactors, disconnect switches, manual starters, and overcurrent protection.
B. Equipment List:
EQUIPMENT
Lighting Control Relay
Load Bank Connection Panel
EQUIPMENT NO.
ME 851 102
PNL 851 109
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
documents. These references are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of
conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the
requirements of this Section shall prevail.
Reference
Title
NEMA 4X
National Electrical Manufacturer Association Enclosure 4X.
NEMA 7
National Electrical Manufacturer Association Enclosure 7.
NEMA 12
National Electrical Manufacturer Association Enclosure 12.
NEMA 250
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 volts maximum)
NEMA ICS 1
Industrial Controls and Systems: General Requirements.
NEMA ICS 2
Industrial Controls and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and
Overload Relays, Rated Not More Than 2,000 Volts AC or 750
Volts DC.
NEMA KS 1
Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches
(600 Volts Maximum)
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog data: Section 16000.
C. Applicable operation and maintenance information: Section 01730.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 CONTROL DEVICES
A. Pushbuttons:
1. Flush head, heavy-duty, with NEMA rating to match enclosure type.
2. Operators: Red for stop functions and black for all other functions.
3. Provide pushbuttons designated “Lock-Out-Stop” (LOS) with a padlockable attachment to
maintain the device in a depressed (stop or open) position.
4. Escutcheon legend as specified on the Drawings.
5. Unless otherwise specified, use momentary contact type.
6. Contact blocks:
a. NEMA ICS 2 designation A600 except when switching circuits monitored by
programmable controllers or other solid state circuits.
b. Hermetically sealed, logic-read type.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16175 - 1
Contract No. C00822C13
c.
Acceptable manufacturer:
1) Allen-Bradley.
2) Square D.
3) Or Approved Equal.
B. Selector Switches:
1. Heavy-duty, with NEMA rating to match enclosure type.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, contact blocks and number of positions as required to perform
the specified operations.
3. Contact blocks: Rated as specified in this Section.
4. Escutcheon legend: As indicated on the Drawings.
5. Acceptable manufacturer: Where solid state loads are switched, and the indicated contact
development cannot be obtained with logic-read type contacts:
a. Blue Line with Type D contacts.
b. Project Representative knows of no equal.
C. Indicating Lights:
1. Indicating lights: 5 to 6 VDC light emitting diodes (LEDs) with push-to-test feature.
2. Testing: As a group using a common lamp test button.
3. Indicating light colors: Per Section 16000.
4. Heavy-duty, with NEMA rated socket/wiring to match enclosure type.
5. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Allen-Bradley.
b. Square D.
c. Or Approved Equal.
D. Control Stations:
1. Classification, unless otherwise specified:
a. Indoor locations: NEMA 1.
b. Outdoor locations: NEMA 3R or 4.
c. Corrosive areas: Nonmetallic NEMA 4X.
d. Hazardous areas: NEMA 7.
2. Pushbuttons: Protective Hypalon boots.
3. When indicating lights are specified, size to accommodate the transformer type lights.
4. Acceptable Manufacturer:
a. Allen-Bradley, 800 H series.
b. Crouse-Hinds, NCS series.
c. Or Approved Equal.
2.02 CONTROL RELAYS
A. Load-switching Control Relays:
1. When used for switching loads (solenoids, actuators, contactors, motor starter coils, etc.):
Heavy-duty machine tool type.
2. Relays that have contacts used for remote interlocking or when the switching load is not
shown: Heavy-duty machine tool type.
3. Contacts: As a minimum, 4-pole and field interchangeable to either normally open or
normally closed. Relay shall be capable of accepting a 4-pole adder.
4. AC relays: NEMA A600 contact ratings and electrical clearances for up to 600 volts.
5. DC relays: NEMA P300 contact ratings and electrical clearances for up to 250 volts.
6. Acceptable Manufacturer:
a. Allen Bradley Bulletin 700.
b. Square D Class 8501.
c. Or Approved Equal.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16175 - 2
Contract No. C00822C13
2.03 MAGNETIC CONTACTORS
A. Lighting contactors:
1. Electrically held contactors used to switch current to incandescent filament, fluorescent, LED,
and high intensity discharge lamp loads.
2. Rated 600V AC, 60 hertz.
3. Coil voltage contact rating and number of phase: As specified.
4. Unless otherwise specified, house in a NEMA 1 enclosure.
B. Motor contactors:
1. Designed for continuous operation of induction motors at 600 volts or less at 60 Hz and
comply with NEMA ICS 2-321.
2. Minimum contactor size: Unless otherwise indicated, NEMA size 1.
3. Supply the contactor with a normally open auxiliary contact for use as a hold-in contact as a
minimum. Provide additional contacts as indicated.
4. Additional contacts as needed.
5. The coil voltage, frequency, and number of poles to be as specified.
2.04 SAFETY DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. Heavy-duty, safety type rated 600 volts AC complete with current limiting fuses sized to match
switch ampere rating.
B. Classification, unless otherwise specified:
1. Indoor enclosures: Unless otherwise indicated, NEMA 12. See section 16110.
2. Outdoor or corrosive areas: NEMA 4X, nonmetallic.
3. Hazardous areas: NEMA 7.
4. Classified areas: Suitable for the specified classification.
C. Operating handle: Capable of being padlocked in the "off" position.
D. Operator: Positive, quick-make, quick-break mechanism.
E. Switch Mechanisms: One auxiliary contact rated B150, per NEMA ICS, 2-125, that opens before
the switch blades.
F. Horsepower rated for motors and comply with NEMA KS 1.
G. Defeatable door interlocks that prevent the door from opening when the operating handle is in the
"on" position.
H. Switches shall have line terminal shields.
I.
Acceptable Manufacturer:
1. General Electric.
2. Siemens.
3. Square D.
4. Or Approved Equal.
2.05 MANUAL STARTERS
A. Manual starters:
1. Horsepower rated quick-make, quick-break, toggle mechanism together with 1 or 2 overloads
as specified. Provide provisions to lock in the off position.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Square D.
2. Allen-Bradley.
3. Or Approved Equal.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16175 - 3
Contract No. C00822C13
2.06 OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
A. Circuit breakers:
1. Thermal magnetic, molded-case type with the ampere rating as specified.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, circuit breaker interrupting rating:
a. 10,000 amperes symmetrical minimum for service at 240 volts and below.
b. 22,000 amperes symmetrical minimum for service above 240 volts.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Square D.
2. Eaton: Cutler-Hammer.
3. Or Approved Equal.
2.07 TEMPERATURE TRIP RELAY
A. Capable of monitoring electric motor winding temperatures based on input signals from three 10
ohm copper 3-wire resistance temperature detectors (RTD).
B. Equipped with light emitting diodes (LED) to indicate which RTD is at the highest temperature.
The highest temperature shall be internally compared to two trip settings to trip SPDT output
relays. The output relays shall be settable at different temperatures and shall de-energize at the
set point on increasing temperature.
C. Relay Contact Minimum Rating: 240 VAC, 5A non-inductive.
D. Output Signal: 0 to 1 mA, linearly proportional to the temperature of the hottest RTD.
E. Powered by 120 VAC, 60 Hz.
F. Acceptable Manufacturer:
1. Allen Bradley.
2. Eaton: Cutler Hammer.
3. Or Approved Equal.
2.08 SELECTOR SWITCHES
A. For Fans: 600V, heavy duty two-position, four-circuit, suitable for Class 1, Division 2 area.
B. Indicating plate markings as follows: “Enable-Stop.”
C. Acceptable Manufacturer:
1. Appleton.
2. Crouse-Hinds EDS 21272.
3. Or Approved Equal.
2.09 NAMEPLATES
A. For all control stations, relays, timers, motor contactors and disconnect switches: Per Section
16000.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Mount control stations, contactors, and safety disconnect switches 48 inches above finished floor.
B. Test all products per Section 16030.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16175 - 4
Contract No. C00822C13
SECTION 16176
LOCAL CONTROL PANELS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies local control panels for controlling process equipment, consisting of
enclosures, wiring, and electrical control devices.
B. Equipment List:
EQUIPMENT
Local Control Panel for LDS
Sump Pumps
Local Control Panel for
Instrument Air Compression
System
Local Control Panel for C2 Water
Supply System
EQUIPMENT NO.
PNL 851 101
PNL 851 105
PNL 851 116
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
documents. These references are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of
conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the
requirements of this Section shall prevail.
Reference
Title
EIA RS-310-C
Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment
ANSI/NEMA ICS 2
Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies
ANSI/NEMA ICS 6
Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems
NEMA 4X
National Electrical Manufacturer Association Enclosure 4X.
NEMA 12
National Electrical Manufacturer Association Enclosure 12.
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code
UL 508
Industrial Equipment
B. Listing and labeling: See Section 16000.
C. Qualifications: Not used.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: See Section 01300.
B. Shop drawings and equipment data: Section 16000.
C. Layout drawings of the local control panel enclosures indicating the front door and rear panel
equipment arrangement and dimensions. Provide a list of materials and components with the
layout drawings.
D. Instrumentation systems' manufacturer design.
E. Elementary and internal connection diagrams: Section 16000.
F. A written description of the elementary diagram "sequence of operation.”
G. Operating and maintenance information: Section 01730.
H. Completed test report form 16000-K.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16176 - 1
C00822C13
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Hoffmann Engineering Company.
B. Schneider Electric - Square D.
C. Or Approved Equal.
2.02 GENERAL
A. Manufacture control panels in accordance with the general layouts, schedules, and details to suit
the locations shown.
B. The instrumentation systems' manufacturer to completely design the panel structures, internal
and external devices, equipment arrangement, wiring, and piping.
C. Provide control devices, control transformers, fuses, blown-fuse indicators, timing relays, control
relays, selector switches, indicating lights, nameplates, terminal blocks, conductor markers, and
miscellaneous materials as specified.
D. Flush mount all instruments, control devices, and similar equipment shown or required to be
located on the face of the panels with no mounting screws or bolts protruding through the panel
face beyond the covering area of the escutcheon.
E. Cleanly make cutouts for instruments in the manufacturer's shop. If a cutout is required for the
fixed-mounted instruments, neatly work the cutout and trim in a flat black finish molded plastic
material similar to the normal instrument escutcheons.
2.03 ENCLOSURES
A. General:
1. Comply with the requirements of ANSI/NEMA ICS-6.
2. Panel doors:
a. Conceal hinges or piano hinges as applicable.
b. Open at least 110 degrees.
c. Provide each main door with a 3-point latching mechanism having roller latching at top
and bottom and a vault-type-operating handle.
d. Provide steel doors with turned edges and brace for rigidity.
3. Provide a 1/8-inch thick neoprene gasket on the panel frame to give the door a firm closure
against the panel.
4. Provide mounting pans on the rear inner wall of the panel and also on the inner sides if any
devices are to be located there.
B. Panel Classification: Unless otherwise indicated:
1. Indoor enclosures: NEMA 12.
2. Outdoor enclosures or in corrosive areas: NEMA 4X, nonmetallic.
3. Class I, Division 1 or Division 2 areas are to meet the NEC requirement for that area.
C. Size:
1. Minimum enclosure area: Unless otherwise indicated, height by width, twice the sum of the
area of the individual components mounted on the back panel.
2. Enclosure depth: Depends on the type of components used, but not less than 6 inches.
D. Finish and Color: In accordance with Section 16000.
E. Mounting:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide the enclosures with provisions for wall mounting.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16176 - 2
C00822C13
2.04 PANEL WIRING
A. Internal Wiring:
1. Single conductor 90 degree C "XHHW-2" wire with wire size in accordance with NFPA 70.
2. Wireways:
a. Interconnect major groups of devices mounted within the panel with wireways.
b. The wireways may be EMT, flexible metal conduit for runs less than 3 feet or 2-1/2 by 21/2-inch or 4-inch by 4-inch steel wireways.
c. Provide PVC slotted-side panel wiring duct adjacent to relays.
d. PVC slotted side panel wiring duct may also be used for control wire.
e. Arrange the duct in horizontal configurations to pass near all relays and devices being fed
from the duct.
f. Header ducts: In general, steel wireways as specified above.
3. Provide panel wiring with stranded cross-linked polyethylene fire-resistant insulation and fit
with pressure-type connectors at all terminations.
4. Provide milliampere and millivolt control and instrument signal wiring with stranded, pairshielded polyvinylchloride insulated conductors as specified in Section 16120.
5. Run control and instrument signal wiring separately from the alternating current circuits,
unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
6. Neatly tie all wiring in position with nylon cable ties.
7. Feed instruments with portable cord connections through the instrument panel plug strip
located near the top of the panel directly above the instruments. Use only the specified type
of miniature locking plugs and receptacles for this purpose. These instrument supply cords
are the only panel wiring which may hang free.
8. Color code internal wiring as follows:
Type
Color
Power (120V AC)
Black
Neutral
White
Control
Red
Foreign voltage
Yellow
DC
Blue
Ground
Green
B. Wire Markers:
1. Provide in accordance with Section 16000.
C. Wiring Methods:
1. Comply with UL 508.
2. Provide plastic wireway with covers to route groups of wires.
3. Provide plastic spiral wrap for exposed wires.
4. Enclose wires that cross door hinge in plastic spiral wrap.
2.05 INSTRUMENT TUBING
A. Bundle all instrument tubing neatly with plastic cable ties or in tubing clips at intervals not
exceeding 18 inches.
B. Neatly lay tubing taken out of bundles along the panel to the point where it bends out to feed the
instrument connection.
C. Lay out tubing in parallel, rather than twisted, runs prior to bundling.
D. Color coded tubing is required.
2.06 CONTROL DEVICES
A. Provide in accordance with Section 16175.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16176 - 3
C00822C13
2.07 INDICATING LIGHTS (LIGHT EMITTING DIODES)
A. All, per the following:
Color
Red
Green
White or clear
Amber (yellow)
Function
Run, open valve
Ready, closed valve
Normal condition
Automatic
Example
Equipment operating, motor running
Equipment ready, end of cycle
Control power on, status OK
Equipment control in automatic position
B. Indicating lights per Section 16175.
2.08 ALARM AND MALFUNCTION DETECTION
A. Provide devices which are used to directly detect or signal alarm or malfunction conditions with
an external manual reset.
B. Provide all devices or relays that are required to provide an external indication of malfunction, or
status to a remote system, with an isolated dry NEMA Form C contact in addition to any contacts
required for use by the internal control system.
C. If the device contact is required for internal equipment control as well as to signal alarm or
malfunction conditions, then the manufacturer may make the reset function a part of the
manufacturer's equipment master shutdown system. However, show each source of shutdown
by local trouble lights which are manually reset at the equipment control panel.
D. Alarm or malfunction output contacts to open and remain open until manually reset when
equipment is shut down due to malfunction.
E. Trouble contacts not to indicate abnormal conditions when the equipment has been manually
shut down.
F. Initiate alarm and malfunction signals by a contact opening.
2.09 DEVICES WITH MOTOR STARTERS AND CONTACTORS
A. Equipment provided with control devices having motor starters or contactors, shall comply with
the following additional requirements:
1. Disconnect switches:
a. Provide equipment with a disconnect switch and switch padlock hasp in accordance with
WAC 296-24.
b. Disconnect: Horsepower rated disconnect switch or molded case circuit breaker, except
that a manual motor starter may be used for drives less than 2 kVA.
c. Provide horsepower rated disconnect switches for equipment 2 kVA or greater with UL
Class RK1 fuses.
d. Circuit breaker interrupting ratings: Unless otherwise indicated, 22,000 symmetrical
amperes for service at 240V or below and 32,000 symmetrical amperes for service above
240V.
e. When the disconnecting device is not a circuit breaker or fused disconnect, provide
adequate overcurrent and short circuit protection for the circuit feeding the disconnecting
device.
2. Overload protection: Provide protection for full motor running overload in ungrounded
conductors for motors.
3. Overload relay contacts:
a. Do not connect overload relay contacts in the line having provision for grounding.
b. Provide grounding connections in the unfused side of control circuits and connect.
4. Power:
a. Supply power at one voltage as shown or specified.
b. Derive additional voltage requirements, such as 120V control power, from transformers
provided internal to the control device as required.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16176 - 4
C00822C13
c.
Rate each control power transformer at least 150 percent of the calculated maximum
load it serves.
2.10 ANALOG INSTRUMENTATION
A. Equipment required to provide analog signals to the process control system specified in Division
17 to provide such signals as an isolated (ungrounded), 4-20 mA DC signal, linearly proportioned
to the value of the measured variable.
B. Equipment required to accept analog command signals from the process control system specified
in Division 17 to accept externally powered 4-20 mA DC signals. The equipment's input terminals
for command signals to be ungrounded and present not more than 250 ohms of resistance to the
command signal.
2.11 TERMINAL BLOCKS
A. Rated 20 amperes.
B. Channel-mounted tubular screw type with pressure plate.
C. Mount assembly on channel standoffs.
D. Provide 15 percent spare terminals available for future use.
2.12 SPACE HEATER AND THERMOSTAT
A. Provide a space heater and thermostat near the bottom of each panel section and for each 3 feet
of length on large panels.
B. Space Heater:
1. Rated 240 volts, 200 watts, but operated at 120 volts (50 watts).
2. Mount on porcelain standoff insulators at least 1/2 inch from the supporting surface.
3. Connect the heater to a control transformer furnished with the panel.
4. Provide an expanded metal guard to completely cover the heater and to allow free air
movement.
5. Acceptable manufacturer:
a. Chromalox Type PT-AC-1.
b. Electromode.
c. Or Approved Equal.
C. Thermostat:
1. Mount at mid panel height.
2. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Fenwall Cat. No. 30,000-0.
b. Honeywell.
c. Or Approved Equal with standoff and Type 62 mounting bracket.
2.13 LABELING AND NAMEPLATES
A. Labeling:
1. Label local control panel components to match the description on the elementary diagram.
Label internal components of the local control panel on the back side of the door with the
same description used on the front side.
2. Permanently mark label on or near each component. Machine embossed, adhesive backed
nameplates shall identify the tag number of equipment inside cabinets.
B. Nameplates: Identify external door-mounted components and the local control panel description
with plastic nameplates in accordance with Section 16000.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16176 - 5
C00822C13
2.14 GROUNDING
A. Ground all neutrals to the mounting plate using a copper bus or grounding lug. Use a grounding
lug for a size No. 2 AWG bare copper conductor to ground the panel to the plant's grounding
system.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Alternating Current Control Circuits:
1. 120 volts or less and grounded.
2. Connect one terminal of each load device to the grounded conductor.
3. Place control contacts, including overload device contacts, in the ungrounded side of the
circuit.
B. Use thermal overload relays in ungrounded conductors supplying a motor.
C. Ground the panel to the plant grounding system shown on the Drawings.
D. Provide conduit, wiring or mounting of devices not shown on the electrical or instrumentation
Drawings, but required for a complete and operable system.
3.02 ASSEMBLY
A. Conform to the requirements of UL 508.
B. Test the functional operation of the local control panel prior to shipment.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install all wiring and tubing crossing hinges in a manner that will prevent chafing.
B. Securely clamp bundles of similar conductors to the door and to the panel, and run the bundles
parallel to the hinge for at least 12 inches.
C. Use spiral nylon cable wrap in the hinge section of the bundle to fully protect the conductors or
tubing against chafing.
3.04 GROUNDING
A. Bond hinged or sliding pans, racks, and drawers to a ground bus by means of tinned-copper
woven flat braid having a rating of at least 50 amperes.
B. Ground Bus: 1/4 inch by 1 inch minimum of suitable length for all conductor terminations and
connected to the motor control center or station ground bus with No. 2 AWG copper, green
insulated cable for all freestanding panels.
C. The ground connection to the central ground bus may be run with other cables in an appropriate
conduit in the case of small wall-mounted panels.
D. Ground Connection: Not less than No. 10 AWG or as shown.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16176 - 6
C00822C13
SECTION 16250
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies a low voltage automatic transfer switch having the ratings, features or
accessories, and enclosure as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Equipment List:
EQUIPMENT
Automatic Transfer Switch
EQUIPMENT NO.
ATS 851 101
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
documents. These references are part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of
conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the
requirements of this Section shall prevail.
Title
Reference
NEMA ICS 4
Application Guide for Terminal Blocks
UL 1008
Transfer Switch Equipment
ASHRAE
Fundamentals Reference Manual
B. Qualifications:
1. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a
minimum of five similar and successful installations.
C. Regulatory Requirements:
1. The transfer switch shall bear the UL label.
2. A certificate of compliance with UL 1008 shall be submitted for the transfer switch to be
supplied. The certificate is not required if the manufacturer's published data submitted and
approved reflect a UL 1008 listing. Proof of UL 1008 listing does not relieve the Contractor of
compliance with other provisions of this Specification.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Qualifications.
1. An acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating
compliance with this requirement.
C. Product Data.
D. Provide the following information:
1. Master drawing index.
2. Dimensioned outline drawing with clearance requirements.
3. Schematic diagram.
4. Component list.
5. Conduit entry and exit locations.
6. Complete wiring, panel elementary and process/instrument diagrams.
7. Seismic certification and equipment anchorage details.
8. Assembly ratings including:
a. Short circuit rating.
b. Voltage.
c. Interrupting current.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16250 - 1
C00822C13
d. Continuous current.
9. Certified production test reports.
10. Installation information.
E. Manufacturers catalog data indicating features of fabrication and information on control features
and components.
F. Copies of the following information per Section 01730:
1. Product descriptive brochures for information.
2. Final as-built drawings.
3. Wiring diagrams.
4. Certified production test reports.
5. Installation information.
G. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals per Section 01730. The manual shall include the
following information:
1. Instruction books and leaflets.
2. Recommended spare parts list.
3. Drawings and information required by this Section.
H. Certificate of compliance with UL 1008.
I.
Factory test results.
J.
Performance test results.
1.04 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Indoor location at South Magnolia CSO Control Facility.
B. Ambient temperature and relative humidity as found in the latest ASHRAE Fundamentals
Reference Manual for Puget Sound Area.
C. Elevation: Approximately 20 feet above sea level.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. One
copy of the instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
A. ASCO.
B. GE Zenith.
C. Or Approved Equal.
2.02 RATINGS
A. Automatically transfer its load circuit to a standby alternate power supply upon failure of its
normal source and return the load to the normal source when it again becomes available.
B. External pilot lights shall indicate the availability of each source as well as breakers in a tripped or
disconnected position.
C. Shall provide complete protection with field adjustable solid-state voltage sensing logic to monitor
each phase of the normal power supply.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16250 - 2
C00822C13
D. The close differential adjustment shall be factory set to drop out when the monitored voltage
drops below 70 percent of normal and initiate load transfer when the alternate stand-by source
becomes available. Upon restoration of the normal source to a pickup level of 90 percent, the
logic shall initiate automatic retransfer of the load circuits to the normal source.
E. The ATS shall be 100 percent equipment rated for continuous duty and shall conform to the
applicable requirements of UL 1008 for standby system total load.
F. All pilot devices and relays shall be of the industrial type with self-cleaning contacts and rated 10
amperes.
G. Fully rated to protect all types of loads, inductive and resistive, from loss of continuity of power
without derating, either open or enclosed.
H. Shall have a minimum 60 cycle withstand rating of 65 kA.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. The automatic transfer switch (ATS) and components shall be designed, manufactured, and
tested in accordance with the current applicable standards of UL and NEMA.
B. Consist of completely enclosed contact assemblies and a separate control logic panel. The
contact assemblies shall be operated by a non-fused motor operator or stored energy mechanism
and be energized only momentarily during transfer, providing inherently double throw switching
action. Control power for all transfer operations shall be derived from the line side of the source
to which the load is being transferred.
C. Capable of being operated manually under full load conditions.
D. Manual operation shall be accomplished via a permanently affixed manual operator or integrally
mounted pushbutton operators located on the face of the contact assemblies. Removable
manual operating handles and handles that move in the event that electrical operators should
suddenly become energized while performing a manual transfer operation are not acceptable.
E. The manual operator shall provide the same contact-to-contact transfer time as provided under
normal automatic operation to prevent possible flashovers from switching the main contacts
slowly. In addition, provisions shall be made to allow disengagement of the electrical operator
during manual operation.
F. Positively interlocked both mechanically and electrically to prevent simultaneous closing of both
sources under either automatic or manual operation. Main contacts shall be mechanically locked
in position in both normal and emergency alternate power source positions. A neutral position
delay shall be possible utilized under normal electrical operation. unless a delayed transition
accessory. The transfer switch shall have a manual neutral position for load circuit maintenance.
A transfer switch position indicator shall be visible from the front of the switch to show to which
source the transfer switch is connected.
G. An external key-operated selector switch shall be provided to disconnect the power supplies.
External pilot lights shall indicate the availability of each source.
H. Inspection and replacement of all separate arcing contacts (moving and stationary) shall be
possible from the front of the transfer switch.
I.
A solid-state sensing and control logic panel shall be separately mounted from the power
switching portion of the transfer switch. The two sections shall be connected by control cables
with plug-in connectors. The control section shall be capable of being disconnected from the
power section for maintenance purposes.
J.
The logic circuit shall utilize solid-state components mounted on printed circuit boards to
accomplish functions such as timing, time delays, and voltage and frequency monitoring. LEDs
shall be furnished to indicate the operation of each solid-state function. Construction shall be
such that functions are individually replaceable without requiring replacement of the complete
solid-state package.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16250 - 3
C00822C13
K. Plug-in modifications shall be available for field installation without voiding the UL label.
L. Provide provision for front cables connection.
M. Terminals shall be solderless pressure type.
2.04 WIRING/TERMINATIONS
A. Terminal blocks shall conform to NEMA ICS 4.
B. Terminal facilities shall be arranged for entrance of external conductors from the top or bottom of
the enclosure.
C. The main transfer switch terminals shall be suitable for the termination of conductors indicated on
the Drawings.
D. Terminal lugs shall be CU-AL, UL-listed.
2.05 METERING
A. The load source shall be provided with a voltmeter, ammeter, frequency meter, and kilowatt (KW)
meter as specified in Section 16440. These meters shall be provided with a phase-select switch.
B. Digital metering shall also be provided, 0.5% accuracy, to indicate generator RMS voltage and
current, frequency, output current, output KW, KW hours, and power factor.
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. The following accessories shall be provided:
1. Time delay normal to standby, adjustable from 0.2 to 30 minutes.
2. Time delay standby to normal, adjustable from 0.2 to 30 minutes.
3. Green pilot light to indicate switch in Utility Source position and red pilot light to indicate
switch in Standby Source position.
4. White pilot lights marked "Utility Source" and "Standby Source" to indicate that respective
source voltages shall be made available.
5. Tripped position indicating lights for both sources.
6. Relay auxiliary contacts (2 NO and 2 NC) to indicate transfer switch position and the
availability of each source.
7. Hand-held kit for field test and calibration of all plug-in timing and monitoring cards, as well as
the output relays from the solid-state logic.
8. Time delay engine start, adjustable from 0.2 to 30 minutes.
9. Time delay engine cool off, adjustable from 0.2 to 30 minutes.
10. Engine start contact.
11. Frequency/voltage relay for emergency/standby source, frequency adjustable from 45 to 60
Hz and voltage fixed at 90 percent pickup, 70 percent dropout.
12. Delayed transition time delay, adjustable from 0 to 120 seconds, to allow disconnection of the
load during transfer in either direction to prevent excessive inrush currents due to out-ofphase switching of large inductive loads.
13. Four-position selector switch permitting four modes of transfer switch operation:
a. Test: simulates normal power outage.
b. Auto: standard automatic operation.
c. OFF: de-energizes control relays and opens the engine start circuit for maintenance
purposes.
d. Engine Start: retains transfer switch in normal position and initiates a testing of the
engine start circuit. Furnish white pilot light for "OFF" indication.
14. Where indicated on the Drawings, short circuit shutdown alarm contact.
15. Pickup relays:
a. 3-phase voltage pickup relay, adjustable 85 to 100 percent.
b. Frequency pickup relay (standby source only), adjustable 90 to 100 percent.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16250 - 4
C00822C13
16. Time delay relay:
a. Normal to standby, adjustable from zero to 360 seconds.
b. Standby to normal, adjustable from 0.2 to 30 minutes.
17. Trip latch relay.
18. Auto return to normal source defeat selector switch.
19. Where indicated on the Drawings, over-current trip red indicating lights.
20. Neutral position time delay, adjustable from 0 to 120 seconds.
21. Six dry contacts for remote monitoring to indicate the following:
a. Transfer switch in normal position.
b. Transfer switch in standby position.
c. Normal source power available.
d. Standby source power available.
e. Transfer switch in “not in auto”.
f. ATS Fault.
22. Contacts:
a. Provide two pre-transfer signal contacts adjustable 0 to 120 seconds to permit load
shedding.
b. Contacts shall be closed when switch is in “utility position,” and shall open before transfer
is made to the generator.
c. Provide an ATS Fault alarm contact. Provide one set of form “C” contacts.
23. Engine generator initiate contact.
B. A transfer switch position indicator shall be visible from the front of the switch to show to which
source the transfer switch is connected.
C. A provision for load bank feeder breakers for testing of the engine generator unit shall be
provided.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 FACTORY TESTING
A. The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this
Section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of UL and NEMA standards.
1. Insulation check to ensure the integrity of insulation and continuity of the entire system.
2. Visual inspection to ensure that the switch matches the Specification requirements and to
verify that the fit and finish meet quality standards.
3. Mechanical tests to verify that the switch's power sections are free of mechanical hindrances.
4. Electrical tests to verify the complete electrical operation of the switch and to set up time
delays and voltage sensing settings of the logic.
5. Provide three certified copies of factory test reports.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and the Drawings.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. After the completion of installation, the ATS shall be individually tested in the presence of the
Project Representative to ensure that the ATS and associated controls are properly installed,
connected, and operate as indicated and as required.
B. Sequence of Operation:
1. Upon loss of phase-to-phase voltage of the normal source to 70 percent of nominal, and after
a time delay adjustable from 1 to 60 seconds to override momentary dips and/or outages, a
10 ampere, 30VDC contact shall close to initiate starting of the emergency or standby source
power plant. Transfer to the alternate source shall take place immediately upon attainment of
90 percent of rated voltage and frequency of that source.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16250 - 5
C00822C13
2. When the normal source has been restored to 90 percent of rated voltage, and after a time
delay, adjustable from 0.5 to 32 minutes (to ensure the integrity of the normal power source),
the load shall be retransferred to the normal source.
3. A time delay, adjustable from 0.5 to 32 minutes, shall delay shutdown of the emergency or
standby power source after retransfer to allow the generator to run unloaded for cool-down,
after which the generator shall be automatically shut down.
4. If the emergency or standby power fails while carrying the load, transfer to the normal power
supply shall be made instantaneously upon restoration of the normal source to satisfactory
conditions.
3.04 FIELD ADJUSTMENTS
A. Adjust all timing and voltage settings of the transfer switch as necessary for proper operation of
the unit.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, adjust the time delay relays to the following values:
1. Normal to standby time delay: 2 seconds.
2. Engine warm-up: 30 seconds.
3. Neutral position dwell: 30 seconds.
4. Emergency/standby to normal time delay: 30 minutes.
5. Engine cool-down: 10 minutes.
6. Pre-transfer signal: 10 seconds.
3.05 PERFORMANCE TEST
A. Test Plan:
1. Submit no later than 30 days prior to the test.
2. Test shall demonstrate the correct function of the ATS system.
3. Include in the test simulation of the removal of power to prove proper operation of
annunciator and the capability to transfer power without operator assistance.
B. Automatic Transfer Switch to remain operational (energized) for a period of 30 days without
malfunction. If there is a malfunction correct problem and restart the 30 day operational period
over without malfunction, repeat until successful.
C. If there is a failure of the performance test repair or replace the Automatic Transfer Switch and
restart testing.
D. Field test the ATS in accordance with Section 16030.
E. Operational Testing of ATS: per Section 01660.
3.06 TRAINING
A. Provide coordinated training course, approved by the Project Representative, to instruct ten
County personnel on automatic transfer switches. The training will be conducted at the West
Point Treatment Plant, coordinate with the Project Representative for room location. The training
shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Conduct four hours of training on operation and maintenance of the automatic transfer
switches specific to the supplied automatic transfer switches.
B. Training may be split into two identical course covering the above material as directed by the
Project Representative
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16250 - 6
C00822C13
SECTION 16400
SERVICE AND METERING
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the extension of Seattle City Light’s (SCL) ductbank, vaults and handholes,
new electrical services and service entrance equipment.
B. This Section includes references to Seattle City Light Construction Standards. References to
SCL Construction Standards define requirements for this Section. References to Engineer in the
SCL Construction Standards shall mean Project Representative.
C. Equipment List:
EQUIPMENT
Service Entrance Breaker
CT Cabinet
Utility Meter
EQUIPMENT NO.
BKR 851 103
CAB 851 101
MET 851 101
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
documents. These references are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of
conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail.
Reference
Title
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code
SCL Construction
Seattle City Light Construction Guidelines
Standards
SCL Material
Seattle City Light Material Standards
Standards
B. Qualifications: Not used.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
1. Prior to submitting to the Project Representative, submit product, equipment and construction
details (such as size, mounting height, location of equipment, etc.) to the serving Utility for
verification of compliance to the Utility’s requirements.
2. Integrate the requirements of this Section with submittals of Section 02200.
3. Integrate the requirements of this Section with submittals of Section 03400.
B. Catalog data in accordance with the Submittals requirements per Section 16000. Show material
information and confirm compliance with these specifications. Submittals shall include the following information:
1. Meter enclosure.
2. Current Transformer (CT) enclosure.
3. Service Entrance Disconnect.
4. Letter of acceptance of material from Utility.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16400 - 1
C00822C13
1.04 DEFINITION
A. SCL: The electrical utility providing service to this facility is Seattle City Light (SCL).
1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with SCL standards and requirements.
B. Listed and labeled by UL as "Suitable for Use as Service Equipment" as required by the NEC.
1.06 SCHEDULING WORK WITH SCL
A. Be fully responsible for scheduling and coordination with SCL. Coordinate and schedule the following:
1. Power outages.
2. Power services.
3. SCL inspections for power distribution extension.
4. SCL inspections for service to Storage Tank Facility.
1.07 CONTRACTOR/SCL INTERFACE RESPONSIBILITIES
A. The County has submitted a new service application for the Storage Facility. The County will pay
for charges associated with this application as it pertains to SCL’s work and responsibility.
B. Coordinate the sequence of installation with SCL.
C. SCL will provide the following services and material:
1. Revenue Meter.
2. Revenue Metering CTs and CT wiring termination.
3. Service Transformer.
4. Terminations at the transformer.
5. Primary cable and installation.
6. Service conductors between the transformer and handhole.
D. Confirm SCL services prior to construction.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 METER ENCLOSURE
A. Meter enclosure shall meet SCL Construction Standards . Installation shall be in vandal proof
NEMA 3R enclosure with a lockable hinged door.
B. Coordinate with SCL on type of metering required.
C. Meet SCL Requirements for Electrical Service Connection.
2.02 CURRENT TRANSFORMER (CT) ENCLOSURE
A. Metering CT enclosure shall meet SCL Requirements for Electrical Service Connection.
B. Located as shown on the Drawings.
2.03 CIRCUIT BREAKER
A. Circuit breaker per section 16175.
B. Enclosure NEMA 1.
C. Circuit breaker shall additionally be rated for service entrance.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16400 - 2
C00822C13
2.04 CONDUITS
A. Conduits shall meet the requirements of SCL’s Construction Standards and Section 16110.
B. Bends shall be rigid galvanized steel per SCL Material Standard 7050.05.
2.05 UTILITY VAULTS AND HANDHOLES
A. Per Section 03400.
2.06 BACKFILL AND CONCRETE ENCASEMENT
A. Concrete encasement of conduits shall meet the requirements of SCL’s Construction Guideline
U2-11.
B. Backfill over concrete encased conduits per Section 02200.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 GROUND ELECTRODE SYSTEM
A. The grounded conductor and ground bus shall be connected to the grounding electrode system
via the grounding electrode conductor as indicated on system One-Line Diagram.
B. Bonded as indicated in Article 250 of the National Electrical Code.
C. Grounding installed per SCL Construction Standard U2-15.1 and U2-14.2.
3.02 UTILITY CONDUITS
A. Install per of SCL’s Construction Standard U2-10 and U12-1.4 and Section 16110.
B. Install end bells flushed with interior of precast concrete vaults on conduits entering vault. Grout
inside and outside of vault per SCL Construction Guideline U2-11.
3.03 UTILITY VAULTS AND HANDHOLES
A. Per Section 03400.
3.04 BACKFILL AND CONCRETE ENCASEMENT
A. Concrete encasement of conduits, install per SCL’s Construction Guideline U2-11.
B. Backfill over concrete encased conduits per Section 02200.
3.05 UNDERGROUND SECONDARY SERVICE FROM TERMINATION HANDHOLE
A. Install in accordance with Sections 16000 and 16110.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16400 - 3
C00822C13
SECTION 16421
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS) SYSTEM
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies transient voltage surge suppression (TVSS) system(s).
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
documents. These references are part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of
conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the
requirements of this Section shall prevail.
Reference
Title
ANSI/IEEE C62.41
Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC
Power Circuits
MIL STD 220A
Method of Insertion Loss Measurement
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code (NEC)
NFPA 78`
Safety Code for the Protection of Life and Property Against
Lightening
UL 1449
Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors
B. Qualifications: Not Used.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Product Data.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 TVSS SYSTEM
A. Provided by the panelboard supplier specified in Section 16470 or Motor Control Center supplier
in Section 16920 for the respective equipment.
B. An integrally mounted TVSS system shall be included for the protection of all AC circuits from the
effects of lightning induced currents, substation switching transients, and internally generated
transients resulting from inductive and capacitive load switching.
C. Modular with the following features:
1. Suppression element: Each to be metal oxide varistor (MOV) based and have each phase
fused with 200 kAIC surge rated fuses.
2. Surge current diversion paths:
a. Provided between each phase conductor and neutral, between each phase conductor
and ground and between the neutral conductor and ground.
b. For delta configured systems: Having components connected between each phase
conductor and between each phase conductor and ground. Copper bus bars
incorporated for the surge current path.
c. Do not use plug in connections and round wire in the surge current path.
d. Directly connected to the bus bars of the panelboard or Motor Control Center to provide a
low impedance surge current path.
3. Provide UL-approved disconnect switch as a means of disconnect.
4. Event surge counter:
a. Mounted on the dead front of the panelboard.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16421 - 1
C00822C13
b. Containing battery to retain memory during power outages.
c. Equipped with a manual reset push button.
5. Equip with visual and audible diagnostic monitoring:
a. Indicating lights: To provide full-time monitoring of each phase of the surge current
diversion module.
b. Alarm: Activates upon a fault condition and has acknowledge, test, and reset push
buttons.
c. C-Form dry contacts: One set which change state during an alarm condition to be
provided.
d. Alarm contacts: Remain in alarm condition until the fault has cleared and the alarm has
been manually reset.
D. Meets or exceeds the following criteria:
1. Maximum surge current capability of 250k AIC per phase.
2. Capable of surviving 5,000 ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C3 transients without failure or
degradation of UL 1449 Suppression Voltage Rating by more than 10 percent.
3. Designed to withstand a continuous operating voltage of not less than 115 percent of nominal
RMS voltage.
4. Has a minimum EMI/RFI filtering of -50dB at 100kHz with an insertion ratio of 50:1 using MIL
STD 220A methodology.
5. Has a response time no greater than 1/2 nanosecond for any of the individual protection
modes.
6. Recognized Component Suppression Voltage Ratings: Not to exceeding the requirements of
UL 1449.
7. Category C3 Let Through Voltages: Not exceeding the requirements of ANSI/IEEE C62.41.
E. Acceptable Manufacturer:
1. Siemens Energy and Automation, Inc: TPS Series.
2. Cutler Hammer: CPS Series.
3. Square D: Surgebreaker Series.
4. Or Approved Equal.
PART 3
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16421 - 2
C00822C13
SECTION 16422
LIGHTNING AND SURGE ARRESTERS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies surge arresters used for the protection of electrical power equipment against
surges caused by lightning or switching.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the following
documents. They are part of this Section. In case of conflict between the requirements of this
Section and the listed documents, the Contractor shall point out the conflict to the Project
Representative; lacking a definitive answer otherwise, the requirements of the Contract
Specifications shall prevail.
Reference
Title
ANSI C62.1
Surge Arresters for AC Power Circuits
NEMA LA 1
Surge Arresters
B. Factory Tests: The following tests shall be made on each arrester in conformance with ANSI
C62.1:
1. Power-frequency spark-over.
2. Radio influence voltage.
3. Sealing.
C. Shipment and Storage: Section 11000.
D. Qualifications: Not used.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Manufacturer's product data.
C. The manufacturer shall provide copies of design test data on the arresters provided showing that
the arresters are in compliance with ANSI C62.1.
D. Certified design test data and individual test data for arresters.
E. Applicable operation and maintenance information items as specified in Section 01730.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS/PRODUCTS
A. The surge arresters shall be valve-type designed to protect electrical power distribution equipment
against overvoltages due to surges from lightning or switching. The arresters shall comply with
ANSI C62.1 and NEMA LA 1.
B. Surge arresters suppliers:
1. ABB.
2. Eaton/Cutler Hammer.
3. Square D.
4. Or Approved Equal.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16422 - 1
C00822C13
2.02 CLASSIFICATION OF ARRESTERS
A. General: Surge arresters are classified according to prescribed ANSI test requirements.
B. Station Class: Where specified, station class arresters shall be provided on electrical distribution
power equipment rated above 10,000 kVA unless otherwise specified.
C. Intermediate Class: Where specified, intermediate class arresters shall be provided on electrical
power distribution equipment rated 10,000 kVA and below unless otherwise specified.
D. Distribution Class: Where specified, distribution class arresters shall be provided on electrical
power distribution equipment.
2.03 RATING
A. The surge arresters shall be rated for the voltage class to which they are applied.
2.04 MOUNTING
A. The manufacturer shall provide the necessary mounting hardware.
2.05 NAMEPLATES
A. Nameplates shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of Section 16000.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Unless otherwise specified, the surge arresters shall be mounted next to the equipment terminals.
The terminations shall be torqued as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.02 TESTING
A. In addition to any testing herein, perform all testing for this product or system consistent with the
requirements of Sections 01660 and 16030, the applicable codes, and the manufacturers' current
quality assurance program.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16422 - 2
C00822C13
SECTION 16431
SHORT CIRCUIT AND COORDINATION REPORT
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the short circuit and coordination study for all voltage levels of the electrical
power system. The “electrical power system” starts at the line side of the Service Entrance circuit
breaker and generator. Refer to single-line diagram of this Contract for details of the substation.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
documents. These references are part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of
conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the
requirements of this Section shall prevail.
Reference
Title
IEEE 141
Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution for
Industrial Plants
IEEE 242
Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of
Industrial and Commercial Power Systems
B. Qualifications: Not Used.
C. Preparations:
1. Prepared by the manufacturer of the switchboard service entrance circuit breaker, motor
control center, or by an electrical testing service which is regularly engaged in power system
studies.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Certified short circuit report and coordination study.
C. Qualifications of firm preparing Short Circuit and Coordination Report.
D. Electronic files of short circuit report and coordination study.
1.04 SHORT CIRCUIT REPORT
A. Prepare a report summarizing the short circuit and coordination study and conclusions or
recommendations which may affect the integrity of the electric power distribution system.
B. As a minimum, include the following in the report:
1. Equipment manufacturer's information used to prepare the study.
2. Assumptions made during the study.
3. Short circuit calculations listing short circuit levels at each bus.
4. Evaluation of the electrical power system and the model numbers and settings of the
protective devices associated with the system.
5. Time-current curves including the instrument transformer ratios, model numbers of the
protective relays, and the relay settings associated with each breaker.
6. Comparison of short circuit duties of each bus to the interrupting capacity of the equipment
connected to that bus.
7. Calculations prepared, stamped, dated and signed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the
state of Washington.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16431 - 1
C00822C13
C. Submit the report 120 days before the service entrance circuit breaker and motor control center
are shipped to the Site.
1.05 SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY
A. One-line Diagram:
1. Location and function of each protective device in the system, such as relays, direct-acting
trips, fuses, etc.
2. Type designation, current rating, range or adjustment manufacturer's style and catalog
transformers.
3. Power, voltage ratings, impedance, primary and secondary connections of all transformers.
4. Nameplate ratings of all motors and generator with their subtransient reactances.
5. Transient reactances of generator and synchronous reactances of generator.
6. Sources of short circuit elements such as utility ties, generators, and induction motors.
7. All significant circuit elements such as transformers, cables, breakers, fuses, reactors, etc.
8. Standby as well as normal switching conditions.
B. Impedance Diagram:
1. Available MVA or impedance from the utility company.
2. Bus impedance.
3. Transformer and/or reactor impedances.
4. Cable impedances.
5. Equipment impedances.
6. System voltages.
7. Grounding scheme (resistance grounding, solid grounding or no grounding).
C. Calculations:
1. Determine the paths and situations where short circuit currents are the greatest. Assume
bolted faults and calculate the 3-phase and line-to-ground short circuits of each case.
2. Calculate the maximum and minimum ground-fault currents.
1.06 COORDINATION STUDY
A. Provide an evaluation of the electrical power system and the model numbers and settings of the
protective devices associated with the system.
B. As a minimum, include the following on 5-cycle, log-log graph paper:
1. Time-current curve for each protective relay or fuse showing graphically that the settings will
allow protection and selectively within Industry standards. Identify each curve and specify the
tap and time dial setting.
2. Time-current curves for each device to be positioned for maximum selectivity to minimize
system disturbances during fault clearing. Where selectivity cannot be achieved, notify the
Project Representative as to the cause.
3. Time-current curves and points for cable and equipment damage.
4. Circuit interrupting, device operating, and interrupting times.
5. Indicate maximum fault values on the graph.
6. Sketch of bus and breaker arrangement.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Perform the studies in accordance with IEEE Standards 141 and 242.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16431 - 2
C00822C13
B. Perform the studies using actual equipment data and the data from the same manufacturer of
protective relay devices as being provided by the switchgear manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16431 - 3
C00822C13
SECTION 16432
ARC FLASH REPORT
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the arc flash study and report for all voltage levels of the electrical power
system. The “electrical power system” starts at the line side of the Service Entrance circuit
breaker and generator. Arc flash study shall include the method and recommendation in
determining proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) and providing proper labeling of
equipment as specified in this Section.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
documents. These references are part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of
conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the
requirements of this Section shall prevail.
Title
Reference
IEEE 1584
IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations
NFPA 70
NFPA 70E
OSHA 29 CFR, Part 1910
Subchapter S
National Electric Code
Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee
Workplaces
Occupational Safety and Health Standards: Electrical
B. Qualifications: Not Used.
C. Preparation:
1. By the manufacturer of the switchboard, service entrance circuit breaker, motor control
center, or by an electrical testing service which is regularly engaged in power system studies.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Certified Arc Flash Report.
C. Arc flash warning labels.
D. Arc flash warning labels for generator circuit breakers.
E. Electronic files of arc flash calculations and report.
1.04 ARC FLASH REPORT
A. Prepare a report summarizing the arc flash study and conclusions and recommendations which
may affect the integrity of the electric power distribution system.
B. Calculations shall be prepared, stamped, dated and signed by a Professional Engineer licensed
in the state of Washington.
C. Perform arc flash calculations to determine the incident energy, arc flash boundary, and minimum
PPE requirements for locations throughout the power system.
D. Arc flash warning labels:
1. Produced and attached to the electrical equipment.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16432 - 1
C00822C13
2. Indicate approach boundaries, incident energy level, and the minimum PPE that is required
when servicing the equipment within the arc flash boundary.
E. As a minimum, include the following in the report:
1. Equipment manufacturer’s information used to prepare the study.
2. Assumptions made during the study.
3. Reduced copy of the one line drawing.
4. Arc flash evaluations summary spreadsheet as specified below in this Section.
5. Bus detail sheets as specified in this Section.
6. Arc flash warning labels printed in color on adhesive backed labels.
F. Submit report a minimum of 60 days before energizing electrical equipment.
1.05 ARC FLASH STUDY
A. Perform an arc flash hazard study after the short circuit and protective device coordination study
has been completed.
B. Coordinate with Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) for site-specific requirements.
C. For each major part of the electrical power system, determine the following:
1. Flash hazard protection boundary.
2. Limited approach boundary.
3. Restricted approach boundary.
4. Prohibited approach boundary.
5. Incident energy level.
6. PPE hazard/risk category.
7. Type of PPE required.
D. Produce arc flash warning labels as indicated in PART 3.
E. Produce bus detail sheets that list the items in Paragraph 1.05B and 1.05C.1 through 7 and the
following additional items:
1. Bus name.
2. Upstream protective device name, type, and settings.
3. Bus line to line voltage.
F. Produce an arc flash evaluation summary sheet listing the following additional items:
1. Bus name.
2. Upstream protective device name, type, settings.
3. Bus line to line voltage.
4. Bus bolted fault.
5. Protective device bolted fault current.
6. Arcing fault current.
7. Protective device trip/delay time.
8. Breaker opening time.
9. Solidly grounded column.
10. Equipment type.
11. Gap.
12. Arc flash boundary.
13. Working distance.
14. Incident energy.
15. Required protective fire rated clothing type and class.
G. Analyze the short circuit, protective device coordination, and arc flash calculations and highlight
any equipment that is determined to be underrated or causes an abnormally high incident energy
calculation. Propose approaches to reduce the energy levels.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16432 - 2
C00822C13
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Provide a current up-to-date short circuit and protective device coordination study. If one does
not exist, then perform a short circuit and protective device coordination study as specified in
Section 16431.
B. Perform the arc flash study in accordance with NFPA 70E, OSHA 29 CFR Part 1910 Subpart S,
and IEEE 1584 Standards.
C. Perform the studies using actual equipment data and the data from the same manufacturer of
protective relay devices as being provided by the switchgear equipment manufacturers.
D. Provide arc flash warning labels on equipment meeting standard ANSI Standard Z535.4 and as
approved by the Project Representative and the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
E. Labels: durable for location and in color with adhesive backs. Labels to include all of the
following:
1. WARNING - ARC FLASH HAZARD.
2. Date of Analysis.
3. Flash Hazard Category.
4. Incident Energy Level at 18 inches in cal per cm. sq.
5. Flash Hazard Boundary.
6. Personal Protection Equipment requirement within the Flash Hazard Boundary.
F. Provide a list of lockout and tagout devices that are compatible with the equipment.
G. Provide arc flash labels for all equipment identified in NEC Article 110. Additional labels shall be
provided for all enclosed feeder circuit breakers located at the generator, automatic transfer
switch, and load bank breaker panel.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16432 - 3
C00822C13
SECTION 16440
INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS, METERS, SWITCHES, AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies accessories for Motor Control Center (MCC) assemblies.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
documents. These references are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of
conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the
requirements of this Section shall prevail.
Reference
Title
ANSI C37.20
Standard for Metal-Enclosed Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breaker
Switchgear
ANSI/IEEE C39.1
Requirements for Electrical Analog Indicating Instruments
ANSI/IEEE C57.13
Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers
B. Qualifications: Not used.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer's product data indicating the general features and dimensions of devices.
2. Burden, accuracy class and ratio data for instrument transformers.
3. Applicable operation and maintenance items: See Section 01730.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS
A. Molded dry-type in accordance with ANSI/IEEE C57.13.
B. Volt-ampere rating suitable for carrying the specified load without overheating or exceeding the
permissible accuracy for the transformer.
C. Potential Transformers: ANSI accuracy class of 0.3, equipped with current limiting fuses.
D. Current Transformers: Provided with the specified ratios with accuracy’s conforming to ANSI
C37.20.
2.02 PANEL METERS
A. Indicating meters:
1. 4-1/2-inch square, semi-flush, mounted switchboard type.
2. Movement taut-band with an accuracy of plus or minus 1 percent of full scale.
3. Case: Black.
4. Scale: White with black markings with length of the scale greater than 7 inches over a
deflection angle of 250 degrees.
5. Manufactured in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI C39.1.
2.03 INSTRUMENT SWITCHES
A. Contact blocks and positions specified.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16440 - 1
C00822C13
B. Rotary-cam type and contacts with positive wiping action of silver-to-silver contact buttons.
C. Escutcheon plates and pistol-grip handles.
D. Voltmeter and ammeter switches shall have four positions with the escutcheon legend as follows:
1. Voltmeter:
OFF
1-2
2-3
3-1
2. Ammeter:
OFF
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
E. Acceptable Manufacturer:
1. General Electric, SBM.
2. Westinghouse, W-2.
3. Or Approved Equal.
2.04 INDICATING LIGHTS
A. Indicating Lights: LED type.
2.05 NAMEPLATES
A. Nameplates: See Section 16000.
2.06 IQ ANALYZER
A. Digital Line Meter Analyzer and Protection (MA&P) Device.
B. Equal to Schneider Electric version ION Meter having the features and functions specified below:
1. Direct reading metered or calculated values of the items listed below and shall auto range
between Units, kilo-units, and Mega-units for all metered values.
2. Capable of displaying multiple parameters at once, including two user configurable custom
screens displaying any seven of the parameters listed.
3. Indicator LED shall status for safety and troubleshooting purposes.
4. Time, date, software version and network address shall also be displayed.
5. Accuracies indicated below to be of read or calculated values.
a. AC Current (amperes) in A, B, and C phases, 3-Phase Average, Neutral (N) and Ground
(G). Accuracy +0.2% (provide neutral and ground current transformer).
b. AC Voltage (volts) for A-B, B-C and C-A, Phase Average, A-N, B-N and C-N, Average
Phase to N, and N to G. Accuracy +0.2%.
c. Real Power (watts), Reactive Power (vars), Apparent Power (VA) for each phase and
system. Accuracy +0.4%.
d. Real Energy (Whr), Reactive Energy (varhr), Apparent Energy (Vahr) for each phase and
system. Accuracy +0.4%. Forward/Reverse/Net indication shall be provided.
e. Frequency (hz). Accuracy +0.4%.
f. Demand values for System Current (amperes), System Real Power (watts), System
Reactive Power (vars) and System Apparent Power (VA).
g. Power Factor both Displacement (60-cycle fundamental watts to VA) and Apparent (total
watts to total vars including harmonics for A, B and C phases and system). Accuracy
+0.8%.
h. Current Percent Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) in A, B and C phases, and N.
i. Voltage percent THD in A-B, B-C, and C-A phases, and A-N, B-N, C-N.
j. K-Factor.
k. Transformer Derating Factor (CBEMA Factor).
l. Crest Factor.
C. Provide the following advanced analysis features:
1. Trend Analysis Screens displaying the minimum and maximum values for each metered
value, with all parameters time stamped to 1-second resolution.
2. Demand Analysis screens displaying current (phases A, B, C and Average) and power
(system real, reactive, and apparent, present demands and peak demands). Peak demands
shall display time and date, stamped to within 1-second resolution. Demand Window
Selection for metered demand values shall be selectable either as:
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16440 - 2
C00822C13
3.
4.
5.
6.
PART 3
a. A user selectable fixed window (programmable from 1 to 60 minutes).
b. Sliding window method with programmable 1- to 60-minute subintervals, for power (kW,
kvar, kVA) demand only.
c. Initiated from a synch pulse for power (kW, kvar, kVA) demand only.
d. Communication signal initiated from a Cutler-Hammer type Westinghouse IMPACC
network master computer.
Harmonic Analysis Screens shall be capable of being function key triggered to capture a
high-speed wave form of 2 cycles of data sampled at 128 samples per cycle, simultaneously
recording current in A, B and C phases, N, and G as well as all voltages A-B, B-C, and C-A
phases, A-N, B-N and C-N. Data captured shall include the magnitude or percent of the
fundamental and the direction of harmonic source (phase angle) for all odd and even
multiples of fundamentals from 2nd through the 50th.
Event Analysis Screens shall display data recorded for up to ten event conditions. The
initiation level of the declaration of an event condition shall be field programmable for all
measured parameters. For each event a description of the event, date, and time of event (1 second resolution) shall be displayed. In addition, a capture shall be made of all metered
values available and current and voltage distortion information harmonic.
Capable of transmitting all data at time of the event via communications to a personal
computer for creating and displaying wave forms.
Event Condition Levels: Capable of being triggered when the programmed threshold is
exceeded. All triggers shall have programmable time delays from 0.1 to 60 seconds except
voltage disturbance, which shall be programmable from 2 to 3600 cycles.
EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Install all accessories and devices per the Motor Control Center manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16440 - 3
C00822C13
SECTION 16450
GROUNDING SYSTEM
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the system for grounding electrical equipment, exposed nonenergized
metal surfaces of equipment, and metal structures.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
documents. These references are part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of
conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the
requirements of this Section shall prevail.
Reference
Title
IEEE 81
Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and
Earth
NEC
National Electrical Code Article 250 Grounding and Bonding
NFPA 70
National Electric Code (NEC)
B. Qualifications: Not Used.
C. Comply with requirements of NEC Article 250.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Product Data.
C. Grounding System Test Results.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 GROUND CABLE
A. Annealed bare copper, concentric stranded as specified. If cable sizes are not indicated, the
minimum sizes shall be as follows:
1. 15kV - 480V transformer: 250 MCM.
2. 15kV Load Interrupter: 4/0 AWG.
3. 480V switchgear: 4/0 AWG.
4. 480V MCC and switchboards: 2/0 AWG.
5. Lighting panels: 1/0 AWG.
6. Exposed metal: 2 AWG.
2.02 GROUND RODS
A. Copper covered steel, 3/4-inch diameter and ten feet long.
B. Rods shall have threaded type removable caps so that extension rods of same diameter and
length may be added where necessary.
2.03 COMPRESSION CONNECTORS
A. Cast copper.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16450 - 1
C00822C13
B. Acceptable Manufacturer:
1. Thomas and Betts.
2. Burndy.
3. Or Approved Equal.
2.04 BOLTED CONNECTORS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer:
1. Burndy.
2. O. Z. Gedney.
3. Or Approved Equal.
2.05 EXOTHERMIC CONNECTORS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer:
1. Thermoweld.
2. Cadweld.
3. Or Approved Equal.
2.06 GROUNDING PLATE – CAST IN CONCRETE
A. Cast copper plate for use with future two-hole lug connection. Flush mounted in concrete.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Burndy.
2. Erico.
3. Or Approved Equal.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Make embedded and buried ground connections by compression connectors utilizing diamond or
hexagon dies. Use a hand compression tool for wire sizes 2/0 AWG and smaller and a hydraulic
pump and compression head for wire sizes larger than 2/0 AWG.
B. Tools and dies:
1. Approved for purpose used.
2. Dimple compressions are not acceptable.
C. Prepare compression connections in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
D. Unless otherwise indicated, make exposed ground connections to equipment by bolted clamps.
E. Do not use solder in any part of the ground circuits.
F. Cables:
1. Securely attach embedded ground cables and fittings to concrete reinforcing steel with tie
wires and prevented from displacement during concrete placement.
2. As each part of the grounding system below finished grade is completed, notify the Project
Representative a minimum of four hours prior to backfilling.
G. Extensions:
1. Extend grounding conductors that are extended beyond concrete surfaces for equipment
connection a sufficient length to reach the final connection point without splicing.
2. Minimum extensions: 3 feet.
H. Conductors:
1. Locate grounding conductors that project from a concrete surface as close as possible to a
corner of the equipment pad, protected by conduit, or terminated in a flush grounding plate.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16450 - 2
C00822C13
2. Terminate grounding conductors for future equipment using a two-hole copper flush mounted
grounding plate.
3. Support exposed grounding conductors by non-corrosive metallic hardware at 4-foot intervals
or less.
4. Ground conductors, except signal conductor shields entering enclosures:
a. Bonded together to the enclosure if it is metallic and to metallic raceways within or
terminating at the enclosure.
5. Grounding conductor shall not be used as a system neutral.
I.
Use compression-type lugs in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
J.
Directly connect lightning arresters to the ground system using copper conductors, sized as
specified.
K. Metallic sheaths or shields of shielded power cable:
1. Terminated by a copper grounding strip provided with cable connection for connection to the
grounding system.
L. Prior to making ground connections or bonds, clean metal surface at the point of connection.
M. For all control devices with sealed cable connection, include a ground conductor in the control
cable.
N. Prior to burying of the ground conductors, record location for Record Drawings.
3.02 RACEWAY GROUND
A. Metallic conduits:
1. Assembled to provide a continuous ground path and bonded using insulated grounding
bushings.
2. Bond using insulated grounding bushings.
B. Non-metallic conduits: Insulated ground conductor sized in compliance with the NEC.
C. Grounding bushings: Connected to the grounding system using conductors sized in compliance
with NFPA 70.
D. Cable trays:
1. No. 2/0 AWG bare copper ground conductor run on the outside of each tray.
2. Conductor to be connected to each section or fitting using a carriage bolt and clamp.
E. Every conduit shall contain an insulated green ground conductor sized in compliance with NEC.
F. Duct Banks:
1. Run along the duct bank a continuous No. 2/0 AWG minimum bare copper conductor.
2. Bond using insulated grounding bushings.
3.03 EQUIPMENT AND ENCLOSURE GROUND
A. Connect electrical and distribution equipment to the grounding system. Cables sized as
indicated.
B. Connect non-electrical equipment with metallic enclosures to the grounding system.
C. Securely bond transformer yard fences and gates as specified.
3.04 ISOLATED GROUNDING
A. Where the manufacturer of equipment supplied from 120 volt instrument power panels requires
an isolated ground, provide an additional isolated ground conductor from the equipment through
the instrument power panel for connection to a single point ground bus in the automatic transfer
switch enclosure.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16450 - 3
C00822C13
B. Conductor: Green insulation with a yellow stripe and run in the same raceway as the power and
neutral conductors.
C. Neutral conductor from the ultra-isolation transformers:
1. Grounded only at the single point ground bus in the automatic transfer switch.
3.05 GROUNDING SYSTEM TESTS
A.
Test per IEEE 81 each grounding connection to determine the ground resistance.
B.
Submit a plot of ground resistance readings for each isolated ground rod or ground mat on 8-1/2 by 11
inch size graph paper.
C.
Current reference rod: At least 100 feet from the ground rod or grid under test.
D.
Make measurements at 10-foot intervals beginning 25 feet from the test electrode, and ending 75 feet
from it, in direct line between the ground rod or center of grid and the current reference electrode.
E.
Consider a grounding system that shows greater than 2-ohm resistance for the flat portion of the plotted
data inadequately grounded. Add additional parallel-connected ground rods and deeper driven rods
until the ground resistance measurements meet the 2-ohm or less requirement.
F.
Use of salts, water, or compounds to attain the indicated ground resistance is not acceptable.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16450 - 4
C00822C13
SECTION 16460
DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS (600 VOLTS AND LESS)
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies dry-type transformers rated 600 volts and less used for power distribution,
lighting, and control purposes.
B. Equipment List:
EQUIPMENT
Transformer
EQUIPMENT NO.
TFR 851 101
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
documents. These references are part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of
conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the
requirements of this Section shall prevail.
Title
Reference
IEEE C57.12.01
General Requirements for Dry-Type Distribution and Power
Transformers
UL 506
Specialty Transformers
NEMA ST20
Dry-Type Transformers for General Application
NEMA TP-1
Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution
Transformers
B. Qualifications: Not Used.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Product Technical Data:
1. Manufacturer's verification that the unit has been built and tested in accordance with the
specified standards.
2. Manufacturer's verification of the sound levels of each unit if different from the specified
NEMA ST20 standards.
3. Manufacturer's product literature.
4. Applicable operation and maintenance information per Section 01730.
C. Completed test report Form 16000-C.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Transformers rated 10 KVA and smaller: Unless otherwise indicated, single phase.
B. Transformers rated 15 KVA and greater: Unless otherwise indicated, 3-phase.
C. Transformers shall conform to IEEE C57.12.01 and UL 506.
D. The voltage, frequency, number of phases, and KVA rating shall be as specified.
E. Acceptable Manufacturer:
1. General Electric.
2. Square D.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16460 - 1
C00822C13
3. Eaton: Cutler-Hammer.
4. Or Approved Equal.
2.02 INSULATION
A. Transformers 15 KVA and greater: Class 220 insulation system in accordance with NEMA ST20.
B. Transformers 2 KVA and smaller: Designed not to exceed 80 ºC temperature rise.
C. Transformers 3 KVA and greater: Designed not to exceed 115 ºC temperature rise.
D. Transformers shall be rated with a minimum efficiency that complies with NEMA TP-1.
2.03 TRANSFORMER COILS
A. Copper wound coils.
B. 15 KVA and greater: Impregnated with varnish.
C. Transformer coils 10 KVA and smaller: Encapsulated.
2.04 WINDING CONFIGURATION
A. Transformers with electrically isolated primary and secondary windings with winding
configurations as specified.
B. Make provisions to permit separate grounding of the neutral conductor and the enclosure.
C. Single-phase transformers: Four-winding type.
2.05 TRANSFORMER TAPS
A. Transformers 15 KVA and above shall have two 2-1/2 percent full capacity taps above normal
voltage and four 2-1/2 percent full capacity taps below rated voltage on the primary winding.
2.06 TERMINAL COMPARTMENTS
A. Sized to permit termination of cables specified.
B. Copper and sized for the cable specified.
C. Make terminal connections in the bottom third of the enclosure.
2.07 ENCLOSURES
A. Transformers rated 15 KVA and smaller: Provide with drip-proof, ventilated enclosures.
B. Indoor transformers rated greater than 15 KVA: Provide with drip-proof, ventilated enclosures.
C. Outdoor transformers: Provide with weatherproof enclosures.
2.08 MOUNTING
A. Transformers 25 KVA and smaller: Suitable for wall mounting.
B. Transformers 37 KVA and greater: Floor-mounting type.
2.09 NAMEPLATES
A. Per Section 16000.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16460 - 2
C00822C13
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Bond together and ground transformer enclosures and neutrals.
3.02 TESTING
A. Test per Section 16030.
B. Complete test report Form 16000-C.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16460 - 3
C00822C13
SECTION 16470
LIGHTING AND POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies panelboards for lighting and power distribution.
B. Equipment List:
EQUIPMENT
Panelboard No. 1
EQUIPMENT NO.
PNL 851 107
Panelboard No. 3
PNL 851 110
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
documents. These references are part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of
conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the
requirements of this Section shall prevail.
Title
Reference
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code (NEC).
UL 50
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
UL 67
Panelboards
UL 489
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and
Circuit Breaker Enclosures
B. Qualifications: Not Used.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Product Technical Data:
1. Manufacturer's certification that bus bracing is capable of withstanding the specified short
circuit condition.
2. Quantity and rating of circuit breakers for each panelboard.
3. Applicable operation and maintenance information: Section 01730.
1.04 PANELBOARDS
A. As indicated on the Drawings.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Panelboards: Circuit breaker, dead front type, with bus bar construction.
B. Acceptable Manufacturer:
1. Square D.
2. Eaton: Cutler-Hammer.
3. Or Approved Equal.
2.02 ARRANGEMENT AND CONSTRUCTION
A. Panel Front: Concealed trim clamps and hinges.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16470 - 1
C00822C13
B. Locks: Flush with cylinder, tumbler-type with spring loaded door pulls.
C. Non-removable fronts with doors in the locked position.
D. Panelboard Locks: Keyed alike.
E. Gutter space on all sides of the breaker assembly to neatly connect and arrange incoming wiring.
F. Panelboard: Composed of individually-mounted circuit breakers designed to be removable
without disturbing other breakers.
G. Mount a directory holder with clear plastic plate and metal frame on the inside of the door.
2.03 BUS
A. Tin-plated copper with current ratings as indicated on the panelboard schedules and sized in
accordance with UL 67.
B. Determine ratings by temperature rise test.
C. Minimum Size: 100 amperes.
D. Panel fault withstand rating: Equal to the interrupting rating of the smallest circuit breaker in the
panel.
E. Other Buses:
1. Panelboards shall be provided with a separate ground bus and, where indicated, with a full
capacity neutral bus.
2. Mount neutral bus of instrument power panels on insulated stand-offs.
2.04 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Molded-case type provided for the current ratings and pole configurations indicated on the
panelboard schedule.
B. Rated 120/208 volt and 120/240 VAC: Minimum interrupting current rating of 18,000 amperes
(symmetrical) at 240 VAC.
C. Rated 480 VAC: Unless otherwise indicated on the panelboard schedule, a minimum interrupting
current rating of 25,000 amperes (symmetrical) at 480 VAC.
D. Bolt-on Type.
E. Listed in accordance with UL 489 for the service indicated.
F. Load Terminals: Solderless connectors.
2.05 PANELBOARD FINISH
A. Cabinet: Fabricated from hot-dip galvanized steel in accordance with UL 50.
B. Fronts: ANSI 61 - gray, baked enamel finish.
2.06 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS) SYSTEM
A. Per Section 16421.
2.07 NAMEPLATES
A. Provided in accordance with the requirements of Section 16000.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16470 - 2
C00822C13
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Type in the circuit description on the circuit directory or panelboard schedule.
3.02 TESTING
A. Test for proper operation and function per Section 01660 and Section 16030.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16470 - 3
C00822C13
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING FIXTURES
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies lighting fixtures.
B. Equipment List:
EQUIPMENT
Emergency Lighting Inverter
Photocell Control Relay
EQUIPMENT NO.
ME 851 101
ME 851 102
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
documents. These references are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of
conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the
requirements of this Section shall prevail.
Reference
Title
ANSI /IEEE C62.11
Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters for Alternating Current Power
Circuits
ANSI/IEEE C62.41
Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC
Power Circuits
ANSI /IEEE C82.1
Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code (NEC)
UL 1570
Fluorescent Lighting Fixtures
UL 1572
High Intensity Discharge Lighting Fixtures
B. Qualification: Not Used.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Large scale photometric charts for each fixture type.
C. Catalog information describing fixture make, electrical ratings, materials, and dimensions.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 LIGHTING MATERIALS
A. Unless otherwise indicated, lighting materials, including fixtures, accessories, and hardware
conform with LIGHTING FIXTURE SPECIFICATION SHEETS (LIGHTSPECs) in this Section.
B. All luminaires shall be UL listed.
2.02 BALLASTS
A. Fluorescent: conform to the following:
1. Type: Electronic instant start, to provide maximum efficacy (lumens per watt).
2. Lamp wiring: Parallel, such that if one lamp fails, others remain lit.
3. Front end circuitry: Passive, to minimize inrush current. Active front ends with high inrush
currents will not be accepted.
4. K-Factor: Less than 2.0.
5. Total harmonic distortion: 1.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16500 - 1
C00822C13
6. Less than 20 percent.
7. Ballast factors: 0.90 minimum for instant start; 1.20 for high output.
8. Minimum starting temperature: Unless otherwise indicated, 35 degrees F standard; 0
degrees F for all outdoor and unheated indoor locations.
9. Maximum case temperature: 70 degrees C.
10. Lamp current crest factor: Less than or equal to 1.7 for instant start and high output,
operating the lamps within ANSI C82.1 parameters.
11. Minimum output frequency: 20 kHz and no visible flicker.
12. Minimum power factor: 0.97.
13. Withstand line transients: As defined in ANSI/IEEE C62.11.
14. Sound rating: Class A or quieter.
15. Contain no PCBs.
16. 1Electromagnetic and radio frequency interference: Comply with FCC regulations.
17. UL listed, Class P, Type 1.
18. Regulation: Within +/-10 percent voltage range of rated input voltage; light output variation
within +/-10 percent.
19. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Osram Sylvania "Quicktronic".
b. GE Lighting, "Ultramax".
c. Or Approved Equal.
2.03 LAMPS
A. General:
1. Lamps: Per LIGHTSPECs.
2. Fluorescent: Unless otherwise indicated, warm white.
3. LED light source – consistent between luminaires of the same type. All LED light sources
shall be replaceable without replacing luminaire.
B. Acceptable Manufacturer:
1. General Electric.
2. North American Philips (Norelco).
3. Osram Sylvania.
4. Or Approved Equal.
2.04 PHOTOELECTRIC CELL UNITS
A. Cadmium sulfide cell housed in a plug receptacle assembly.
B. Plug receptacle assembly: Three-prong polarized locking type, suitable for outdoor mounting and
rated for 1800 VA at 120V maximum capacity.
2.05 LIGHTING CONTACTOR
A. Coil voltage 120 VAC.
B. Minimum 6 poles.
C. Used in conjunction with photoelectric cell to control lighting circuits.
D. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Square D.
2. Eaton: Cutler-Hammer.
3. Or Approved Equal.
2.06 EMERGENCY LIGHTING INVERTER
A. Inverter with automatic transfer switch.
B. Rated to start all luminaires on associated circuits simultaneously.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16500 - 2
C00822C13
C. Maintain circuit voltage and current for a minimum 90 minutes following an outage.
D. Rated input voltage 120VAC, single phase.
E. Rate continuous output 600 VA minimum.
F. UL listed.
G. External control modules to support external photoelectric cell and separate switch to provide
emergency egress lighting during a power failure.
H. External control modules shall be provided by the same manufacturer of Emergency Lighting
Inverter.
2.07 SPARE PARTS
A. Procedures: Section 01750.
B. The following spare parts shall be provided:
1. Lamps:
a. Fluorescent: 10 percent of the quantity provided, but not less than 2 of each lamp type
and size specified.
b. Sealed beam: 10 percent of the quantity provided, but not less than 2 of each lamp type
and size specified.
c. LED light sources: No spare required.
2. Ballasts: 5 percent of the quantity provided, but not less than 2 of each ballast type and size
specified.
2.08 PRODUCT DATA
A. Polar plots on 8-1/2 by 11 inch paper providing candlepower vs. angle and foot-lamberts
(brightness) vs. angle for longitudinal and transverse axis.
B. Table of utilization factors for calculation of illumination levels by the zonal cavity method.
C. Applicable operation and maintenance items per Section 01730.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. The location, type, and number of fixtures and receptacles are shown on the Drawings. Unless
specifically detailed, the information is diagrammatic.
B. Plan and layout work to avoid interferences with other Contract work. If unavoidable conflict,
notify the Project Representative.
C. Raceways and wire from the fixtures, switches, and receptacles to the lighting panel per the NEC.
D. Raceways: Per Section 16110.
E. Wire: Per Section 16120.
F. Splice circuit conductors in a separately mounted junction box for fixtures labeled to require
conductors with a temperature rating exceeding 75 degrees C.
G. Connect fixture to junction box using flexible conduit with a temperature rating equal to that of the
fixture.
H. Photoelectric cells: Orient toward the north.
I.
Remove labels and marks, except the UL label, from exposed parts of the fixtures.
J.
Clean fixtures per Section 01710.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16500 - 3
C00822C13
K. Where recessed fixtures are required, provide with mounting hardware for the ceiling system
specified.
L. Provide a concealed latch and hinge mechanism to permit access to the lamps and ballasts and
for removal and replacement of the diffuser without removing the fixture from ceiling panels.
M. Provide a protective coating of bituminous paint for fixtures recessed in concrete.
N. Align and direct fixture to illuminate an area as specified.
O. Directly and rigidly mount on supporting structures.
P. Unless otherwise indicated, do not use fixtures to support conduit system.
Q. Treat welded areas with rust-resistant primer and finish paint where brackets or supports for
lighting fixtures are welded to steel members.
R. Underground and outdoor wire splices per Section 16120.
3.02 FIXTURE SCHEDULE
A. General:
1. Manufacturer's catalog numbers listed are examples of the basic model, or series, and the
overall quality required.
2. While the referenced catalog numbers attempt to be as definitive as available literature
permits, such items as voltage, mounting style, modifications, and other special features may
not be included.
3. Verify and provide all of the specified requirements.
B. LIGHTSPEC
1. Lamp codes specified on LIGHTSPEC sheets are Osram Sylvania designations.
2. Do not use catalog numbers given on the LIGHTSPECs for selection of mounting hardware,
but only as a reference to the type of fixture required.
3. Contains the following Family groups of fixtures:
a. EX – Emergency, Classified location.
b. FW – Fluorescent, wall-mounted.
c. LG – LED Gasketed Lens.
d. LH – LED, Classified location.
e. LS – LED, general diffuse.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16500 - 4
C00822C13
Family group:
EX – Emergency, classified location.
Group description:
Battery-powered emergency lighting unit, corrosionresistant, 90-minute minimum light from integral
batteries.
Family member:
N/A
Fabrication:
N/A
Lighting:
Distribution: two (2) adjustable light heads.
Lamps:
12-watt minimum, 12-volt sealed-beam, one per head.
Electrical:
Input voltage: 120. Integral 12-volt transformer and
battery charger.
Mounting:
Power unit wall mounted in custom angle iron bracket
assembly with bottom at +7-1/2 feet. See detail on
Drawings.
Acceptable manufacturer:
Crouse-Hinds, Hubbell, Or Approved Equal.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16500 - 5
C00822C13
Family group:
FW – Fluorescent, wall-mounted.
Group description:
Indoor wall bracket, surface mounted.
Family member:
FW1: Two 2-foot lamps.
FW2: Two 4-foot lamps.
Fabrication:
Housing: die-formed code gage steel.
Finish: white, high gloss baked enamel.
Door frame: hinged and latched.
Gasketing: light-tight.
Lighting:
Distribution: up and downlight.
Shielding: patterned acrylic.
Lamps:
Energy saving, T-8 shape.
Electrical:
Input voltage: 120-277 universal volatage.
Ballasts: electronic.
Mounting:
Wall
Acceptable manufacturer:
HE Williams series 29, Lithonia series W, Or Approved
Equal.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16500 - 6
C00822C13
Family group:
LG – LED, gasketed lens.
Group description:
Pendant LED, gasketed lens.
Family member:
LG1: multiple LED light sources, nominal 8-inches wide
by 4-foot.
Fabrication:
Housing: UV stabilized, injection molded, impact
resistance, polycarbonate lens, symmetric optics and
stainless steel hardware.
Finish: white.
Lighting:
Distribution: general downlight.
Reflector: white.
Shielding: polycarbonate lens.
Lamps:
LED light source.
Electrical:
Input voltage: 120 volts.
Premium LED drivers.
Initial lumens: 5,400.
Watts: 130.
Mounting:
N/A
Acceptable manufacturer:
WF Harris Lighting; Model 200 series or Lithonia VAP
series Or Approved Equal.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16500 - 7
C00822C13
Family group:
LH – LED, classified location.
Group description:
Seven (7) LED light sources, 16” round with heat
dissipation fins.
Family member:
LH1: Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, & D
explosionproof.
Materials: copper-free aluminum.
Lens: shatter-resistant explosionproof glass with SS wire
guard.
Finish: die cast aluminum with epoxy powder coat with
stainless steel hardware.
Mounting: Pendent, provided with swivel luminaire
hanger.
Fabrication:
N/A
Lighting:
N/A
Lamps:
LED light source
Electrical:
Input voltage: 120 – 277 volts.
Premium LED drivers.
Initial lumens: 6,500.
Watts: 100.
Mounting:
Pendent.
Acceptable manufacturer:
Crouse-Hinds series EVLL, Appleton, Or Approved
Equal.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16500 - 8
C00822C13
Family group:
LS – LED, general diffuse.
Group description:
Surface LED.
Family member:
LS1: Vaporproof luminair.
Example: Phoenix VP series.
Fabrication:
Finish: Marine grade aluminum.
Lighting:
Distribution: General.
Shielding: Standard with clear frosted heat-treated glass
globe with marine grade aluminum guard.
Lamps:
LED light source, sealed in clear silicone.
Electrical:
Input voltage: 120 volts.
Premium LED drivers.
Initial lumens: 1,300.
Watts: 16 watts.
Mounting:
Surface on wall with flush mounting box and 90 degree
mounting bracket on exterior walls.
Acceptable manufacturer:
Phoenix series VP, Hubbell series V, Or Approved Equal.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16500 - 9
C00822C13
SECTION 16621
DIESEL FUEL LEAK DETECTION AND INVENTORY SYSTEM
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies a leak detection and inventory system for tanks and piping used for the
generator diesel fuel system.
B. Equipment List:
EQUIPMENT
Leak Detection/Inventory Panel
Horn & light at fuel filling station
Light at Leak Detection/Inventory
Panel
EQUIPMENT NO.
PNL 851 104
HRN 851 101
LGT 851 101
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
documents. It is a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the
requirements of this Section and those of a listed document, the requirements of this Section
shall prevail.
Reference
Title
IFC Chapter 34
Flammable and Combustible Liquids
NEC
National Electrical Code
NEMA 1
National Electrical Manufacturers Association type 1 Enclosure
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code
WAC 173-360
Washington Administration Code Underground Storage Tank
Regulations
B. Qualifications: Installer shall have installed a minimum of five other installations in the past three
years.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Catalog cuts showing general features of the equipment.
C. Schematic diagram showing the wiring of the complete system.
D. Plan Drawings show the locations of the probes and related equipment.
E. System description.
F. Site plan and sections showing piping and conduit routing.
G. Installers current certification as an Underground Storage Tank (UST) Supervisor in accordance
with WAC 173-360 Part VI. Listing of projects in the past three years.
H. Operation and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with Section 01730.
1.04 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Leak Detection and Inventory System shall provide King County with the capability of monitoring
and reporting in accordance with:
1. IFC Chapter 34.
2. WAC 173-360.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16621 - 1
C00822C13
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. The equipment in this section has been pre-selected by the County for system standardization.
Contractor shall procure the items required in this section from a vendor authorized to supply
products by the listed manufacturer.
2.02 ACCEPTABLE DIESEL FUEL LEAK DETECTION AND INVENTORY SYSTEM
MANUFACTURER
A. Veeder-Root.
B. No substitution for the above manufacturer.
2.03 LEAK DETECTION AND INVENTORY PANEL
A. Suitable for monitoring one tank and its associated piping and sumps for liquid leaks and fuel
level.
B. Microprocessor-based with remote sensors and probes, interconnecting cables, controls and
alarm.
C. User programmable via front panel keypad to continuously indicate tank level in gallons and/or
percent of capacity.
D. An isolated 4 to 20 mA signal shall be provided for remote level monitoring of the fuel tank at the
Main Control Panel (MCP 851,101).
E. Equipped with integral printer to document leak tests, leak detection, alarms and setup
information.
F. The panel shall be rated NEMA 1.
G. Leak detection tests:
1. Above ground storage tanks: none required.
H. Equipped with power conditioner UPS with 10-minute minimum holding time. If the panel is not
supplied with the UPS, supply the power conditioner UPS and integrate it with the panel power
supply.
2.04 SENSORS AND PROBES
A. Coordinate with generator and with fuel tank materials and applications in Section 11083.
B. Interstitial leak sensors:
1. Non-discriminatory liquid sensing type suitable for monitoring for the presence of petroleum
and water in the interstitial space of double walled tanks and in the common piping well.
2. Maintenance-free, suitable for continual use, requiring no drying or cleaning after being
contaminated by the specified petroleum product and/or water.
C. Inventory probe:
1. Compatible with the dimensions of tank.
2. Provide a continuous inventory of the contents of the tank.
3. For above ground storage tanks, provide inventory only type.
2.05 ALARMS
A. Panel shall display an illuminated alarm any time a leak is detected; alarm shall identify the
sensor location and remain lit until the problem has been corrected.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16621 - 2
C00822C13
B. When the tank reaches 90 percent full:
1. An illuminated alarm shall be displayed on the panel. The alarm shall remain lit until the tank
falls below the 90% full level at which time the alarm shall extinguish itself and the system
reset itself in preparation for the next filling.
2. A local visual alarm and a remote audible/visual alarm shall be activated.
C. When tank reaches 50 percent full, a low level alarm shall be displayed on the panel.
D. Extra sets of contacts for 90% and 50% alarms shall be provided for future use.
2.06 LOCAL 90 PERCENT FULL VISUAL ALARM
A. The local visual alarm shall be mounted on wall next to the fuel tank and shall be a Hubbell
Compact Fluorescent Vaporite series Part No. NVQX18GG with amber globe VAMGP-100
outside. Use 18 Watt Compact Fluorescent Dulux D/E18.
B. The visual alarm shall stay activated until the liquid level falls below 90 percent.
2.07 REMOTE 90 PERCENT FULL AUDIBLE/VISUAL ALARMS
A. Audible:
1. The remote audible alarm shall be mounted on the outside of the generator building above
the fuel fill port and shall be a heavy duty horn, 120 VAC, rated NEMA 3R or better, and
provide a sound pressure of 103 dB at 10 feet. Alarm shall be “Adaptahorn,” model number
870-N5 by Edwards, or approved equal.
2. A reset push button station, mounted below the audible alarm, shall be provided to silence
the audible alarm, and a time delay relay output contact shall be wired in series with reset
push button, or the alarm will not reset until the level in the tank falls below 90 percent.
3. Time Delay Relay shall have a range of 1 to 60 minutes. Timing shall begin when tank
reaches 90% fill capacity. Relay shall be initially set to 30 minutes.
B. Visual:
1. The remote visual alarm shall be identical to the local visual alarm and shall be mounted on
the outside of the generator building, adjacent to the audible alarm.
2. The visual alarm shall stay activated until the liquid level falls below 90 percent or the Time
Delay Relay times out.
2.08 ALARM SIGNAL TO TELEMETRY SYSTEM
A. Alarm signals for petroleum leak and low petroleum level shall be transmitted from the Diesel
Tank Leak Detection and Inventory Panel to the Main Control Panel (MCP). The alarm signals
shall be dry contacts. The contacts shall be closed for normal condition and open for alarm
condition. The alarm signals shall be wired to the facility's PLC as shown on the Drawings.
B. Provide the following outputs:
1. Leak detection (dry contact).
2. Low level (dry contact).
3. Fuel Tank High Level (dry contact).
4. Fuel tank level (analog 4-20mA).
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Installation shall comply with NEC for Class I, Division 1 and 2.
B. Install as shown on Drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16621 - 3
C00822C13
C. Conform with the manufacturer's recommendation for wire type, shielded cable for probes and
sensors, rated less than 100 picofarads per foot such as Carol C2534 or Belden 88760, 8760 or
8770, or equal. Wire runs shall be less than 1000 feet to meet intrinsic safety requirements. No
splices in the wire run between sensor or probe junction box and the panel. Sensor to panel
wires shall be #14 to #18 AWG stranded copper wire and installed as a Class 1 circuit.
D. Secure the support of a systems integrator to comply with the requirements of this Section, per
Section 17000.
E. Conduit and conductors (per Sections 16110 and 16120) not identified on the Drawings but
needed for operation of the packaged system equipment. All buried wire shall be in conduit.
F. On exterior installation electrical boxes shall be recessed and no exposed conduit shall be
allowed.
G. Startup and Testing. Section 11083.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16621 - 4
C00822C13
SECTION 16660
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM - PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section establishes minimum standards and guidelines for providing a complete and
operable and tested fire alarm system including final design, permitting, supervision, and
installation by a qualified firm specializing in fire alarm design and installation.
B. Work includes the design and installation of cable and raceway systems to support the fire alarm
system which will monitor all heat detectors, smoke detectors, alarms, and pull stations.
C. Equipment List:
EQUIPMENT
Fire Alarm Panel
EQUIPMENT NO.
CP 851 102
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
document. It is a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the
requirements of this Section and that of the listed document, the requirements of this Section
shall prevail.
Title
Reference
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code
NFPA 72
National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code
NFPA 820
Standard for Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and
Collection Facilities
FM
Factory Mutual Research Corporation Standards
NEC Article 760
Fire Alarm Systems
UL 268
Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 268A
Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications
UL 521
Heat Detection for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
28 CFR Part 36, Appendix A
ADA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
UL 38
Manual Signaling Boxes for Fire Alarm Systems
UL 497B
Protectors for Data Communications and Fire Alarm Circuits
SFC
2009 Seattle Fire Code
B. Qualifications:
1. Fire protection system designer:
a. Licensed Fire Protection System Engineer in Washington State.
b. Minimum of five years of experience with design of systems of similar scope.
2. Fire protection system installer:
a. Licensed Fire Protection System installer in Washington State.
b. Minimum of five years of experience installing systems of similar scope.
C. UL Listing or FM approval.
D. Governing Authority: City of Seattle Fire Marshall.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Shop drawings and equipment data per Section 16000 requirements.
1. Product technical data:
a. Battery calculations.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16660 - 1
C00822C13
b. Voltage drop calculations.
c. Complete descriptive data indicating UL listing or FM approval for all system
components.
d. Sequence of operations of the system.
e. Name of local service organization.
f. Copy of point-to-point electrical schematic and wiring drawings submitted to governing
authority and the approved drawings stamped by the governing authority.
2. Fabrication and/or layout drawings:
a. Provide drawings in AutoCAD 2007, full size at 22 inches x 34 inches.
b. Plan drawings showing type and locations of all fire alarm devices. Indicate salient
features of each device (e.g., weatherproof, strobe candela rating).
c. Complete system wiring diagrams for components capable of being connected to the
system and interfaces to associated equipment.
C. Qualifications of the fire protection engineer and fire protection installer.
D. Catalog cuts showing general features of all products.
E. Schematic diagrams showing the wiring of all modified systems.
F. Plan drawings showing the locations of detectors and other related devices in each area.
G. Acceptance test records and test certificates signed and approved by the governing authority.
H. Operating and maintenance information per Section 01730.
I.
System access keys.
J.
Project “as-built” record documents.
1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide a fire alarm system complete and operable in accordance with the following:
1. Governing authority fire department standards.
2. NFPA 70.
3. NFPA 72.
4. NFPA 820.
5. Applicable provisions of 28 CFR Part 36, Appendix A.
B. The design shall be prepared, stamped, dated, and signed by a Professional Engineer licensed in
the state of Washington.
C. The fire alarm system shall include:
1. Smoke detectors.
2. Heat detectors.
3. Notification appliances.
4. Manual fire alarm pull boxes.
5. Fire alarm panel.
6. Wire and cable.
7. Appurtenances as required by the governing authority Fire Marshal, or local fire code.
D. Provide independent self-contained fire alarm panels in each area as specified on the Drawings.
E. Fire alarm panels shall monitor sensors, actuate alarm and signal devices, and retransmit alarm,
supervisory, and trouble signals to the monitoring system.
F. Contacts for transmission of data to the monitoring system shall be normally closed and open on
alarm or malfunction. Contacts shall be rated not less than 2.0 amperes at 120 VAC.
G. Fire alarm system shall retransmit alarm signals to the fire department in accordance with
governing authority requirements. As a minimum, include sending individual zone address
information of all alarm, trouble, and supervisory data through a UL Listed Fire Alarm Monitoring
Service Provider (FAMSP).
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16660 - 2
C00822C13
H. Fire alarm system shall be an addressable micro-processor based system with smart sensors.
I.
The fire alarm system shall provide automatic fire detection, retransmit alarm, supervisory and
trouble signals by zone to an UL Listed FAMSP, retransmit alarm, supervisory and trouble signals
to the PLC panel and Metrotel, monitor critical HVAC systems, and other functions normally
attributed to fire alarm systems.
J.
Fire alarm system including automatic fire detection shall be provided as a complete and
operable turn-key system in all areas protected by the zones assigned in this Section.
K. Fire alarm Panel: CP 851,102.
L. Basic Performance:
1. Signal Line circuits (SLC) shall be Class A (NFPA Style 6).
2. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be wired Class A (NFPA Style Z).
3. Each SLC shall be limited to only 80 percent of its total capacity at the time of initial
installation.
1.05 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide fire alarm systems under the supervision of a single specialty contractor (fire alarm
system contractor), which is regularly engaged in the design and installation of such systems of
similar scope and complexity. Be responsible for performance of all systems as specified and as
approved by the governing authority.
B. All conduits and wiring among fire alarm sensors, boxes, and panels shall be supplied, installed,
and tested by the fire alarm system contractor.
1.06 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY
A. The Drawings annotate the areas required by this Contract to have a fire alarm system. This
Section specifies the requirements for the fire alarm system.
B. Using the Specification requirements and the general arrangement Drawing for the fire alarm
system, be responsible for obtaining governing authority permits, approval, inspection, and
certification of the entire fire alarm system and for meeting the requirements of this Section.
C. Install the Fire Alarm System.
1.07 COUNTY RESPONSIBILITY
A. Identify the Fire Alarm Monitoring Service Provider (FAMSP) for the Contractor.
B. Provide the phone line between the monitored facility and the FAMSP.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Fire alarm panel:
1. Notifier.
2. Siemens Cerberus.
3. Simplex.
4. Or Approved Equal.
B. The fire alarm equipment shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 72.
2.02 FIRE ALARM PANEL
A. Sixteen-zone panel.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16660 - 3
C00822C13
B. Integral battery charger and sealed lead-calcium battery with sufficient capacity for 24 hours
operation followed by five minutes sounding of audible alarms.
C. Alarm Signal to UL Listed FAMSP or King County Security Division, as specified:
1. For consistency throughout the system, King County's FAMSP is Guardian Security.
2. Provide a Subscriber Terminal Unit (STU), capable of constant monitoring of the phone line
integrity, as the means of connecting the South Magnolia Storage Facility Ancillary Building to
the monitoring facility operated by the FAMSP.
D. Signals to Telemetry System:
1. An alarm, supervisory, and trouble signal shall be transmitted from the Fire Alarm Panel CP
851,102 to the Main Control Panel MCP 851,101 located in the electrical room.
2. Alarm, supervisory, and trouble signal shall be by a dry contact rated 1A at 120 VAC. The
contact shall be closed for normal condition and open for alarm condition.
3. See Division 17 for retransmission of the alarm signal from the Fire Alarm Panel to the
Metrotel panel and the PLC panel.
E. Zone Assignments: annunciation required at minimum for the following zones:
1. Building Area or Room:
a. Electrical Room.
b. Dewatering Pump Room.
c. Generator Room.
d. Odor Control Room.
e. Rest Room.
f. Mechanical Room.
g. 6 Spares.
F. Area Classifications:
1. See Electrical Plans for area classification designations.
2. Designation of an area will determine the NEMA rating of the electrical equipment
enclosures, types of conduits and installation methods to be used in that area.
a. Outdoor areas: Wet, Also, corrosive and/or hazardous when specifically designated on
the Drawings or in the specifications.
b. Indoor areas: Dry. Also, wet corrosive and/or hazardous when specifically designated
on the Drawings or in the specifications.
G. System Description:
1. Automatic and manual, analog addressable, general alarm and non-coded evacuation alarm,
supervised, closed-circuit, 24 Vdc microprocessor based fire detection and alarm system.
2. Provide components including but not limited to the following:
a. Fire Alarm Panel.
b. Analog addressable heat sensors.
c. Analog addressable smoke detectors.
d. Analog addressable duct smoke sensors with auxiliary relays.
e. Addressable manual pull station.
f. HVAC System Interface:
1) Duct detectors and circuits included in HVAC System work.
g. Fan control relay associated with the HVAC control system.
h. Combination fire alarm horns with strobe.
i. Auto Dialer for remote alarm to Alarm Monitoring Agency.
1) King County currently uses Guardian Security for alarm monitoring. Verify with
Project Representative.
j. Fire alarm system wire, with all wiring in conduit.
1) Conduit and wiring between Duct Detectors and HVAC System Controller and HVAC
System Controller and FAP included in HVAC work.
k. Interconnection with HVAC System Controller for duct detector alarms.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16660 - 4
C00822C13
2.03 AUTOMATIC FIRE DETECTORS
A. Option A: Ionization Smoke Detectors per NFPA 72 with the following features:
1. Dual chamber ionization type.
2. No moving parts.
3. Alarm indicator lamp.
4. Capable of having sensitivity tested and adjusted as installed.
5. Nominal 24 VDC operation. Range: 17-26 VDC, standby current <1 mA, alarm current > 30
mA.
6. Terminal base connection.
7. Anti-tampering features.
8. Solid-state amplifier-switching circuitry.
9. UL 268 listed for 30-foot spacing.
10. FM Approval.
11. Plug-in base with 2-wire terminal connection, compatible with other specified space
detectors.
a. Notifier 1400 Series, Simplex 4098 Series, or approved equal.
B. Option B: Photoelectric Smoke Detectors per NFPA 72 with the following features:
1. Sensitivity: Better than 3% per foot.
2. Alarm indicator lamp.
3. Capable of having sensitivity tested and adjusted as installed.
4. Nominal 24 VDC operation. Range: 17-26 VDC, standby current <1 mA, alarm current > 30
mA.
5. Terminal base connection.
6. Anti-tampering features.
7. Solid-state amplifier-switching circuitry.
8. UL 268 listed for 30-foot spacing.
9. FM approval.
10. Plug-in base with 2-wire terminal connection, compatible with other specified space
detectors.
a. Notifier 2400 Series, Simplex 4098 Series, or equal.
C. Heat Detectors per NFPA 72 with the following features:
1. Rate of Rise and rate compensated 135F fixed temperature operation.
2. Dual thermistor or pneumatic chamber rate of rise operating principle.
3. Alarm indicator lamp.
4. UL 521 listed for 50 feet spacing.
5. Solid state electronics.
6. Nominal 24 VDC operation. Range: 17-26 VDC, standby current <1 mA, alarm current > 30
mA.
7. Plug in base with 2-wire terminal connection, compatible with other specified space.
8. Notifier HD 600 Series, Simplex 4098 Series, or approved equal.
D. Duct Smoke Detectors per NFPA 72 with the following features:
1. Ionization type UL 268A listed.
2. Accessories required for monitoring air flow in duct work.
3. See HVAC temperature control diagrams in the mechanical drawings for locations of duct
ionization detectors.
4. Two Form C contacts for shut-down of associated air handling units. Rated 2A at 24VDC or
120 VAC.
5. Remote reset and test.
2.04 MANUAL PULL STATIONS
A. Addressable manual stations per NFPA 72 with the following features:
1. Meets UL 38 Standard.
2. Meets ADA Pull force requirements.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16660 - 5
C00822C13
3.
4.
5.
6.
Surface Mount indoor manual station.
Single-action type not requiring part replacement to accomplish reset.
Pull down lever locks in position, actuating alarm switch until manually reset.
Switch contact: SPST N.O. rated 0.25A at 30V AC or DC.
B. Notifier NBG-12S, Simplex 2099 Series, or equal.
2.05 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. Interior Horn/Strobes:
1. Solid state components.
2. Audible signal: Field selected continuous or pulsed output. Field selected standard and high
dbA sound output levels. Minimum output 75 dbA at 10 ft (anechoic).
3. Visible signal: Xenon flashtube, flashing at one flash per second with minimum 75 candela
rating.
4. Operating voltage: 21 to 30 VDC. Maximum current at nominal 24 VDC = 160 mA.
5. Fully compliant with ADA 1990 requirements. Listed to UL 464 and UL 1971 and approved for
fire protective service.
6. Quantity and location of interior horn/strobes shall be as required by code and/or the
Governing Authority.
7. Notifier MASS12/24ADA, Simplex 4093 series, or equal.
B. Exterior Horn/Strobes:
1. Solid state components.
2. Audible signal: Field selected continuous or pulsed output. Field selected standard and high
dbA sound output levels. Minimum output 75 dbA at 10 ft (anechoic).
3. Visible signal: Xenon flashtube, flashing at one flash per second with minimum 75 candela
rating.
4. Operating voltage: 21 to 30 VDC. Maximum current at nominal 24 VDC = 160 mA.
5. Fully compliant with ADA 1990 requirements. Listed to UL 464 and UL 1971 and approved for
fire protective service.
6. Quantity and location of interior horn/strobes shall be as required by code and/or the
Governing Authority.
7. Weather proof.
C. Combination Audio/Visual Devices:
1. Mount in an integral unit and have the same features as the individual units specified herein.
2.06 MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES
A. Isolated Loop Circuit Protector (Transient Suppressions):
1. Hybrid solid state high performance suppression system. Do not use gas tubes, spark gaps
or other suppression system components which might short or crowbar the line resulting in
interruption of normal power flow to connected loads.
2. Line-to-line response time of less than 1 nanosecond capable of accepting a 2000 amperes
(8 x 20 µsec pulse) at 28 volts.
3. Line-to-ground response time of less than 1 nanosecond capable of accepting a 2000
amperes (8 x 20 µsec pulse) to earth.
4. Shield-to-ground shall be capable of accepting a 5000 amperes (10 x 50µsec pulse) to earth.
5. Standard: UL 497B.
B. Fault Isolation Module:
1. Bi-directional short circuit protection for SLC communication lines. Isolators optimize
communication integrity by creating device groups, any group with short circuited wiring can
be isolated, allowing communications to continue to the other groups.
2. FAP mounted or individually mounted.
C. Automatic Telephone Dialer:
1. 120 Volt AC.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16660 - 6
C00822C13
2. Remote Alarm Notification with telephone dial up.
a. Activate upon dry contact alarm/trip inputs.
b. Four channels for pre-defined inputs monitoring building conditions.
c. Four channels for custom configuration.
d. 8 pre-programmable telephone numbers.
3. Data parameters:
a. Receive calls from computer/modem and transfer to station SCADA.
b. Communications – RS-485 interface.
4. Dial unit to monitor status and retrieve information on operating modes and status.
5. Battery backup.
2.07 CABLE AND CONDUIT
A. Conduit: See Section 16110.
B. Conductors:
1. Insulation type per NEC 760.
2. 120 Vac and power supply connections: 12 AWG, minimum.
3. Low-voltage general alarm circuits: 14 AWG, minimum.
4. Low-voltage signaling circuits: 18 AWG, minimum.
5. Annunciator and data communication circuits: As required by manufacturer, UL listed.
6. Use larger wire sizes when recommended by equipment manufacturer and per voltage drop
calculations.
7. See Section 16120.
C. Cable to interconnect the various components of the fire alarm system per NFPA 70.
D. Locate the fire alarm panel in the electrical room. Route cables interconnecting the fire alarm
panel with other components in a dedicated conduit.
2.08 SPARE PARTS
A. Furnish as spares ten percent of the quantity installed, but not less than:
1. One of each automatic fire detector type as specified in this Section.
2. One air handling unit detector.
3. Furnish one xenon tube for each bell strobe supplied.
B. Tag and store spare components per Section 01750.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Install per NFPA 72, NEC Article 760, ADA 1990 requirements, and all applicable codes and
manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Install all wiring in raceways:
1. Provide raceways (conduits) per Section 16110 for all interconnecting wiring between the Fire
Alarm Panel and remote components.
C. Make all fire alarm wiring continuous from terminal to terminal or from terminal to device pigtail
lead.
1. Circuit splices not permitted.
2. Color code all wiring by type of device.
3. Coordinate color with County.
4. Wiring joints, only when required at device pigtail leads shall utilize Scotchlok insulated
conical spring connector.
D. Provide sensors with electronics immune from false alarms caused by EMI and RFI.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16660 - 7
C00822C13
E. Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work in contract shall be closely
coordinated with appropriate subcontractors.
1. Duct detector devices, conduit and wiring not included in the fire alarm system work to be
brought to the Fire Alarm Panel.
2. Connect conduit and wiring for the duct detectors, and alarms at the Fire Alarm Panel.
3. Telephone dialer for Alarm Monitoring Agency.
F. Mount fire alarm panel and devices located on architecturally finished surfaces flush or semiflush.
G. Surface mount alarm panel and devices located on wall surfaces.
H. Supply manufacturer's authorized representative as on-site supervision.
I.
Clean all dirt and debris from inside and outside of equipment after completion of installation.
J.
Connect duct smoke detectors to the specified fire alarm panel for power supply, supervision, and
alarm annunciation.
K. Cover all smoke detectors with plastic bags immediately after installation to maintain cleanliness.
L. Mark all duct sensor locations in red with “smoke/fire sensor location”.
M. Device Mounting Schedule:
1. Dimensions are to center of item unless otherwise indicated.
2. Mounting heights as indicated below unless otherwise indicated on Drawings:
a. Manual pull stations: 48 inches.
b. Notification appliances: 80 inches.
c. Control panels and remote annunciators: 72 inches to top.
d. Stand alone duct detector annunciator: 54 inches.
3.02 TESTING
A. Test the completed system per NFPA 72 in the presence of the Project Representative and the
governing authority. Coordinate test scheduling with the governing authority. Provide a minimum
of 1 week notice to Project Representative prior to testing.
B. Upon successful testing, certify system in writing. Provide system certification and description in
accordance with NFPA 72.
3.03 INSTRUCTION
A. Provide an authorized representative to instruct and train Fire Department personnel and Owner’s
personnel in operation of system.
3.04 COMPLETION
A. Prior to Final Acceptance:
1. Turn all access keys over to the Project Representative.
2. Turn in As-Built records.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16660 - 8
C00822C13
SECTION 16720
GENERAL COMMUNICATIONS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies a new communications service to the facility and general communications
for a complete operating system.
B. Where system components are specified in following sections, materials shall not be limited to
those components only. It is intended that these components be utilized to perform the basic
system functions. All equipment, accessories and installation materials required to fulfill the
operational requirements shall be provided, whether or not specifically enumerated or shown.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
documents. These references are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of
conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of a listed document, the
requirements of this Section shall prevail.
Reference
Title
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code
WAC
Washington Administrative Code 296
NFPA 75
Standards for the Protection of Electronic Computer / Data
Processing Equipment
NFPA 780
Standards for the Installation of Lightning Protection
NFPA 101
Life Safety Code
EIA/TIA-568
Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard
EIA/TIA-569
Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunication Pathways
and Spaces
EIA/TIA-606
Administrative Standard for the Telecommunications
Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings
EIA/TIA-607
Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications
in Commercial Buildings
B. Qualifications:
1. Systems and equipment shall be produced by manufacturers of established reputation and
experience, who shall have produced similar apparatus for at least three years of similar
installations rendering satisfactory service.
2. Manufacturer shall be a firm with full-time authorized dealer having a parts and service facility
within 150 miles of the site.
3. Systems to be installed and tested under the direction of a qualified manufacturer’s
representative and contractor with expertise in that particular specialty with EIA/TIA
certification.
4. Each system to be the product of one manufacturer with sole responsibility for system
performance, unless approved otherwise.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Qualifications:
1. Provide manufacturer’s qualifications with three years of experience.
2. Location of authorized dealer.
3. Installer’s certification.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16720 - 1
C00822C13
C. Product Data.
1. Terminal cabinet.
2. Connector Blocks.
3. Terminal boards.
4. Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS)
1.04 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Deliver all equipment in original containers with manufacturer's label intact.
1.05 SCHEDULING WORK WITH THE COMMUNICATIONS UTILITY COMPANY
A. Provide all scheduling and coordination with the communications utility company.
1.06 CONTRACTOR/UTILITY INTERFACE RESPONSIBILITIES
A. The communications utility providing service to this facility is Century Link. Clarify all questions
regarding communications utility installation prior to bid. Comply with all communication utility
company standards and requirements.
B. Provide four telephone lines to the facility.
1. One dial up line for the Fire Alarm System autodailer.
2. Three leased lines for the Metrotel system, Main Control Panel, and Upper/Existing Diversion
Structure communication link.
C. Sequencing: Coordinate the sequence of installation with the Communications Utility.
D. The division of responsibilities stated below has been determined by coordination with the
Communications Utility.
E. Contractor. Provide the following service and materials:
1. Request a new service from Century Link (minimum of 90 days before needed date).
2. Conduit to communications utility manhole.
3. Pull string and true measure tape.
4. All trenching, excavation, backfill, and compaction.
5. Grounding.
6. Dedicated receptacle.
7. Coordinate with Century Link and Conveyance Contractor to provide Central Office (CO)
intertie with Conveyance System Control Panel located on 32nd Ave. West.
F. UPS
G. Utility. Will provide the following service and material:
1. 25 pair cable.
2. Termination equipment.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 TERMINAL CABINETS
A. UL telephone and equipment cabinet with door and latch with minimum dimensions of 12 inches
wide by 15 inches high by 4 inches deep or as specified.
B. Mounted on a 3’ x 8’ x 3/4-inch fire resistant plywood backboard.
C. Surface mounted as shown.
D. Acceptable Manufacturer:
1. Chatsworth.
2. Systimax.
3. Berk-tek.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16720 - 2
C00822C13
4. Or Approved Equal.
2.02 CONNECTOR BLOCKS
A. Punch-on type, No. 66 industry standard.
B. Example: No. 66M150 with No. 89B bracket terminates, 25 pair.
C. Acceptable Manufacturer:
1. Amphenol.
2. Hubbell.
3. Or Approved Equal.
2.03 TERMINAL BOARDS
A. Provide 3/4-inch thick fire resistant plywood, shop grade or better, manufactured to APA
standards.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, center at 4 feet above floor.
C. Paint with 2 coats gray enamel.
D. Secure to wall with screws, expansion or toggle bolts.
2.04 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
A. Provide UPS per section 17132.
B. Coordinate with Century Link on minimum size required, but in no case shall the UPS be smaller
than 1 kVA.
2.05 IDENTIFICATION
A. Nameplates: See Section 16000.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate with Century Link on installation of the conduit into Century Link’s manhole. The
installer shall meet with the Century Link inspector in the field.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, install conduit for all communications systems per Section 16110 and
EIA/TIA-569.
C. Terminate 4 inch communications conduit one foot above finished floor and below the backboard.
D. Communications conduit between manhole and electrical room shall have a minimum cover of 36
inches. No more than three 90 degree sweeps. Sweeps shall have a minimum radius of 36
inches. A True Tape shall be installed in this conduit.
E. Grounding install per Section 16450 and EIA/TIA-607. Provide grounding busbar below
backboard.
F. Provide labeling per EIA/TIA-568 and EIA/TIA-606.
G. Provide dedicated receptacle adjacent to backboard, coordinate with Century Link.
3.02 TESTING
A. Provide testing per EIA/TIA-568.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16720 - 3
C00822C13
SECTION 16740
TELEPHONE AND COMPUTER DATA PROVISIONS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies conduits, outlets, terminal boards, and other items necessary for a
telephone system.
B. Where system components are specified in following sections, materials shall not be limited to
those components only. It is intended that these components be utilized to perform the basic
system functions. All equipment, accessories and installation materials required to fulfill the
operational requirements shall be provided, whether or not specifically enumerated or shown.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
documents. These references are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of
conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of a listed document, the
requirements of this Section shall prevail.
Reference
Title
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code
WAC
Washington Administrative Code 296
NFPA 75
Standards for the Protection of Electronic Computer / Data Processing
Equipment
NFPA 101
Life Safety Code
EIA/TIA-568
Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard
EIA/TIA-569
Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunication Pathways and
Spaces
EIA/TIA-606
Administrative Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of
Commercial Buildings
EIA/TIA-607
Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications in
Commercial Buildings
B. Qualifications:
1. Systems to be installed and tested under the direction of a qualified manufacturer’s
representative and contractor with expertise in that particular specialty with EIA/TIA
certification.
2. Each system to be the product of one manufacturer with sole responsibility for system
performance, unless approved otherwise.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
1. Installer’s qualification.
B. Product Data:
1. Cable.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 CABLE
A. Category 6e.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16740 - 1
C00822C13
B. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Belden.
2. Anixter.
3. Or Approved Equal.
2.02 TERMINAL BOARDS
A. Per Section 16720.
2.03 CONDUITS
A. Per Section 16110.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Unless otherwise indicated, install conduit for all communications systems per Section 16110 and
EIA/TIA-569.
B. Grounding install per Section 16450 and EIA/TIA-607.
C. Provide labeling per EIA/TIA-568 and EIA/TIA-606.
D. Provide conduit to equipment enclosures requiring communications support within the Electrical
Room.
3.02 FEEDER AND SERVICE CONDUITS
A. Sizes: As shown or scheduled on the Drawings.
B. Types: per Section 16110.
C. Pull Lines:
1. Install and leave pull line and true measure in each conduit run for use by utility company.
2. Use No. 12 AWG steel wire or equivalent nylon rope.
3. Approved by utility company.
3.03 HOME RUNS CONDUITS
A. Inside Structures: In heated, covered structures which are not regularly occupied except for
process observation and maintenance:
1. 3/4-inch type GRS conduit from each utilization panel or outlet to a local terminal box.
2. Conduit: per Section 16110.
3.04 TESTING
A. Provide testing per EIA/TIA-568.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16740 - 2
C00822C13
SECTION 16920
LOW-VOLTAGE (480VAC) MCCS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies freestanding, factory assembled 600 volt motor control centers (MCC) with
all appurtenances, and accessories.
B. Equipment List:
EQUIPMENT
Motor Control Center
Power Monitor
Phase Fail Relay
Transient Voltage Surge
Suppressor
EQUIPMENT NO.
MCC 851 101
JU 851 101
PFR 851 101
TVS 851 101
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a
part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this
section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
Reference
Title
ANSI/NEMA ICS 1
General Standards for Industrial Controls and Systems
ANSI/NEMA ICS 2
Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies
NEMA 1
National Electrical Manufacturer Association Enclosure 1
NFPA 79
Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery
UL 845
Motor Control Centers
B. Qualifications: Not Used.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Product Data:
1. Elementary connection and interconnection diagrams as required in this Section, in
accordance with NFPA 79 and/or NEMA ICS standards.
2. Time current curves for all protection devices.
3. List of starters and feeder tap compartments indicating the size and type of circuit protection.
4. Interrupting, withstand and continuous current rating of:
a. Bus bars.
b. Feeder tap units.
c. Starter units.
d. Main incoming units.
5. Catalog and technical data indicating the equipment meets the specifications.
6. Installation instruction, outline dimensions, front view drawing identifying control and
monitoring devices, nameplate engravings, shipping section dimensions, weight, and
foundation requirements assembly.
7. External connection diagram showing function and identification of all terminals requiring field
connections.
8. Operations and Maintenance manuals as specified in Section 01730.
9. Schematics and wiring diagrams.
10. Plan drawings showing conduit entry locations.
11. Recommended spare parts list.
12. Certified copies of all material test reports.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16920 - 1
C00822C13
13. Training schedule and materials.
14. Certification and calculations that the equipment complies with the seismic requirements of
Section 01031.
C. Completed test report form 16000-D.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS
A. The equipment in this section has been pre-selected by the County for system standardization.
Contractor shall procure the items required in this section from a vendor authorized to supply
products by the listed manufacturer.
2.02 ACCEPTABLE MCC MANUFACTURER
A. Schneider Electric / Square D.
B. No substitution for the above manufacturer.
2.03 SERVICE
A. Motor control centers shall be rated 600 volts, 60 hertz, 3 phase, 4-wire as specified, and suitable
for operation at the specified voltages and short circuit capacities.
2.04 STRUCTURE AND CONSTRUCTION
A. Structure:
1. Motor control centers shall be made of No. 14 gage steel minimum, and each section shall be
as specified on the contract drawings. The individual unit compartments shall be a minimum
of 12 inches high. There shall be 72 inches available for stacking starter units.
Compartments shall have pan-type doors with a minimum of two quarter-turn hold-down
latches; and neoprene gaskets.
2. A full height vertical wireway, 20-square-inch minimum, shall be provided for each vertical
motor control center section. The wireway shall contain full height removable doors.
Horizontal wireways shall be provided top and bottom, extending the length of motor control
centers.
3. Bottom channel sills shall be mounted front and rear of the vertical sections extending the full
length of the motor control center lineup. A removable lifting angle shall be mounted on top
and shall extend the width of the motor control center lineup.
4. Motor Control Centers and related equipment shall be braced for site seismic criteria listed in
Section 01031.
B. Construction:
1. Motor control centers located indoors shall have NEMA 1.
2. Starter units, size 5 and smaller, and feeder tap units less than 225 amperes shall be drawout
plug-in construction with hardened, plated copper free-floating stabs and steel spring
backups. The door shall have interference tabs which prevent door closure if unit is
improperly installed. Units shall be latched in the position to assure proper bus contact. The
unit disconnect device shall be interlocked to prevent removal or reinsertion of a unit when
the disconnect is in the "ON" or "TRIPPED" positions.
3. Fusible switch or circuit breaker disconnect operators shall be capable of accommodating
three padlocks for locking in the "OPEN" position.
4. Hardware for mounting future starter and feeder tap units shall be provided at compartments
specified as "FUTURE."
2.05 FINISH AND COLOR
A. The finish and color shall be in accordance with 16000.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16920 - 2
C00822C13
2.06 BUS
A. General: Bus shall be tin-plated copper with bolted connections between vertical and horizontal
bus bars. Access for tightening these connections shall be from the front, without the need for
tools on the rear of the connection. Insulated horizontal and vertical bus barriers shall be
provided. Barriers shall be fabricated from high-strength, glass-filled polyester resin.
B. Horizontal Bus: Unless otherwise specified, the main horizontal bus shall be rated a minimum
600 amperes continuous.
C. Vertical Bus: Unless otherwise specified, the vertical bus shall be rated a minimum 600 amperes
continuous.
D. Neutral Bus: Where specified, a neutral bus shall be provided. The neutral bus shall have the
same rating as the main horizontal bus and shall be provided full length of the motor control
center.
E. Ground Bus: A 1/4-inch by 2-inch copper ground bus shall be provided the full length of the
motor control center. Ground bus shall be located at the bottom of the motor control center.
Provide a lug to terminate a bare 4/0 AWG copper ground conductors at each end of the ground
bus.
F. Units shall be top fed to match existing field wiring.
2.07 WIRING
A. General: Motor control centers shall be provided with NEMA Class II, Type B wiring. All starter
units shall have terminal blocks for control wiring. Terminal blocks shall be provided for power
wiring for starters size 2 and smaller. Motor control centers shall be provided with all necessary
interconnecting wiring and interlocking. When a control section, as described in this Section, is
specified on the drawings or schedules, wire directly to the relays or programmable controller's
input/output modules as part of the interconnecting wiring. Provide elementary and connection
diagrams for each starter unit and an interconnection diagram for the entire motor control center.
Attach polyester plastic protected connection diagram to inside of each unit door.
B. Power Wire: Power wire shall be copper 90 degrees C "MTW" insulated, sized to suit load;
minimum power wire size shall be No. 12 AWG copper stranded.
C. Control Wire: Control wire shall be No. 16 AWG stranded copper wire, rated 90 degrees C and
UL listed for panel wiring.
D. Terminations and Cable Connections:
1. Terminals: Control wiring shall be lugged with ring-tongue or locking spade crimp type
terminals made from electrolytic copper, tin-plated.
2. Cable Connectors: Cable connectors for use with stranded copper wire, sizes No. 8 AWG to
1000 MCM, shall be UL listed. Dished conical washers shall be used for each bolted
connection. Connectors shall be reusable and shall be rated for use with copper conductors.
Incoming line and outgoing feeder compartments shall be provided with crimp type lugs, 3M,
Burndy, or approved equal.
E. Conductor Markers: Markers used for identification shall meet the requirements of Section
16000.
2.08 MAIN AND FEEDER BRANCH CIRCUIT PROTECTION
A. General: Main and feeder tap units shall consist of fused disconnect switches or circuit breakers,
as specified. The trip setting shall be adjustable from 700 to 1300 percent of the motor full load
amperes from the front of the breaker. The motor circuit protector shall be set at its lowest
position at the factory.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16920 - 3
C00822C13
B. Fused Disconnect Switches: Fused disconnect switches shall be equipped with visible knife
blades, shielded line terminals, and a quick-make, quick-break switch operator. Fuse clips shall
be UL Class R rejection type. Type RK-1 dual-element fuses shall be used for both motor and
non-motor loads. Unless otherwise specified, assembly shall have a UL listed short circuit
capacity of 65,000 amps, symmetrical. Fuses shall be nonrenewable. Fuse removal shall be
readily accomplished with the use of a fuse puller.
C. Circuit Breakers (Thermal Magnetic): Thermal-magnetic circuit breakers shall be molded case
equipped with toggle type handle, quick-make, quick-break over center switching mechanism that
is trip-free so that breaker cannot be held closed against short circuits and abnormal currents.
The tripped position shall be clearly indicated by breaker handle maintaining a position between
"ON" and "OFF." All poles shall open, close, and trip simultaneously. Minimum short circuit
capacity shall be 65,000 amperes RMS symmetrical.
D. Circuit Breakers (Magnetic Only): Magnetic circuit breakers shall be molded-case equipped with
toggle type handle, quick-make, quick-break over center switching mechanism that is trip-free so
that breaker cannot be held closed against short circuits and abnormal currents. The tripped
position shall be clearly indicated by breaker handle maintaining a position between "ON" and
"OFF." All poles shall open, close, and trip simultaneously. Minimum short circuit capacity shall
be 65,000 amps symmetrical.
2.09 MOTOR CONTROLLER UNITS
A. General: Motor controller units shall be combination type with contactor and fused disconnect
switch or motor circuit protector as specified on the drawings or the MCC schedule. The starter
units shall have a minimum combination UL listing of 65,000 amps RMS, symmetrical or as
specified in the schedule.
B. Fused Disconnect Switches: Fused disconnect switches shall be as specified in this Section.
Type RK-5 fuses shall be used for starter sizes 1 through 5. Class L time-delay fuses shall be
used for size 6. Unless otherwise specified, assembly shall have a UL listed short circuit capacity
of 65,000 amps symmetrical. Provide fused switches where shown.
C. Motor Circuit Protectors: The molded case motor circuit protector shall operate on the magnetic
principle with a current sensing coil in each of the three poles to provide an instantaneous trip for
short circuit protection.
D. Control Transformers:
1. Each control transformer shall be rated 480/240-120V, single phase, 2 wire, 60 Hz. The
transformer shall be sized for the load it feeds but shall not be less than the minimum ratings
as follows:
NEMA starter size
Volt-ampere rating
1
100
2
150
3
200
4
300
5
500
2. Each control transformer shall be provided with time-delay, slow-blow secondary fuse rated
to interrupt 10,000 amperes short circuit at 250 volts AC. Two UL Class CC time-delay
primary fuses rated to interrupt 200,000 amperes at 600 volts shall be provided on all
starters. Fuses shall be sized in accordance with NEC. Primary fuse shall have a
time/current characteristic specifically designed for control circuit transformer protection.
3. Fuse holder for secondary fuse shall be drawout indicating type and mounted on the door of
the compartment. Fuse holders for primary fuses shall be fuse clips with full barriers between
fuses.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16920 - 4
C00822C13
E. Contactors:
1. Full-Voltage Non-Reversing (FVNR): Unless otherwise specified, contactors shall be full
voltage, 3-pole, 600 volt AC, NEMA size 1 minimum. Contacts shall be double break, silvercadmium oxide, and weld resistant. Contacts shall be isolated to prevent arcing. Coils and
magnets shall be capable of being removed or replaced without special tools.
2. Full-Voltage Reversing (FVR): Reversing starters shall have mechanically interlocked
contactor coils to prevent simultaneous engagement and shall have an additional contactor
and auxiliary relays as required.
3. Two-Speed, Two-Winding (2S2W): Two speed starters shall have two mechanically and
electrically interlocked contactors. Separate running over-current protection shall be provided
for each speed.
F. Transient Surge Suppressor: A transient surge suppressor shall be provided in each starter.
Suppressor shall be encapsulated in a small module suitable for mounting directly to the starter
coil. Additional panel space for suppressor shall not be required. Suppressors shall be rated
120V AC.
G. Auxiliary Contacts: Contactors shall be equipped with auxiliary contacts, rated 10 amperes at
120 volts AC. Each contactor shall be equipped with interlocks as shown on the drawings, but
not less than two normally open and two normally closed electrically isolated auxiliary contacts.
Auxiliary contacts shall be wired out to terminal blocks.
H. Overload Relay: TeSys T Motor Management System with current module shall protect the
power wiring and motor from excessive over currents. The relay shall be ambient compensated.
The sensing element shall conform to ANSI/NEMA ICS 2-222.06, Class 20 tripping time. The
management system shall incorporated Ethernet TCP/IP communications protocol. Each TeSys T
Motor managements system shall integrate a Human Machine Interface (HMI) module on the
front of the MCC. The Overload Relays shall include the LTM-E expansion unit.
I.
Terminal Blocks: Terminal blocks shall be screw type rated 600 volts, 20 amperes for control
wiring and 30 amperes power wiring (starters size 3 and larger shall terminate the power leads
directly to the contactor). The number of terminal blocks shall be specified on the drawings.
Terminal blocks shall be provided with integral marking strips and shall be permanently marked
with the conductor number as specified on the drawings. Internal wiring shall be connected on
one side of the terminal block; outgoing conductors shall be connected to the other side.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS
A. For motor starter units the control devices such as pushbuttons, selector switches, indicating
lights, and overload reset pushbuttons shall be mounted on the unit compartment door via the
HMI module.
B. Elapsed time indicator shall be incorporated into the HMI module.
C. Nameplates: Nameplates shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of Section
16000. Nameplates shall be provided for all cubicles and compartments. A nameplate shall be
provided identifying the motor control center.
D. Power Monitor: Power monitor shall be an IQ Analyzer and shall be provided in accordance with
the requirements of Section 16440.
E. Provide phase fail relays which shall comply with the requirements of the control circuits.
F. Transient voltage surge suppressor shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of
Section 16421.
2.11 DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS
A. Dry-type power transformers shall meet the requirements of Section 16460. The size and voltage
shall be as specified.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16920 - 5
C00822C13
2.12 PANELBOARDS
A. Where specified, panelboards mounted in motor control centers shall be flush mounted and shall
have the quantity and size of branch circuit breakers specified. The panelboard shall meet the
requirements of Section 16470.
2.13 ETHERNET SWITCH
A. Per Section 17803 with the exception of number and type of ports.
1. 10/100BaseTX: sixteen RJ-45 Copper Ports.
B. Prewired to all Ethernet devices within the MCC.
C. Preconfigured per Drawings.
D. One port reserved for communication to MCP 851,101.
E. Five spare ports.
F. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. N-tron model 716TX with N-View option.
2. Hirshmann.
3. Or Approved Equal.
2.14 SPARE PARTS
A. Procedures: Section 01750.
B. The following spare parts shall be provided:
1. Ten percent of the quantity provided, but not less than 12, of each fuse type and size
specified in this Section.
2. Ten percent of the quantity provided, but not less than 12, of each lamp type specified in this
Section.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. The motor control centers shall be erected in accordance with the recommendations of the
manufacturer and with the details specified herein.
B. Field wiring shall meet the requirements of Section 16120. Cables larger than No. 6 AWG which
hang from their vertical connections shall be supported within 2 feet of the connection.
C. The TeSys T overload unit shall be provided and sized based on the actual full load amperes of
the motor.
D. The motor circuit protectors shall be adjusted to the lowest setting not causing false tripping.
3.02 TRAINING
A. Provide coordinated training course, approved by the Project Representative, to instruct ten
County personnel on motor control centers. The training will be conducted at the West Point
Treatment Plant, coordinate with the Project Representative for room location. The training shall
include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Conduct four hours of training on operation and maintenance of the motor control centers
specific to the supplied motor control center.
2. Training may be split into two identical courses covering the above material as directed by
the Project Representative.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16920 - 6
C00822C13
3.03 FIELD TESTS
A. Motor control centers shall be tested in accordance with Section 16030.
B. Complete test report form 16000-D.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
16920 - 7
C00822C13
SECTION 17000
PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies requirements for process instrumentation and control for Division 17, which
consists of hardware, software, and services necessary to provide the control functions specified.
B. The required control system uses Drawings, Schedules and Narrative/Specifications. The
Drawings and Schedules depict application dependent data while the Narrative/Specifications
define broader requirements such as overall quality and performance.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
documents. It is a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the
requirements of this Section and those of a listed document, the requirements of this Section
shall prevail.
Reference
Title
API RP550
Manual on Installation of Refinery Instruments and Control
Systems, Part I - Process Instrumentation and Control Sections
1 Through 13
API RP 551
Process Measurement Instrumentation
API RP 552
Transmission Systems - first Edition
ANSI/ISA S5.4
Instrument Loop Diagrams
ISA S20
Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control
Instrumentation, Primary Elements, and Control Valves
ANSI/ISA S5.1
Instrumentation Symbols and Identification
ANSI/ISA S51.1
Process Instrumentation Terminology
ISA S5.3
Graphic Symbols for Distributed Control/Shared Display
Instrumentation, Logic and Computer systems
ISA RP12.2.02
Recommendations for the Preparation, Content and
Organization of Intrinsic Safety Control Drawings
NFPA 70
National Electric Code (NEC)
NFPA 79
Electrical Standards for Industrial Machinery
NFPA 820
Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities
IBC 1632
International Building Code
UL 508
Industrial Control Equipment
UL 508A
Industrial Control Panels
B. Qualifications: The systems integration company which constructs and installs the process
instrumentation and control system shall have the following qualifications at a minimum:
1. A single systems integration company regularly engaged in the design and installation of
systems of similar scope and complexity.
2. The systems integration company and its personnel shall have demonstrated a history of
successful execution of the work commensurate with the scope of work of this Contract.
3. A minimum of three years in the business of providing system integration.
4. Completed the same type of work specified on at least five projects of similar project.
5. Local support within 50 miles of the work site.
6. Has an electrical or controls engineer currently registered as a professional engineer in the
state of Washington to supervise the work.
C. Labeling: all electrical control panels shall be manufactured in conformance with UL 508 and
shall bear the UL label.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17000 - 1
C00822C13
D. Perform detailed design for new facilities for all interconnected components. Interconnected
components shall include new and existing mechanical and electrical equipment specified in
other sections of the Contract Documents, as well as new and existing process control system
equipment specified within Division 17.
E. Calibrate, test, and start up the complete process instrumentation and control system.
F. Place the completed system in operation including tuning loops and making final adjustments to
instruments as required during plant system and Facility start-up.
G. Provide the services of skilled instrument technicians for testing, calibration, and adjustment
activities under direct on site supervision of the electrical or controls engineer.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Qualifications.
C. Catalog Cuts of all furnished components and equipment.
D. Fabrication drawings with keyed Bills of Materials. Furnish hard copy as well as electronic
format.
E. Seismic design information including a list of equipment weighing 400 pounds or more.
F. Certifications.
G. Factory test schedule and procedure including all test forms.
H. Field test schedule and procedure including all test forms.
I.
Test Reports.
J.
Operation and maintenance information per Section 01730.
K. Elementary Drawings and Loop Diagrams: Hard copy as well as electronic format.
L. Connection Diagrams. Furnish hard copy as well as electronic format.
M. Interconnection Diagrams. Furnish hard copy as well as electronic format.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Unless otherwise specified, the definitions of terminology used in Division 17 shall be as defined
in ISA S51.1.
B. Electronic Format:
1. Drawings shall be AutoCAD 2007 or higher “.dwg” format files.
2. Tabular data shall be submitted in electronic format compatible with Microsoft Excel 2003®.
3. Text data shall be submitted in electronic format compatible with Microsoft Word 2003®.
1.05 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
A. Process Control System consists of the following, installed in accordance to NFPA 70:
1. A Programmable Logic Controller, (PLC).
2. Hardwired main control panel (MCP) including conventional panel-mounted switches,
controllers, recorders, and indicators; specific purpose panels, local control panels for
individual equipment manual control. Manufactured and including the requirements of UL
508.
3. Conventional field instrumentation including primary elements, indicating transmitters, level,
and pressure switches.
4. Final control elements such as valve positioners and solenoids.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17000 - 2
C00822C13
B. The process control system interfaces with variable frequency drives, motor control centers, and
other auxiliary equipment.
C. Hierarchical Levels:
1. A description of how each unit process is controlled within this control hierarchy is shown in
the control strategies as described in Section 17501, 17502, and 17503 and as shown on the
Drawings.
2. In all cases, the control system shall be capable of controlling all processes as described in
Division 17 and as shown on the Drawings.
3. Generally, the process control system consists of two levels of control
a. The top level is generally fully automatic with a PLC used to control the process.
b. The second level is the local control, sometimes automatic and sometimes manual.
D. SCADA System: Included for telemetering alarms and status information. The SCADA system
includes the PLC system and special communication and interface modules.
E. METROTEL: This telemetry system that backs up the PLC based SCADA system for critical
alarms and important process variables.
F. Some areas of this Contract may involve classified areas and shall be handled per NFPA 820.
1.06 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Examine the mechanical Drawings and Specifications to determine actual locations, sizes,
materials and ratings of process connections.
1.07 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Catalog Cuts:
1. Include catalog information, technical specifications, and application information for each
piece of equipment to be furnished.
2. Edit catalog cuts to indicate only those items, models, or series of equipment to be furnished.
Cross out or otherwise obliterate all extraneous materials information. Clearly identify all
configuration options for the equipment to be furnished.
3. Include data sheets in accordance to ISA S20 and a complete listing of all instruments to be
furnished or modified, as well as any existing equipment that may be included in the work of
this contract.
B. Drawings:
1. The Contract Drawings are functional in nature and do not show exact locations of equipment
and may not show all necessary interconnections between equipment.
2. Fabrication drawings:
a. Submit detailed interconnection diagrams, wiring diagrams, elementary diagrams, loop
diagrams, and process and instrument diagrams with all electrical and electronic
components clearly identified by tag number.
b. Submit detailed construction drawings for all panel layouts and equipment enclosures
with dimensions in inches. Show both exterior and interior views.
3. Wiring and loop diagrams shall carry a uniform and coordinated set of wire numbers and
terminal block numbers in compliance with Division 16 and Section 17110 to permit crossreferencing between contract documents and the drawings prepared by the Contractor.
4. Each control circuit, control loop, control panel layout design, etc., shall be represented on a
unique drawing. Control circuits, loop diagrams, and panel layouts referenced to typical
diagrams are not acceptable.
5. Drawing symbol format shall comply with NFPA 79, ISA 5.1, ISA 5.3 and where appropriate,
ISA RP 12.2.02.
6. Hardcopy plots shall be 11-inch by 17-inch (half-size) or 22 inch by 34 inch (full-size), as
required.
7. Minimum Text size: 0.125 inch for 22 x 34 inch drawings, 0.063 inch for 11 x 17 inch
drawings.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17000 - 3
C00822C13
8. Drawings shall have borders and title blocks identifying the Contract, facility, system, and
revisions to the drawing, and type of drawing. Borders and title blocks shall conform to
current County drafting standards.
9. Each release of a drawing shall carry a revision number, date, and a brief description of the
changes. All changes associated with a given release shall be indicated on the drawing by a
revision flag. Changes on the latest revision shall be indicated by clouding.
10. Transfer record drawings per Section 01720 to the County in electronic format on CD and
hard copy when work is completed.
C. Elementary and Loop Diagrams:
1. Contract Drawings are functional in nature and may not show the exact wiring needed to
achieve the required functions.
2. Provide complete elementary diagrams for equipment control.
3. Prepare loop diagrams in compliance with ISA S5.4 and provide for all analog loops.
4. Comply with NFPA 79.
5. Show circuits and devices of a system.
6. Arrange to emphasize device elements and their functions as an aid to understanding the
operation of a system and maintaining or troubleshooting that system.
7. Show wire numbers, signal polarities, and terminal block numbers. Tables for wire numbers,
signal polarity, and terminal block numbers are not acceptable.
8. Wiring between circuit elements shall terminate on terminal blocks, and shall not be
connected from element to element. Exceptions are: common wires among contacts on a
single circuit element (e.g., switch or relay contacts, but NOT the relay coil).
D. Wiring Diagrams:
1. Panels: comply with NFPA79.
2. Show components of a control panel in an arrangement similar to the actual layout of the
panel.
3. Show internal wiring between devices within the panel.
4. Show all terminal blocks whether used for internal or field wiring. Those used for field wiring
shall be clearly identified as such.
5. Wiring diagrams shall indicate insulation color code, signal polarities, and show wire numbers
and terminal block numbers.
E. Interconnection Diagrams:
1. Submit complete interconnection diagrams for field wiring.
2. Show each panel and field devices.
3. Show wire numbers, cable numbers, raceway numbers, terminal box numbers, terminal block
numbers, panel numbers, and field device tag numbers.
4. Comply with NFPA79.
F. Certifications:
1. Temperature: Test data certified by the manufacturer to demonstrate that field electronic
devices are suitable for the specified ambient temperatures.
2. Corrosion: Test data showing design features of the electronic equipment provided to protect
against damage by the specified atmospheric contaminants and specific evidence that
similarly protected electronic equipment has operated in similar environments for a period of
not less than five years without failure due to corrosion.
G. Seismic Design:
1. Procedure and submittals: per Section 01031.
2. Structures and equipment shall be braced to prevent damage from specified forces.
3. Equipment shall not be required to function properly during periods of seismic disturbance,
but shall be capable of manual restart without repair or modification following a disturbance.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17000 - 4
C00822C13
1.08 FACTORY TEST
A. Prior to factory test to be witnessed by the Project Representative, complete the following:
1. Inspect and test the process instrumentation and control system including the main control
panel, PLC, local control panels, etc., to ensure they are operational.
2. Ensure that proper materials have been used during manufacture and assembly and that
parts and materials have been correctly assembled and wired.
3. Complete an integrated test:
a. Interconnect and test the process control and instrumentation system, except for primary
elements, final control elements, and small control stations.
b. Exercise and test all functions to ensure proper manufacture and assembly of the
completed panel and/or system.
c. Test all panels.
d. Simulate inputs and outputs for primary elements, final control elements, and small
control stations excluded from the test.
B. Location: Test within Washington State.
C. The Project Representative may elect to witness the factory test. Provide a written test schedule
and notify the Project Representative no less than seven days prior to the test.
D. The factory test: Test and document the following functions:
1. Exercise and test all functions, including PLC software functions.
2. Provide test equipment to simulate discrete and analog inputs and outputs. All I/O shall be
exercised.
3. Provide a testing simulation program to exercise all discrete and analog outputs to confirm
proper loop operation.
4. Provide screens for the graphics display (OIS), if provided, to display and alarm simulated
statuses and confirm system response to operator inputs.
5. Demonstrate that all panels and subsystems have the required spare capacity for expansion.
Include test for I/O storage capacity and program memory capacity.
E. At a minimum, have the following at the test for review and use:
1. Factory test procedure including all test forms.
2. Shop drawings and hardware submittals for equipment being tested.
3. Software documentation.
F. Correct deficiencies and retest prior to shipment of the equipment to the work site.
1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Shipping:
1. Ship as a single unit to work site.
2. Anchor and brace equipment weighing 400 pounds or more to resist seismic forces per IBC
1632. Seismic criteria for the work site are listed in Section 01031.
3. No internal wiring shall be disconnected for transportation.
B. Delivery Inspection: Notify the Project Representative and provide access for inspection upon
arrival of any material or equipment to be incorporated into the work. Remove protective covers
when required.
C. Control Panels:
1. Completely wired and tested in the factory prior to being shipped to the job site.
2. Shipped as a single unit to job site after testing is complete.
3. No internal wiring shall be disconnected for transportation.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17000 - 5
C00822C13
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND QUALITY
A. The Instrument Schedule in Section 17901 lists major instruments required to provide the process
instrumentation system. Provide all functions specified in the instrument schedule. Provide
additional instruments that may be required to complete the instrument loops because of certain
characteristics of the particular equipment selected by the Contractor. Provide such additional
instruments even though not specified in the Instrument Schedule or shown on the Drawings.
B. In some cases, it is possible to combine the functions of two or more instruments specified in the
Instrument Schedule into a single instrument. An example of functions that may be ordinarily
combined into a single instrument are multiple alarms derived from a common transmission
signal. Alarm or safety functions derived directly from process measurements shall not be
combined with instruments operating from transmission signals. Critical alarms or safety
functions shall not be combined into any instrument used for process control, indication, or
recording.
C. Material shall be new, free from defects, and of the quality specified. Each type of instrument,
accessory, and device shall be by the same manufacturer.
D. Unless otherwise specified, electronic equipment shall be of solid-state construction.
Components of standard electronic assemblies shall not be replaced with components of different
characteristics in order to meet the performance requirements of the specification. Parts shall be
as shown in the instruction manuals and shall be replaceable with standard commercial
components of the same description without degrading the performance of the completed
assembly.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. The Contractor's on site instrumentation and controls project engineer shall supervise and
coordinate all activities related to the requirements of Division 17 and be responsible to the
Contractor.
2. Equipment shall be located and protected so that it is readily accessible for operation and
maintenance as required by NFPA 70. Equipment shall be located between 48 and 66
inches above the floor or a permanent work platform.
3. Provide instrument tags for all field instruments engraved with the equipment number as
identified on the Process and Instrument Diagrams and/or the Instrument Schedule Section
17901. Tags shall be stainless steel and affixed to the field equipment with stainless steel
screws or stainless steel wire. Engraved text shall be not less than 0.125 inches high.
4. Use API RP 551 and PR 552 as a guide where installation procedures that are not specified
herein.
5. Coordinate installation with other work to avoid interference with normal operation of on-line
equipment and processes.
6. Provide the services of skilled instrument technicians for testing, calibration, and adjustment
activities.
7. Unless otherwise specified, instrumentation support systems shall be constructed of stainless
steel.
8. Instrument supports shall not be attached to handrails, process piping, or mechanical
equipment unless required in order to perform the measurement function.
9. No instrument shall be mounted directly flush to walls without a minimum of 5/8” spacing.
10. Anchor and brace equipment per Section 01031.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17000 - 6
C00822C13
B. Signal Transmission:
1. Unless otherwise specified, signal transmission between electric or electronic instruments not
located within a common panel shall be 4 to 20 milliamperes and shall have a loop
compliance of at least 500 ohms.
2. Two-wire loop transmitters shall operate at 24 VDC.
3. Unless otherwise shown, milliampere signals from the field shall be converted to 1 to 5 VDC
signals at the field terminal block of each panel. Conversion error shall not exceed 0.1%. All
instruments within a panel shall be parallel wired with 1-5 VDC signals.
4. Loops shall be grounded at the field terminal block by bonding to the instrument panel signal
ground bus. Separate grounded conductors shall be provided for each loop. Daisy chaining
of grounded conductors from one loop to another is not allowed.
5. Provide isolating amplifiers for field equipment possessing a grounded input or output, or
having a common mode voltage other than system ground.
6. Convert high frequency (greater than 50 Hz) pulse rate signals from field transmitters to
analog 1- 5 VDC signals at the panel.
7. Convert platinum resistance temperature detector (RTD) outputs to 4-20 milliampere signals
at the RTD, or where shown on the Drawings. The temperature milliampere signal may be
brought from the field to the panel and converted to a 1-5 Volt DC signal.
8. All other transmission systems, such as impulse duration, low frequency pulse rate, and
voltage regulated, will not be permitted except where specifically noted in the Instrument
Schedule, Section 17901. When transmitters with non-standard outputs are specified, their
output shall be converted to 4 to 20 milliamperes at the field instrument.
9. Equipment located in classified areas shall be explosion-proof or intrinsically safe. Provide
intrinsic safety barriers approved by UL, CSA, or FM.
3.02 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. General Requirements:
1. Meet Section 01660 requirements.
2. All required tests beginning with the Factory Test, will be witnessed by the Project
Representative or County-designated person unless a written exemption is provided.
3. Notify the Project Representative of the test date seven days prior to the test.
4. Submit a detailed step-by-step test procedure, complete with forms for the recording of test
results, testing equipment used, and identification of the technician performing and
witnessing the test.
5. Test reports: conform to the requirements of Forms 17000-A through 17000-K per Section
01999 and ISA S20.
B. Test Equipment:
1. Unless specified otherwise, provide all test equipment to complete all specified tests.
2. Test equipment used to simulate inputs and read outputs shall have a rated accuracy at the
point of measurement at least three times greater than the component under test.
3. Each test instrument shall be calibrated prior to the commencement of a testing activity and
checked after the completion of a testing activity.
4. Submit dated and certified calibration reports traceable to the National Institute of Standards
and Technology (NIST) with the test report. Calibration certification date shall be within three
months of date of use on this Contract.
5. Provide buffer solutions and reference fluids for tests of analytical equipment.
C. Test Stages:
1. General:
a. Test each instrument loop in the following sequence:
Testing sequence
Form
1) Wiring
17000-A
2) Piping
17000-B
3) Individual components 17000-C through I
4) Individual loops
17000-J
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17000 - 7
C00822C13
5) Loop commissioning
17000-K
2. Testing of piping, wiring, and individual components shall be completed with certified test
reports provided to the Project Representative prior to commencement of individual loop
testing.
3. Un-witnessed factory test: Testing prior to Factory Test: per this Section.
4. Factory test: per this Section.
5. Individual component calibration and test:
a. Each instrument and final element shall be field calibrated in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommended procedure. Instruments shall then be tested in compliance
with ISA S51.1 and the data entered on the applicable test form.
b. This test is to be witnessed by the Project Representative.
c. Alarm trips, control trips, and switches shall be set to initial values specified in the
Instrument Schedule in Section 17901.
d. Final elements shall be checked for range, dead-band, and speed of response.
e. Any component that fails to meet the required tolerances shall be repaired by the
manufacturer or replaced.
f. Repeat above tests until the component is within tolerance.
6. Loop test:
a. Test each instrument loop as an integrated system. This test shall check operation from
transmitter to signal receiving components, and from the main control panel to final
control elements. This test is to be witnessed by the Project Representative.
b. Inject signals at the field terminations to simulate primary measuring elements.
c. Output of each auto/manual station shall be manually varied from 0 to 100 percent, and
correct operation of final control element verified.
d. Each alarm circuit shall be manually actuated at the field sensor.
e. Verify correct operation of the applicable annunciator window.
f. Where alarm contact is connected to the PLC system, and/or the Metrotel system, correct
PLC and Metrotel responses shall be monitored and verified.
7. Closed-loop test:
a. Test shall demonstrate stable operation of the loop under actual Facility operating
conditions. This test includes adjustment of loop tuning parameters and shall be
witnessed by the Project Representative. b.
Unless otherwise specified, adjust
tuning parameters (proportional gain, integral time constant, and derivative time constant)
for each control loop to provide ¼-amplitude damping or better.
b. Prepare a chart recording showing loop response to a step disturbance for each loop.
c. Make two charts for cascade loops, one showing the secondary loop response with its
set point on manual, and the second showing overall loop response.
d. Chart recordings shall be made at sufficient speed and amplitude to clearly show
specified amplitude damping and shall be annotated to show loop number and title, and
settings of parameters and set point.
8. SCADA system test:
a. Coordinate with the Project Representative for the requirements of this test.
b. Test both the PLC-to-SCADA connection, and the Metrotel connection. Check both
systems end-to-end from the field sensor location to the treatment plant control room.
c. Provide the services of a qualified technician for at least 24 labor-hours to assist in this
test.
d. Check that the equipment is functioning correctly and as specified.
e. Check that all specified signals are telemetered and received at the appropriate County
facility as required.
f. Check that all control signals are telemetered correctly from the treatment plant control
room and the appropriate control action is observed on the field equipment.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17000 - 8
C00822C13
SECTION 17110
PANELS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies requirements for panels, cabinets, consoles, and racks for instrumentation
and communication equipment. Additional requirements are specified in sections specifying the
various instrumentation and communication systems.
B. Equipment List:
EQUIPMENT
Main Control Panel
Combustible Gas Panel
Bubbler Panel No. 1
Bubbler Panel No. 2
Bubbler Panel No. 3
Metrotel III RTU Panel
EQUIPMENT NO.
MCP 851 101
CGD 851 102 BA
PNL 851 113
PNL 851 114
PNL 851 115
CP 851 101
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
documents. It is a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the
requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the more stringent requirements
of this Section shall prevail.
Reference
Title
FED STD 595A
Federal Standard Colors
IEC 60947-7-1
Low Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear - Terminal blocks for
copper conductors
NEMA 250
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)
NFPA 79
Electrical Standards for Industrial Machinery
UL 94
Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices
and Appliances
UL 508A
Industrial Control Panels – Standard
UL 698A
Industrial Control Panels – Classified Areas
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Dimensioned front view drawings.
C. Dimensioned internal equipment layout drawings.
D. Panel assembly drawings shall include sections showing clearances between face and rear
mounted equipment and keyed Bills of Materials.
E. Nameplate engraving schedule showing engraving by line, character size, and nameplate size.
F. Enclosure manufacturer drawings.
G. Panel seismic calculations.
H. Panel wiring diagram for each panel. The diagram shall meet the requirements as set forth in the
NFPA 79 Electrical standards for industrial machinery.
I.
Calculations of percentage wire fill for wireways including factory wiring and allowance for field
wiring.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17110 - 1
C00822C13
1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Enclosures shall be limited to the following NEMA 250 types:
Type
Location
1. NEMA 12
Control rooms, switchgear rooms, MCC rooms
2. NEMA 4X SS
All other locations and applications
3. NEMA 7D
Classified Locations
B. Panel Design:
1. General:
a. Section 17901 specifies major panels and equipment on those panels.
b. Additional panels may be specified on the Drawings.
c. Panel size and equipment layout requirements are specified on the Drawings.
2. Panel mounted operator interface devices such as selector switches: mounted less than 72”
and more than 36” above the finished plant floor.
3. Panel mounted instruments such as indicators or recorders: mounted less than 66” and more
than 40” above the finished plant floor, with the exception of the annunciator panel as
described below.
4. Panelboards: each panel containing 120-volt powered equipment with an aggregate load
greater than 1200 watts shall be provided with a panelboard per Section 16470.
5. Annunciators: Unless shown otherwise, each panel containing alarm points shall be provided
with one or more annunciators per Section 17120. Annunciators shall be mounted with the
top frame less than 90” above the finished plant floor.
6. Power supplies:
a. The main control panel shall contain a dual redundant DC power supply system as
shown on the Drawings.
b. Other panels containing direct current powered instruments or serving as the termination
point for transmission loop powered field instruments shall obtain the DC power from the
main control panel's DC power supply system.
c. The DC power supply system shall be per Section 17130.
7. Air supplies: each panel containing pneumatically operated instruments shall contain a dual
service regulator and distribution manifold.
C. Labeling:
1. Panels shall be manufactured and labeled in accordance with UL 508A and/or UL 698A and
shall bear the UL label.
2. Design shown on Drawings is for reference and shall be altered as required to make the
panels UL 508A compliant.
D. Panel Schedule
ITEM
Instrument Control Panel
Combustible Gas Panel
Bubbler Panel
Bubbler Panel
Bubbler Panel
Metrotel RTU Panel
EQT Number
MCP 851,101
CGD 851,102 BA
PNL 851,113
PNL 851,114
PNL 851,115
CP 851,101
NEMA Type
NEMA 12
NEMA 4X
Back Pan Only
Back Pan Only
Back Pan Only
NEMA 12
Refer to Divisions 11 through 16 for additional panels which may cross-reference Division 17
for panel requirements.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND QUALITY
A. General:
1. Panelwork shall be designed for seismic requirements per Section 01031.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17110 - 2
C00822C13
2.
3.
4.
5.
Cutouts for future equipment shall be blanked off with suitable metal covers.
Instrument tag numbers shall be identified on the panel rear per this Section.
Nameplates shall identify face-mounted instruments per paragraph per this Section.
Instruments shall be mounted in a manner that allows ease of access to components and
ease of removal.
6. Face-mounted instruments that are more than six inches deep, weigh more than 10 pounds,
or exert more than a 4 ft-lb moment force on the face of the panel shall be supported
underneath at the rear by a 1-inch x 1/8-inch thick steel angle.
7. Face-mounted equipment shall be flush or semi-flush with escutcheons.
8. Floor mounted cabinets less than 60 inches high shall be provided with floor stands to raise
the top of the panel to at least 60 inches above the floor or work platform. Or, if panel weighs
less than 100 pounds and wall space is available, wall mounting may be used in lieu of a floor
stand.
B. Fabrication of NEMA Type 12 Industrial Use, Indoor Cabinets with Front Doors:
1. Enclosure fabricated from 16-gauge minimum thickness sheet steel for enclosures smaller
than 24"x24", and 14-gauge minimum for larger enclosures. Face-mounted instruments shall
be mounted in the door.
2. Interior frame or otherwise formed so as to provide a rigid structure.
3. Doors shall be hung on full-length continuous (piano-type) hinges and equipped with vaulttype latch capable of accepting a 3/8-inch-shackle padlock.
4. Three-point latch hardware shall be provided for doors exceeding 48 inches height. Door
width shall not exceed 34 inches.
C. Fabrication of NEMA Type 4X Cabinets:
1. NEMA 250, Type 4X requirements.
2. Fabricated from 14 gauge (minimum thickness) Type 304L stainless steel (or fiberglass when
specifically specified) and provided with an interior frame or otherwise formed to provide a
rigid structure.
3. Where face-mounted instruments are specified mount on an interior sub-panel.
4. Doors:
a. Vault-type latch and, if greater than 48 inches high, three-point latch hardware.
b. Latch shall accept a 3/8-inch shackle padlock.
c. Unless shown otherwise, door width shall not exceed 36 inches.
5. For cabinets located outdoors, equip with rain and sun shields.
D. Fabrication of NEMA 7D Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 7 suitable for Class 1, Division 1, Group D
classified area and assembled and installed to maintain this rating.
2.02 HEATING AND VENTILATING
A. Cooling shall be provided to maintain the internal panel temperature below 104 degrees F (40 C)
when all equipment is operating at its maximum heat load and the ambient temperature is 86
degrees F (30 °C). Filtered forced air ventilation shall be provided for NEMA 12 cabinets and
either closed glycol loop heat exchange system or a mechanical refrigeration system for NEMA
4X and NEMA 7 enclosures.
B. Fans shall be equipped with UL-approved washable filters and provide at least 240 CFM. Noise
level at three feet from exterior wall and 30 degrees off axis shall not exceed 60 db.
C. Outdoor or below grade cabinets shall not be insulated and shall be provided with
thermostatically controlled space heaters.
D. Heater wattage shall to maintain the air temperature inside the cabinet above the dew point or 50
degrees F (10 °C), whichever is higher, at all times.
E. If space heater surface temperature exceeds 122 degrees F (50 °C), an expanded metal guard
shall be provided.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17110 - 3
C00822C13
F. When a strip type heater is used, the heater shall be a 240 VAC heater and connected to 120
VAC and sized to produce the required heat at 120 VAC.
G. Thermostat Acceptable Manufacturer:
1. Honeywell T631B1054.
2. Penn Controls A28AA-4.
3. Or Approved Equal.
2.03 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
A. Machine engraved laminated black phenolic nameplates 1/16-inch thick with white lettering shall
be provided for panel mounted equipment. Nameplate minimum size: ¾-inch high by 2.0-inch
long.
B. Nameplate engraving shall be as specified and shall carry the instrument tag number in 3/32-inch
(2.4 mm) minimum size lettering on the bottom line, or engraved as shown on the Drawings.
C. Nameplates shall be attached to the panel with a minimum of two self-tapping 304 stainless steel
screws.
D. Wording may be changed if changes are made prior to commencement of engraving.
E. Machine-printed laminated adhesive labels shall identify tag number of instruments and
equipment inside panels.
F. Attach nameplates and labels to panel surfaces, not to instruments.
2.04 WIRING AND ELECTRICAL DEVICES
A. Wiring:
1. Power, control and signal wiring inside panels:
a. Power and control conductors: Type MTW. Conductor insulation rated for 600 volts and
90 degree C in dry locations. Conductors shall be stranded copper minimum 16 AWG.
b. Wiring for instrumentation analog signals: Aluminum foil shielded twisted pairs, minimum
18 AWG, stranded copper conductors with drain. Conductor insulation shall be PE in
black and white or clear with overall jacket of grey PVC, Type CM rated 300V and 60°C
in dry locations. Belden type 8760, Alpha 2422C, or approved equal.
c. Wiring for instrumentation analog signals shall be run continuously from measuring
instrument to control cabinet terminal strips without splices.
d. Conductor size vs. fuse rating for conductors inside panels:
Wire
Fuse
18 AWG
<1 AMP
16 AWG
5 AMPS
14 AWG
15 AMPS
12 AWG
20 AMPS
2. Support wiring independent of terminations by slotted flame retardant plastic wiring channels.
3. Wiring channels shall comply with UL94, Type V. Wiring channel fill shall not exceed 40
percent.
B. Wire Naming and Marking
1. Wiring shall be marked at terminations with machine printed plastic sleeves per Section
16000.
2. Wire numbers shall consist of three parts, or as shown on the Drawings.
3. Unless shown otherwise, the prefix of the wire number shall be the instrument loop number.
4. If an instrument loop number is not available, the lowest mechanical equipment number of all
final drives in the circuit shall be used.
5. Following the prefix shall be a code letter. The third part of the wire number shall be a
number that identifies wires in a circuit that are electrically identical.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17110 - 4
C00822C13
6. Label each control and instrumentation wire as follows:
a. FFF, LLL-CC-NNN, Where:
FFF
= facility number
LLL
= equipment, panel or loop number
CC
= wire code from table
NNN = wire number
C. Color Coding
1. Color coding of wires within control panels shall be as follows (subject to restriction by UL
508A and/or UL 698A):
WIRE COLOR CODES
Code
Type
Color
Use
Volts
S1
TSP
BLACK
SIGNAL (+)
5-24 VDC
S2
TSP
WHITE or
SIGNAL (-)
5-24 VDC
CLEAR
SG
TSP
BARE
SHIELD DRAIN
5-24 VDC
S1
TRIAD
BLACK
SIGNAL
0-24 VDC
S2
TRIAD
WHITE
SIGNAL
0-24 VDC
S3
TRIAD
RED
SIGNAL
0-24 VDC
SG
TRIAD
BARE
SHIELD DRAIN
0-24 VDC
24P
SINGLE
BLUE
POWER (+)
24 VDC
24C
SINGLE
WHITE/BLUE
COMMON (-)
24 VDC
D
SINGLE
BLUE
CONTROL
24 VDC
125P
SINGLE
BLUE
POWER
125 VDC
125C
SINGLE
WHITE/BLUE
COMMON
125 VDC
B
SINGLE
BLUE
CONTROL
125 VDC
L
SINGLE
BLACK
POWER
120 VAC
N
SINGLE
WHITE
NEUTRAL
120 VAC
C
SINGLE
BLACK
CONTROL
120 VAC
PG
SINGLE
GREEN
POWER GND
EARTH GND
SG
SINGLE
GREEN/YELLO
SIGNAL GND
EARTH GND
W
UL
SINGLE
BLACK/WHT
UPS POWER
120 VAC
UN
SINGLE
WHITE/GREY
UPS NEUTRAL
120 VAC
M
SINGLE
YELLOW
MCC
120 VAC
MN
SINGLE
WHITE/YELLOW MCC NEUTRAL
120 VAC
GND'D
A
SINGLE
BLACK OR
ANNUNCIATOR
120 VAC or
BLUE
24VDC
IO
SINGLE
BLACK OR
ISOL I/O
120 AC or
BLUE
24VDC
R
SINGLE
BLUE
RTU
12 VDC
IS
SINGLE
LIGHT BLUE
INTRINSIC SAFE <12 VDC
2. Power and control wiring shall be carried in covered wiring channels separate from low
voltage analog signal circuits.
D. Terminal blocks and accessories:
1. UL listed.
2. DIN rail mounted. Compliant with IEC 60947-7-1.
3. Compression clamp type terminal rated for 600 volts and 30 Amperes.
4. 22 AWG to 12 AWG copper wire size range.
5. Mark using marker carrier and preprinted marker bars for the terminal numbers.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17110 - 5
C00822C13
6. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Entrelec Series
1) Typical Entrelec catalog numbers are the following:
Terminal block
Type MS 4/6
Switch block
Type M 4/6.SNT
Fuse block
Types M 4/8.SFL, M 4/8.SFD, M 4/8.SFD1
b. Phoenix Contact Series UK IEC Terminal Blocks.
c. Allen-Bradley Series 1492 IEC Terminal Blocks.
d. Or Approved Equal.
7. Field connections shall be to separate terminal blocks. Terminal blocks for field terminations
shall be in a separate part of the panel close to where the field cables enter the panel.
8. External circuits shall be fused. Fuses for 120 VAC: include blown fuse indicator lamps.
9. Comply with UL requirements in construction.
2.05 PANEL GROUNDING
A. Each panel shall be provided with two copper ground bars. One bar shall be bonded to the panel
frame or sheet metal and to the supply ground system per NEC. The second (signal) ground bar
shall be mounted on insulated stand-offs and shall be bonded to the frame ground bar at one
point only.
B. Signal circuits, signal cable shields, and low-voltage DC power supply commons shall be bonded
to the signal ground bar.
C. Surge protectors and separately derived AC power supplies shall be bonded to the frame ground
bar.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Wired as shown on the wiring diagrams.
B. Control room cabinets:
1. Mount on channel iron sills as specified.
2. Sills shall be leveled so panel structures will not be distorted.
3. Panels shall be shimmed to precise alignment so doors operate without binding.
4. Sealant shall be provided under panels not located in dry control or electrical equipment
rooms.
5. Mount field panels and cabinets in compliance per Section 17000.
6. Floor-mounted cabinets except in dry control rooms or electrical equipment rooms shall be
mounted on 3-1/2-inch minimum height concrete pads or grouted bases as specified
7. Mount record drawings for wiring, connection and interconnection diagrams behind a piece of
Plexiglas on the inside of one (or more) door(s).
3.02 COATING
A. Except for stainless steel and fiberglass panels, all panels and cabinets shall be painted inside
and out. Exterior finish shall be an enamel meeting ANSI 61 gray. Interior panel finish shall be
an enamel meeting Federal Standard 595: 27880 white.
B. Treat cutouts to prevent corrosion.
C. Except for stainless steel enclosures, the metal surfaces of panels, cabinets, and consoles, shall
be prepared, primed, and finish coated per Section 09900, System J-2.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17110 - 6
C00822C13
D. Except for stainless steel enclosures, the metal edges of cutouts for instruments, switches, lights,
etc., in panels, cabinets, and consoles shall be prepared, primed, and finish coated per Section
09900, System J-2.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17110 - 7
C00822C13
SECTION 17120
ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEMS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies requirements for alarm annunciator systems. Application requirements are
specified in the Alarm Schedule, Section 17902, and the Annunciator Connection Diagrams,
included on the Drawings.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
documents. It is a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the
requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section
shall prevail.
Reference
Title
ISA S18.1
Annunciator Sequences and Specifications
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Dimensioned Layout Drawings.
C. Engraving Window Inscription Schedule.
D. Test Data.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEMS
A. Annunciators shall be back-lighted window type with window engraving.
B. Unless otherwise specified, windows shall accommodate four lines of 16 characters not less than
7/32 inches in height.
C. Unless otherwise specified, windows shall be engraved white translucent plastic with black filled
characters. Windows shall each be illuminated with a minimum of two LED lamps.
D. Unless otherwise specified, annunciator logic shall operate from the panel grounded 24 VDC
power supply system. Power requirement shall be less than 2 Watts per input.
E. Provide not less than 20 percent spare points complete with logic cards and blank windows.
F. Sequence logic shall be solid-state logic type. Annunciator system shall be programmable via
field-settable jumpers.
G. Unless otherwise specified, provide one alarm input point per logic card.
H. Signal inputs shall be optically isolated and shall be field programmable or jumperable for
normally open or normally closed field contacts, response time, and isolated/non-isolated FCV
supply. Field Contact voltage shall be 120 VAC.
I.
Unless otherwise specified, the alarm sequence shall be ISA S18.1, Sequence A. Other
sequences may be software programmable.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17120 - 1
C00822C13
J.
Provide auxiliary relays with one (minimum) field selectable form A or form B contact for each
alarm point. Auxiliary contacts shall follow Field Contacts and not lamp sequence or TEST
sequence.
K. Unless otherwise shown, the sensing voltage for the field trouble contacts shall be 120 VAC.
L. Provide electronic audible signal with output level adjustable from 68 to 90 dB (reference 0.0002
dynes/cm2).
M. Provide separately mounted ACKNOWLEDGE and TEST pushbuttons shall be separately
mounted on the face of the main control panel. These pushbuttons shall not be part of an
annunciator window box.
N. Acceptable Manufacturer:
1. Panalarm Series 90.
2. Ametek RIS.
3. Or Approved Equal.
2.02 ALARM INDICATOR LIGHT
A. Rated for heavy duty use.
B. Contain a transistorized power supply and xenon flash tube and Lexan optic lens. Lens color shall
be as specified.
C. Suitable for wall mounting,
D. Acceptable manufacturer:
1. Edwards Adapt Beacon Heavy Duty Strobe Light No. 50 SIN.
2. Allen Bradley 855B.
3. Or Approved Equal.
2.03 HORN
A. Operating voltage: 120 VAC enclosed buzzer.
B. Enclosure: NEMA 4 Weatherproof for outdoor applications.
C. Mounting: Surface mount type for panel installation.
D. Provide: ON/OFF switch mounted inside the main control panel to turn off the horn during
maintenance.
E. The ON/OFF switch shall energize an indicating light mounted on the face of the main control
panel.
F. Acceptable manufacturer:
1. Federal Signal Model WB350.
2. FaradayEdwards Catalog No. 7410WB.
3. Or Approved Equal.
2.04 AUXILIARY RELAY
A. Provide a normally energized auxiliary relay for re-transmitting a common alarm.
B. Acceptable Manufacturer:
1. Panalarm Model 90AX2.
2. Ametek RIS.
3. Or Approved Equal.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17120 - 2
C00822C13
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Mounted and connected in the main control panel.
1. Windows engraved and filled with permanent black ink.
2. Test per Section 17000.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17120 - 3
C00822C13
SECTION 17130
POWER SUPPLY AND CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies requirements for power supply and conditioning equipment required to
support the instrumentation and communication systems.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
documents. It is a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the
requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the more stringent requirements of
this Section shall prevail.
Reference
Title
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code (NEC)
UL 1012
Power Units other than Class 2
UL 1283
Electromagnetic Interference Filters
B. Labeling: power supply equipment shall bear a UL or other label acceptable to the inspection
authority having jurisdiction for the specified application.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Dimensional Drawings.
C. Catalog Cuts including performance parameters.
D. Installation Information.
E. Wiring Diagrams.
F. Operations and maintenance information per Section 01730.
1.04 PLANT ELECTRICAL SUPPLY SYSTEM
A. Electric power for instrumentation and communication systems shall be obtained from the power
distribution system specified in Division 16. This power is not regulated, waveforms may be
distorted, and significant amounts of electrical noise may be present.
B. Unless otherwise specified, provide all necessary power supply and conditioning equipment for all
required voltages and current capacities and of adequate quality to ensure reliable operation of the
instrumentation and communication systems.
C. Unless otherwise specified, assume that the power supply for instrumentation systems is 120 volts
plus or minus 15 percent, 60 hertz plus or minus 3 hertz, and 5 percent harmonic distortion.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Except for power supply units that form an integral part of an individual piece of equipment.
1. Comply with UL 1012.
2. Approved by UL, CSA, or FM for the application.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17130 - 1
C00822C13
B. Power supply equipment serving multiple instrument loops shall be provided in hot-standby
configurations such that failure of a single unit will not disable all or any part of the instrumentation
and communication systems.
C. Provide diode isolation for redundant direct current supply units.
D. Connect the DC power supply negative output terminal to the signal ground bus at a single point.
2.02 ALTERNATING CURRENT (AC) VOLTAGE REGULATORS
A. Solid-state tap-changing type, insensitive to line frequency variations between 47 and 63 hertz.
Ferro resonant units are not acceptable.
B. Output regulation for input voltage variation from 85 to 125 volts shall not exceed 4 percent.
C. Output regulation for load variation from 0 to 100 percent shall not exceed 1.0 percent.
D. Response time shall be 1.0 cycles or less.
E. Voltage regulators serving panelboards and control panels shall have a load capacity not less than
200 percent of the connected load.
F. Voltage regulators serving individual instruments shall have a load capacity not less than 125
percent of the connected load.
G. Power loss shall not exceed 2 percent of the regulator capacity, and harmonic distortion introduced
by the regulator shall not exceed 0.1 percent.
H. Regulator output shall be fully protected against internal faults, external overloads, and short
circuits.
I.
Three-phase units shall be 4-wire, wye-connected, and capable of supporting 100 percent
unbalanced load.
2.03 NOISE-SUPPRESSION ISOLATION TRANSFORMERS
A. For AC powered instrumentation loads containing solid-state circuitry where such is not included
within the instrument.
B. Triple box shield type.
C. Each coil shall be completely enclosed in a grounded conductive faraday shield, and the overall
transformer enclosed in a faraday shield.
D. Common mode noise attenuation between primary and secondary shall exceed 140 dB at 1.0 kHz.
E. Dielectric strength shall be 2500 volts minimum.
F. Serving panelboards and control panels shall have a load capacity not less than 200 percent of the
connected load.
G. Serving individual instruments shall have a load capacity not less than 125 percent of the
connected load.
H. Power loss shall not exceed 2.0 percent of the maximum load rating.
I.
Harmonic distortion introduced by the isolation transformer shall not exceed 0.1 percent.
J.
Three-phase units shall be 4-wire, wye-connected, and capable of supporting 100 percent
unbalanced load.
K. Acceptable manufacturer:
1. Topaz T1.
2. Eaton CVX series.
3. Or Approved Equal.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17130 - 2
C00822C13
2.04 DIRECT-CURRENT POWER SUPPLIES
A. Dual (Redundant) DC Power Supply:
1. UL labeled, regulated redundant power package with the following features:
2. Dual and identical DC power supplies.
3. Dual (redundant) isolation diodes or "N+1" redundant design allowing forced current sharing
among individual supplies.
4. Barrier block terminals for all wiring connections.
5. Connections for two 120 VAC power sources.
6. 24 VDC output voltage with accessible adjustment for a minimum of plus or minus 0.5 volts;
floating output.
7. Output voltmeter and output ammeter for each internal power supply.
8. Control for automatically selecting one of the two power supplies as master.
9. SPDT (minimum) alarm contact for external alarm circuit tripped for power supply failure.
10. Line regulation: shall not exceed plus or minus 0.05 percent for line voltage variation from 93
to 132 volts.
11. Load regulation: full load and no load shall not exceed plus or minus 0.05 percent.
12. Ripple shall not exceed 15 mVrms.
13. Electronic current limiting to provide short circuit protection and recovery on the output.
14. Enclosure: 19-inch rack mount or wall-mount enclosure suitable for locating on mounting
panel inside a control panel.
15. Automatic adjustable output over-voltage shutdown with alarm and over-temperature
protection shall be provided. EMI filtering of both AC input and DC output shall be provided.
16. Output current: as listed in the instrument index Section 17901 or on the contract drawings.
17. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Acopian Series RWL24.
b. Kepco series MST.
c. Lambda series ZUP.
d. Or Approved Equal.
B. Linear DC Power Supply:
1. UL labeled, linear regulated power supply with the following features:
2. Barrier block terminals for all wiring connections.
3. 120 VAC input voltage.
4. 24 VDC output voltage with accessible adjustment for a minimum of plus or minus 0.5 volts.
5. Floating output allowing either output terminal to be connected to system ground.
6. Line regulation: Shall not exceed plus or minus 0.15 percent for line voltage variation from
105 to 125 volts.
7. Load regulation: Between full load and no load shall not exceed plus or minus 0.1 percent.
8. Ripple and noise: Shall not exceed 2 mVrms.
9. Electronic current limiting to provide short circuit protection and recovery on the output.
10. Enclosure: Fully enclosed and suitable for locating on mounting panel inside a control panel.
11. Output current: Minimum 3.5 Amperes at 40 degrees C.
12. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Acopian Gold Box Single Output Model B24G350.
b. Lambda series NN.
c. Or Approved Equal.
2.05 SURGE PROTECTION
A. For protection against line generated transients for both normal and common mode protection.
B. The unit shall be a non-degrading, solid state, series low pass filter with transient protection having
the following features:
1. UL compliant for UL categories 1283 and 1449.
2. Input voltage: 120 VAC single-phase, 47-63 hertz.
3. Load current: 20 amperes minimum.
4. Barrier type terminal blocks for line and load hard-wired connections.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17130 - 3
C00822C13
5. Response time: less than 1 nsec normal mode and 5nsec common mode.
6. HF noise suppression: -25 dB at 100 KHz and -55 dB at 5-10 MHz.
7. Transient suppression (per IEEE C62.41): Line-neutral, line-ground, neutral-ground - 15,000
Amps (8 x 20 usec); Category A Ringwave: Normal mode: 6V, Common mode: 330V.
8. Operating temperature: -40 degrees C to +45 degrees C.
9. Acceptable manufacturer:
a. Control-Concepts Islatrol IC+130.
b. Control-Concepts Islatrol IE+120.
c. Eaton/Cutler Hammer AEGIS HW.
d. Or Approved Equal.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Unless otherwise specified, mount and connect in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide line side disconnect switches.
C. Provide line and load side overcurrent protection in compliance with NFPA 70.
D. Disconnect switches per Section 16175.
E. Small power supply and conditioning equipment may be mounted in the panel served. Larger
units shall be mounted adjacent to the equipment served.
F. Where unconditioned power is brought into control panels, it shall be enclosed in metallic raceways
within the panel.
G. When larger than 5 KVA load capacity supported from surfaces other than concrete provide with
sound isolators.
H. Final raceway connections shall be a flexible conduit in compliance with Section 16110.
I.
When not designed for exposed mounting, house in panels per Section 17110.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17130 - 4
C00822C13
SECTION 17132
SINGLE PHASE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY EQUIPMENT
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies on-line single-phase PWM-type uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
equipment, 1.0 through 10 kVA output. UPS equipment shall include rectifier/charger, pulsewidth-modulation inverter, static transfer switch, maintenance bypass switch, AC input
disconnect, meters, controls, indicators, battery, battery disconnect switch, battery rack, and
appurtenances.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
documents. It is a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the
requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section
shall prevail.
Reference
Title
IEEE 485
Recommended Practice for Sizing Lead- Acid Batteries for
Stationary Applications
NEMA 250
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code (NEC) NOT USED
UL1778
Uninterruptible Power Supply Equipment
B. Label: UPS equipment shall bear a UL or other label acceptable to the inspection authority
having jurisdiction for the specific application and be UL1778 listed.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedure: Section 01300.
B. Catalog cuts showing general features of the UPS and batteries.
C. Battery discharge/recharge calculations.
D. Dimensions and weights of components including working clearances.
E. Block diagram depicting functional operation of UPS.
F. Installation information.
G. Wiring Diagrams, internal and external.
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Equipment output characteristics:
1. Power factor: 1.0 to 0.8 lagging.
2. Wave form: Sinusoidal, 5% maximum total harmonic distortion.
3. Voltage regulation: ±3% nominal for no load to full load, 1.0 to 0.8 lagging power factor,
minimum to maximum DC voltage, or 0 to 40 degrees C ambient.
4. Transient response: ±10% maximum upon application or removal of 50 to 100% load step;
recovery to ±5% within 50mS.
5. Voltage unbalance: ±5% with 100% load unbalance.
6. Overload capability: 200% for 10 seconds.
7. Frequency: Synchronized to power source. Automatic disconnect at ±0.5Hz; free running
±0.1%.
8. Battery charger float voltage : 2.25V/cell; recharge time less than 8 hours.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17132 - 1
C00822C13
9. Solid-state transfer switch: Maximum disturbance time, 1/4 cycle; capacity, 11,000A i sq. t.
B. Equipment input characteristics:
1. Normal source: 120 VAC, 1 phase
2. Input Power Factor: 95% lagging, minimum
3. Operating voltage range: +10% to -15%, (-20% without battery discharge).
4. Frequency range: ±5%.
5. Battery voltage: 48 VDC-120VDC nominal; discharge cut-off at 1.75V/cell.
C. Environmental:
1. Operating temperature: 0 - 40 C
2. Humidity: 5% - 95% RH, non-condensing.
3. Altitude: 0 - 5000 ft
4. Audible Noise @ 1m: 55 dB maximum, A-weighted
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. UPS and battery shall be housed in a free standing NEMA 250, Type 1, locking caster base
enclosure for installation, service, and ventilation.
B. UPS shall be arranged for rear or top entry of all conduits.
C. UPS and batteries as a system shall be capable of carrying 125% of the rated load for 10
minutes, and 50% of rated load for 30 minutes. Efficiency at full load under normal operation
shall not be less than 72%.
D. Acceptable Manufacturer:
1. Liebert UPStation GTX.
2. PowerWare FerrUPS FE.
3. Or Approved Equal.
2.02 BATTERY CHARGER / RECTIFIER
A. Constant-voltage type, capable of supplying the UPS direct current bus with no battery attached.
2.03 INVERTER
A. Solid-state pulse-width-modulation type.
2.04 BATTERY
A. Sealed maintenance-free type with 7-year life expectancy.
B. Specific gravity: 1.215 at 25 degrees C.
C. Size in accordance with IEEE 485.
2.05 MAINTENANCE BYPASS SWITCH
A. Fully rated for the UPS capacity and make before break contacts.
B. Mounted external to the UPS cabinet to permit completely de-energizing all components within
the cabinet during maintenance.
2.06 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
A. Monitoring Instruments: Provide display panel indicator with the following parameters:
1. Percent load.
2. Battery reserve.
3. Input power.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17132 - 2
C00822C13
4. Rectifier/charger.
5. Output normal status.
B. Alarm Indication:
1. AC input failure.
2. Battery low.
3. Output under voltage.
4. Output over voltage.
5. DC bus over voltage.
6. Bypass on.
C. Alarm Signal Output: Provide normally closed common alarm contact.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and per NFPA 70.
3.02 TESTING
A. General: Test prior to operational use.
B. Load Test:
1. Use 0.8 power factor load bank.
2. Disconnect AC input and operate UPS at rated load.
3. Record operating time and battery voltage.
4. Continue operation at rated load battery cut-off.
5. Monitor battery voltage and record value just prior to cut-off.
C. Battery Re-charge Test: Connect AC power and record battery specific gravity at end of specified
recharge duration.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17132 - 3
C00822C13
SECTION 17211
PROCESS TAPS AND PRIMARY ELEMENTS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies requirements for instrumentation elements that quantitatively convert the
measured variable energy into a form suitable for measurement and process measurement
accessories.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
documents. It is a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the
requirements of this Section and those of a listed document, the requirements of this Section
shall prevail.
Reference
Title
API RP550
Manual on Installation of Refinery Instruments and Control
Systems, Part 1 - Process Instrumentation and Control
ASTM A269
Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless
Steel Tubing for General Service
ASTM A276
Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes
ASTM D1248
Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials For
Wire and Cable
SAMA PMC 17-10
Bushings and Wells for Temperature Sensing Elements
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. All submittals shall be per Section 17000.
C. Flow calculation for each differential-type flow element.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 INSTRUMENTATION SPECIFICATION SHEETS (INSTRUSPEC)
A. General requirements for primary elements specified in this Section are listed on INSTRUSPEC
sheets in this Section.
2.02 VALVES
A. Isolation Valves:
1. Full port ball valves with ASTM A276, 316 stainless steel trim and body.
2. Teflon seats and packing.
3. Acceptable manufacturer:
a. Parker Hannifin.
b. Whitey.
c. Hoke.
d. Or Approved Equal.
B. Gage Valves:
1. Machined from ASTM A276 bar stock.
2. Use with 1/2-inch NPT connections and integral bleed valve.
3. Acceptable manufacturer:
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17211 - 1
C00822C13
a. Anderson Greenwood M9530.
b. Hoke 6801L8Y.
c. Or Approved Equal.
C. Root Valves:
1. ASTM A276, Type 316 stainless steel bar stock.
2. 1/2-inch NPT male process connection and three 1/2-inch NPT female instrument
connections.
3. One instrument connection shall be provided with an ASTM A276, Type 316 stainless steel
bleed valve.
4. ASTM A276, Type 316 stainless steel plugs for unused ports.
5. Lagging type units shall be provided for insulated vessels and pipes.
6. Acceptable manufacturer:
a. Anderson Greenwood M5 AVS-44.
b. Hoke 6802L8Y.
c. Or Approved Equal.
D. Manifolds:
1. Three-valve bar-stock type.
2. Body: machined from ASTM A276, Type 316 stainless steel bar stock.
3. Valves shall be globe configuration with 316 stainless steel ball seats and Teflon stem
packing.
4. Designed for direct mounting to differential pressure transmitters in place of the flanges
normally furnished.
5. Fabricated manifolds or manifolds employing needle or soft seat valves are not acceptable.
6. Purge taps, 1/8-inch NPT shall be furnished on manifolds where water purge is specified.
7. Acceptable manufacturer:
a. Anderson Greenwood M4TVS.
b. Hoke 8123F8Y.
c. Or Approved Equal.
2.03 TUBING AND TUBING FITTINGS
A. Instrument tubing:
1. Process impulse lines: 1/2-inch x 0.065-inch seamless annealed ASTM A269 Type 316
stainless steel between the process connection and instruments.
2. Pneumatic tubing: Low pressure (<80 PSIG) pneumatic tubing within protective enclosures or
conduit may be 1/4-, 3/8, or 1/2-inch high molecular weight polyethylene or nylon per ASTM
D1248, Type III, Class C, Grade 3 with 0.04 inch minimum wall thickness, as required.
B. Tubing fittings:
1. Type 316 stainless steel.
2. Swage ferrule design with components (nut, body and ferrule system) interchangeable with
those of at least one other manufacturer.
3. Flare and ball sleeve compression type are not acceptable.
4. Acceptable manufacturer:
a. Parker Hannifin.
b. Swagelok.
c. Hoke.
d. Or Approved Equal.
2.04 CHEMICAL SEALS
A. Diaphragm:
1. Unless otherwise specified, seal shall be the diaphragm type with flushing connection, Type
316 stainless steel body and Type 316L diaphragm.
2. Unless otherwise specified, fill fluid shall be DC200 silicone oil.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17211 - 2
C00822C13
3. Acceptable manufacturer:
a. Ashcroft Type 100/101.
b. Or Approved Equal
B. Annular:
1. Seal shall be the in-line full stream captive sensing liquid type.
2. Metallic wetted parts shall be 316 stainless steel.
3. Unless otherwise specified, flexible cylinder shall be Buna-N.
4. Rated 200 psig with not more than 5-inch WC hysteresis.
5. Unless otherwise specified, fill fluid shall be DC200 silicone oil.
6. Acceptable manufacturer
a. Ashcroft Series 80.
b. Or Approved Equal
2.05 BUSHINGS AND THERMOWELLS
A. Comply with SAMA PMC17-10.
B. Unless otherwise specified, machined from 316 stainless steel bar stock.
C. On insulated vessels or pipes, temperature taps with1/2-inch NPT, and lagging extensions.
2.06 PURGE ASSEMBLIES
A. Air purge assembly:
1. Constant-differential relay, needle valve, check valve and 0.2 to 2.0 SCFH rotameter.
2. Acceptable manufacturer:
a. Fischer & Porter Series 10A6100 Purgemaster w/optional d.p. regulator and low flow
range needle valve.
b. Wallace/Tiernan model 32-A056 flowmeter w/optional low capacity outlet flow regulator.
c. Or Approved equal.
B. Water purge assembly:
1. Strainer, constant-differential regulator, needle valve, check valve, and 20 to 200 cc/m
rotameter.
2. Acceptable manufacturer:
a. Assembly:
1) Moore Products 63BD4A.
2) Fischer & Porter 10A3137N-53BR2110.
3) Or Approved Equal.
4) Strainer: 155 micron wye-type
a) ASCO 8600A2.
b) Crane.
c) Or Approved Equal.
2.07 FLOW STRAIGHTENING VANES
A. Acceptable manufacturer:
1. Apollo Engineering Co.
2. Daniel Industries Model 1106F.
3. Or Approved Equal.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Process Connections:
1. Unless otherwise specified, process taps shall comply with API RP550.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17211 - 3
C00822C13
2. Root valves shall be provided at taps, except temperature taps and pump discharge pressure
taps.
3. Arrange, where possible, such that instruments may be readily removed for maintenance
without disruption of process units or draining of large tanks or vessels.
a. Unions or flange connections shall be provided as necessary to permit removal without
rotating equipment.
b. Where process taps are not readily accessible from instrument locations, a block valve
shall be provided at the instrument. Block valves shall also be provided for each
instrument where multiple instruments are connected to one process tap.
B. Electrical Connections: final connections between rigid raceway systems and instruments shall
be made with jacketed flexible conduit with a maximum length of two feet.
3.02 TESTING
A. Testing requirements per Paragraph 17000.
3.03 INSTRUSPEC SHEETS
A. The following INSTRUSPEC sheets are included in this Article:
INSTRUSPEC Symbol
Instrument Description
LBE
Bubbler assembly
PG
Pressure gage
PLG
Low range pressure gage
Instrument Function
Level measurement
Pressure measurement
Pressure measurement
B.
Instrument Identification:
Instrument Description:
Instrument Function:
Power Supply:
Signal Input:
Signal Output:
Process Connection:
Product Requirements:
Bubbler Assembly:
Bubbler Panel:
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
LBE
Bubbler assembly
Level measurement
As specified in Section 17140.
Water column pressure
NA
Bubbler pipe assembly
Each bubbler system shall consist of a bubbler
panel, bubbler pipe assembly and interconnecting
piping, as shown.
1. Each bubbler panel shall be as shown.
2. Each bubbler panel shall include one, two or
three level measuring loops as shown.
3. Unless shown otherwise, for each level
measuring loop the instruments mounted on the
door shall include a pressure gauge, an air purge
assembly with a rear-of-door mounted rotameter,
and a three-position hand operated air switch.
4. Unless shown otherwise, for each level
measuring loop, the instruments mounted inside the
enclosure shall include an adjustable air filter
regulator with output gauge, and pressure sensing
instrumentation such as a differential pressure
transmitter. (See Section 17212)
17211 - 4
C00822C13
Pressure Gauge:
Constant Differential
Air Purge Assembly:
1. Minimum 4- inch dial size; ANSI grade A (1.5
percent of span accuracy) Bourdon tube or
diaphragm measurement element; wetted materials
shall be 316 stainless steel; range shall be zero
based and selected to be as close to the maximum
water depth measurement range as possible by
using a standard gauge range; case shall be black
epoxy coated aluminum or stainless steel designed
for flush mounting in the door of the bubbler panel
with a rear-mounted pressure connection.
2. Acceptable manufacturer:
a.
Tel-Tru Model 4037
b.
Winters model P430x
c.
WIKA model 632.50
d.
Or Approved Equal.
3. Special Scale. Scale shall be a combination type
with psig inner scale and feet of water outer scale.
The outer scale shall be marked with the actual
elevation as shown in Section 17901.
1. One rotameter shall be provided for each levelmeasuring loop.
2. The rotameter shall have the following features:
a. 304 stainless steel body.
b. 316 stainless steel end fittings.
c. Viton O-rings.
d. Removable borosilicate glass metering tube
with polycarbonate shield.
e. 3-inch meter scale with direct reading etched
scale in SCFH, minimum air flow capacity 0.2 to 1.9
SCFH at 70 degrees Fahrenheit and 14.7 psia.
f. Minimum operating pressure 14.7 psia plus
maximum water level pressure.
g. Minimum pressure / temperature rating 250
psig/100 degrees Fahrenheit
h. Integral stainless steel control valve.
i. Rear of panel mounting so that body is behind
door and the metering tube and flow adjustment
knob is on front of door.
3. Differential pressure regulator shall have the
following features:
a. Capability to maintain a constant flow rate
with varying downstream pressures.
b. 316 stainless steel body.
c. Viton diaphragm.
d. 316 stainless steel ball valve.
e. 316 stainless steel springs.
f. Stainless steel regulator piping.
g. Maximum pressure rating 200 psig.
h. Maximum differential pressure rate 100 psi.
i. Acceptable manufacturer:
1) ABB/Fischer & Porter Series 10A6100
Purgemaster.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17211 - 5
C00822C13
High Pressure Purge Valve:
Filtered Regulator:
Accessories:
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
2) Wallace/Tiernan model 32-A083 flowmeter
w/optional low capacity outlet flow regulator.
3) Or Approved Equal.
1. One air switch shall be furnished for each level
measuring loop.
2. Mount on the door so that only the knob is on the
front and the rest of the switch is on the rear of the
door.
3. 316 stainless steel.
4. 3-positions 4-way Valve for normal level
measuring, instrument calibration, and bubbler pipe
purging.
5. Level measuring position shall apply only bubbler
sensing pressure on the door mounted pressure
gauge and pressure sensing instruments,
6. Calibration position shall close off all valve ports.
7. Purge position shall apply filter/regulator output
pressure to the bubbler pipe only and will close off
pressure sensing instruments.
8. Provide nameplate to define each position.
9. Acceptable Manufacturer:
a. King Engineering Model 6930
b. Parker
b. Or Approved Equal.
1. Consist of service regulator and 10 micron filter
of capacity to at least serve 200 percent of the final
element load, provided with a 2-inch gauge.
2. Acceptable manufacturer:
a. ITT/Conoflow GFH-60.
b. Norgren model B38.
c. Fairchild model 65AF.
d. Or Approved Equal.
1. The accessories inside the panel include
bulkhead fittings, shut-off ball valves, manifolds,
tubing and fittings, etc.
2. Accessories and tubing shall be 316 stainless
steel as shown.
3. Tubing that is required to be flexible shall be high
molecular weight virgin polyethylene manufactured
in accordance with ASTM D1248, Type III, Class C,
Grade 3 with 0.04 inch minimum wall thickness.
4. Fittings shall be 316 stainless steel, swage
ferrule design and shall have components (nut, body
and ferrule system) interchangeable with those of at
least one other manufacturer.
5. Flare and ball sleeve compression type fittings
are not acceptable.
6. Fittings acceptable manufacturer:
a. Parker Hannifin.
b. Crawford Swagelock.
c. Hoke Gyrolok.
d. Or Approved Equal.
7. Shutoff valves shall be 316 stainless steel body
and trim with Teflon seats and seals, quarter turn
units.
8. Valves acceptable manufacturer:
17211 - 6
C00822C13
Bubbler Pipe Assembly
Interconnecting Tubing
Execution:
Installation:
Calibration:
a. Hoke.
b. Nupro.
c. Or Approved Equal.
1. All piping, fittings, accessories shall be 3/4-inch
schedule 40 316 stainless steel.
2. Provide with one or two pipe tees, as required, at
the top for connection of air purge supply line and/or
static signal line as shown.
3. Top opening shall be provided with threaded plug
for rodding out the bubble pipe.
4. The bottom end of the bubble pipe shall be
notched approximately 3/4-inch deep x 1/2-inch
wide.
1. For installations where the bubbler panel and
bubbler pipe are separated by more than 100 feet,
provide two interconnecting tubes, one for the air
purge supply line and one for the signal sense line.
For installations where the bubbler panel and the
bubbler pipe are separated by less than 100 feet,
provide only one interconnecting tube, combining
the functions of air purge and sense lines.
2. The tubing and fittings shall be 1/2-inch x 0.065inch seamless annealed ASTM A269 Type 316
stainless steel for distances under 30 ft., or shall be
½-inch high molecular weight virgin polyethylene
tubing as described above, installed in protective 1inch rigid steel conduit for longer distances or if
embedded in concrete. If flexible tubing is used,
fittings shall be stainless steel, and no splices shall
be allowed within embedded sections. Provide pull
boxes at exposed ends and at right angle bends to
facilitate removal and replacement of embedded
flexible tubing sections.
Mount and connect in Type 4X Stainless Steel panel
as specified in Section 17110 in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and as specified on the
Drawings.
Top of notch in bubble pipe shall be set at specified
elevation with an accuracy of 0.1 inch or better.
C.
Instrument Identification:
Instrument Description:
Instrument Function:
Power Supply:
Signal Input:
Signal Output:
Process Connection:
Product Requirements:
Pressure gages:
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
PG
Pressure gage
Pressure measurement
N/A
N/A
N/A
1/2-inch male NPT
1. 4-1/2-inch premium grade, glycerin filled units
with bourdon tube element, 270-degree milled
stainless steel movement, phenolic case, and
shatterproof glass window. The requirements of
Paragraph15095-2.02 apply to this instrument.
2. Accuracy: ANSI grade 2A (+0.5% of span)
17211 - 7
C00822C13
3. The range of the measuring element shall be as
shown in the instrument index. The dial scale shall
be equivalent to the measuring element range, but
displayed in the engineering units shown as Scale in
the instrument index.
4. Acceptable manufacturer:
a. WIKA model 233.34. No substitution.
Execution:
Installation:
Application/Calibration:
1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and the recommendations of API RP550
to the specified requirements.
2. Root valves shall be provided at all process
pressure taps except taps made for safety
instruments.
3. Gage valves shall be provided at the instrument
where the instrument is not within sight of the root
valve or where two or more instruments are
connected to a single tap.
4. Safety instruments shall not be connected to the
same process tap as instruments used for control,
indication, or recording.
5. Unless otherwise specified, pressure instruments
shall be located as close as practical to the process
tap but shall be positioned to permit observation and
maintenance.
6. Pressure gages may be supported from the
process tap if this location permits observation from
the floor or a permanent work platform.
7. Pressure instruments shall be installed in such a
manner that blowout discs are not obstructed.
Application, calibration, and set points shall be as
specified in Section 17901.
D.
Instrument Identification:
Instrument Description:
Instrument Function:
Power Supply:
Signal Input:
Signal Output:
Process Connection:
Product Requirements:
Execution:
Installation:
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
PLG
Low range pressure gage
Pressure measurement
N/A
N/A
N/A
1/2-inch male NPT
1. Gages shall be 4-1/2-inch phenolic turret case
construction with shatterproof glass window and
270-degree milled stainless steel movement.
2. Unless otherwise specified, element shall be
ASTM A269, Type 316 stainless steel bellows.
3. Accuracy: ANSI Grade A (+2.5% of span)
3. Provide with a porous metal type snubber with
ASTM A276, type 303 stainless steel body and type
316 stainless steel filter disc.
4. Acceptable manufacturer:
a.
WIKA model 632.34. No substitution.
1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and the recommendations of API RP550
to the specified requirements.
17211 - 8
C00822C13
Application/Calibration:
2. Root valves shall be provided at all process
pressure taps except taps made for safety
instruments.
3. Gage valves shall be provided at the instrument
where the instrument is not within sight of the root
valve or where two or more instruments are
connected to a single tap.
4. Safety instruments shall not be connected to the
same process tap as instruments used for control,
indication, or recording
5. Unless otherwise specified, pressure instruments
shall be located as close as practical to the process
tap but shall be positioned to permit observation and
maintenance.
6. Pressure gages may be supported from the
process tap if this location permits observation from
the floor or a permanent work platform.
7. Pressure instruments shall be installed in such a
manner that blowout discs are not obstructed.
Application, calibration, and set points shall be as
specified in Section 17901.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17211 - 9
C00822C13
SECTION 17212
TRANSMITTERS
PART 1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies requirements for transmitters.
1.02 1QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
document. It is a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the
requirements of this Section and that of the listed document, the requirements of this Section
shall prevail.
Reference
Title
API RP550
Manual on Installation of Refinery Instruments and Control
Systems, Part 1- Process Instrumentation and Control.
API RP551
Process Measurement Instrumentation
ASTM A276
Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
NEMA 250
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Catalog cuts and product data as required in Section 17000.
C. Calibration and test data per Section 17000.
D. Operations and Maintenance information per Section 01730.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Unless otherwise specified, measuring elements and transmitters shall comply with the following
requirements:
1. Output indicators complying with this Section
a. Provide with any transmitter that does not include an integral indicator.
b. Indicators, whether integral or separate, shall be calibrated in process units.
c. The units shall be engraved on the indicator scale plate.
d. The installed orientation of the output indicator shall permit the plant operator to easily
read the display from the operating floor.
2. Transmitters:
a. Two-wire type with operating power derived from the signal transmission circuit, unless
otherwise specified.
b. Output shall be 4 to 20 milliamperes, current regulated DC.
c. Load variations within the range of 0 to 500 ohms with the power supply at 24 volts DC.
d. Output shall be galvanically isolated.
e. Time constant of transmitters used for flow or pressure measurement, including level
transmitters used for flow measurement, shall be adjustable from 0.0 to 5.0 seconds.
f. Output shall increase with increasing measurement.
g. Unless otherwise specified, enclosures shall be rated NEMA 250, Type 4X.
h. When located outdoors, provide with surge protectors: Rosemount Model 470A, Control
Concepts model TMR, or approved equal.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17212 - 1
C00822C13
i.
Where two-wire transmitter is located in a classified area, use intrinsic safety barrier per
Section 17212.
2.02 OUTPUT INDICATOR
A. Output indicator shall be a loop powered current-to-digital display indicator.
B. Input current shall be 4-20 mA and display shall be a 3 1/2 active digit liquid crystal display with
black numerals at least 0.35 inches high.
C. Display scalable with decimal point to read process engineering units.
D. Enclosed in a conduit body-type housing with glass window, classified as appropriate for the area
in which the output indicator is installed.
E. A diode shall be provided to maintain loop continuity in case of indicator failure or removal.
F. Accuracy shall be +/- 0.1 percent of reading.
G. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Action Instruments models V561/V565.
2. Precision Digital 600 series.
3. Moore Industries models PSD/SPD.
4. Or Approved Equal.
2.03 INTRINSIC SAFETY BARRIERS
A. Two-wire transmitters of the active, isolating, loop powered type. Mounting: DIN rail.
B. Acceptable Manufacturer:
1. Stahl 9160/13-11.
2. Pepperl + Fuchs KFD2 series.
3. Or Approved Equal.
2.04 INSTRUMENTATION SPECIFICATION SHEETS (INSTRUSPEC)
A. Requirements for instruments specified in this Section are listed on INSTRUSPEC sheets.
Installation application requirements are specified in Section 17901, and/or on the Drawings.
2.05 SIGNAL CURRENT ISOLATOR (FIELD MOUNTED)
A. Provides Galvanic isolation of milliampere transmission signals from transmitters with
inadequately isolated output circuits. House in a NEMA 250, type 4X/7 conduit body. Derive
operating power from the signal input circuit.
B. Input and output signals shall be 4 to 20 milliamperes, and error shall not exceed 0.1 percent of
span. Input resistance shall not exceed 550 ohms with an output load of 250 ohms.
C. Acceptable Manufacturer:
1. Action Instruments model T700.
2. Moore Industries model SCX .
3. Or Approved Equal.
2.06 PRODUCT DATA
A. Data per Section 17000.
B. Test results per Section 17000.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17212 - 2
C00822C13
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Installation requirements per Section 17000.
3.02 TESTING
A. Testing requirements per Section 17000.
3.03 INSTRUSPEC SHEETS
A. The following INSTRUSPEC sheets are included in this Section.
INSTRUSPEC
Symbol
AI/AAS
AE/AIT1
Instrument
Description
Multi-Channel Receiver
Combustible Gas Analyzer
Display, and Alarms
Instrument
Function
Gas Monitor/Alarms
Combustible Gas Detection
AE/AIT2
Hydrogen Sulfide Gas Analyzer
AE/AIT3
Display, and Alarms
Oxygen Gas Analyzer
Magnetic flowmeter
Differential pressure transmitter
Gage pressure transmitter
Hydrogen Sulfide Gas
Detection
Low Oxygen Detection
FM
PDT
PGT
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17212 - 3
Flow measurement
Pressure measurement
Pressure measurement
C00822C13
INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET--INSTRUSPEC
Instrument Identification:
Instrument Description:
Instrument Function:
AI/AAS
1-10 channel Receiver
Gas monitoring and alarm
Power Supply:
Signal Input:
Signal Output:
120 VAC or 24 VDC, 60 VA max.
4-20mA
Display of gas concentration, alarms and relay contacts, 4 –
20mA output for each channel
Confined space atmospheres
N/A
Process:
Process Connections:
Product Requirements:
General:
Supports inputs from up to ten, 2- or 3-wire combustible or toxic
gas detectors, separately specified.
Receiver:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
Enclosure: NEMA – 4X, wall mount
Environmental:
Temperature range:14 to 104°F (-10 to 40ºC)
Humidity: 0 – 90% Non-condensing
Common Relays: Horn, Warning, Alarm, Fail. SPDT rated
5A at 30
VDC/120 VAC
Display: 4-digit LCD calibratable in EGU. Displays each
channel input, with Individual LED indication for Caution,
Warning, Alarm and Fail statuses.
Alarm Relay Programming: Time delay (0-999 sec),
latching/non-latching,
Output: 4-20mA re-transmitted output for each channel.
Repeatability: +/-1.0% of full scale
Accuracy: +/-1.5% full scale
Approvals: UL/CSA 61010-1
Approved Manufacturer:
a. MSA series 9000,
b. Or Approved Equal.
17212 - 4
C00822C13
INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET—INSTRUSPEC
Instrument Identification:
Instrument Description:
Instrument Function:
AE/AIT1
Gas Analyzer, Combustibles
Analysis of Gas for Combustible hydrocarbons (C1-C7)
Power Supply:
Signal Input:
Signal Output:
24VDC nominal, 18-27 VDC, 10 VA maximum
Process
4-20 mA (See below)
Process:
Waste water or Odor Control
Process Connections:
Back Pan mounted, connection per installation detail
Product Requirements:
General:
The combustible gas detector shall be a single point unit
designed for fixed installation and shall include a sensor,
transmitter, and accessories.
Sensor:
1.
2.
3.
Transmitter:
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Design: Optical sensor optimized for CH4 and
combustibles,
corrosion-resistant contacts.
Range: 0-100% LEL based on methane
Connection: Flow cell with aspirator, or Stand alone, as
specified
Temperature limit: -4° to 122°F (-20 to 50 C)
Humidity range: 0 to 95% RH, non-condensing
Housing: NEMA 4 or NEMA 7 per detail specifications
Housing material: Epoxy-coated Aluminum or Stainless
steel
Temperature limit: -4° to 122°F (-20 to 50C)
Calibration: Non-intrusive method, Microprocessor-based,
able to retain configuration through power outage
Analog Output signals: 4-20 mA into 600 ohms at 24 VDC.
Response time: <30 seconds to 90% full scale
Linearity: +/-3% LEL below 40% LEL
Repeatability: +/- 2% LEL below 40% LEL
Display: LCD (% LEL), WARN and HIGH Alarm icons
Approval: UL/FM/CSA
Rating: Class 1, Div. 1, Groups B to D
Special requirements:
1.
2.
Manufacturer & Model:
1.
2.
Execution:
Installation:
Calibration:
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
Provide Aspirator assembly sampler pump with flow switch
capable of drawing a sample of 2.0 SCFH through
analyzer sample chamber.
Provide ¼-inch diameter 316 SS or Teflon sample tubing
and end-of-line filters.
MSA models Ultima-XIR and Ultima-XE sensor and
transmitter, or Approved Equal
Sample pump:
a. MSA model Ultima sampler.
b. Or Approved Equal
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the
recommendations of API RP551
Application, calibration and set point requirements per Section
17901
17212 - 5
C00822C13
INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET—INSTRUSPEC
Instrument Identification:
AE/AIT2
Instrument Description:
Gas Analyzer, Hydrogen Sulfide Gas
Instrument Function:
Analysis of Gas for Hydrogen Sulfide Gas measurement, display,
test and alarm.
Power Supply:
24VDC nominal, 18-27 VDC, 0.5 VA maximum
Signal Input:
Process
Signal Output:
4-20 mA (See below)
Process:
Waste water or Odor Control
Process Connections:
Back Pan mounted, connection per installation detail
Product Requirements:
General:
The hydrogen sulfide detector shall be a single point unit
designed for fixed installation and shall include a sensor,
transmitter, and accessories.
Sensor:
1. Design: Electromechanical principle of operation.
2. Range: 0-10ppm; 0-50ppm; 0-50ppm; 0-100ppm, as
specified.
3. Connection: Flow cell with aspirator, or Stand alone, as
specified
4. Temperature limit: -4° to 122°F (-20° to 50° C)
5. Humidity range: 15% to 95% R.H., non-condensing.
Transmitter:
1. Housing: NEMA 7 explosion proof.
2. Housing material: Epoxy-coated Aluminum or Stainless steel
3. Temperature limit: -4° to 122°F (-20° to 50° C)
4. Calibration: Non-intrusive method, Microprocessor-based,
able to retain configuration through power outage
5. Analog Output signals: 4-20 mA HART into 600 ohms at 24
VDC.
6. Outputs (optional, stand alone):
a. Digital Output: MODBUS RTU RS-485 half duplex,
communication interface output or HART, per detail
specifications.
b. Alarm Relays: 4 relays – SPST rated 5A at 250 VAC/30
VDC resistive, 3 for alarm levels, 1 for fault, programmed
per detail specifications.
7. Response time: R50 <30 seconds.
8. Linearity: ±10% full scale or 2ppm.
9. Repeatability: +/- 1% full scale or 2ppm.
10. Display: 3.5 digit LCD, 0.5” height.
11. Approval: UL/FM/CSA
12. Rating: Class 1, Div. 1, Groups A to D
Cable:
Cond. shielded plus conforming ground. Maximum separation
between sensor and transmitter: 50 ft.
Special requirements:
Provide Electrical sampler pump with flow switch capable of
drawing a sample of 2.0 SCFH through analyzer sample
chamber.
Provide ¼-inch diameter 316 SS or Teflon sample tubing and
end-of-line filters.
Manufacturer & Model:
MSA model Ultima-XE sensor and transmitter,
Or Approved Equal.
Sample pump: MSA model Ultima sampler
Or Approved Equal.
Installation:
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the
recommendations of API RP551
Calibration:
Application, calibration and set point requirements per Section
17901.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17212 - 6
C00822C13
INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET—INSTRUSPEC
Instrument Identification:
AE/AIT3
Instrument Description:
Gas Analyzer, Oxygen Gas Concentration
Instrument Function:
Analysis of Gas for Oxygen Gas Concentration measurement,
display, test and alarm.
Power Supply:
24VDC nominal, 18-27 VDC, 0.5 VA maximum
Signal Input:
Process
Signal Output:
4-20 mA (See below)
Process:
Waste water or Odor Control
Process Connections:
Back Pan mounted, connection per installation detail
Product Requirements:
General:
The oxygen concentration detector shall be a single point unit
designed for fixed installation and shall include a sensor,
transmitter, and accessories.
Sensor:
6. Design: Electromechanical principle of operation.
7. Range: 0-25% - compensated.
8. Connection: Flow cell with aspirator, or Stand alone, as
specified
9. Temperature limit: -4° to 122°F (-20° to 50° C)
10. Humidity range: 15% to 95% R.H., non-condensing.
Transmitter:
13. Housing: NEMA 7 explosion proof.
14. Housing material: Epoxy-coated Aluminum or Stainless steel
15. Temperature limit: -4° to 122°F (-20° to 50° C)
16. Calibration: Non-intrusive method, Microprocessor-based,
able to retain configuration through power outage
17. Analog Output signals: 4-20 mA HART into 600 ohms at 24
VDC.
18. Outputs (optional, stand alone):
a. Digital Output: MODBUS RTU RS-485 half duplex,
communication interface output or HART, per detail
specifications.
b. Alarm Relays: 4 relays – SPST rated 5A at 250 VAC/30
VDC resistive, 3 for alarm levels, 1 for fault, programmed
per detail specifications.
19. Response time: R50 <30 seconds.
20. Linearity: ±2% full scale or 2ppm.
21. Repeatability: +/- 1% full scale or 2ppm.
22. Display: 3.5 digit LCD, 0.5” height.
23. Approval: UL/FM/CSA
24. Rating: Class 1, Div. 1, Groups A to D
Cable:
Cond. shielded plus conforming ground. Maximum separation
between sensor and transmitter: 50 ft.
Special requirements:
Provide Electrical sampler pump with flow switch capable of
drawing a sample of 2.0 SCFH through analyzer sample
chamber.
Provide ¼-inch diameter 316 SS or Teflon sample tubing and
end-of-line filters.
Manufacturer & Model:
MSA model Ultima-XE sensor and transmitter,
Or Approved Equal.
Sample pump: MSA model Ultima sampler,
Or Approved Equal.
Installation:
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the
recommendations of API RP551
Calibration:
Application, calibration and set point requirements per Section
17901.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17212 - 7
C00822C13
INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET—INSTRUSPEC
Instrument Identification:
Instrument Function:
Instrument Description:
FM
Flow measurement.
Magnetic flow metering system.
Power Supply:
Signal Input:
Signal Output:
120 VAC (transmitter).
Process.
4 – 20 mA DC.
Process Connection:
Flange, ANSI B16.5 Class 150, raised face.
Product Requirements:
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Flow Tube:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Transmitter:
1.
2.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
Magnetic flow meter shall be provided as a system
consisting of a flow tube and remotely mounted
converter/transmitter complete with all necessary
interconnecting cables for the flow tube to transmitter
separation shown.
System shall be suitable for measuring raw sewage flow.
Provide grounding rings for both upstream and
downstream connections with the process piping.
Provide mechanical protection for the flow tube flanges
and liner during installation or removal of the flow tube.
Provide pipe reducer and expander where pipe run size is
different from specified flow tube size. The reducer and
expander shall be uniformly diverging and converging
swages with a total reducing angle not exceeding 8
degrees. Locate per manufacturer’s instructions for
upstream and downstream obstructions.
Inside diameter of the flow tube: As specified in Section
17901.
Flow tube construction: NEMA 4X construction. Measuring
tube material 304 stainless steel; liner material: Suitable
for service hard rubber or as specified in 17901 (for special
applications). Flow tube shall be rated IP68 when installed
below grade or where submergence is possible.
Pulsed D.C. field excitation with automatic zero point
correction.
Field coil insulation class E.
Not used
Electrode material: Suitable for service: Hastelloy-C,
unless designated differently in Section 17901, Instrument
Index.
Grounding ring material: 316 stainless steel, unless
designated differently in Section 17901, Instrument Index.
Acceptable manufacturer:
a.
Krohne ENVIROMAG 2000 Flanged Flowtube for
Water and Wastewater,
b.
Or Approved Equal..
Signal converter/transmitter shall be suitable for an
adjustable fullscale flow within the limits of from 1 to
30 feet per second.
Signal converter / transmitter features: Mounted on
flowtube; microprocessor based.
17212 - 8
C00822C13
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Execution:
Installation:
1.
2.
3.
Cable:
1.
2.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
Bi-directional flow and totalization measurement.
Integral high-contrast LCD display; integral control panel.
Accuracy of 0.3% of Rate.
Signal output 4 – 20 mA DC galvanically isolated and
internally powered. Minimum 500 Ohm driving capability.
Low-flow cutoff: adjustable from 0% to 20% of range
Signal converter shall be compatible with all types and
sizes of flowtubes and replaceable without recalibration.
Upgradeable to future software and communications
versions.
Adjustable dampening: 0.2 to 256 seconds
Power 120 VAC.
Enclosure: NEMA 4X wall mount
Flow rate calibration as per Section 17901, Instrument
Index.
Smart transmitter sub-carrier compatibility with
HARTprotocol.
Acceptable manufacturer:
a.
Krohne IFC-300,
b.
Or Approved Equal.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, API
RP550, and the specified functional requirements.
Install ground rings upstream and downstream of the flow
tube.
Install the transmitter on the wall near to but remotely from
the flow tube.
Provide signal cable between the primary element and
transmitter by the system manufacturer.
A sufficient length of cable shall be provided for installation
of a continuous run between the primary element and the
remotely mounted transmitter.
17212 - 9
C00822C13
INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET—INSTRUSPEC
Instrument Identification:
PDT
Instrument Function:
Differential Pressure (Level) measurement.
Instrument Description:
Differential pressure transmitter.
Power Supply:
9-30 VDC, two-wire transmitter
Signal Input:
Differential pressure, as specified in Section 17901.
Signal Output:
4-20 mA Variable Analog transmission signal per this Section.
Process Connection:
Two 1/2-inch female NPT flange adapters.
Product Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Pressure transmitter shall be capacitance or Silicon piezoresistive bridge type.
Unless otherwise specified, wetted parts shall be ASTM
A276, type 316 stainless steel.
Rangeability: 15:1 minimum.
Unless otherwise specified, fill fluid shall be DC 200
Silicone oil.
Adjustable dampening : 0.5 to 10 seconds
External zero adjustment
Accuracy: ±0.1 percent of span.
Transmitters shall be available in 10” WC to 600 PSIG
ranges. Specific ranges shall be designated in Section
17901, Instrument Index.
Provide differential pressure transmitters with a three-valve
manifold per Section 17211 and with four 1/4-inch
drain/vent ports, two plugged and two provided with bleed
valves.
Static pressure rating shall be 2000 psig or greater.
Smart transmitter sub-carrier compatibility with
HARTprotocol.
Acceptable Manufacturer:
Execution:
Installation:
1.
Yokogawa EJA110 series, Or Approved Equal.
1.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
the recommendations of API RP551
Provide root valves at all process pressure taps.
Locate pressure instruments as close as practical to the
process tap and position to permit observation and
maintenance from grade or work platform unless otherwise
specified.
Do not support pressure instruments from process piping,
unless otherwise specified.
2.
3.
4.
Calibration:
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
Per Section 17901 Instrument Index.
17212 - 10
C00822C13
INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET – INSTRUSPEC
Instrument Identification:
Instrument Function:
Instrument Description:
PGT
Pressure measurement.
Gage pressure transmitter.
Power Supply:
Signal Input:
9-30 VDC
Process
Signal Output:
4-20 mA Variable Analog transmission signal per this Section.
Process Connection:
1/2-inch female NPT flange adapter.
Product Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.
Execution:
Installation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
Pressure transmitter shall be capacitance or Silicon piezoresistive bridge type.
Wetted parts shall be ASTM A276, type 316 stainless
steel, unless otherwise specified
Rangeabilty: 15:1 minimum.
Fill fluid shall be DC 200 Silicone oil, unless otherwise
specified.
Adjustable dampening: 0.5 to 10 seconds
External zero adjustment
Accuracy: ±0.1 percent of span.
Range: Transmitter shall be available in 10” WC to 600
PSIG ranges. Specific ranges shall be designated in
Section 17901, Instrument Index.
Provide transmitters with spans less than or equal to 25
psig with one 1/2-inch flanged process connection and two
1/4-inch drain/vent ports, one plugged and one with bleed
valve.
Atmospheric reference: Provide reference diaphragm with
a weatherproof, bug-proof atmospheric vent.
Transmitters with spans greater than 25 psig shall be
similar to the above except shall be designed for sealed
gage pressure service, and overpressure rating shall be
greater than the lesser of 2000 psig and 150 percent of
maximum range.
Provide smart transmitter subcarrier capability compatible
with HART protocol.
Yokogawa EJA500 series, Or Approved Equal.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
the recommendations of API RP551.
Provide root valves at all process pressure taps.
Provide gage valves at the instrument where the
instrument is not within sight of the root valve or where two
or more instruments are connected to a single tap.
DO NOT connect safety instruments to the same process
tap as instruments used for control, indication, or
recording.
Locate pressure instruments as close as practical to the
process tap and position to permit observation and
maintenance from grade or a maintenance platform,
unless otherwise specified.
17212 - 11
C00822C13
6.
Calibration:
DO NOT support pressure instruments from process
piping.
Per Section 17901, Instrument Index.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17212 - 12
C00822C13
SECTION 17216
PROCESS SWITCHES
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies requirements for process-activated switches.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
documents. It is a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the
requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section
shall prevail.
Reference
Title
API RP550
Manual on Installation of Refinery Instruments and Control
Systems, Part 1 - Process Instrumentation and Control
API 551
Process Measurement instrumentation
NEMA 250
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)
NEMA ICS 2
Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies
NEMA ICS 6
Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: per Section 01300.
B. Product Data: per Section 17000.
C. Calibration and Test Results: per Section 17000.
D. Operation and Maintenance Information per Section 01730.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Unless otherwise specified, switches shall comply with the following requirements:
1. Contact outputs used for alarm actuation shall be ordinarily closed and shall open to initiate
the alarm.
2. Contact outputs used to control equipment shall be ordinarily open and shall close to start the
equipment.
3. Contacts monitored by solid-state equipment such as programmable logic controllers or
annunciators shall be hermetically sealed and designed for switching currents from 20 to 100
mA at 24 VDC.
4. Contacts monitored by electromagnetic devices such as mechanical relays shall be rated
NEMA ICS 2, designation B300.
5. Double barriers shall be provided between switch elements and process fluids such that
failure of one barrier will not permit process fluids into electrical enclosures.
6. Switch electrical enclosures shall be rated NEMA 250, Type 4X minimum.
7. Contacts in Class 1, Division 1 areas and monitored by solid-state circuits shall be made safe
by suitable intrinsic-safety barriers.
2.02 INTRINSIC SAFETY BARRIERS AND RELAYS
A. Intrinsic safety barriers for process switches:
1. Dual input, passive type.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17216 - 1
C00822C13
2. Shunt diode barrier construction with non-replaceable fuse and internal current limiting
resistor
3. Listings: UL, FM or CSA certified for use in Class I Groups A, B, C, D; Class II Groups E, F,
G.
4. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Ronan X57 Series.
b. Turck MZ-61 Series.
c. Or Approved Equal.
B. Intrinsic safety relays:
1. Isolates field contacts in classified location from control circuits in non-classified location.
2. Input:
a. Maximum field contact current/voltage: 10 mA/11 VAC.
b. Turn-on sensitivity: < 100K Ohms.
c. Turn-off sensitivity: > 1 Megaohm.
3. Output:
a. SPST N.O./N.C. switching action field programmable
b. Rating: 1 A resistive at 24 VDC or 120 VAC
4. Power: 100 to 130 VAC, 50-60 Hz, 4 VA maximum
5. Listings: UL of FM approval for use in Class I Groups A, B, C, D. Class II Groups E, F, G
6. Enclosure: NEMA 1
7. 7. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Gems SafePak model 54820.
b. Stahl IS Isolator Type 9170.
c. Square-D series 8501 TO or NY2.
d. Warrick series 17 or 27.
e. Or Approved Equal.
2.03 INSTRUMENTATION SPECIFICATION SHEETS (INSTRUSPEC)
A. General requirements for instruments specified in INSTRUSPEC sheets in this Section.
Application requirements are specified in Section 17901.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Unless otherwise specified, installation requirements are specified in Paragraph 17000-3.01.
3.02 TESTING
A. Per Sections 17000 and 01660.
3.03 INSTRUSPEC SHEETS
A. The following INSTRUSPEC sheets are included below.
INSTRUSPEC Symbol
LFS
LFS2
PS
PDS
ZS
GQS
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
Instrument Description
Float level switch
Float level switch (multipoint)
Instrument Function
Level measurement
Level measurement
Pressure switch
Differential Pressure switch,
low range
Position Switch
Rain Gauge
Pressure measurement
Differential pressure
measurement
Position Limit Detection
Precipitation measurement
17216 - 2
C00822C13
Instrument Identification:
Instrument Description:
Instrument Function:
Power Supply:
Signal Input:
Signal Output:
Process Connection:
Product Requirements:
Execution:
Installation:
Calibration:
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
LFS
Float level switch.
Level measurement.
N/A
N/A
Contacts per Paragraph 17216-2.01.
N/A
1. Switch shall consist of a SPST mercury tilt switch
enclosed in a 316 stainless steel float housing.
2. 14-AWG wire type SO cable with PVC outer jacket.
3. Mercury tilt switch shall be rated for two amps at 120
VAC.
4. Cable length shall be as specified to meet the application
needs.
5. Acceptable manufacturer:
a. US Filter Model 9G (N.O.)
b. Anchor Scientific Roto-Float-SST
c. Or Approved Equal
Install per Contract Detail Drawing.
Per Section 17901. Switch set point and reset point shall
be adjusted as specified.
17216 - 3
C00822C13
Instrument Identification:
Instrument Description:
Instrument Function:
Power Supply:
Signal Input:
Signal Output:
Process Connection:
Product Requirements:
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
LFS2
Float level switch.(multipoint)
Level measurement.
N/A
N/A
Contacts per Paragraph 17216-2.01.
N/A
1. Brass or Stainless Steel hardware
2. SS Floats
3. Four level switches
4. Single Pole, Double Throw switches for high
and low level measurement (1 each goes to
PLC/SCADA, other goes to package panel)
5. Single Pole, Single Throw switches acceptable
for fill valve open and close settings (just to
package panel.)
6. Acceptable manufacturer:
a. Gems, LS-800 Series Multi-Point Level
Switch
b. Or Approved Equal.
17216 - 4
C00822C13
Instrument Identification:
Instrument Description:
Instrument Function:
Power Supply:
Signal Input:
Signal Output:
Process Connection:
Product Requirements:
Execution:
Installation:
Application/Calibration:
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
PS
Pressure switch
Pressure measurement
N/A
Process
Contacts as per Paragraph 17216-2.01
1/4-inch female NPT.
1. Construction: Pressure element and a precision switch.
2. Pressure element:
a. Type: Diaphragm type with Buna-N diaphragm, or
brass dual bellows.
b. Overpressure: capable of withstanding 10 times
overrange pressure without affecting calibration.
3. Switch:
a. Hermetically sealed SPDT, unless otherwise
specified.
b. Contacts rated 10 A at 120 VAC; 0.5 A at 120 VDC,
resistive
c. Adjustable set-point and deadband of approximately
10% to 90% of operating range, unless otherwise specified.
4. Range: As specified. Set point should fall between 30%
and 70% of operating range. Set point and reset point shall
be indicated on calibrated scales.
5. Accuracy: Repeatability and sensitivity shall be +1% of
operating range or better.
6. Enclosure:
a. Cast aluminum rated NEMA 4X or NEMA 7, as
required
b. Two 3/4-inch conduit connections
7. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Square-D series 9012 G.
b. Ashcroft LP Series
c. Mercoid Series 1000
d. Or Approved Equal.
1. Install per manufacturer's instructions and the
recommendations of API RP550 to the specified
requirements.
2. Provide root valves at all process pressure taps except
taps made for safety instruments.
3. Provide gage valves at the instrument where the
instrument is not within sight of the root valve or where two
or more instruments are connected to a single tap.
4. Do not connect safety instruments to the same process
tap as instruments used for control, indication, or recording.
Unless otherwise specified, locate as close as practical to
the process tap and position to permit observation and
maintenance.
Application, calibration, and set points shall be per Section
17901.
17216 - 5
C00822C13
Instrument Identification:
Instrument Description:
Instrument Function:
Power Supply:
Signal Input:
Signal Output:
Process Connection:
Product Requirements:
Execution:
Installation:
Application/Calibration:
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
PDS
Differential pressure switch, low range
Differential pressure measurement
N/A
Process
Contacts as per Paragraph 17216-2.01.
1/8- or 1/4-inch NPT high and low pressure taps.
1. Construction: Differential pressure element and a
precision switch.
2. Pressure element:
a. Type: Diaphragm type with Buna-N diaphragm, or as
specified
b. Overpressure: capable of withstanding 10 times
overrange pressure without affecting calibration.
3. Switch:
a. Snap-action SPDT, unless otherwise specified.
b. Rated 15 A at 120 VAC
c. Adjustable set-point and deadband of approximately
10% to 90% of operating range, unless otherwise specified.
4. Range: As specified. Set point should fall between 30%
and 70% of operating range. Set point and reset point shall
be indicated on calibrated scales.
5. Accuracy: Repeatability and sensitivity shall be +3% of
operating range or better.
6. Enclosure:
a. Cast aluminum rated NEMA 4X or NEMA 7, as
required
b. Two 3/4-inch conduit connections
7. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Square-D series 9012G
b. Ashcroft series LDA, D400, D700
c. Mercoid series PG, SA1100
d. Or Approved Equal.
1. Install per manufacturer's instructions and the
recommendations of API RP551 to the specified
requirements.
2. Provide root valves at all process pressure taps except
taps made for safety instruments.
3. Provide gage valves at the instrument where the
instrument is not within sight of the root valve or where two
or more instruments are connected to a single tap.
4. Do not connect safety instruments to the same process
tap as instruments used for control, indication, or recording.
5. Unless otherwise specified, locate as close as practical
to the process tap and position to permit observation and
maintenance.
Application, calibration, and set points shall be per Section
17901.
17216 - 6
C00822C13
Instrument Identification:
Instrument Description:
Instrument Function:
ZS
Magnetic reed switch
Position threshold detection
Product Requirements:
1. Provide industrial grade switch suitable for harsh
environments
2. Contacts: SPDT form C, 0.5 amp max, 100 VAC/DC max at
0.25 amps, 7 VA max.
3. Magnetic reed switch
4. Prevent sticking or freezing between the two switch plates
that form the magnetic field.
5. Electrical components hermetically sealed.
6. 316 stainless steel armored lead type.
7. Operating temperature: -40 to 150 degrees F.
8. UL listed.
9. Acceptable manufacturer
a. GE Security Products 2500 series
b. George Risk Industries
c. Or Approved Equal
Execution:
Installation:
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and
the application requirements.
2. Suitable for metal door installation.
17216 - 7
C00822C13
Instrument Identification:
Instrument Description:
Instrument Function:
Power Supply:
Signal Input:
Signal Output:
Process Connection:
Product Requirements:
Execution:
Installation
Application/Calibration
GQS
LBE
Rain
Gaugeassembly
Bubbler
Precipitation
Measurement
Level measurement
N/A
N/A
Two independent reed switches potted in soft silicon rubber with
varister protection.
1. Receiver: 200 mm powder coated heavy duty cast aluminum.
2. Sensitivity: one tip at 0.01 inch of rainfall.
3. Range and Accuracy:
a. 0 to 250 mm / hr +/- 2%
b. 25 to 500 mm/hr +/- 3%
4. Humidity: 0 to 100 %
5. Temperature: - 20 to +70C
6. Contact ratings:
a. 0.5A max
b. 24V max
7. Syphon:
a. 0.4 mm (12 ml) capacity of rainfall – made from brass with
a non hydroscopic outer case.
b. Can be dismantled for routine cleaning and servicing.
8. Bucket:
a. Synthetic ceramic coated brass bucket balanced to +/0.05 gms.
9. Base: Cast aluminum.
10. Level: bulls eye level adhered to aluminum base.
11. Mounting Holes: three 10 mm diameter mounting holes with
117 mm p.c.d. cast in feet attached to outside diameter of
base.
12. Drain fittings: to attach 12 mm inside diameter tubing, to catch
rainfall after passing through buckets.
13. Pivots: ground sapphire pivots with hard stainless steel shaft.
14. Insect covers: stainless steel mesh on all openings to prevent
insects and ants entering gauge.
15. Outer Enclosure: keyed to enable the release of the outer
enclosure without the need for removal of the three securing
screws.
16. Height: 330 mm
17. Weight: 3 kg
18. Field Calibration Device: TB320
19. Laboratory Calibration Device: 340
20. Acceptable manufacturer:
a. Hydrological Services Pty Ltd. Model TB3/0.1/M
b. Campbell Scientific TE525
c. Or Approved Equal
Mount and connect per manufacturer’s instructions and as shown in
the Contract Drawings
Provide calibration per manufacturer instructions.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17216 - 8
C00822C13
SECTION 17271
SIGNAL CONDITIONING MODULES
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies requirements for panel mounted signal conditioning modules.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
documents. It is a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the
requirements of this Section and those of the listed document, the requirements of this Section
shall prevail.
Reference
Title
EIA RS-310C
Racks, panels, and associated equipment.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Product Data: per Section 17000.
C. Test Results: per Section 17000.
D. Operations and Maintenance Information per Section 01730.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Unless otherwise specified or shown, signal conditioning modules shall comply with the following
requirements:
1. Analog signal inputs shall be 1 to 5 VDC with minimum input impedance of 20M ohms.
2. Analog signal outputs shall be 4 to 20 mA DC with minimum of 600 ohms driving capability.
3. Discrete output contacts shall be SPDT rated 5 amperes at 120 VAC and 24 VDC.
4. Power supply shall be 120 VAC or 24 VDC as shown, plus or minus 10 percent. Power supply
effect shall not exceed 0.005 percent per 1.0 percent change.
5. The output contacts of electronic trips shall change state as follows:
a. When shown as E>SP, the relay coil shall energize and contacts shall change state when
input (E) is greater than or equal to set point (SP).
b. When shown as E<SP, the relay coil shall energize and contacts shall change state when
input (E) is less than or equal to set point (SP).
6. Modules shall be rated for continuous operation in an ambient temperature of 0 to 80
degrees C. Ambient temperature effect shall not exceed plus or minus 0.01 percent per
degree C within that range.
7. Span and zero adjustments shall be made by front accessible multi-turn potentiometers and/or
field programmable switches or jumpers.
8. Electronic trip modules shall be provided with LED indicators for relay status.
9. Modules shall withstand 30 volts per meter radio frequency radiation between 200 and 500
MHz with not more than 0.25 percent calibration effect. Modules shall also be provided with
traps on the terminals to shunt conducted radio frequency interference to ground.
10. Signal and power supply terminals shall be galvanically isolated from the chassis ground.
B. Unless otherwise specified, all modules specified in this Section shall be the product of a single
manufacturer.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17271 - 1
C00822C13
2.02 INSTRUMENTATION SPECIFICATION (INSTRUSPEC) SHEETS
A. General requirements for instruments specified in this Section are listed on INSTRUSPEC.
Application requirements are specified in the instrument schedule in Section 17000, and/or on the
Drawings.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Signal conditioning modules shall be installed in panels per Section 17110 and in compliance to
EIA RS-310C.
3.02 TESTING
A. Testing requirements per Section 17000
3.03 INSTRUSPEC SHEETS
A. The following INSTRUSPEC sheets are included in this Section.
INSTRUSPEC Symbol
YVC
Instrument Identification:
Instrument Description:
Instrument Function:
Power Supply:
Signal Input:
Signal Output:
Process Connection:
Product Requirements:
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
Instrument Description
DC Voltage/Current Isolating
Amplifier
Instrument Function
Function module
YVC
DC Voltage/Current Isolating Amplifier
Function module
120 Volts AC, 60 Hertz or 24 Volts DC, as specified
1 to 5 VDC or 4 to 20 mA DC, as specified
4 to 20 mA DC into 500 Ohms
N/A
1. DC isolation converter shall provide an output
that is linearly proportional to the input. Span and
Zero shall be field selectable and adjustable +10%
via multi-turn potentiometer or program function.
2. Isolation: Between Input, Output, Power, and
Ground - 1000 VAC, minimum.
3. The unit shall have the following features:
a. Filtering and conditioning to reduce
susceptibility to transients and noisy operations.
b. Linearity: 0.05 percent span or better;
c. Accuracy/repeatability: 0.1 percent of span
or better.
c. Response time: less than 1 second.
d. Operating temperature range of 0 60
degrees C (32 to 140 degrees F); Temperature drift:
less than 0.02 percent of span plus 30 microvolts per
degree C or less over operating temperature range.
4. Mechanical: DIN rail mounting (w/ relay socket
if required), with compression-type screw terminals
5. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Action Instruments - Model WV-408
b. Moore Industries - Model FCT
c. Wilkerson Instruments - Model DR4380
17271 - 2
C00822C13
d. Or Approved Equal.
Execution:
Installation:
Application/Calibration:
Mount and connect in panels per Section 17110 and
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to the
specified functional requirements.
Application, calibration, and set points shall be per
Section 17901.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17271 - 3
C00822C13
SECTION 17272
MISCELLANEOUS PANEL INSTRUMENTS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies requirements for panel mounted devices for operator interface and internal
controls.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
documents. It is a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the
requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section
shall prevail.
Reference
Title
EIA RS-310C
Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment
NEMA 250
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)
UL 508
Industrial Control Equipment
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Product Data: per Section 17000.
C. Calibration and Test Results: per Section 17000.
D. Operation and Maintenance Information per Section 01730.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Unless otherwise specified or shown, devices covered by this Section shall comply with all
requirements for installation in a control panel bearing the UL 508 label.
B. Unless otherwise specified, all like equipment specified in this Section shall be the product of a
single manufacturer.
2.02 INSTRUMENTATION SPECIFICATION (INSTRUSPEC) SHEETS
A. General requirements for instruments specified in this Section are listed on INSTRUSPEC.
Application requirements are specified in Section 17901, and/or on the Drawings.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Relays and control switches and pilot devices shall be installed in panels per Section 17110 and in
compliance to EIA RS-310C.
3.02 TESTING
A. Testing requirements per Section 17000.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17272 - 1
C00822C13
3.03 INSTRUSPEC SHEETS
A. The following INSTRUSPEC sheets are included in this Section.
INSTRUSPEC Symbol
Instrument Description
XXS
Selector Switches
XXL
Pilot Light
PB
Push Button Switch
CR
Control Relay
TR
Timer Relay
Instrument Identification:
Instrument Description:
Instrument Function:
Power Supply:
Signal Input:
Signal Output:
Process Connection:
Product Requirements:
Execution:
Installation:
Application/Calibration:
Instrument Identification:
Instrument Description:
Instrument Function:
Power Supply:
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
Instrument Function
Operator Interface
Operator Interface
Operator Interface
Control Logic
Control Logic
XXS
Selector Switch
Operator Interface
120 VAC, 60 Hertz
N/A
Contact
N/A
1. Main Control Panel switches shall be four-quadrant
style as described.
2. Up to four control positions that can be configured as:
(1) selector switches, (2) selector push-type switches, (3)
pushbuttons, and/or (4) segmented indicating light units.
3. Provide up to four separate energized indicating
lights with legend plates and colored lenses as shown on
the Drawings.
4. Indicating lights, pushbuttons and selector switches
shall be oil tight heavy-duty units. Conforming to NEMA
250 Type 4 or better, as required.
5. Contacts in signal circuits shall be gold, for electronic
solid-state dry circuits and rated for 28 VDC one-ampere
resistive/125 VAC 0.5-ampere resistive.
6. Contacts in control circuits shall be silver and rated
for 125 VDC 5-amperes inductive/120 VAC 5 amperes.
7. Indicating lights for 120 VAC shall be transformer
type using a LED lamp.
8. Indicating lights for 24 VDC shall be resistive type
using a LED lamp.
9. Lights shall be capable of being changed from the
front of the panel without special tools.
10. Unit shall be UL/CSA listed.
11. Acceptable Manufacturer:
a. Senasys Inc., Series CMC. No substitutions
allowed.
12. Oil-tight Selector switches in other locations shall be
as specified in Section 16175.
Mount and connect in panels per Section 17110 and in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions to the
specified functional requirements.
Application, calibration, and set points shall be per
Section 17901.
XXL
Pilot Light
Operator Indicator (Pilot) Light
120 VAC, 60 Hertz
17272 - 2
C00822C13
Signal Input:
Signal Output:
Process Connection:
Product Requirements:
Execution:
Installation:
Application/Calibration:
Instrument Identification:
Instrument Description:
Instrument Function:
Power Supply:
Signal Input:
Signal Output:
Process Connection:
Product Requirements:
N/A
N/A
N/A
1. Each assembly shall have up to four positions that
can be configured as segmenters indicating light units.
2. Provide indicating lights, legend plated and colored
lenses as shown on the Drawings.
3. Indicating lights shall be oil-tight heavy-duty units,
conforming to NEMA 250 Type 4 or better, as required.
4. Indicating lights for 130 VAC shall be transformer type
using a LED lamp.
5. Indicating lights for 24 VDC shall be resistive type
using a LED lamp.
6. Lights shall be capable of being changed form the
front of the paned without special tools.
7. Units shall have UL/CSA listing.
8. Acceptable Manufacturer:
a. Senasys, Inc. Series CMC. No substitution
allowed.
Mount and connect in panels per Section 17110 and in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions to the
specified functional requirements.
Application, calibration, and set points shall be per
Section 17901.
PB
Push Button Switch
Operator Interface
Dependent on Application
N/A
Contacts, rated as below
N/A
1. 30.5 mm diameter mounting hole, flush head,
heavy-duty, water-tight/oil-tight, NEMA rated to match
enclosure type.
2. Operators: Red for stop functions and black for all
other functions.
3. Provide pushbuttons designated "Lock-Out-Stop"
(LOS) or "Emergency Stop" (E-stop) with red mushroom
head and maintained-operation contacts. NOT USED
4. Escutcheon legend: as shown on drawings.
5. Contacts: unless otherwise indicated, momentary
action
a. NEMA ICS 2 designation Type A600 except
when switching circuits monitored by PLC or other solid
state circuits
b. Solid state circuits: Hermetically sealed reed
contacts
6. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Allen-Bradley Series 800T
b. Square-D class 9001 Type K
c. Or Approved Equal
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17272 - 3
C00822C13
Execution:
Installation:
Application/Calibration:
Instrument Identification:
Instrument Description:
Instrument Function:
Power Supply:
Signal Input:
Signal Output:
Process Connection:
Product Requirements:
Mount and connect in panels per Section 17110 and in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions to the
specified functional requirements.
Application, calibration, and set points shall be per
Section 17901.
CR
Control Relay
Control Logic
Dependent on application
N/A
N/A
N/A
General: All relays shall have indicator lights and 4
Form C contacts except for Types 3 & 4, which shall 3
Form C contacts.
1. Type 1 - Dry circuit relay. (0 to 100 mA DC).
Hermetically sealed with miniature blade terminals.
a. Potter Brumfield KHS Series with bifurcated
gold crossbar
b. Omron model MY4ZH
c. Or Approved Equal.
2. Type 2 - Low level relay (10 mA DC to 1A DC).
Miniature blade terminals
a. Potter-Brumfield KHA series with
gold-silver-nickel contacts.
b. Allen-Bradley Bulletin 700-HC14
c. Or Approved Equal.
3. Type 3 - Intermediate level relay (50 mA DC to 5
amps AC). Octal tube base.
a. Idec series RR with silver contacts.
b. Allen Bradley Bulletin 700-HA.
c. Or Approved Equal.
4. Type 4 - Low power relay (10 amps at 120 VAC).
Square base with blade terminals.
a. Potter-Brumfield KU Series with silver
cadmium-oxide contacts.
b. Allen-Bradley Bulletin 700-HB
c. Or Approved Equal.
Execution:
Installation:
Application/Calibration:
Instrument Identification:
Instrument Description:
Instrument Function:
Power Supply:
Product Requirements:
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
Mount and connect in panels per Section 17110 and in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions to the
specified functional requirements.
Application, calibration, and set points shall be per
Section 17901.
TR
Timer Relay
Control Logic
As Specified
1. Type 1 - Time delay “on” relay.
a. DPPT contacts rated 3 A at 30 VDC or 220 VAC
b. Repeatability: + 0.2% maximum
c. Setting error + 10% maximum
17272 - 4
C00822C13
d. Temperature error: + 3% maximum
e. Range: As specified, 0.1 - 3600 seconds
f. Lifetime - electrical: 200,000 operations
mechanical: 50,000,000 operations
g. Coil voltage: As specified
h. Approved Manufacturers:
i. Allen-Bradley 700-HR series
ii. Omron H3CR-A series
iii. Or Approved Equal.
2. Type 2 - Time delay "off" relay.
a. "True off" delay: timed contact remains
energized after power is removed from coil terminals up
to 600 seconds.
b. DPDT contacts rated 24 VDC or 240 VAC at 5A
c. Repeatability: + 0.4% maximum
d. Setting error: + 10% maximum
e. Temperature error: + 0.2% maximum
f. Range: As specified, 0.1 - 600 seconds
g. Lifetime - electrical: 100,000 operations
mechanical: 20,000,000 operations
h. Coil voltage: As specified
i. Approved Manufacturers:
i. Idec GT-3F series
ii. Allen-Bradley 700-HRQ series
iii. Omron H3CR-H series
iv. Or Approved Equal.
Execution:
Installation:
Application/Calibration:
Mount and connect in panels per Section 17110 and in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions to the
specified functional requirements.
Application, calibration, and set points shall be per
Section 17901.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17272 - 5
C00822C13
SECTION 17274
MINIATURE CASE ELECTRONIC PANEL INSTRUMENTS
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies requirements for panel mounted electronic instruments used to provide
process control and interface between the operator and the process.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
documents. It is a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the
requirements of this Section and those of the listed document, the more stringent requirements of
this Section shall prevail.
Reference
Title
NEMA 250
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Product Data: per Section 17000.
C. Calibration and Test Results: per Section 17000.
D. Operation and Maintenance Information: per Section 01730.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Unless otherwise specified, panel instruments shall comply with the following requirements:
1. Analog instruments shall be miniature-case drawout type, standard DIN dimensions, and not
more than 20 inches deep.
2. Operator, tuning, and configuration adjustments shall be accessible without disconnecting the
instrument from the process.
3. Analog signal indicators shall be solid-state, LED, or gas-discharge type, 4-digit numerical
display or bar-graph displays with not less than 100 segments, as specified
4. Analog signal inputs shall be 1 to 5 VDC into not less than 250K ohms.
5. Analog signal outputs shall be 1 to 5 VDC into >10K ohms except where instrument provides
final output signal to field in which case output shall be 4 to 20 mA current regulated into 0 to
600 ohms.
6. Unless otherwise specified, power supply shall be 120 VAC plus or minus 10 percent.
7. Signal and power supply connections shall be isolated from the instrument case.
B. Unless otherwise specified, panel instruments specified in this Section shall be the product of a
single manufacturer, and shall match and line up to form an integrated appearance and operator
interface strategy.
2.02 INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION (INSTRUSPEC) SHEETS
A. General requirements for instruments specified in this Section are listed on INSTRUSPEC.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17274 - 1
C00822C13
B. Application requirements are specified in the instrument schedule in Section 17901, and/or on the
Drawings.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Operator interface instruments shall be installed on panels per Section 17110.
3.02 TESTING
A. Testing requirements per Section 17000.
3.03 INSTRUSPEC SHEETS
A. The following INSTRUSPEC sheets are included in this Section.
INSTRUSPEC Symbol
Instrument Description
XI2
Digital Indicator
Instrument Function
Digital panel indicator
Instrument Identification:
Instrument Description:
Instrument Function:
Power Supply:
Signal Input:
Signal Output:
Process Connection:
Product Requirements:
XI2
Digital Indicator
Digital Indicator
120 VAC, 60 hertz, or 24 VDC, as required
1-5 VDC
Process Input
N/A
1. Panel mount digital process meter, scalable in
engineering units.
2. Display: 4-digits by 0.5" high minimum. LED or
back-lighted LCD with adjustable D.P.
3. Accuracy: 0.1% +/- 1 digit
4. Display range: -1999 to 9999
5. Relative humidity: 0 to 85%, non-condensing
6. Operating temperature: 32° to 122°F
7. Enclosure: NEMA 4X: Bezel: 1/8 DIN (96.5 mm
W x 49.5 mm H); Panel cutout: (92 mm W x 45
mm H)
8. Acceptable Manufacturer:
a. Newport model IDP
b. Red Lion controls model PAX
c. Action Instruments model 438
b. Or Approved Equal.
Execution:
1. Install in panels per Section 17110 and in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions to the
specified functional requirements.
2. Application, calibration, and setpoints shall be
per Section 17901.
Installation:
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17274 - 2
C00822C13
SECTION 17275
MISCELLANEOUS INSTRUMENTS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies requirements for miscellaneous instruments used to provide process
control and interface between the operator and the process.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
document. It is a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the
requirements of this Section and that of the listed document, the requirements of this Section
shall prevail.
Reference
Title
NEMA 250
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Per Section 17000.
C. Test Data.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION (INSTRUSPEC) SHEETS
A. General requirements for instruments specified in this Section are listed on INSTRUSPEC
sheets.
B. Application requirements are specified in the instrument schedule in Section 17000, and/or on the
Drawings.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Instruments shall be installed on panels per Section 17110.
3.02 TESTING
A. Testing requirements per Section 17000.
3.03 INSTRUSPEC SHEETS
A. The following INSTRUSPEC sheets are included in this Section.
INSTRUSPEC Symbol
Instrument Description
RTU
Remote Telemetry Unit
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17275 - 1
Instrument Function
Telemetry (Metrotel)
Contract No. C00822C13
3.04 INSTRUSPEC SHEET
INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET—INSTRUSPEC
Instrument Identification:
Instrument Description:
Instrument Function:
Power Supply:
Signal Input:
Signal Output:
Product Requirements:
RTU
Remote Telemetry Unit
Telemetry (Metrotel)
120 VAC
Discrete and analog
Discrete and analog (Optional)
1.
2.
3.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
The remote telemetry unit (RTU) shall have sufficient
sensitivity and power to communicate with master
telemetry unit (MTU) of the specific application.
The RTU shall be capable of communicating with existing
Metrotel system at the Treatment Plant receiving the
signals over standard voice grade telephone lines.
The RTU shall have the following features:
a.
Base Card:
1) 12 discrete inputs (12 VDC), 8 discrete outputs
(Solid State DC, 10-32V@1AMax), 6 analog
inputs (4-20mA DC) standard.
2) Power sources: 12VDC power supply, or 12
VDC back up battery.
3) Operating Temperature: -20 to 140 deg F,
Humidity: 10-95%, non-condensing
4) RS232 Serial port
5) RS485 Port A, TSP connection.
6) RS232 Port B, RJ45 connection.
7) RS232 Port D, TSP connection.
8) Ethernet 10/100 RJ45 port.
9) Communications protocol: US Filter Autocon
95XX protocol w/CRC security.
10) Manufacturers:
a) Siemens Control Systems Intralink
Controller ILK-LC2000-131, No Substitution.
b.
DI Expander Unit:
1) 16 discrete inputs (12 VDC) - Siemens Control
Systems Intralink Controller ILK-DI-16-BE, No
Substitution.
c.
Surge Protection, 120 VAC, DIN mounted- Phoenix
Contact 2856812, PT2-PE/S-120AC/FM or equal.
d.
Telephone Surge Protection, Analog, Phoenix
Contact MT-2-FM-RJ12 or equal.
e.
Modem card:
1) 1200 baud 4-wire Bell 202 compatible
(a) Mfg: Siemens Control Systems CMM202
Radio/Phone 300/1200 BPS Modem, ILKCMM202C-01, No Substitution.
f.
Power supply:
1) DIN-mounted 12 VAC 4.5 Amp
(a) Mfr: Siemens 6EP1322-1SH02, Or
Approved Equal.
g
Backup Battery:
1) 12 VDC 2.2 A-h
(a) Mfg: US Filter Autocon Model 9530, Or
Approved Equal 17275 - 2
Contract No. C00822C13
h
Enclosure:
1) NEMA 250 Type 12 or Type 4X, as required
3.05 EXECUTION
A. Installation:
1. Install the RTU equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Obtain 120 VAC power from the UPS at the facility.
3. Connect the RTU to the discrete and analog points specified in Section 17904 Metrotel
schedule.
B. Configuration/Programming:
1. Configure the RTU and telephone line to communicate with the Metrotel system at the
receiving Treatment Plant.
a. Provide a technician for a four-hour period for testing the RTU while the County staff is
testing the Metrotel system at the receiving Treatment Plant.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17275 - 3
Contract No. C00822C13
SECTION 17400
SYSTEM LOGIC DESCRIPTIONS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the system logic descriptions for microprocessor based equipment, which
includes the programmable logic controller (PLC) and the miniature case control station used as
single loop controllers.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. This Section incorporates the requirements of King County’s “PLC Install and Programming
Standards Manual”. This document is available upon request from the Project Representative.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTION
A. Provide system logic per Control Strategies in Sections 17501 through 17504
B. Provide system logic for hardware per the King County’s “PLC Installation and Programming
Standards Manual”.
C. Provide function module library per the King County’s “PLC Installation and Programming
Standards Manual.”
D. Provide controller system logic as shown on the drawings for a three pump sequence with
proportional-integral level control.
PART 3
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17400 - 1
C00822C13
.
SECTION 17501
CONTROL STRATEGY- STORAGE TANK FILLING SEQUENCE
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Combined sewer flows will be diverted to the Lower Diversion Structure (LDS) adjacent to the
storage tank via a diversion structure and the diversion structure isolation gate (SLG 851,151)
located along the South Magnolia Trunk Sewer (SMTS) in 32nd Avenue W. The diversion structure
on 32nd Avenue W., the diversion structure and the conveyance pipeline will be constructed under a
separate contract, to be known as the South Magnolia Conveyance Pipeline (SMCP) Contract.
Flows diverted to the LDS will continue through the LDS and on to the connection to the SMTS. If
capacity is limited in the SMTS, the wastewater level will rise, and when the water surface elevation
overtops the weir, flow will enter the storage tank. A Lower Diversion Structure Emergency Plug
Valve (PLV 851,101) (normally open) is provided as a backup shut off if the diversion structure
isolation gate on 32nd Avenue W fails to close;.
B. Flows will enter the Lower Diversion Structure and continue via gravity to the existing South
Magnolia Trunk Sewer. A flap valve (FG 851,101) is provided in the third chamber of the LDS.
When the SMTS downstream of the LDS begins to surcharge, the water level in the third chamber
of the LDS will rise. If the level in the third chamber exceeds the level in the second chamber, the
flap valve will close and prevent flows from the downstream system from entering the storage tank.
C. As upstream flows continue through the influent conveyance pipe, the water level in the middle
chamber of the Lower Diversion Structure will rise and will start to spill over into Bay 1 at elevation
105.5. Bay 1 will continue to fill to the water surface elevation of 105.0 before spilling over to Bays
2-4. The tank will begin to fill until the 4 bays reach the water surface level of 104.5.
D. The diversion structure isolation gate (SLG 851,151) shall close (messaged from the Storage Tank
PLC to the diversion structure PLC, coordinate with the SMCP contractor) when the water surface
elevation reaches 104.5 (measured by level sensors in Bays 2-4). The remaining flow in the influent
conveyance pipeline will be sent to the storage tank with the tank water surface increasing to the
maximum elevation of 105.5.
E. In the event that diversion structure isolation gate (SLG 851,151) does not close, the storage tank
will continue to fill. When the water surface elevation reaches 107.0 (measured by level sensors in
Bays 2-4), the Emergency Plug Valve (PLV 851,101) in the Lower Diversion Structure shall close
and storage filling shall stop.
F. Equipment List:
1. Mechanical: Per Section 11009 and on the Drawings.
2. Instrumentation: Per Section 17901 and on the Drawings.
3. Alarms: Per Section 17902 and on the Drawings.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED)
1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED)
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Storage Tank Level Measurement:
1. Tank level measurement:
a. Redundant Bubblers.
b. Back up High and High High level floats.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17501 - 1
C00822C13
.
2. Bubbler System:
a. Air is supplied to the bubbler level measurement systems by an instrument air system per
Section 11366.
b. System includes a bubbler tube, pressure regulator, air supply pressure gauge, air flow
regulator, rotameter, purge mechanism, backup air compressor, and the following
instruments: pressure gauge, differential level transmitter, and pressure switch.
c. Location as indicated on the Drawings:
1) Bay 1/Wetwell sump: LIT 851,113A and LIT 851,113B
2) Bays 2-4: LIT 851,114A and LIT 851,114B
d. The bubbler pipes shall be installed with the open end 6-inches above the bottom floor of
the tank bays and the transmitter and level indicators are calibrated to indicate a level of
elevation when water is at or below the end of the bubbler pipe.
1) Bay 1/Wetwell sump: El 79.25 feet.
2) Bays 2 -4: 83.25 feet.
e. Level is indicated in feet of elevation on the pressure gauge located on the bubbler panel
and on an OIT (PanelView) screen for each of the level instruments.
f. High Level setpoints:
1) Bays 2-4: 104.5 for the High Level alarm/trip.
2) Bays 2-4: 107.0 for the High High Level alarm/trip.
g. Back-up High Level Floats:
1) Location as indicated on the Drawings:
a) Bays 2-4: LSH 851,113B and LSHH 851,113A.
h. All levels shall be monitored at SCADA and Metrotel III.
1.05 CONTROL OPERATIONS
A. Storage Tank Level Measurement:
1. Manual control:
a. A level transmitter selector (A/AUTO/B) on the Main Control Panel (MCP 851,101) allows
the operator to manually select either level transmitter (A) or level transmitter (B)
independently for each tank.
2. Automatic control - (normal mode):
a. The selector switch is in the AUTO position.
b. PLC will utilize the last level transmitter selected (herein referred to as "primary level
transmitter") by an operator via the level transmitter selector switch.
3. Level transmitter failure:
a. If a level transmitter fail condition is detected the PLC will switch control to the other level
transmitter (herein referred to as "back-up level transmitter"). Fail condition is defined as:
1) Transmitter out of range:
a) PLC will monitor the selected level transmitter output.
b) Transmitter low out of range is defined as the level transmitter output below an
adjustable limit, initially set at 3.8 mA (.8V in the case of voltage outputs) for more
than a 15 second time delay.
c) Transmitter high out of range is defined as the level transmitter output above an
adjustable limit, initially set at 20.2 mA (5.2V in the case of voltage outputs) for
more than a 15 second time delay.
d) Either condition shall be alarmed as a Bubbler out of Range Alarm . The logic shall
automatically switch to the Back-up level transmitter.
2) Bubbler level instrument conflict (discrepancy)
a) If the bubbler level transmitter output varies from the back up LIT output by+/- 0.5
feet.
b) This condition shall be alarmed as a Bubbler out of Range Alarm only.
4. Back up High Level Floats:
a. High Level float switch (LSH 851,113B), physically mounted to trip at Elevation 105.0, shall
back up the analog setpoint (El. 104.5) for the command to close the Isolation Gate (SLG
851,151). This float will also trigger the High Level Alarm.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17501 - 2
C00822C13
.
b. A High High level float switch (LSHH 851,113A), physically mounted to trip at Elevation
107.0, shall back up the analog setpoint (El. 107.0) for the command to close the
Emergency Shut Off Plug Valve (PLV 851,101). This float will also trigger the High High
Level Alarm.
B. Diversion Structure Isolation Gate (SLG 851,151):
1. Description: SLG 851,151 (Isolation Gate, by South Magnolia Conveyance Pipeline (SMCP)
Contractor).
2. Automatic control - Open/Close Gate:
a. Normally Open.
b. Closes when the surface elevation of the Storage Tank reaches 104.50 ft. based on either
LIT 851,114A (primary) or 851,114B (back up) or LSH 851,113B.
c. Close signal shall be messaged from the storage tank PLC to the diversion structure PLC,
coordinate with the SMCP contractor.
d. Diversion structure PLC shall manipulate gate to proper position.
e. Opens when the surface elevation of Storage Tank reaches 103.5 ft based on either LIT
851,114A (primary) or 851,114B (back up).
f. Open signal shall be messaged from the storage tank PLC to the diversion structure PLC,
coordinate with the SMCP contractor.
C. Emergency Plug Valve (PLV 851,101):
1. Description: Open/Close Eccentric Plug Valve located in the Lower Diversion Structure,
controlled by motorized actuator.
2. Manual control:
a. Manually controlled from integral operator interface devices at the actuator and CMC
switches on the MCP and remotely from SCADA.
b. LOCAL/REMOTE indication (from the integral local/remote switch on the actuator)
3. Automatic control - Open/Close Gate:
a. Normally Open.
b. Closes when the surface elevation of the Storage Tank reaches 107.00 ft. based on at
least 2 of the 4 Level transmitters in the storage tank (LIT 851,113A, LIT 851,113B, LIT
851,114A, LIT 851,114B) indicating above this level or LSHH 851,113A is tripped.
c. Opens when the surface elevation of the Storage Tank decreases to 104.5 based on LIT
851,113A, LIT 851,113B.
4. Valve fail detection:
a. The full open to full closed time shall be monitored with a hardwired timer off relay. If the
travel time from point to point (full open to full closed and vice versa) takes longer than the
set time on the timer, the PLC will receive and annunciate a gate failure alarm.
1.06 ALARMS
A. As shown in Section 17904 and on the Drawings.
1. Annunciated on the main control panel and on the OIT alarm screen
2. All alarms shall be also be annunciated at SCADA.
1.07 OPERATOR INTERFACE GRAPHICS
A. In accordance with the latest edition of the King County PLC Installation and Programming
Guidelines Manual.
B. Storage Tank Level Measurement:
1. Control: None
2. Display:
a. Status and process display:
1) Storage Tank levels:
a) Primary Level Transmitters: LIT 851,113A and LIT 851,114A.
b) Back-up Level Transmitters: LIT 851,113B and LT 851,114B.
c) Level float switches indications: LSH 851,113B and LSHH 851,113A.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17501 - 3
C00822C13
.
b. Operator entries: None
c. Alarms: On OIT and annunciated at SCADA
Tag:
Description
LYA 851,113A
Storage Tank Bay 1 Level Transmitter Out of Range
LYA 851,114A
Storage Tank Bay 2-4 Level Transmitter Out of Range
LYA 851,113B
Storage Tank Bay 1 Back up Transmitter Out of Range
LYA 851,114B
Storage Tank Bay 2-4 Back up Transmitter Out of Range
PAL 851,113
Storage Tank Bay 1 Bubbler Loss of IA
PAL 851,114
Storage Tank Bay 2-4 Bubbler Loss of IA
LAH 851,113B
Storage Tank Bay 1 High Level Float Alarm
LAHH 851,113A
Storage Tank Bay 1 High High Level Float Alarm
d. Historical trending: none.
C. Emergency Plug Valve:
1. Control: operator adjustable level setpoints for the isolation gates/emergency plug valve.
2. Display:
a. Status and process display:
1) OPEN/CLOSE Gates: full open, gate traveling, full close indication, fault indication,
local/remote status indication.
b. Operator entries: Level setpoints.
c. Alarms: On OIT and annunciated at SCADA.
1) PLV 851,101 Fault.
d. Historical trending: None.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17501 - 4
C00822C13
SECTION 17502
CONTROL STRATEGY- STORAGE TANK DEWATERING SEQUENCE
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The dewatering pumps will dewater the storage tank and discharge into the third chamber of the
Lower Diversion Structure. The Dewatering Sequence is based on the level measurements in the
South Magnolia Trunk Sewer (measured by level sensors in the third chamber of the Lower
Diversion Structure) and level measurements in Bay 1/Wetwell.
B. The level signals in the Lower Diversion Structure are the basis for maintaining and monitoring level
control of the downstream South Magnolia Trunk Sewer System during tank dewatering.
C. The dewatering pumps will begin pumping only if capacity in the South Magnolia Trunk Sewer
system is available and if a water surface level is indicated in Bay 1/Wetwell,
D. The variable speed pumps will ramp up one by one, as needed to maintain the operator adjustable
level control setpoint in the Lower Diversion Structure (initially set at el 99.5).
E. The dewatering pumps will shut off in one of two conditions:
1. Downstream system begins to surcharge: The water level in the third chamber of the Lower
Diversion Structure reaches the operator adjustable “pump off” setpoint (initially set at 100.3).
The pumps will ramp down to minimum speed as the surcharge level in the Lower Diversion
Structure rises to the operator adjustable “ pump off” setpoint (trip point).
2. Storage Tank Empty: Bay 1/wetwell level reaches the “pump off” setpoint (initially set at 80.0
indicating the tank is empty). All but one pump will shut off at el 82.0 prior to reaching the “pump
off” setpoint.
F. A flow meter is provided on the dewatering pump discharge line to monitor tank discharge rate.
G. Equipment List:
1. Mechanical: Per Section 11009 and on the Drawings.
2. Instrumentation: Per Section 17901 and on the Drawings.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Bay 1/Wetwell Storage Tank Level Measurement: Per Section 17501.
B. Lower Diversion Structure Level Measurement:
1. Bubbler System:
a. Air is supplied to the bubbler level measurement systems by an instrument air system per
Section 11366.
b. Each level measurement system includes a bubbler tube, pressure regulator, air supply
pressure gauge, air flow regulator, rotameter, purge mechanism, backup air compressor,
and the following instruments: pressure gauge, differential level transmitter, and pressure
switch.
2. Location as indicated on the Drawings:
a. Third chamber of the Lower Diversion Structure: LIT 851,115A. and LIT 851,115B.
b. The bubbler pipes shall be installed with the open end 6-inches above the bottom floor of
the third chamber of the Lower Diversion Structure and level indicators are calibrated to
indicate a level of el 97.4 when water is at or below the end of the bubbler pipe.
3. Level is indicated in feet of elevation on the pressure gauge located on the bubbler panel, on a
OIT (PanelView) screen, SCADA and the Metrotel system for each of the level instruments.
4. Level is transmitted to the Treatment Plant via SCADA and Metrotel.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17502 - 1
C00822C13
C. Dewatering Pumps:
1. All three pumps (P851,101, P851,102 and P851,103) will be operated at variable speed to
maintain a constant level in the Lower Diversion Structure.
2. Location as indicated on the Drawings:
a. Bay 1/Wetwell sump wetwell.
3. Check Valve Limit Switch. A check valve is used on the discharge of each pump. The check
valves are equipped with limit switches (ZSC851,101, ZSC851,102 and ZSC851,103) that
signal when the valve is not fully opened and is used to monitor that the pump is producing flow
when the motor is running.
4. Pumping Unit Control Switches And Lights: Each pumping unit includes a HAND/OFF/AUTO
selector (HS851,101AA , HS851,102AA and HS851,103AA) on the main control panel.
a. Indicating lights integral to each HOA switch are provide for READY, RUNNING, AUTO
and CONTROL POWER.
D. Storage Tank Isolation gate (SLG 851,101)
1. Description: Open/Close Isolation Gate located in the Storage Tank, controlled by motorized
actuators.
2. Manual control:
a. Manually controlled from integral operator interface devices at the actuators and CMC
switches on the MCP, remotely at the Storage Tank Control panel and remotely from
SCADA.
b. LOCAL/REMOTE indication (from the integral local/remote switch on the actuator)
3. Automatic control - Open/Close Gate:
a. Normally Closed
b. Opens when the tank is in the dewatering mode, water has overtopped the weir between
Tank Bay 1 and Bays 2-4 and the level in Tank Bay 1 is within ½ foot of the level in Tank
Bay 2-4, based on the primary level transmitter indicators.
c. Closes when the flushing sequence has been completed and the following:
1) 30 minutes has elapsed since the dewatering pumps have operated.
2) 30 minutes has elapsed since the level sensors in the third chamber of the Lower
Diversion Structure have measured above the level setpoint of 98.9 (indicating
capacity is not available).
4. Gate fail detection:
a. The full open to full closed time shall be monitored with hardwired a timer off relay. If the
travel time from endpoint to end point (full open to full closed and vise versa) takes longer
than the set time on the timer, the PLC will receive and annunciate a gate failure alarm.
1.03 CONTROL OPERATION
A. Lower Diversion Structure Level Measurement:
1. Manual control:
a. A level transmitter selector (A/AUTO/B) on the Main Control Panel (MCP 851,101) allows
the operator to manually select either level transmitter (A) or level transmitter (B)
independently for each tank.
2. Automatic control - (normal mode):
a. The selector switch is in the AUTO position.
b. PLC will utilize the last level transmitter selected (herein referred to as "primary level
transmitter") by an operator via the level transmitter selector switch.
3. Level transmitter failure:
a. If a level transmitter fail condition is detected the PLC will switch control to the other level
transmitter (herein referred to as "back-up level transmitter"). Fail condition is defined as:
1) Transmitter out of range:
a) PLC will monitor the selected level transmitter output.
b) Transmitter low out of range is defined as the level transmitter output below an
adjustable limit, initially set at 3.8 mA (.8V in the case of voltage outputs) for more
than a 15 second time delay.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17502 - 2
C00822C13
c) Transmitter high out of range is defined as the level transmitter output above an
adjustable limit, initially set at 20.2 mA (5.2V in the case of voltage outputs) for
more than a 15 second time delay.
d) Either condition shall be alarmed as a Bubbler out of Range Alarm . The logic shall
automatically switch to the Back-up level transmitter.
2) Bubbler level instrument conflict (discrepancy)
a) If the bubbler level transmitter output varies from the back up LIT output by+/- 0.5
feet.
b) This condition shall be alarmed as a Bubbler out of Range Alarm only.
B. Dewatering Pump Operation:
1. Manual Control:
a. The Dewatering Pumps shall be manually operable via the HAND/OFF/AUTO selector
switches on the main control panel.
b. When these switches are in HAND, the pumps will be individually controlled manually.
2. Automatic Control (Normal Operating Mode):
a. Lead, First Follow and Second Follow assignments shall be selectable from hardwired
switches on the Main Control Panel.
1) If one pump is selected for more than one position in the starting sequence, a Pump
Sequence Fault alarm (YA 851,126) shall be annunciated locally at the annunciator.
b. All three pumps will be operated at variable speed to maintain a constant level in the Lower
Diversion Structure.
c. Pumps Start/Stop Operation: The PLC shall be programmed for proportional plus integral
(P+I) operation to maintain level setpoint in the Lower Diversion Structure.
1) When the level in the third chamber of the Lower Diversion Structure drops to the
operator adjustable level setpoint (initially set at EL 98.9 ) the South Magnolia Trunk
Sewer has capacity for receiving CSOs from the storage tank.
2) If the level in Bay 1/Wetwell is at or above the level setpoint of 80.5, flows are present
in the storage tank.
3) These two setpoints (“PUMP ON” trip point) drives the call for the Lead variable speed
pump to run. The Lead pump shall ramp to 100% speed for 30 seconds to clear
potential debris from the effluent piping.
4) After 30 seconds, the Lead pump shall ramp to maintain the level in the Lower
Diversion Structure at the Tank Dewater Level setpoint (level control). This setpoint
shall be initially set at EL 99.5.
5) If the Lead pump, running at 100% output, is unable to reach and maintain the level
setpoint after 5 minutes, the PLC shall call the First Follow pump. The First Follow
pump shall ramp to 100% speed for 30 seconds, then both Lead and First Follow
pumps shall ramp to maintain the Tank Dewater Level setpoint (level control).
6) If the Lead and First Follow pumps, running at 100% output, are unable to reach and
maintain the level setpoint after 5 minutes, the PLC shall call the Second Follow pump.
The Second Follow pump shall ramp to 100% speed for 30 seconds, then all three
pumps shall ramp to maintain the Tank Dewater Level setpoint (level control).
7) The First Follow and Second Follow pumps will shut off when the water surface
elevation in Bay 1/Wetwell reaches el 82.0 (First Follow/Second Follow pumps OFF).
The Lead pump will continue to operate until the water surface elevation in Bay
1/Wetwell reaches el 80.0 (Lead pump OFF).
8) If during dewatering, the South Magnolia Trunk Sewer begins to surcharge, the pumps
will shut off when the level in the Lower Diversion Structure reaches the Surcharge
Level “PUMP OFF” setpoint (trip point). The Surcharge Level “PUMP OFF” setpoint
shall be initially set at EL 100.3.
d. Pump failure detection:
1) In the event of Utility Power Failure, any running dewatering pumps shall restart in the
same Lead, First Follow, Second Follow sequence with a 15 second delay between
pump starts to limit the inrush load on the Generator.
2) Alarm conditions that will initiate pump shutdown for the Dewatering Pumps.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17502 - 3
C00822C13
a) High Temperature: For the Pump Motor Winding alarms, TAH851,101,
TAH851,102, TAH851,103. The alarms shall be reset by pressing the Reset button
(HS 851,101EA) on MCP 851,101
b) VFD Fault: VFD 851,101, VFD 851,102 and VFD 851,103 respectively in the event
of a VFD fault. These alarm conditions may be manually reset for each pump by
pressing the push-to-reset buttons, HS851,101AD, HS851,102AD, and
HS851,103AD, on VFD’s
3) The PLC will contain logic to initiate the following pump shutdowns and alarms. In the
event of a Lead or First Follow pump failure, the Second Follow pump shall
automatically replace the failed pump in the dewatering pump start sequence.
a) VFD Fault: NDA851,101, NDA851,102 and NDA851,103.
b) Motor Winding Temp: TAH851,101, TAH851,102 and TAH851,103.
4) The PLC will contain logic to initiate the following pump alarms without shutdown.
a) Leakage Sensor: MAH851,101, MAH851,102 and MAH851,103
e. A flow meter is provided on the dewatering pump discharge line to monitor pump discharge
volume. Instantaneous flow rate as well as flow total shall be indicated on the OIT and
available to SCADA.
C. Storage Tank Isolation Gate Operation
1. General:
a. Open/Close Gate:
1) The OPEN/CLOSE gate is controlled by motorized actuators, which respond to
OPEN and CLOSE signals and provide OPEN and CLOSED position indication.
The valves are all manually controlled from integral operator interface devices at
the actuators, remotely from the Storage Tank Control Panel and remotely from
SCADA.
2) One OPEN/CLOSE isolation gate is utilized in the Tank Dewatering Sequence.
SLG851,101 is located in the storage tank between Bay1 and Bays 2-4.
2. Gate Operation
a. Description
1) SLG851,101 OPEN/CLOSE isolation gate is automatically controlled by level
setpoints , manually controlled or remote manually controlled.
b. Equipment:
1) Isolation gate SLG 851,101
c.
Manual control:
1) OPEN/CLOSE Gate: Manually controlled from integral operator interface devices
at the actuators, remotely from the Storage Tank Control panel and remotely from
SCADA.
3. Automatic control:
a. OPEN/CLOSE Gate: Level based control
1) SLG851,101 (normally closed) opens when the tank is in the dewatering mode, the
level in Bay 1 has overtopped the weir between Bay 1 and Bays 2-4 (EL 105.0. The
gate will open when the level in Tank Bay 1 (as indicated by Bay 1/wetwell level
measurement) is within ½ foot of the level in Tank Bay 2-4 (as indicated by Bays
2-4 level measurement) at the beginning of the dewatering sequence (indicating a
full tank) or as the level in Bay 1 is drawn down to the level in Bays 2 – 4 during
dewatering
2) If SLG 851,101 opens during dewatering (indicating water has flowed into Bays
2-4), it shall remain open until Bays 2-4 have been flushed (per Section 17503).
Once Bays 2-4 have been flushed and drained, SLG 851,101 shall close and
remain closed until a new CSO event occurs.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17502 - 4
C00822C13
4. Gate Fail detection:
a. OPEN/CLOSE Gate:
1) The full open to full closed time shall be monitored with hardwired a timer off relay.
If the travel time from endpoint to end point (full open to full closed and vise versa)
takes longer than the set time on the timer, the PLC will receive and annunciate a
gate failure alarm
1.04 OPERATOR INTERFACE (OIT)
A. Operator interface graphics: In accordance with the latest edition of the King County PLC
Installation and Programming Guidelines Manual.
B. Lower Diversion Structure Level Measurement:
1. Control: None
2. Display:
a. Status and process display:
1) Storage Tank levels:
a) Primary Level Transmitter
b) Back-up Level Transmitter
3. Operator entries: None
4. Alarms: On OIT and annunciated at SCADA
Tag:
Description
LYA 851,115A
Lower Diversion Structure level Transmitter Out of Range
LYA 851,115B
Lower Diversion Structure back up Transmitter Out of Range
PAL 851,910
Lower Diversion Structure Bubbler loss of IA
a. Historical trending: none
C. Storage Tank (Bay 1/Wetwell) Level Measurement: Per Section 17501.
D. Dewatering Pumps:
1. Control: None
2. Display:
a. Status and process display: Indicating lights integral to each HOA switch
1) READY
2) RUNNING
3) AUTO
4) PUMP FAULT
5) IN REMOTE
3. Operator entries: None
4. Alarms: On OIT and annunciated at SCADA
Tag:
Description
YA 851,101
Pump Fault: Pump P851,101 check valve closed while pump running
YA 851,102
Pump Fault: Pump P851,102 check valve closed while pump running
YA 851,103
Pump Fault: Pump P851,103 check valve closed while pump running
MAH 851,101
Pump P851,101 seal fail
MAH 851,102
Pump P851,102 seal fail
MAH 851,103
Pump P851,103 seal fail
TAH 851,101
Pump P851,101 high temperature alarm
TAH 851,102
Pump P851,102 high temperature alarm
TAH 851,103
Pump P851,103 high temperature alarm
NDA 851,101
Pump P851,101 VFD Fault
NDA 851,102
Pump P851,102 VFD Fault
NDA 851,103
Pump P851,103 VFD Fault
5. A short time delay permits flow to be established during starting before alarm is enabled.
a. Historical trending: none
1) READY, RUNNING, IN REMOTE and FAULT are also transmitted to the West Point
Treatment Plant via SCADA.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17502 - 5
C00822C13
E. Storage Tank Isolation Gate: (SLG 851,101)
1. Control: None
2. Display: Located on MCP 851,101 in the Electrical Room.
a. Status and process display:
1) OPEN/CLOSE Gates: full open, gate traveling, full close indication, fault indication,
local/remote status indication
b. Operator entries: None
c. Alarms: annunciated at SCADA
1) SLG 851,101 Fault
d. Historical trending: None
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17502 - 6
C00822C13
SECTION 17503
CONTROL STRATEGY- STORAGE TANK FLUSHING SEQUENCE
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Flushing sequence will commence after a CSO event. The automated flushing system consists of
the tipping buckets filling with C2 water and tipping to flush debris from the tank. Tipping bucket
motorized valves (MV 851,101 – MV 851,104) are used to supply the water to fill the tipping
buckets. The buckets will tip by gravity when full. Bays may be flushed once or multiple times after
an event.
B. The flushing sequence will begin after the dewatering sequence if the level in the third chamber of
the Lower Diversion Structure is below the level setpoint which indicates there is capacity in the
South Magnolia Trunk Sewer and the storage tank level measurement in the wet well (indicated by
LIT 851 113 A or B) is below the first pump on level.
C. The automated flushing system will flush only the Bays filled during filling, as indicated by the
storage tank level measurements and the open/closed position of the isolation gate (SLG 851,101)
in the storage tank. Bay 1 only will be flushed if water has been detected by LIT 851,113A and LIT
851,113B and the isolation gate position is Closed.
D. All the Bays will be flushed if water has been detected by LIT 851,114A or LIT 851,114B and the
isolation gate position is Open. The buckets will be filled and tip one at a time beginning with
flushing Bay 1, then Bay 2, then Bay 3, then Bay 4. A position switch will detect when each bucket
tips and the PLC will keep track of the events in the sequence.
E. A flushing inhibit button shall be provided on the OIT (PanelView) and at SCADA to allow the
operator to override and reset the automatic controls. The entire sequence can be executed up to 3
times (operator adjustable at OIT (PanelView) or SCADA following each CSO event.
F. Equipment List:
1. Mechanical: Per Section 11009 and on the Drawings.
2. Instrumentation: Per Section 17901 and on the Drawings.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED)
1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED)
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Tipping Bucket:
1. Tipping buckets will fill with C2 water via timer operated C2 valves. The tipping buckets tip
when full via gravity and release a “flushing wave” down the length of each bay to remove
settled debris.
2. Position switches: detect when each bucket tips; the PLC will record each event in sequence.
3. The flushing water will collect in Bay 1/wetwell and will be pumped out by the dewatering sump
pump per Section 17502.
B. Tipping Bucket Fill:
1. Description:
a. Tipping buckets are filled with C2 water when the corresponding motor actuated valve is
called to open from the PLC.
b. A operator adjustable time (adjustable at the OIT and SCADA) backed up by a hardwired
timer maintain the open call to each motorized valve. The motorized valve shall positively
close in the event of the hardwired timer timing out in both manual and auto modes.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17503 - 1
C00822C13
1.05 CONTROL OPERATION
A. Storage Tank Flushing:
1. Manual Control:
a.
Each tipping bucket fill valve shall be capable of opening manually at the CMC switch
located on the main control panel.
b.
Tipping Bucket C2 Water Fill Valves shall open and remain open until the hardwired
timer times out (empirically set to 10 seconds longer than the tipping bucket takes to fill
to tipping point).
c.
Hardwired timer initially set at 20 minutes. Motorized valves shall positively close when
the hardwired timer times out.
d.
This feature is provided to allow operator to flush individual bays at any time.
e.
Each tipping bucket fill valve shall be capable of opening manually at the CMC switch
located on the main control panel.
f.
Dewatering pumps will pump out to the South Magnolia Trunk Sewer per Section
17502.
2.
Automatic Control (Normal Operating Mode):
a. Flushing sequence will commence:
1) Upon dewatering pumps turning off, flushing sequence will begin if the following
conditions are met:
a) Level in third chamber LDS measured by LIT 851,115A and LIT 851,115B is at or
below El 98.9 (pump on level set point), indicating capacity available in the South
Magnolia Trunk Sewer.
b) Water level measured in Bay 1 by LIT 851,113A and LIT 851,113B is el 80.0 or
below, indicating Bay 1 near empty.
c) The flushing sequence shall interrupt if the level in the Lower Diversion Structure
raises to el 100.3 or above, indicating no capacity in the South Magnolia Trunk
Sewer. Flushing sequence shall continue when the pump on level in the LDS is
once again established per (a) above.
b. All Bays will be flushed:
1) Water level recorded in Bays 2-4 by LIT 851,114A or LIT 851,114B, indicating Bays 2-4
were used during the storage tank filling sequence.
2) Storage tank isolation gate SG851,101 position is OPEN.
3) Flushing sequence commences sequentially from flushing Bay 1 to Bay 4. The first
tipping Bucket C2 Water Fill Valve shall open and remain open until the hardwired
timer times out (empirically set to 10 seconds longer than the tipping bucket takes to fill
to tipping point).
4) Hardwired timer initially set at 20 minutes and operator adjustable timer (adjustable at
the OIT and SCADA) backed up by a hardwired timer. Motorized valve shall positively
close when the hardwired timer times out and indicate to the PLC to open the next
motorized valve in the sequence.
5) The buckets will fill and tip by gravity when full, one at a time. A position switch will
detect when each bucket tips and the PLC will keep track of the events in the sequence
(monitor only).
6) The flushing sequence can be executed up to 3 times (operator adjustable at OIT
(PanelView) or SCADA).
7) Storage tank isolation gate SG851,101 will close when the flushing sequence has
been completed.
8) Dewatering sump pumps will pump out flushing water per Section 17502.
c. Bay 1 flushed only:
1) No water level recorded in Bays 2-4 by LIT 851,114A or LIT 851,114B, indicating Bays
2-4 were not used during the storage tank filling sequence.
2) Storage tank isolation gate SG851,101 position CLOSED.
3) Hardwired timer initially set at 20 minutes. Operator adjustable timer (adjustable at the
OIT and SCADA) backed up by a hardwired timer. Motorized valve shall positively
close when the hardwired timer times out.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17503 - 2
C00822C13
4) Tipping bucket (TBK 851,101) will fill and tip by gravity when full. A position switch will
detect when the bucket tips and the PLC will monitor only.
5) The flushing sequence can be executed up to 3 times (operator adjustable at OIT
(PanelView) or SCADA).
6) Dewatering sump pump will pump out flushing water per Section 17502.
d. Manual Override:
1) A flushing inhibit button shall be provided on the OIT (PanelView) and at SCADA and
programmed into the PLC to allow the operator to override and reset the automatic
controls.
e. Sequence Reset
1) The Flushing Sequence shall automatically reset when the sequence is completed. i
1.06 OPERATOR INTERFACE GRAPHICS
A. In accordance with the latest edition of the King County PLC Installation and Programming
Guidelines Manual.
B. PanelView Plus (OIT) for flushing system operation:
1. Control: Automatic Flushing.
2. Display:
a. Status and process display:
1) Individual Tipping Bucket C2 Water Fill Valves OPEN/CLOSED indication.
2) Individual Tipping Bucket position indication.
3) Indication of flushing status: flushing initiated, flushing completed.
b. Operator entries:
1) Automatic mode- adjustable flush level setpoint.
2) Automatic “flush inhibit” button and indication.
3) Adjustable flush cycles setpoint (1 to 3).
c. Alarms: None.
d. Historical trending: none.
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17503 - 3
C00822C13
SECTION 17504
CONTROL STRATEGY - MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEMS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies control strategies for miscellaneous systems that are not covered in other
control strategies.
B. Common functions will also be included here.
C. Equipment List:
1. Mechanical: Per Section 11009 and on the Drawings.
2. Instrumentation: Per Section 17901 and on the Drawings.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The following COMMON functions will follow King County’s software standards:
1. Common analog I/O functions:
a. Conditioning.
b. Alarming.
c. Scaling.
d. Flow totalization: When associated instrument is in CALIBRATE mode use last good
value for totalization and mark historical data accordingly.
e. Alarm setpoint dead bands.
f. Calculated analog values.
g. Instrument or equipment calibration mode (operate mode, maintenance mode, alarm
inhibit, timed monitoring in maintenance mode, data collection management when in
maintenance mode, etc.).
2. Common discrete I/O functions:
a. Alarming (alarms specified in this Section).
b. Interlocks.
3. Common control functions:
a. Level control using PLC resident proportional, integral, derivative (PID) controller.
b. Bumpless transfer (between control modes: auto, manual, local, remote, PID modes,
etc.).
c. Tracking of set point, process variable, equipment status (opened, closed, position,
mode, etc.).
4. Common valve control functions:
a. Local/remote mode monitoring, and HMI auto/manual mode monitoring and control.
b. Position monitoring (open, in transition, closed, position).
c. Equipment failure monitoring and alarming:
1) FAULT.
2) Fail to OPEN (within preset time delay).
3) Fail to CLOSE (within preset time delay).
5. Common monitoring functions:
a. Accessing information on the HMI (number of mouse clicks for navigation, diagnostics
information, etc.).
b. Communications:
1) Status.
2) Failure.
3) Power failure and restore.
6. Common instrument functions:
a. Redundant instruments provide level measurements (Tank Bays 1, 2-4 and Lower
Diversion Structure).
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17504 - 1
C00822C13
b. Both instruments identically calibrated in engineering units.
c. Level transmitter with the highest reading is used for level control function.
d. PLC logic generates an alarm when the difference between the two values exceeds an
operator adjustable value (initially set at 0.5 foot).
e. When one instrument is in maintenance mode, the other will be used for control.
f. Individual instrument high and low out-of-range alarming.
1.03 ALARMS
A. MetroTel Alarm Schedule
1. As shown in specification section 17904 and on the Drawings.
B. Local PLC Alarm Schedule
1. As shown in specification section 17902 and on the Drawings.
C. SCADA alarms
1. As shown in specification section 17905 and on the Drawings.
1.04 INTERLOCKS – (NOT USED)
1.05 OPERATION
A. Emergency Plug Valve: Per Section 17501.
B. Storage Tank Isolation Gate: Per Section 17502.
C. Dewatering Pumps: Per Section 17502 and the Drawings.
D. Air Gap Tank:
1. The Air Gap Tank provides an air gap between the C2 portion of the station water systems
and city water.
2. The Air Gap Tank system is monitored for low tank level and high tank level using float
switches.
3. High and low tank level alarms are monitored by the PLC.
4. The tank liquid level controls the Air Gap Tank Fill Valve through a float mechanism.
5. Refer to Section 11710 for full control description.
E. C2 Water Pumps:
1. The C2 water pumps are controlled by the package C2 water control panel. A summary
alarm (trouble) contact is sent to the PLC and monitored by SCADA.
2. There is one duplex C2 water pump control panel.
3. Refer to Section 11710 for full control description.
4.
F. Emergency Generator System:
1. The generator, generator control panel, and batteries shall be provided as a package system
from the generator supplier.
2. The generator statuses are monitored and reported to the PLC as shown on the Drawings.
3. When the Generator Running status is active, the status is reported to the MetroTel system.
4. Generator Failure alarm is made available to the MetroTel system.
G. Fuel Supply System
1. The fuel system will be provided as a package system from the fuel tank supplier.
2. The Fuel Tank Control Panel monitors and controls the fuel system according to the
manufacturer’s specifications.
3. The Fuel Tank system statuses are monitored and reported to the PLC as shown on the
Drawings.
4. The Leak Detection and Inventory Control Panel monitors the fuel tank for fuel level and leak.
5. Fuel storage tank statuses are monitored and reported to the PLC as shown on the
Drawings.
6. A local horn will be activated if the level in the main fuel storage tank rises above 90%.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17504 - 2
C00822C13
H. Automatic Transfer Switch:
1. The automatic transfer switch statuses are monitored and sent to the PLC as shown on the
drawings.
2. When the automatic transfer switch is not in “AUTO” mode, an alarm is sent to the PLC and
to MetroTel.
3. When the automatic transfer switch signals that the normal power source (utility) is not
available, an alarm is sent to the PLC and to MetroTel.
I.
Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS):
1. The UPS status is monitored and sent to the PLC as shown on the Drawings.
2. When the UPS Trouble alarm is activated, an alarm is sent to the PLC and to MetroTel.
J.
PLC Failure Alarm:
1. The PLC holds a normally opened relay contact closed. When the PLC fails, the contact
opens and triggers a MetroTel alarm.
K. Combination System:
1. The Fire Alarm Panel shall have dedicated direct telephone communication to the local fire
department for Fire Alarming.
2. Additionally, the Fire Alarm Panel shall be monitored for Fire Alarm and Fire Alarm Panel
Trouble by the PLC and Fire Alarm only by MetroTel.
L. Go/No Go Indication and Alarming (Odor Control Room)
1. The Go / No Go Indication and Alarming shall be driven from a hardwired circuit.
2. Go / No Go indications and alarming shall annunciate locally at the Odor Control Room
door, via the Go/No Go visual and audible alarming package. The Go/No Go alarms shall be
driven by signals from the Odor Control Room Gas Monitor (LEL and O2) and Odor Control
Room exhaust fan flow switch.
M. Intrusion Summary Alarm:
1. Magnetic reed door switches monitor the access points shown on the Drawings.
2. When any of these circuits are interrupted, an individual room intrusion alarm shall be
activated in the PLC and displayed on the local Operator Interface. A summary intrusion
alarm shall be passed to SCADA and MetroTel.
N. Sump Pumps:
1. The sump pumps are controlled by the package sump pump control panel. A summary alarm
(trouble) contact is sent to the PLC and monitored by SCADA.
2. There is one duplex sump pump control panel (Lower Diversion Structure Valve Vault Sump).
O. Rain Gauge:
1. The Rain Gauge status is monitored by the PLC as shown on the Drawings.
2. Each tip increments the counter in the PLC.
3. The total rainfall is calculated and totalized daily, weekly, monthly, and annually and made
available to SCADA.
P. Power Monitoring
1. The MCC is equipped with a power monitor and electronic motor overloads that provide data
via Ethernet connection.
2. Data points monitored at the MCC power monitor and overloads shown in the Drawings
include:
a. kW.
b. kVAR.
c. Power Factor.
d. Amps.
e. Volts.
3. The VFDs are monitored via Ethernet. Data collected for the VFDs shall be kW.
4. Power monitoring data shall be forwarded to the WPTP SCADA.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17504 - 3
C00822C13
Q. Odor Control Fan:
1. The Odor Control Fan shall be normally running (on/off control at the MCC).
2. The Odor Control Fan shall be monitored for running status.
3. Running status shall be verified by a flow switch on the fan exhaust.
4. An Odor Control Fan fault shall be activated if the flow switch indicates flow has stopped and
the signal shall be made available to SCADA.
R. Instrument Air System:
1. The Instrument Air System is provided as a packaged system.
2. The Instrument Air Panel provides a common alarm (An Instrument Air Trouble alarm) to the
PLC, SCADA and MetroTeI.
3. There is one duplex Instrument Air control panel.
4. Refer to Section 11366 for full control description.
S. Tipping Buckets: Per Section 17503.
T. Level Monitoring (Flood switches):
1. The PLC shall monitor Diversion Structure Valve Vault and the Mechanical Room monitored
for flooding.
2. Both alarms shall be made available to SCADA.
3. The Diversion Structure Valve Vault Flood Alarm shall be transmitted to MetroTel.
U. Gas Detection:
1. The Storage Tank shall be monitored for three gases.
a. % LEL.
b. %H2S.
c. %O2.
2. The Odor Control Room and Odor Control Vault shall be monitored for two gases:
a. % LEL.
b. %O2.
3. All Gas levels shall be made available to SCADA.
4. The PLC shall alarm on high LEL, High H2S and Low 02 in their respective areas.
5. The MetroTel shall alarm on high LEL, High H2S and Low 02 in their respective areas.
6. All three gas monitor panels (Storage Tank, Odor Control Room and Odor Control Vault)
shall provide a low flow alarm for the sampler flow that is provided to SCADA and
annunciated locally on the Annunciator.
V. Telemetry:
1. Telemetry communication shall be monitored alarmed upon failure of 20 seconds or more.
a. Telemetry failure between the Upper Diversion Structure PLC and the Storage Tank PLC
shall be alarmed via both SCADA and MetroTel.
b. Telemetry failure between the SCADA and the Storage Tank PLC shall be alarmed via
MetroTel.
c. A MetroTel power test function switch shall be installed and shall be used to confirm
proper function of the MetroTel communication to the West Point Treatment Plant.
W. AC Power Failure:
1. AC Power shall be monitored at the Main Control Panel.
2. AC power fail shall activate alarms to SCADA and MetroTel.
X. DC Power Supply Failure:
1. The Redundant DC Power Supply shall be monitored at the Main Control Panel.
2. If one or both DC power legs fail, the DC Power Supply fail alarm shall activate to SCADA
and MetroTel.
Y. DDC Panel Trouble:
1. The DDC panel shall be monitored for a common trouble alarm and alarm made available at
SCADA.
Z. Bubbler Panels: Per Section 17501, 17502, 17503 and the Drawings:
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17504 - 4
C00822C13
1. Levels for all bubblers (6) shall be made available at SCADA and MetroTel.
2. Bubbler Out of Range and panel low instrument air alarms shall be made available to
SCADA.
AA. Variable Frequency Drives: Per 17502 and the Drawings:
1. The VFDs shall be monitored by the PLC for status to include:
a. In Auto.
b. Ready.
c. Running.
d. Fault.
2. All points monitored shall be made available at SCADA.
3. VFD Fault shall be made available to MetroTel.
BB. Maintenance Mode Function
1. The Maintenance Mode function switch on the Main Control Panel door shall freeze the
analog values in the PLC, when placed in the maintenance position.
2. The switch shall provide a momentary input to the PLC (spring return switch).
3. Once Maintenance Mode is enabled, a timer shall disable maintenance mode and
automatically return the station to normal mode after 1 hour.
4. Maintenance Mode status shall be monitored by SCADA.
5. The alarm reset button on the Main Control Panel door shall also return the station to normal
mode when depressed.
CC. Conveyance Pipeline Pressure monitoring
1. PIT-851,101V, installed upstream of the Emergency Plug Valve in the Valve vault, shall
monitor the conveyance pipeline pressure.
2. The pipeline pressure reading shall be made available to SCADA, read at the digital indicator
on the Main Control Panel door and read on the operator interface (Panelview)
1.06 OPERATOR INTERFACE
A. Operator interface graphics: In accordance with the latest edition of the King County PLC
Installation and Programming Guidelines Manual.
PART 2
MATERIALS (NOT USED)
PART 3
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17504 - 5
C00822C13
SECTION 17610
VENDOR-SUPPLIED PACKAGED CONTROL SYSTEM, SMALL
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies requirements for vendor-supplied control systems and associated process
instrumentation for packaged systems. The vendor-supplied packaged control system shall
include system components required for a complete, fully functional and operable control system
including instruments, enclosures, racks, power supplies, input/output (I/O) systems, interconnect
wiring, and all terminations within the enclosures. Vendor’s packaged control system shall be
provided as a complete and operable system including all system documentation, alarms, and
troubleshooting guidelines. Vendor-supplied packaged control systems shall be provided in
accordance with Section 17000, the Drawings and Division 11.
B. Packaged Control Systems include:
1. C2 Water Supply Pressure System.
2. Instrument Air Compression System and Appurtenances.
3. Lower Diversion Structure Sump Pump System.
C. Control system components indicated on the Drawings shall be provided, as well as any ancillary
or incidental equipment or devices, whether identified or not, that are required to support the
monitoring and control of the vendor-furnished process equipment and permit full use of the
equipment’s processing capabilities.
1. The packaged control system shall follow all system testing, training, and system
documentation requirements specified in Division 17.
2. Vendor’s packaged control system shall be designed to perform the following functions as a
minimum:
a. Control the operation of the vendor’s packaged process system. Packaged control
system shall comply with the South Magnolia CSO Storage Tank Control System design.
b. Provide control capabilities as required for power failure restart of the packaged control
system and the packaged system processes in coordination with the South Magnolia
CSO Storage Tank Control System.
c. Hardwired inputs and outputs shall be used to communicate to the South Magnolia CSO
Storage Tank Control System.
D. Provide services to:
1. Design, fabricate, factory test and deliver, control systems equipment, enclosures, panels,
instruments, and install accessories required for a Fully Functional Packaged Control
System.
2. Provide a fully functional packaged control system capable of exchanging hardwired inputs
and outputs with the South Magnolia CSO Storage Tank Control System.
3. Participate in project scope, progress, and coordination meetings.
4. Install the packaged control system and provide training as specified herein.
5. Test the packaged control system with the packaged system equipment.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
documents. These references are part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of
conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of a listed document, the
requirements of this Section shall prevail.
Reference
Title
NFPA 70
National Electric Code (NEC)
IBC
International Building Code
UL 508
Industrial Control Equipment
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17610 - 1
C00822C13
ANSI/ISA S5.1
ANSI/ISA S51.1
Instrumentation Symbols and Identification
Process Instrumentation Terminology
B. System Responsibility
1. Provide the required packaged control system design, installation and commission work that
meets the requirements as specified in Division 17 and on the Drawings. The packaged
control system design, installation, testing, and commission work shall be provided by the
packaged system vendor that meets the qualifications of this Section.
2. Be responsible for control of the supplied process equipment to provide the established level
of performance and quality.
3. Provide on-sight design reviews with the Project Representative, and on-site assistance,
direction, and coordination during installation, functional check-out, startup, and
commissioning of systems, and as needed through Final Acceptance.
4. Coordinate with the Project Representative to assure seamless integration of required I/O
into the overall South Magnolia CSO Storage Tank Control System.
C. Packaged System Vendor Qualifications:
1. The vendor qualified staff and support organization shall:
a. Provide an on-site qualified specialist experienced with the specified control equipment
for either a minimum of five years or on at least five separate projects. This experience
shall include managing testing, commissioning and training of the packaged system
control system.
b. Provide the names and qualifications for three individuals qualified to support the
installed packaged control system.
c. Provide experienced training personal for the required operations and maintenance
training courses.
D. Factory Tests:
1. Factory Inspections: All equipment shall be inspected for required construction, electrical
connections, and intended function.
2. Preoperational Tests and Adjustments: Provide witnessed testing per Sections 01660 and
17000. Prepare and submit its test procedure eight weeks prior to the actual field testing.
Document all test results including corrective action taken to correct all deficiencies. The
County shall determine if the operational factory test is satisfactorily completed prior to
releasing equipment for shipment.
E. Shipping: The equipment specified herein shall be factory assembled. The parts and assemblies
that are of necessity shipped unassembled shall be packaged and tagged in a manner that will
provide easy identification in the field. Protect the equipment from damage, and facilitate the final
assembly in the field. The packaged control system equipment and instrumentation shall adhere
to the shipping and storage requirements of Section 00700.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Sections 01300.
B. AutoCAD Format Drawings: Provide complete drawings which include the following:
1. Drawings prepared on a computer-aided drafting (CAD) system and delivered in a 11- by 17inch drawing size and shall be complete with borders and title blocks clearly identifying the
project name and scope of the drawings. The CAD drawing files shall be converted to .DXF
file format and submitted on DVD or CD media.
2. Drawing format in current version of AutoCAD; no older than 2010 version.
C. Items to be submitted for this Specification: Provide the following items, in addition to items
specified in Division 11:
1. Packaged Control System Implementation Plan which consists of: the Contractor’s project
schedule;, listing of key contacts among Contractor, subcontractors, and other vendors;
designation of responsible Contractor leadership and authorized decision makers; and
preferred communication methods.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17610 - 2
C00822C13
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Control system hardware arrangement drawing.
Vendor’s qualifications.
Instrument air requirements for steady-state and upset conditions.
Test procedures required by Sections 01660 and 17000.
Mark-up of the Drawings to reflect the vendor-supplied packaged control system
implemented.
Control logic/strategies document in hard copy format. Provide in three-ring binders. Include
complete I/O lists with addresses and field terminal numbers.
Completely updated and corrected final instrument list and datasheets per Sections 17900,
17901, 17903, 17904, 17906.
As-built control panel drawings, loop sheets, control system hardware bill of materials, and
wiring diagrams for the packaged control system as specified in Section 17000.
Spare parts as specified within this Section.
Training materials.
1.04 WORK OUTSIDE VENDOR PACKAGE SCOPE
A. The following items shall be supplied by the Contractor outside the scope of the vendor package:
1. Overall South Magnolia CSO Storage Tank Control System design, testing, installation,
training, start-up and programming.
2. Power and signal interconnects (including wiring, conduit, tray, and other appurtenances
required to provide connections as needed) between any packaged control system and other
panels associated with the South Magnolia CSO Storage Tank Control System.
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. South Magnolia CSO Storage Tank environmental conditions: The packaged control systems
enclosure shall relate the panel requirements of Section 17110 to the environmental conditions of
the installation area.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 PACKAGED CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
A. If the packaged control system elects to use a PLC for programmed monitoring and control, the
PLC shall be:
1. Allen-Bradley Compact Logix Series PLC; no substitutions allowed.
B. The packaged control system input/output addressing assignments shall be made by the
Contractor. I/O assignments and tag naming conventions shall be coordinated with and adhere to
the County’s guidelines. The Project Representative shall be kept appraised of changes in
input/output point quantities and assignments.
C. Design the control panel layout to follow the typical panel layout drawings utilized for the South
Magnolia CSO Storage Tank Control System panels. Field components necessary for installation
in the field shall be in 304 stainless steel control panels designed for the environmental conditions
in which they will operate. The control system panel requirements are specified in Section 17110.
2.02 GENERAL
A. Services:
1. Attend two on-site meetings, in addition to those already required by the relevant Division 11
specification, to be held at the King County location. The primary function of the meetings
shall be to solicit input from the County regarding the implementation of the packaged control
system and to facilitate preparation of the Packaged Control System Implementation Plan as
described in Submittals above.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17610 - 3
C00822C13
2. Have in attendance at each meeting a representative who is responsible for the preparation
of the Packaged Control System Implementation Plan. The preliminary schedule and agenda
for each of the meetings shall be as described below. The specific dates for each of the
meetings shall be scheduled by the Contractor and accepted by the Project Representative.
B. Control system items to be furnished shall conform to the requirements for the South Magnolia
CSO Storage Tank Control System. Items shall be new and unused, and shall fully conform to the
requirements specified in Section 17000.
C. Provide identical packaged control system control logic for parallel equipment within a process or
equipment of the same type distributed over multiple processes.
D. Packaged control system hardware shall be provided to avoid a single point of failure. The
hardware and wiring shall be arranged so that the equipment associated with one process train
can be removed from service without affecting any other process train.
E. Provide a tag list of packaged control system I/O to the Project Representative.
F. All valves and instruments shall have a unique tag that is consistent with the County’s tag naming
convention as presented in Figure A below and as shown on the Drawings. Instrument function
shall follow ANSI/ISA-5.1 standard function assignment. Provision of a cross-reference table
charting non-standard Contractor assigned tags matching the County’s tag name standard is not
acceptable.
Figure A – Tag Numbering Format
G. Complete electrical assembly shall meet all requirements of the National Electrical Code, National
Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), all
applicable state and local codes, and requirements of Divisions 16 and 17.
2.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Systems Integration: Each packaged control system shall include manual and automatic control
of all included system process equipment.
B. Power Failure Restart: Packaged control system shall provide a fully automatic and sequenced
restart upon return to power, following a loss of utility power. This restart program shall reside in
the packaged control system and shall coordinate with the packaged system equipment to restart
in an orderly sequence and to provide no disruption to other South Magnolia CSO Storage Tank
processes.
2.04 FIELD INSTRUMENTATION
A. Field instrumentation shall be provided to measure and control the packaged systems process
equipment in compliance with the Division 17.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17610 - 4
C00822C13
B. Field instrumentation shall be selected and calibrated to operate at 40 to 60 percent range during
normal process conditions or as defined by the process parameters.
2.05 CONTROL VALVES
A. Control valves shall be supplied to meet the process application and shall be in accordance with
Division 15. Control valves shall be sized to operate in the linear control range of the valve,
generally not less than 20 percent open for minimum conditions and no greater than 80 percent
open for maximum conditions.
2.06 ACTUATORS
A. Control valve actuators shall be provided in accordance with Division 15, and as described
herein. Actuators shall be mounted to the control valve by the valve actuator manufacturer or
valve manufacturer with readily available, standard, off-the-shelf yoke and mounting hardware.
Valves and actuators assembled by any other party are not acceptable. Specialty or custom
fabricated actuator mounting brackets and hardware is not acceptable.
B. The valve and actuator assemble shall be fully benched tested for break-away seat torque
requirements plus a 150 percent service factor, full stroke operation, limit and torque switch
settings, and full stroke run time. The County may choose to witness factory testing of the valve
operation at their discretion.
2.07 ELECTRICAL
A. All electrical work shall be in compliance with Division 16.
B. Motor starters are to be in motor control centers located in area electrical rooms and are provided
by the MCC vendor. A dry contact shall be provided by the package system vendor for the start
call circuit for each motor in the vendor package. For process control and instrumentation,
120VAC, single-phase is provided from the facility panelboard. Power requirements are to be
included in the submittal.
C. Critical interlocks that shall be hardwired to the motor control circuit shall be identified and
submitted to the Project Representative on motor elementary drawings.
D. Skid-mounted components shall be pre-wired to a terminal junction box located in the proximity of
the equipment which shall enclose any hardwired terminal blocks for connecting I/O from the
equipment to the electrical room.
2.08 MOTORS
A. Motors shall be as specified in Divisions 11 and 16.
2.09 SPARE PARTS
A. Procedures: Section 01750.
B. Provide a spare parts list associated with the packaged control system for the equipment listed in
the submittal, including unit prices for all replaceable parts; this list shall include but not be limited
to (the identified number of spares below is for each of the three packaged systems)::
1. Relays – two
2. Terminals - five
3. Lights - Four
4. Switches – one
5. Timers - two
6. Floats – one
7. Meter – one
8. Valves - one
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17610 - 5
C00822C13
9. One set of new and unused special tools required for installation, operation, and
maintenance.
10. Any other vendor-recommended spare parts – quantities as recommended.
C. In addition to the installed spares defined, cabinets shall be provided with 10 percent additional
spare module power and spare space for 10 percent additional modules and termination units to
accommodate Contractor equipment modifications.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 ASSEMBLY
A. Components mounted inside and outside enclosures shall be tagged per the correct designations
including terminal blocks, termination units, power supplies, all wiring, and instruments to make a
complete operational control system.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Provide factory-trained, vendor-authorized personnel to furnish technical direction for on-site
labor associated with installation of the supplied equipment, landing of wiring/cabling, power
wiring, grounding, and field I/O wiring for the packaged control system equipment. Contractor
shall install the control system in accordance with vendor’s instructions and recommendations.
B. The vendor shall inspect the control system installation including I/O addressing, switch/jumper
settings, etc. and shall and certify the completed installation meets the vendor’s packaged control
system requirements.
C. Monitor all system diagnostic indicators and certify that the system performance meets or
exceeds the vendor’s published specifications for the packaged system provided.
D. All installation fault or trouble conditions shall be investigated, documented, and resolved by the
Contractor to the satisfaction of the County.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General: The following requirements are in addition to the field quality control requirements
specified in Division 11.
B. On-Site Installation, Component and System Testing, Commissioning and Training:
1. Qualified Contractor’s personnel to supervise activities during installation, functional testing,
quality control, quality assurance, and inspection.
2. Commissioning, on-site performance testing, equipment start-up, training of the County’s
staff, and follow-up testing services.
C. Calibration: Following installation of equipment, field calibrate all instruments where possible,
including pressure transmitters, process analyzers, flow meters, and switches. Instruments that
cannot be field calibrated shall be factory calibrated and supplied with manufacturers calibration
certifications. Accuracy shall be checked in the field.
D. Testing:
1. Conform to testing requirements in Sections 01660 and 17000.
3.04 SERVICES
A. Provide services in accordance with Section 01660 and as described herein.
B. In addition to the minimum on-site time necessary to complete the requirements established
elsewhere within these specifications, provide qualified individuals to perform the following during
construction and testing:
1. Provide a minimum of 4 hours of formal operations and maintenance training on the
packaged system. Coordinate training with other systems as described in Section 01660.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17610 - 6
C00822C13
2. Vendor’s on-site manager shall attend:
a. One 2-hour site meeting with the Contractor and County prior to packaged system startup.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17610 - 7
C00822C13
SECTION 17800
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) hardware, programming
software and system configuration requirements.
1. Each PLC system shall consist of a PLC and input/output module system complete as per the
Contract Drawings.
2. Each PLC system shall receive inputs and transmit output to circuits and components as
shown on the Contract Drawings.
3. Each PLC system shall be programmable in industrial standard relay ladder logic symbols
and be delivered fully programmed for the functions required as per Section 17802.
4. Each PLC system shall be delivered fully configured to process bi-directional communication
with a SCADA host as per Section 17803.
5. The PLC shall be delivered with a Graphical Operator Interface as per Section 17801.
B. Responsibilities of the Contractor include:
1. Verifying that systems modified under this Contract operate as described in Section(s) 17501,
17502 and 17503 Control Strategies.
2. Coordinating installation of the PLC equipment installed under this Contract with the existing
communication network, the existing SCADA system, and other existing elements of the
facility control system.
3. Providing a complete and functional PLC system communicating with the existing SCADA
system.
4. Control system startup, testing and commissioning as defined in Section 01660 and Section
17804.
5. Coordinating the Work defined by this Section with other work defined under this Contract.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the
following documents. It is a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict
between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the more stringent
requirements shall prevail.
Reference
Title
NEMA ICS 1
General Standards for Industrial Controls and Systems
NEMA ICS 1.1
Safety Guidelines for the Application of Industrial Control Systems
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code (NEC)
King County
PLC Installation and Programming Guidelines Manual
B. Listing: Equipment shall be listed for the purpose for which it is used by UL, FM or CSA.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Manufacturer’s catalog information.
C. Shop drawings and dimensions of PLC System components and back panels.
D. PLC interconnection drawings: Organization, mounting, and interconnection of the PLC system
components with a material list.
E. Wiring diagrams: Connections of the PLC System to new and existing equipment.
F. Software submittals: per Section 17802.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17800 - 1
C00822C13
G. Testing submittals: per Sections 01660 and 17804.
H. Operation and Maintenance information: per Section 01730.
1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Each PLC system shall consist of one PLC Central Processing Unit (CPU) and one or more I/O
chassis populated with I/O modules as shown in the Contract Drawings. PLC systems shall be
mounted in the control panels as shown.
B. Each PLC system shall receive inputs and transmit output to circuits and components as shown.
C. Each PLC system shall be programmed in industry standard relay ladder symbols and shall be
delivered fully programmed for the functions required as per Section 17802 and the King County
PLC Installation and Programming Guidelines Manual.
D. Each PLC system shall be fully configured to process bi-directional serial communications with an
external SCADA computer as per Section 17803.
E. Power Supply Requirements: Each PLC I/O rack shall contain a power supply to provide DC
power necessary for the CPU, and/or input and output modules. Power shall be from 100 to 130
volts AC, 60 Hz source.
F. Environmental Requirements:
1. Temperature: 10C to 60C (50 deg F to 140 deg F).
2. Humidity: 0 to 95%, non-condensing.
3. Altitude: 0 to 500 feet (0 to 150 m) above Sea Level.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 PLC HARDWARE
A. Provide PLC Systems, complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1. Include all hardware required to provide a complete and operable PLC.
2. Ensure hardware is fully compatible with the software that is to operate on the hardware.
3. Provide components from the same manufacturer, model, part number and revision for any
specified component.
4. Provide products compatible with existing equipment and the existing SCADA System.
5. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Provide only Allen-Bradley PLC products.
B. Programmable Logic Controller Equipment
1. Provide all appurtenant hardware required to support the installation, operation and
maintenance of the PLC.
2. Pre-Selected Products:
a. The following products have been pre-selected to be used in this Contract. Provide PLC
system components selected from the following list. All equipment provided shall be
manufactured by the Allen-Bradley division of Rockwell Automation. The County has a
procurement contract for this equipment. No substitutions allowed.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17800 - 2
C00822C13
3. Equipment List:
ITEM
BP
PS
CPU
AI
AO
DI-120
DI-24
RO
DO-120
DO-24
OI
CM
CN
4.
5.
6.
7.
Description
10-, 13-, or 17-slot PLC
chassis
Power Supply
Processor Card
Analog Input
Analog Output
Discrete Input, 120 VAC
Discrete Input, 24 VDC
Discrete Output, Relay
Discrete Output, 120 VAC
Discrete Output, 24 VDC
Operator Interface With
Ethernet Communication
Module
SCADA Interface Module
ControlNet Interface
Allen-Bradley Model No.
1756-A10 or 1756-A13 or
1756-A17
1756-PA72
1756-L61/B
1756-IF8
1756-OF4 or 1756-OF8
1756-IA16
1756-IB16 or 1756-IV16
1756-OX8I, 1756-OW16I
1756-OA16
1756-OB16D or 1756OV16E
See Section 17801
See Section 17803
1756-CNB (See Section
17803)
EN
Ethernet I/P interface
1756-EN2T (See Section
17803)
Provide the quantity of PLC equipment required to meet the Contract Specifications. Install
the individual I/O cards, wiring arm connectors, wire and cable, and terminal blocks as shown
on the Drawings.
Rack Communications: Provide Allen-Bradley Model 1756-CNB ControlNet interface
modules to communicate with the I/O subsystem racks as specified in Section 17803.
Provide communications between the PLC and the I/O subsystem racks utilizing AllenBradley ControlNet protocol.
Wire spare I/O on installed cards to terminal blocks.
Provide PLC slot covers in all empty slots.
2.02 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
A. Utilize software for programming the Allen-Bradley PLC as specified in Section 17802.
B. Utilize software for programming operator interface as specified in Section 17801.
2.03 PLC SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. The processor models, I/O quantities and I/O configurations shall comply with the following
general control requirements:
1. PLC CPUs shall not be required to be redundant.
2. Removal of any single I/O card shall not affect pumps or other critical equipment.
3. Failure of any single I/O card shall not affect pumps or other critical equipment.
4. Each station shall have an Operator Interface as described in Section 17801 for displaying
and modifying specific PLC program parameters.
5. All programs loaded into the Allen-Bradley PLCs shall comply with Section 17802 and shall
be written in Ladder Logic or other approved program languages. Use of programming
techniques other than approved program languages is prohibited without prior written
approval by King County.
B. Utilize the King County PLC Installation and Programming Guidelines Manual, attached as
Appendix A. Apply this manual to all parts of the Contract that involve PLC-based control
systems.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17800 - 3
C00822C13
C. PLC Failure Relay:
1. Provide at least one Relay Output module in each PLC System to provide a hard-wired
indication of PLC failure. Locate the relay output card in the rack containing the CPU module
as shown on the Drawings.
2. Program the PLC and configure the Relay Output card so that the PLC failure relay is
normally energized and shall de-energize on detection of a fatal PLC error or upon PLC
power failure. Fatal error detection shall include all diagnostics available in the PLC and
custom error detection programming as required.
3. Submit detailed description of the PLC Fail program functions that will control the contact to
the Project Representative for approval. King County may revise selection.
D. Communications Interface:
1. Provide, install and test the communications between the PLC System and the existing
SCADA system per Section 17803.
2. Coordinate pseudo-Modbus addressing in PLC with the existing SCADA system.
3. Verify bi-directional data communications between the PLC System and the SCADA system.
E. I/O Card Connections:
1. Provide connections utilizing cables and wiring arm connectors according to the Drawings.
2. Provide all discrete and analog outputs with fuses, as specified. Provide terminal blocks with
integral fusing as shown on the Drawings.
F. Operator Interface Panel:
1. Provide an Operator Interface Panel as specified in Section 17801 for each PLC System.
Install as shown on the Drawings.
2. Utilize Programming Software: Rockwell RSView Studio ME software.
2.04 SPARE PARTS
A. Procedures: Section 01750.
B. Provide at least 10% installed spare points of each of the following types:
1. Analog Inputs (1-5 VDC).
2. Analog Outputs (4-20 mA).
3. Discrete Inputs (120 VAC and/or 24VDC, as required).
4. Discrete Outputs (120 VAC, 24 VDC, and/or Relay Outputs, as required).
2.05 REMOTE I/O SYSTEM
A. Provide remote I/O racks which communicate with the local CPU rack via ControlNet protocol.
B. Provide a coaxial backbone for the ControlNet network with interface modules as required to
provide noise-free and reliable network communications for the network geometry shown in the
project drawings. See Section 17803.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install a PLC System in each facility complete with ladder logic programming based on control
strategy narratives in Sections 17501,17502 and 17503.
B. Program the PLC System to provide local equipment monitoring, local equipment control and
serve as an interface between the facility systems and the existing SCADA System.
C. Install all equipment in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Installation
requirements shall include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Maintain a minimum 6-inch vertical spacing between the bottom of the enclosure and the
bottom-most PLC chassis.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17800 - 4
C00822C13
2. Maintain a minimum 6-inch vertical spacing between the top of the enclosure and the topmost PLC chassis.
3. Maintain a minimum 6-inch vertical spacing between PLC chassis.
4. Maintain a minimum 4-inch horizontal spacing between power supply and side of enclosure.
5. Center wiring ducts between the PLC chassis.
6. Provide a grounding wire for each PLC chassis. Connect the grounding wire between one of
the chassis grounding screws and the main grounding bus of the power system. This wire
shall be green and the AWG rating shall be sized to meet the fuse rating of the supply circuit.
7. Ground each power supply mounted in the PLC chassis to one of the chassis grounding
screws
D. Provide secure temporary mounting of the PLC System during the integration phase of the
Contract to ensure the PLC System is protected from damage.
E. Install the PLC equipment in new and existing enclosures as shown on the Drawings.
F. Program each Operator Interface panel for local facility monitoring and control as described in
"PLC Installation and Programming Guidelines Manual" and in Section 17802.
G. Install, configure and test the interface to the existing SCADA system as specified in Section
17803.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verify the correct program is installed in the PLC prior to connecting the PLC System to the field
wiring.
B. Inspect the installed PLC and verify that the PLC System is mounted correctly and all wire
polarities and wire terminations are correct.
C. Make final adjustments and perform preliminary check out to verify proper operation.
3.03 TESTING
A. Perform testing as specified in Sections 01660, 17000, and 17804.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17800 - 5
C00822C13
SECTION 17801
GRAPHICAL OPERATOR INTERFACE
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section defines the requirements and the communications options for the Graphical Operator
Interface used in King County Treatment Division Pumping Stations.
1. The Operator Interface (OI) shall offer serial interfaces suitable for communicating with
Rockwell Automation Controllogix series PLC’s. The Operator Interface shall have an Ethernet
communications option for use with other PLC’s or Control Equipment.
B. Environmental Requirements:
1. Temperature: 10 deg C to 55 deg C (50 deg F to 130 deg F).
2. Humidity: 0 to 95%, non-condensing.
3. Altitude: 0 to 500 feet above Sea Level.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
documents. They are a part of the Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between
the requirements of the Section and that of the listed documents, the more stringent requirement
shall prevail.
Reference
Title
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code
UL 508
Industrial Control Equipment
B. Listing: Equipment shall be listed for the purpose for which it is used by UL, FM or CSA.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Catalog data sheet, including layout dimensions.
C. Local manufacturer’s representative name, address, and telephone number.
D. Software programming submittals in accordance with Section 17802.
E. Operation and Maintenance Information per Section 01730.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS
A. General
1. The Operator Interface (OI) shall be a single, self-contained, panel-mounted unit capable of
meeting all of the required specifications without separate external modules. Communications
interfaces, if required, shall be plug-in style and capable of installation in the Operator Interface
unit. Enclosure shall be rated NEMA-4 when installed.
B. The Operator Interface module shall consist of the following major components:
1. Color Graphic panel - 640 x 480 pixel min. resolution - 256 colors min.
2. Touch screen - min. 16 touch sensitive positions
3. Function Keypad - min. 12 function keys, 4 arrow keys
4. Numeric Entry Keypad - min. 0-9 (d.p.) (-) <ENTER>
5. Communications interfaces: Serial (RS-232) and <Ethernet/IP (IEEE 802.3)> or <ControlNet>.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17801 - 1
C00822C13
C. The Operator Interface module shall utilize the following support components, provided according
to the requirements of the application:
1. Programming Software.
2. Cables and Connectors.
D. Acceptable Manufacturer:
E. Operator Interface module shall be Rockwell Automation PanelView Plus 700 color graphic panel
with touch screen, 22-key Function keypad, and PLC communications interface as specified, no
substitutions.
F. Models shall be as specified below:
Screen size, Nominal
PLC Interface
[10-inch diagonal
Ethernet/IP
Model No.
2711P-B10C4D1]
G. Programming Software: Rockwell Automation Factorytalk View Studio Machine Edition software,
County authorized version, no exceptions. If necessary, obtain the County authorized version from
the Project Representative.
2.02 POWER SUPPLY
A. The Operator Interface module shall operate from 24 VDC (21-27 VDC) power. Power dissipation
shall be less than 80 Watts. Provide one power source for each Operator Interface.
B. A single power source shall power all Operator Interface functions. All additional voltages for
communications interfaces, etc., shall be derived from this one power source. Operator Interface
shall be fused for short circuit protection. Operator Interface shall be UL listed and/or CE certified
for use in this application.
2.03 PROGRAMMABLE ACCESSORIES
A. Programming Software
1. Utilize software for programming, documentation, and diagnostic tools for the Operator
Interface as specified above. Software is capable of uploading and downloading programs to
the OI. Software features used for entering and editing programs includes programming utilities
such as graphical “cut and paste” operations, creation and editing of graphic elements, text
elements, and touch screen (if used) elements.
2. Software enables the programmer to create display screens consisting of graphic elements,
static and dynamic text displays. Software allows the linkage of status variables to colors
and/or video attributes of text or graphic elements. Software has the ability to link keystrokes
from the special function keypad or touch screen to the values of status variables and/or to the
video attributes of text or graphical elements. Software provides the ability to display and enter
numeric variables.
3. Software has a library of pre-defined graphic elements including, but not limited to: push
buttons, indicator lamps, bar graph displays, selector switches, numeric entry panels and
dynamic messaging panels.
4. Software has the ability to navigate to new operator display screens in a tree-shaped
architecture based on special function or touch screen keystrokes.
5. Documentation features allow editing of variable names and program comments, and printing
or listing to a file of:
a. Display screen definitions and/or screen captures.
b. Variable linkages, variable names and program comments.
c. Version number of the program, version comments, author, and date of last revision.
B. Programming Software operates under the Windows XP® or Windows NT ® operating systems.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17801 - 2
C00822C13
2.04 TROUBLESHOOTING
A. The Operator Interface module shall have built-in status checking software. Errors shall be
reported via error messages on the display, and recoverable errors shall be resettable from the
front panel. Non-recoverable errors shall be resettable by cycling power off and on.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting:
1. The OI shall be mounted in the main control panel as shown in the contract drawings and in
compliance with the manufacturer’s requirements.
3.02 FACTORY TEST
A. The factory test shall comply with the requirements of Section 17804.
3.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST
A. The system test shall comply with the requirements of Sections 17000 and 17804.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17801 - 3
C00822C13
SECTION 17802
PROGRAMMING
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the requirements for programming the PLC and OIT. Provide fully
operational PLC Systems at each facility. The operation of the facility under PLC control and
operation via the SCADA System shall be as per the Contract Drawings and the Control Strategies
as defined in Sections 17501 through 17504.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards: This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following
document. It is a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the
requirements of this Section and that of a listed document, the more stringent requirements shall
prevail.
Reference
Title
King County
PLC Installation and Programming Guidelines Manual
B. Qualifications:
1. The Contractor shall be fully cognizant of Allen-Bradley Ladder Logic programs and shall
include all those functions that are required to operate and monitor the facilities using the PLC.
2. The Contractor responsible for performing the detailed design and programming of the PLC
equipment shall have a minimum of five (5) years’ experience in similar projects. The
Contractor shall assume full responsibility for system design.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Qualifications.
C. Software programming, testing, and startup.
1. Include I/O, program, and SCADA databases; block diagrams of logic sequence; PLC program
with fully commented ladder logic; and all support information necessary for review.
2. Submit in hard copy form as well as on CD-ROM. All programs shall be submitted to Project
Representative for review. Submitting just the program on electronic media is unacceptable.
1.04 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
A. Utilize Rockwell Automation RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Full Edition Programming Software, King
County approved version - No exception.
1.05 DOCUMENTATION
A. Provide complete documentation of all programs. Utilize all of the available documentation services
available through the RSLogix Programming Software. All application programs shall be fully
commented. Program databases shall be fully expanded and shall include a comments field.
B. All PLC programs shall be fully documented. Include references to drawings, original rung
comments and requirements defined in the King County's “PLC Installation and Programming
Guidelines Manual”.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17802 - 1
C00822C13
1.06 PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE
A. King County has standardized on Ladder Logic language for programming the PLC. All programs
shall utilize Ladder Logic language and RSLogix 5000 programming software. In addition, Function
Block Language may be used sparingly for analog signal processing with written permission from
King County. Specifically forbidden is the use of Structured Text language and Sequential
Function Charts without written permission from King County. Time spent by the Contractor to
correct programming that is not compliant with the programming software and programming
language defined in this section will be at the Contractor's expense and shall not affect the project
schedule or milestone dates.
1.07 SOFTWARE REVISIONS
A. Provide a formal revision tracking procedure for all software being submitted and delivered to the
Project Representative. The revision tracking procedure shall contain information necessary to
track all changes, ensure revisions are properly tested, documented, and incorporated into the final
program. The revision tracking procedure shall track submitted programs, reference Project
Representative's comments, show date program was saved, date of all revisions and reference to
material used for the program revisions.
B. The revision tracking procedure shall ensure that only fully tested, fully documented and properly
revised software is loaded into the PLC for delivery.
1.08 SCADA COMMUNICATIONS
A. The PLC shall communicate with the West Point SCADA system using voice-grade dedicated
telephone lines at 1200 baud. Telephone lines shall be furnished by King County and will be as
supplied by U.S. West Communications. The PLC shall connect to the SCADA network using an
RS-232 port and a County-furnished modem. See Section 17803 for specific communication
requirements.
B. The facilities typically contain between 100-500 hardware I/O points. All input/output (I/O) points
must be capable of being transmitted to the existing SCADA system whether or not they are
utilized.
C. Organize the SCADA registers as defined in King County's “PLC Installation and Programming
Guidelines Manual”. Coordinate addresses with the King County SCADA system maintenance
staff.
1.09 SOFTWARE FUNCTIONS
A. Provide common functions and software structures among programs for the facilities.
B. Provide PLC programs capable of performing the following functions at a minimum:
1. Analog input processing and conversion to engineering units.
2. Discrete input processing for alarms and interlocks.
3. Discrete output processing for Alarm generation to local annunciators and other equipment.
4. Pump Sequence selection (Lead, 1st Follow, 2nd Follow, etc.).
5. Pump Start/Stop and Speed control.
6. Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PID) control algorithm processing, with setpoints entered
locally or transmitted from the SCADA system.
7. Analog Output processing for control loop outputs.
8. Real-time clock for scheduling of control functions and tasks.
9. Display of process data on Operator Interface.
C. Provide Operator Interface programming that allows adjustment of loop setpoints, timer and
counter presets, and loop tuning parameters.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17802 - 2
C00822C13
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 PROGRAMS
A. Provide each of the facilities defined by the Contract Documents with a fully functioning program
that is without error, does not perform abnormal stops or actions, and is fully documented.
B. Provide a minimum of five types of Operator Interface display screens for each facility, including the
following:
1. System Overview & Equipment Status Graphic screen(s).
2. Setpoint and Data Entry screen(s).
3. Alarm History screen, with time/date stamp.
4. Control Mode & Equipment Status Screen(s) (Discrete and Analog Variables).
5. Maintenance screen(s) (password protected).
C. Graphic displays shall include both text and simple graphical representations of the facility. Refer
to Appendix D of King County's “PLC Installation and Programming Guidelines Manual” for
structure of screen displays and color standards.
2.02 PLC PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT
A. Provide a schedule showing program development tasks including milestones. The schedule
shall include the following steps as a minimum:
1. Preliminary Software Submittal (30%).
2. Intermediate Software Submittal (60%).
3. Operational Software Submittal (90%).
4. Final Software Submittal (100%) with O&M manuals.
B. Provide a Preliminary Software Submittal (30%) including:
1. Detailed database and program structure information:
2. Variables List and I/O configuration printouts: Shows organization of memory usage.
3. Complete List of Tags and Descriptors for I/O points, internal variables, and SCADA
communications data.
4. Key to program sections in the long comments of the Main Task.
5. Program Block diagram - with keyed long comments on Sub-tasks and Routines.
6. List of proposed display screens for Operator Interface panel and sketches of layout for display
screens.
7. Submit in hardcopy format and electronic media format compatible with Microsoft Word/Excel
2003®.
8. Develop basic program organization, structure and documentation, including block diagram,
using the “PLC Installation and Programming Guidelines Manual”.
C. Submit an Intermediate Software Submittal (60%) including draft coding all of the following items.
D. Submit the items below in electronic media format, compatible with RSLogix 5000 software King
County approved version:
1. Discrete Alarms and Interlocks.
2. Analog inputs and alarms.
3. PID loops.
4. Equipment sequencing and control logic.
5. Runtime accumulators and flow integrators.
6. SCADA Interface logic.
7. Watchdog timer and Facility controls failover logic.
8. Power-fail and Power-on restart logic.
E. Submit the items below as hardcopy screen captures and in electronic media format compatible
with Factorytalk View Studio Machine Edition software - King County approved version:
1. Draft of Operator Interface display screens, including the following:
a. System Overview Graphic screens.
b. Setpoint and Data Entry screens.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17802 - 3
C00822C13
c. Alarm History screens.
d. Control Mode & Equipment Status screens.
e. Maintenance screens.
F. Submit program and documentation when 90% complete. Documentation shall be in accordance
with paragraph 2.03 of this Section and include:
1. Final draft of program code and PanelView display screens.
2. Complete code listings and printouts of PanelView display screens.
3. Proposed test plan for Factory Acceptance Test of Software.
4. Submit in hardcopy and electronic media format as above.
G. Review the facility programming package in a meeting with the Project Representative when 90%
complete. Prepare Minutes of Meeting that documents the meeting, the answers provided by the
Contractor to the Project Representative's questions, and all decisions reached pertaining to
program development.
H. Incorporate revisions and submit Operational Test programs.
I.
Submit programs and documentation incorporating modifications from Operational Testing as part
of O&M manuals.
2.03 PLC PROGRAM DOCUMENTATION
A. Program documentation shall be in accordance with King County's PLC Installation and
Programming Guidelines Manual.
B. Provide complete descriptors for all elements used in the programs. This includes:
1. Inputs.
2. Outputs.
3. Coils.
4. Contacts.
5. Tasks and Routines.
6. Data Structures.
7. Tables and Arrays.
8. Sections.
C. Fully utilize all descriptor fields provided by the programming software, including:
1. Tags and Aliases.
2. Descriptions.
3. Comments.
4. Titles.
D. Provide clear and concise tags for all active components within a rung of logic. Tags shall be
descriptive in nature. Provide narrative in Rung, Task, and Routine comments fields for complex
rungs of logic or where the function is not readily understood without clarification.
E. Use cross-references. Label all coils with descriptive tag names. Label rungs according to
function and equipment tag name. Label all input contacts with the equipment tag name.
F. Programs shall be fully documented and a complete printout shall be provided to the Project
Representative as a submittal demonstrating compliance to the full documentation requirements.
Printouts shall include:
1. Log Book of revisions and their authors.
2. Tags.
3. Descriptors.
4. Program, Task and Routine Comments.
5. Titles.
6. CPU Memory Configuration.
7. I/O Rack configuration.
8. Communications Interface Configurations.
9. Listing of Data structures and ASCII message tables.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17802 - 4
C00822C13
G. Provide complete hard copies and software media (magnetic or CD ROM) of all programming
notes, programs and program documentation with all submittals. Provide three copies of each
program for each facility upon the Project Representative's acceptance of the facility.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 PROGRAM INSTALLATION
A. Install the application program as defined in Section 17800.
B. Edits by the Contractor to software installed in a PLC operating a facility shall comply to the
following:
1. Coordinate the changes, edits or reloading of the programs with the Project Representative.
Make changes to the program to correct deficiencies or incorrect operation.
2. The Project Representative shall approve all changes before loading the program into the PLC.
The Project Representative shall be present at the facility when changes are downloaded to the
PLC.
3. All programming changes shall be downloaded locally, not transmitted over the phone line.
4. Install electrical equipment or devices together with all required interconnections.
5. All documentation, drawings, copies of the program and narratives shall be revised by the
Contractor to reflect the edits to the program.
3.02 PROGRAM TESTING
A. Test programs in accordance with Section 01660 and 17804.
3.03 TRAINING
A. Provide24 hours of training for the County's personnel on all aspects of design, operation and
maintenance of the PLC and Operator interface applications programs.
B. Provide training at a County facility specified by the Project Representative at a time mutually
agreed between the Contractor and the Project Representative.
C. Notify the Project Representative at least two weeks prior of the proposed training date.
D. Complete forms 11000A and 11000B included in Section 01999 at the end of Startup and Training.
Submit the forms to the Project Representative for approval.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17802 - 5
C00822C13
ATTACHMENT A
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17802 - 6
C00822C13
PLC Guidelines
PLC
INSTALLATION
AND
PROGRAMMING
GUIDELINES MANUAL
Rev H.3a
July 2013 (NB CSO)
The contents of this document are proprietary to King County and shall not be disseminated without prior approval.
King County Dept. of Natural Resources
201 South Jackson St. - M/S KSC-NR-0508
Seattle, WA 98104
Rev H.3
Page 1
07/18/10
PLC Guidelines
PLC INSTALLATION AND PROGRAMMING
GUIDELINES MANUAL
Document Issue Register
Issue
Draft A
Rev A
Rev B
Rev C
Rev D
Rev E
Rev F
Rev G
Date
8/9/99
6/6/01
02/20/02
07/16/02
11/12/02
04/23/03
03/08/04
10/19/05
Author
Westin Engineering – Paul Reardon
King County DNR – G K Brock
King County DNR – G K Brock
King County DNR – G K Brock
King County DNR - G K Brock
King County DNR - G K Brock
King County DNR - G K Brock
King County DNR – G K Brock
Rev H
7/11/06
King County DNR – G K Brock
Rev H.1
Rev H.2
8/15/07
2/25/10
King County DNR – G K Brock
King County DNR – G K Brock
Rev H.3
5/1/11
King County DNR – G K Brock
Rev H.3a
(NB CSO)
7/2/13
King County DNR – G K Brock
Rev H.3
Page 2
Description
Draft A for approval
Henderson Pump Station
Revised for Modicon PLC
Revised for A-B PLC
Correct minor errors
Change OI Display spec.
Conform to UL 508A
General Revisions – Add
Appx D
General Revisions –
Programming and Appx D
Programming languages
Changed KC logo; Xrefs
to Guide Specs; Gen. rev’s
Added Outline numbers,
Offsite SCADA
references, Overview
screen descry.
Changed RSView Studio
ME to FactoryTalk Studio
ME
Issued to
Client
Consultant
Consultant
Contractor
Contractor
All
All
All
All
All
All
All
Consultant
07/18/10
PLC Guidelines
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1.0 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................................1
1.1 BACKGROUND ................................................................................................................................................1
1.2 REVISIONS AND UPDATING .........................................................................................................................1
2.0 PLC EQUIPMENT GUIDELINE .......................................................................................................................1
2.1 SUMMARY AND RECOMMENDATIONS .....................................................................................................1
2.2 FACILITY SIZES AND TYPES ........................................................................................................................1
2.2.1 Facility I/O Sizes................................................................................................................................................. 1
2.2.2 Operator Interface .............................................................................................................................................. 2
2.3 PLC EQUIPMENT .............................................................................................................................................2
2.3.1 CPU Module ....................................................................................................................................................... 2
2.3.2 Power Supplies ................................................................................................................................................... 2
2.3.3 I/O Racks............................................................................................................................................................. 2
2.3.4 Remote I/O .......................................................................................................................................................... 2
2.3.5 Module Arrangement .......................................................................................................................................... 3
2.3.6 I/O Modules ........................................................................................................................................................ 3
2.3.6.1 Analog Input Modules: .......................................................................................................................................... 3
2.3.6.2 Analog Output Modules: ....................................................................................................................................... 3
2.3.6.3 Discrete AC Input Modules (120-240 VAC) ......................................................................................................... 4
2.3.6.4 Discrete DC Input Modules (12-24 VDC) ............................................................................................................. 4
2.3.6.5 Relay Output Modules ........................................................................................................................................... 4
2.3.6.6 Discrete AC Output Modules (120-220 VAC) ....................................................................................................... 4
2.3.6.7 Discrete DC Output Modules (20-30 VDC, sourcing) .......................................................................................... 4
2.3.6.8 Discrete DC Output Modules (10-30 VDC, sinking) ............................................................................................. 4
2.3.6.9 High Density Discrete DC Output Modules (10-28 VDC, sourcing) .................................................................... 5
2.3.6.10 Deviations and Waivers ...................................................................................................................................... 5
2.4 Programming Tools ............................................................................................................................................... 5
2.5 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACES .............................................................................................................6
2.5.1 Offsite SCADA System Communications........................................................................................................... 6
2.6 OPERATOR INTERFACE: .............................................................................................................................. 6
3.0 PLC SOFTWARE GUIDELINE .........................................................................................................................1
3.01 SUMMARY ......................................................................................................................................................1
3.1 PLC ATTRIBUTES ............................................................................................................................................1
3.1.1 Typical Configurations ....................................................................................................................................... 1
3.1.3 Variables and Memory Types ............................................................................................................................. 1
3.1.4 Offsite SCADA memory ...................................................................................................................................... 2
3.2 COMMUNICATIONS .......................................................................................................................................2
3.2.1 Modbus Protocol ................................................................................................................................................ 2
3.2.2 Offsite SCADA Data Exchange .......................................................................................................................... 3
3.2.3 I/O Tag Naming Conventions ............................................................................................................................. 4
3.3 PLC PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE ...............................................................................................................4
Rev H.3
Page i
07/18/10
PLC Guidelines
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
3.3.1 PLC Programming and Development Software ................................................................................................. 4
3.3.2 Approved Programming Languages .................................................................................................................. 4
3.3.3 Program Module Library ................................................................................................................................... 4
3.3.4 PLC Programming Software .............................................................................................................................. 5
3.4 HARDWARE CONTROL STRATEGIES .........................................................................................................5
3.4.1 Response to Processor Failures ......................................................................................................................... 5
3.4.2 Processor Faults ................................................................................................................................................. 5
3.4.3 Fatal Errors ........................................................................................................................................................ 5
3.4.4 Non-fatal Errors ................................................................................................................................................. 6
3.4.5 High-speed or short duration pulses .................................................................................................................. 7
3.5 PROCESS CONTROL STRATEGIES ..............................................................................................................7
3.5.1 Function Library................................................................................................................................................. 7
3.5.2 Valve Open/Close Control and Status Monitor .................................................................................................. 8
3.5.4 Equipment Sequence Monitoring and Control .................................................................................................. 9
3.5.5 Force Main Valve Control Strategy ................................................................................................................... 9
3.5.6 Influent/Effluent Valve Control strategy............................................................................................................. 9
3.5.7 Analog Inputs and Alarms .................................................................................................................................. 9
3.5.8 Wetwell Level Sensing and Alarms................................................................................................................... 10
3.5.9 Offsite SCADA Communication Status............................................................................................................. 10
3.5.10 Accumulators and Totalizers .......................................................................................................................... 10
3.5.11 PID Loops ....................................................................................................................................................... 11
3.5.12 PLC Accepts/Sheds Level control .................................................................................................................. 11
3.5.13 Facility Power Failure and Power On Restart Routines ............................................................................... 12
3.6 OPERATOR INTERFACE PANEL ................................................................................................................. 12
3.6.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................. 12
3.6.2 Overview and Status Screens............................................................................................................................ 12
3.6.3 Alarm Screens ................................................................................................................................................... 12
3.6.7 Maintenance Screens ........................................................................................................................................ 13
3.7 DOCUMENTATION AND PROGRAM STRUCTURE ................................................................................ 13
3.7.1 Functional Descriptions ................................................................................................................................... 13
3.7.2 Databases ......................................................................................................................................................... 14
3.7.3 Block Diagrams ................................................................................................................................................ 14
3.7.4 Program Structure ............................................................................................................................................ 14
3.7.5 Comments: ........................................................................................................................................................ 14
3.7.6 Tag Names and Descriptors: ............................................................................................................................ 15
3.7.7 Documentation.................................................................................................................................................. 15
4.0 PLC INSTALLATION GUIDELINE .................................................................................................................1
4.1 SUMMARY ........................................................................................................................................................1
4.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ..........................................................................................................................1
4.2.1 Enclosure Requirements ..................................................................................................................................... 1
4.2.2 Environmental Requirements ............................................................................................................................. 1
Rev H.3
Page ii
07/18/10
PLC Guidelines
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
4.2.3 Electrical Requirements...................................................................................................................................... 2
Power Supply .................................................................................................................................................................... 2
4.2.4 Grounding ........................................................................................................................................................... 2
4.3 I/O MODULE WIRING GUIDELINES .............................................................................................................3
4.3.1 Input Module and Relay Module Wiring ............................................................................................................ 3
4.3.2 Output Module Wiring ........................................................................................................................................ 3
4.4 WIRING ............................................................................................................................................................. 3
4.4.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................... 3
4.4.2 Panel Connection Wire ....................................................................................................................................... 3
4.4.3 Wire Tagging ...................................................................................................................................................... 3
4.4.4 Wire Colors and Codes....................................................................................................................................... 4
4.4.5 Wire Numbers ..................................................................................................................................................... 4
4.4.6 Terminal Blocks .................................................................................................................................................. 5
4.4.7 Terminal Tags, Covers And Markers ................................................................................................................. 5
4.4.8 Fuses ................................................................................................................................................................... 5
4.4.9 Plastic Wireway .................................................................................................................................................. 5
4.4.10 Relays ................................................................................................................................................................ 5
4.4.11 Wiring Methods ................................................................................................................................................ 6
4.5 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACES .............................................................................................................6
4.5.1 Communications to the Offsite SCADA System.................................................................................................. 6
4.5.2 Communications to Local High Speed Serial Devices ....................................................................................... 6
4.6 TESTING REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................................................................................6
4.6.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................... 6
4.6.1 Test Plans............................................................................................................................................................ 7
4.6.2 Test Reports ........................................................................................................................................................ 7
4.6.3 Factory Acceptance Test..................................................................................................................................... 8
4.6.3.1 System Configuration Verification ........................................................................................................................ 8
4.6.3.2 Equipment Test and Verification ........................................................................................................................... 8
4.6.3.3 Functional Test ..................................................................................................................................................... 9
4.6.4 Site Acceptance Test ........................................................................................................................................... 9
4.6.5 Final Documentation Acceptance ...................................................................................................................... 9
APPENDIX A............................................................................................................................................................... 1
DRAWINGS ............................................................................................................................................................. 1
A-1 Sht. 1...................................................................................................................................................................... 1
PLC Card Layout – East Division Typical .................................................................................................................. 1
A-1 Sht. 2...................................................................................................................................................................... 1
PLC Card Layout – West Division Typical ................................................................................................................. 1
A-2................................................................................................................................................................................ 1
PLC Analog Input & Output Wiring ........................................................................................................................... 1
A-3................................................................................................................................................................................ 1
24 VDC Discrete Input & Output Wiring .................................................................................................................... 1
A-4................................................................................................................................................................................ 1
Rev H.3
Page iii
07/18/10
PLC Guidelines
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
120 VAC Discrete Input & Output Wiring .................................................................................................................. 1
A-5................................................................................................................................................................................ 1
PLC Relay Discrete Output Wiring ............................................................................................................................. 1
APPENDIX B ............................................................................................................................................................... 1
OFFSITE SCADA NETWORK PROGRAMMING ................................................................................................ 1
Network Configuration ................................................................................................................................................ 1
MTU memory Allocation ............................................................................................................................................. 1
RTU Memory Allocation.............................................................................................................................................. 1
Messages ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1
Telemetry Watchdog .................................................................................................................................................... 2
APPENDIX C............................................................................................................................................................... 1
SOFTWARE SUBMITTALS ...................................................................................................................................1
Preliminary Software Submittal (30%) ....................................................................................................................... 1
Intermediate Software Submittal (60%) ...................................................................................................................... 1
Final Software Submittal (90%) .................................................................................................................................. 1
APPENDIX D............................................................................................................................................................... 1
GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS ...........................................................................................................................1
Screens, General:......................................................................................................................................................... 1
Overview Screens: ....................................................................................................................................................... 1
Pumps/Fans/Motorized equipment: .................................................................................................................................... 1
Valves: .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2
Wetwell or Tank Level: ..................................................................................................................................................... 2
Facility Status: .................................................................................................................................................................. 2
Standby Generator, Automatic Transfer Switch Status: ....................................................................................................... 3
Flows & Pressures:............................................................................................................................................................ 3
Equipment Status Screens: .......................................................................................................................................... 3
Pumps: .............................................................................................................................................................................. 3
Valves and other major pieces of equipment: ................................................................................................................... 3
Faceplate Display Screens: ......................................................................................................................................... 4
Alarm History Screen: ................................................................................................................................................. 4
Current Alarms Banner: ..................................................................................................................................................... 4
Maintenance Screens:.................................................................................................................................................. 5
Control Parameter Screen ................................................................................................................................................ 5
Counter/Timer Tuning....................................................................................................................................................... 5
PID Loop Tuning .............................................................................................................................................................. 5
Rev H.3
Page iv
07/18/10
PLC Guidelines
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 BACKGROUND
During mid-1998 King County solicited information from PLC Manufacturers for the supply of
new PLC’s to replace existing PLC’s at its Offsite Facilities. The solicitation was in the form of a
Request for Qualifications, and a Request for Proposal. Based on the information received, King
County selected a PLC Manufacturer whose products were to be used as its guideline for
installation at King County Offsite Facilities.
The PLC Manufacturer chosen was Allen-Bradley (A-B), and the PLC model selected was the
ControlLogix 1756 with appropriate I/O modules and supporting devices.
This manual is a combination of three separate guidelines: PLC Equipment Guideline (Part 2),
PLC Software Guideline (Part 3), and PLC Installation Guideline (Part 4).
1.2 REVISIONS AND UPDATING
Use of these guidelines is mandatory for all King County wastewater offsite facilities. Projects
involving PLC-based control systems at these facilities must apply these guidelines for
developing the project and must contractually require contractors to use the guidelines.
The Engineering Division of the Department of Natural Resources is the designated owner of the
Guidelines. The Engineering Division invites new or improved practices so that these guidelines
may continue to represent current acceptable practices. Forward all suggestions for improvement
to the Engineering Division.
King County
Rev. H.3
1-1
7/18/10
PLC Guidelines
2.0 PLC EQUIPMENT GUIDELINE
2.1 SUMMARY AND RECOMMENDATIONS
This Section defines the PLC equipment and configurations to be used at the Offsite Facilities. In
order to provide the maximum standardization between facility configurations, use of these
guidelines is recommended for new design.
This Guideline also defines communications requirements to the Offsite SCADA system, and to
any required local operator interface devices.
Drawings of two typical PLC configurations are provided in the Appendix.
Follow the recommendations below in configuring a PLC system:
 Redundant PLC CPUs are not required
 Redundant power supplies are not required
 Removal of any single I/O module shall not affect more than two pumps.
 Failure of any single I/O module shall not affect more than two pumps
 For facilities with only two pumps, discrete I/O for each pump shall be on separate
modules
 Each facility shall be equipped with an operator interface device and Backup
controllers, as required by the project documents.
2.2 FACILITY SIZES AND TYPES
2.2.1 Facility I/O Sizes
Each PLC configuration shall provide approximately 10% spare I/O point capacity of each of the
following types:




Analog Inputs (1-5 VDC)
Analog Outputs (4-20 mA)
Discrete Inputs (120 VAC or 24VDC, as required)
Discrete Outputs (120 VAC, 24VDC, or Relay Outputs, as required)
Each PLC shall include at least one Relay Output module to provide a hard-wired indication of
PLC failure to the facility annunciator and the Metrotel alarm RTU.
King County
Rev H.3
2-1
7/18/10
PLC Guidelines
2.2.2 Operator Interface
The local Operator Interface panel replaces the Status Indicator Panel, the Loop Access Module
and the Counter/Timer module of the older PM-550 control systems. It provides a local real-time
display of critical variables and alarms, and provides access for authorized personnel to change
control parameters such as timer/counter presets and PID tuning parameters.
2.3 PLC EQUIPMENT
2.3.1 CPU Module
All facilities shall be configured with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC model 1756-L61,
unless otherwise specified.
This PLC CPU is a single slot module, with 1.5 MB of non-volatile user memory. The serial
programming port on the CPU module may be used to program and monitor the PLC CPU via a
laptop computer. Optionally, the CPU may be programmed and monitored through one of the
high speed communications ports described below.
2.3.2 Power Supplies
PLC configurations shall use 10 Amp power supplies, A-B model 1756-PA72. Power supplies
shall be capable of being used standalone or in a summing configuration. The power supplies
shall be configured for 115 VAC input (102-132 VAC, 47-63 Hz), and shall be fed from the
facility’s UPS.
2.3.3 I/O Racks
PLC configurations shall use a 10-, 13- or 17-slot I/O rack assembly, A-B model 1756-A10, A13, or -A17, as space permits. PLC configurations requiring more than 10, 13, or 17 slots,
including spares, shall use multiple I/O rack assemblies.
2.3.4 Remote I/O
PLC configurations shall use a non-redundant ControlNet system for connections to multiple I/O
racks. The CPU rack and all subsequent I/O racks shall contain a ControlNet Communications
module, A-B model 1756-CNB.
All I/O racks shall be located in the same or adjacent cabinets. ControlNet cabling shall use a
single coax backbone arrangement with taps and terminators. The cable to be used shall be as
recommended by the manufacturer. An I/O tap shall be installed for each I/O rack or other node
King County
Rev H.3
2-2
7/18/10
PLC Guidelines
on the ControlNet system. The last taps on either end of the coaxial backbone shall include cable
terminators.
2.3.5 Module Arrangement
The first I/O rack, called Rack 1, shall be configured as follows:





CPU module shall be installed in slot 00 (the first slot)
ControlNet module (if required) shall be installed in slot 01
Offsite SCADA (Modbus) Interface module shall be installed in slot 02.
Ethernet/IP interface module shall be installed in slot 03.
A Relay Output module for PLC fatal alarms shall be installed in the last slot.
Second and subsequent I/O racks shall be configured as follows:

ControlNet interface module shall be installed in slot 00
Rack 1 should contain only Analog Input (AI), Analog Output (A0), and Relay Output (RO) I/O
modules.
Discrete Input (DI), Discrete Output (DO), and other modules may be installed in Racks 2, 3, 4
and higher as required.
Modules should be grouped by type, with at least one spare slot between module groups.
2.3.6 I/O Modules
2.3.6.1 Analog Input Modules:
Analog Input modules shall be A-B model 1756-IF8. This module has 8 single-ended
inputs, each capable of being configured as either 4-20 mA or 1-5 VDC. Normally,
analog inputs will be configured to operate at 1-5 VDC, referenced to signal ground.
2.3.6.2 Analog Output Modules:
Analog Output modules shall be A-B model 1756-OF4 or 1756-OF8. Modules have nonisolated outputs, each capable of driving 4-20 mA into a 750-Ohm load.
NOTE:
If an Analog Output module is used to drive a load located remotely from the
PLC enclosure, use a separate isolation module to prevent damage to the PLC.
King County
Rev H.3
2-3
7/18/10
PLC Guidelines
2.3.6.3 Discrete AC Input Modules (120-240 VAC)
Discrete AC Input modules shall be A-B model 1756-IA16. This module has 16 inputs
arranged in two groups of 8 inputs each sharing a common neutral. Input modules shall
be limited to 16 inputs to minimize the impact of module failure. Multiple groups of
inputs are required, since the discrete signals may originate from systems with different
power neutral potentials, such as different MCC cubicles or control panel locations. If
more than two neutrals are required for a 16-point AC Input module, use of the 1756IA16I isolated input module is permitted.
2.3.6.4 Discrete DC Input Modules (12-24 VDC)
Discrete DC Input modules shall be A-B model 1756-IB16 or 1756-IV16. This module
has 16 inputs arranged in two groups of eight inputs each sharing a common
supply/return. Modules shall be limited to 16 inputs to minimize the impact of module
failure. Multiple groups of inputs are required, since the discrete signals may originate
from systems with different common return potentials. If more than two commons are
required for a 16-point DC Input module, use of the 1756-IB16I isolated input module is
permitted.
2.3.6.5 Relay Output Modules
Relay output modules shall be A-B model 1756-OX8I or 1756-OW16I. These modules
have 8 Form C or 16 Form A outputs per module, with individual commons. Contacts are
rated 2 A at 24VDC and 120-240 VAC.
2.3.6.6 Discrete AC Output Modules (120-220 VAC)
Discrete AC Output modules shall be A-B model 1756-OA16I. This module has 16
isolated outputs. The outputs are rated for operation with non-inductive loads of 100 mA
to 1000 mA at 100-230 VAC (fully derated).
2.3.6.7 Discrete DC Output Modules (20-30 VDC, sourcing)
Discrete DC Output modules shall be A-B model 1756-OB16D or 1756-OV16E. This
module has 16 outputs arranged in two groups of eight outputs, each with common power
supply connections. The outputs are rated for operation with non-inductive loads of 50
mA to 1000 mA at 20 - 30 VDC (fully derated). Total module output current shall be
limited to 8 A.
2.3.6.8 Discrete DC Output Modules (10-30 VDC, sinking)
Discrete DC Output modules shall be A-B model 1756-OV16E. This module has 16
outputs arranged in two groups of eight outputs, each with common return connections.
The outputs are rated for operation with non-inductive loads of 50 mA to 1000 mA at 10
- 30 VDC. Total module output current shall be limited to 8 A.
King County
Rev H.3
2-4
7/18/10
PLC Guidelines
2.3.6.9 High Density Discrete DC Output Modules (10-28 VDC, sourcing)
High Density Discrete DC output modules shall be A-B model 1756-OB32. This module
shall have 32 outputs arranged in two groups of 16, each with common power supply
connections. This module may be used only for driving the local annunciator. The
module outputs source current when turned ON, and each output is rated 350 mA at 28
VDC. The high-density 32-point module may only be used to drive the annunciator,
which does not directly affect facility operation. Total module output current shall be
limited to 10 A.
2.3.6.10 Deviations and Waivers
Written permission from King County shall be required to use other than the above
specified I/O modules.
2.4 Programming Tools
The PLC shall be programmed using an IBM-compatible PC equipped with Windows 2000 or
Windows XP Operating System and Rockwell RSLogix5000 Enterprise System programming
software. Use the version of the programming software approved by King County at the time of
Notice to Proceed.
The application program shall be written in ladder logic exclusively, except by written
permission of King County.
The PC shall connect to the CPU serial port or the optional Ethernet communications port for
local programming.
The local Operator Interface shall be programmed using an IBM-compatible PC equipped with
Windows 2000 or Windows XP Operating System and Rockwell FactoryTalk Studio Machine
Edition programming software. Use the version of the programming software approved by King
County at the time of Notice to Proceed. The PC shall connect to the Operator Interface serial
port or via the optional Ethernet communications port for programming.
For more details on the programming tools and software to be used, refer to Part 3 of this
document.
King County
Rev H.3
2-5
7/18/10
PLC Guidelines
2.5 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACES
2.5.1 Offsite SCADA System Communications
The PLC shall communicate with the Treatment Plant Offsite SCADA system using a Bell 202Tcompatible modem. The modem shall operate at 1200 bps asynchronous, using a four-wire
circuit in full duplex mode. The return carrier shall be switched.
A serial RS-232 port on a separate module shall be dedicated to communications with the Offsite
SCADA system. The Offsite SCADA protocol shall be Modbus RTU. The PLC shall be
configured as a Modbus slave node with an address in the range of 02 to 64.
The PLC shall respond to polls from the Offsite SCADA Modbus master. The PLC shall issue
Request- To-Send (RTS), and receive Clear-To-Send (CTS) handshaking signals from the
modem prior to sending data to the Offsite SCADA master. Offsite SCADA system details are
available in Appendix B.
2.6 OPERATOR INTERFACE:
The local Operator Interface shall be a color graphic terminal, A-B Panelview Plus model 700 or
1000 as required, with a high-speed Ethernet/IP serial port for communication to the PLC.
Models shall be as listed below. The local Operator Interface shall include numeric, function,
and touch-screen keypads for operator entry and a LCD display for displaying the required
variables within the PLC program. The local Operator Interface shall be used to access control
loop, timer and counter parameters, and to display critical variables and alarms.
The local Operator Interface will be permanently connected to the PLC. The panel shall be flushmounted on the door of the PLC enclosure.
Approved models:
Screen Size
7” nominal
10” nominal
King County
Rev H.3
Hi-speed Interface
EthernetIP
EthernetIP
Model Number
2711P-B7C4D1
2711P-B10C4D1
2-6
7/18/10
PLC Guidelines
3.0 PLC SOFTWARE GUIDELINE
3.01 SUMMARY
This section defines software-related topics associated with the PLC’s. These topics include:







PLC attributes
Communications
PLC programming software
Hardware Control Strategies
Process Control Strategies
Operator Interface Panel
Documentation and Program Structure.
This section defines specific attributes, values, and procedures required to maintain conformity
between multiple King County facilities utilizing the Allen-Bradley PLC hardware.
3.1 PLC ATTRIBUTES
3.1.1 Typical Configurations
The following typical Configurations define the variables, I/O configurations and the
applications software modules that will be configured in the PLC system. The typical
configurations are guidelines that should be used to configure project-specific applications.
Configure the CPU with the version of Firmware approved by King County as of the date of
Notice to Proceed.
3.1.3 Variables and Memory Types
The Allen-Bradley PLC uses dynamically allocated memory for moving data to and from the I/O
modules, storing data, and importing/exporting data to other devices.
Typical memory types are:
 BOOLEAN (Input bits, Output bits, and Control Relay (holding) bits)
 SINT (1-byte integers)
 INT (2-byte integers)
 DINT (4-byte integers)
 REAL (4-byte floating point numbers)
 ARRAYS of each of these data types
King County
Rev. H.3
3-1
7/18/10
PLC Guidelines
In addition to these basic data types, there are pre-defined and user-defined STRUCTURES of
multiple data elements conforming to a specific architecture. Examples of these data structures
are:
 PID ( proportional, integral, derivative control structure )
 COUNTER
 TIMER
Each of these basic data types and structures can be associated with one or more TAG NAMES,
which are the handles by which the application program manipulates the data. These TAG
NAMES are stored with the program in the ControlLogix CPU, allowing a completely selfcontained application to be stored on the processor.
3.1.4 Offsite SCADA memory
The PLC internal memory assignments used for data exchange with Offsite SCADA system shall
be an array of INT registers in the PLC memory. The Offsite SCADA memory array shall be
organized in pseudo-Modbus format, with pseudo-Modbus addresses in the range of 41000 to
44095. The actual pseudo-Modbus addresses of the registers to be used in the Offsite SCADA
memory array shall be provided by King County.
Offsite SCADA data shall be divided into several types:
 Alarm bits, packed into 16-bit words
 Status bits, packed into 16-bit words
 Analog READ data (12 bit resolution, packed in 16-bit word)
 WRITE data (16-bit words)
 Watchdog READ and WRITE words
The number of words reserved for Offsite SCADA communication shall depend on the specific
application, but should not exceed 1000.
3.2 COMMUNICATIONS
3.2.1 Modbus Protocol
The Modbus RTU protocol will be used to communicate data between an Offsite PLC and the
Offsite SCADA Host. Shared voice-grade phone lines with modems will serve as the
communication media.
The Offsite SCADA Host will poll the slave PLCs at time intervals in the range of 10-20
seconds. The addressed PLC shall respond to a query from the Offsite SCADA Host by asserting
King County
Rev. H.3
3-2
7/18/10
PLC Guidelines
the RTS modem control line and responding with data when the modem asserts CTS. When not
addressed, the PLC will not assert RTS.
In Modbus RTU mode a typical frame is composed as follows:
Start
Silent Interval
Address
1 Byte
Function
1 byte
Data
N Bytes
CRC Check
2 Bytes
End
Silent Interval
3.2.2 Offsite SCADA Data Exchange
The Offsite SCADA Host utilizes a serial multiplexer capable of communicating with up to 24
PLC’s per channel. The typical Offsite SCADA network configuration will have six or fewer
PLC’s per channel/phone line due to system throughput limitations. The data rate for Offsite
SCADA channels shall be 1200 bps. Line parameters shall be: 8-bits, Odd Parity, 1 Stop bit.
The existing Offsite SCADA communications channels use Telenetics model MOT202TSA
modems. King County shall provide modems for the Offsite SCADA system. Modems at the
offsite facilities shall be provided as specified in the contract.
Modbus commands supported by the Offsite SCADA System are shown in the table below. The
boldface commands are those most commonly used:
MODBUS
COMMAND
RCOL
RINP
RHRG
RIRG
FCOL
FREG
REST
LPBT
FMRG
SHRG
FMCL
DEFINITION
Read PLC coil(s)
Read PLC coil(s)
Read PLC registers into discrete inputs
Read PLC registers
Write one PLC coil
Write one PLC register
Read exception status
Loop-back test
Write multiple PLC registers
Read and scale PLC analog register
Write multiple PLC coils
FUNCTION
CODE
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
10
03
0F
ADDRESS
RANGE
0xxxx
1xxxx
4xxxx
3xxxx
0xxxx
4xxxx
4xxxx
4xxxx
0xxxx
Store analog values in pseudo-Modbus registers as scaled integers. The Offsite SCADA Host
shall read and un-scale the analog values to floating point values as required. East and West
Division Offsite SCADA systems utilize different integer coding standards for analog values.
Conform to the data scaling conventions provided by the relevant Division Offsite SCADA
King County
Rev. H.3
3-3
7/18/10
PLC Guidelines
System Manager. Take care to maintain uniformity of engineering units calibration between the
Offsite SCADA system and the PLC for each analog value.
Pack and unpack PLC discrete points into 16-bit data registers for communication with the
Offsite SCADA Host.
3.2.3 I/O Tag Naming Conventions
Tag names shall use a combination of the County facility number, existing equipment tags and a
loop number (from the loop drawings). Use ISA tag names whenever possible. Create an
associated description of the device for inclusion in the tag name database.
Example:
PAL-303.001 Instrument Air Low Pressure alarm at Yarrow Bay (station 303), part of
loop 001.
3.3 PLC PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
3.3.1 PLC Programming and Development Software
The following programming guidelines are intended to reduce overall costs for installing and
maintaining the PLCs in the offsite facilities. The guidelines advocate re-use of common
program modules wherever possible to provide King County with PLC programs that reflect a
common approach to each application. Re-using common modules in multiple facilities will
provide King County with PLC programs that are more uniform and require less time to develop,
install, test, and maintain.
3.3.2 Approved Programming Languages
Ladder Logic is the preferred programming language for the PLCs. Function Block language
may be used sparingly, for analog handling processes, and only by prior KC approval. Utilize
Ladder Logic and Function Block programming languages exclusively to ensure consistent
programming. Specifically, the use of the IEC suite of PLC languages, other than these
approved programming languages, is forbidden.
3.3.3 Program Module Library
Application-specific program modules, such as Pump Sequencing, should be saved in a file for
use in other offsite facility programs. Create and maintain a Program Module Library consisting
of frequently used program modules. Incorporate library program modules into new programs
King County
Rev. H.3
3-4
7/18/10
PLC Guidelines
with modifications as required for the specific application. The objective is to build modular
programs with the same ‘Look and Feel” from one facility to another.
3.3.4 PLC Programming Software
King County has standardized on the Rockwell Software RSLogix 5000 Enterprise Series
programming suite for programming the PLCs. This software is Windows-based and fully
compatible with Windows 2000® and Windows XP®. The software supports editing features
for both application programming and documentation which allow saving and re-using portions
of the ladder program as library program modules. Use only the KC-approved version of this
programming package in effect at the time of Notice to Proceed for software development and
documentation without written approval from the Project Representative.
3.4 HARDWARE CONTROL STRATEGIES
3.4.1 Response to Processor Failures
The PLC program shall monitor itself and the I/O system to detect PLC processor and external
equipment failures. The response of the PLC program shall be based on what failures are
detected and what impact the failures may have on the operation of the offsite facility.
3.4.2 Processor Faults
The A-B PLC has multiple Fault codes and a task watchdog timer. The watchdog timer’s timeout time can be adjusted through software. The timer and diagnostic checks shall be used to
generate PLC fault alarms and to control the state of the PLC outputs. Control programs can also
reference the processor fault states, contained in the controller FAULTLOG object.
3.4.3 Fatal Errors
Processor Major Faults which are Fatal Errors are:
Power Loss
I/O Major Fault
Network Communications Major Fault
Instruction (Program) Major Fault
Task Watchdog Timer expired
Stack Fault
Mode Change Fault
Motion Controller Fault
King County
Rev. H.3
3-5
7/18/10
PLC Guidelines
Configure the PLC to de-energize all discrete outputs on a Major Fault. The relay output module
located in the last slot of the first I/O rack shall be used for error alarms. Designate one output on
this module as the Fatal Error output. It shall be programmed to be normally energized, and shall
de-energize on detection of a Major Fault or on PLC power failure.
In addition, the following program faults shall be defined as Fatal Errors:

Processor not in RUN mode
Detection of a Fatal Error while the station control mode is “PLC” or “REM” shall cause the
facility controls to failover to the backup control hardware (such as a Moore loop controller).
The “PLC FAIL” alarm shall also be transmitted to the Treatment plant via the Metrotel system,
and shall be annunciated locally, as required.
An external hardwired time delay relay, programmable for 0 – 10 sec delay, shall determine the
restart mode when the “PLC FAIL” alarm is cleared. If the “PLC FAIL” alarm clears before the
relay times out, the facility shall return to “PLC” or “REM” control mode automatically. If the
“PLC FAIL” alarm clears after the relay has timed out, manual operator intervention will be
required to return the facility to PLC control, such as cycling the facility control mode selector
switch from “PLC” or “REM” to “LOCAL” and back.
3.4.4 Non-fatal Errors
Non-fatal Errors shall not require the PLC to relinquish control of the offsite facility, but shall be
transmitted to the Treatment plant as an alarm by the Offsite SCADA interface and/or the
Metrotel system. Process errors (external to the PLC) shall be separately monitored. A second
output on the relay output module in the last slot of Rack 0 shall be designated the Non-fatal
Error alarm. It shall be programmed to be normally de-energized and shall energize on
occurrence of a Non-Fatal Error. The alarm shall remain latched until reset by a maintenance
technician at the offsite facility.
PLC Processor Faults which are Non-fatal errors are:
Instruction (program) Minor Fault
Periodic Task Overlap
Network Communications Minor Fault
CPU Serial Port Fault
Backup Battery Failed
In addition, the following program errors are considered Nonfatal Errors:
Offsite SCADA communications failure
Signal Loss on analog or discrete inputs.
King County
Rev. H.3
3-6
7/18/10
PLC Guidelines
3.4.5 High-speed or short duration pulses
Some devices produce signals that require special handling. For example, a tipping-bucket rain
gauge will typically produce a short duration pulse (<100 msec) with each tip of the bucket.
Connecting this signal directly to a discrete input and monitoring the input with conventional
ladder logic may not capture every pulse. The programmer shall provide an appropriate
subroutine to capture these short-duration pulses reliably. Pulses shall be accumulated in a
software counter, and the counter’s current value shall be sent to the Offsite SCADA System.
The Offsite SCADA System shall track the changes and determine the current rate of rainfall and
the rainfall totals.
Other high speed or short duration pulses should be handled in a similar manner.
3.5 PROCESS CONTROL STRATEGIES
3.5.1 Function Library
This section defines some of the process control strategies that should be included in the library
of re-usable program function modules. The goal is to provide the programmer, whether a
contractor or King County staff, an example program of function modules that contain the most
common process control logic. This example program will be issued with each project, and
should be used to the greatest extent possible in developing new PLC programs.
Functions Included in the Example program:















King County
Rev. H.3
PLC Failure Detection
Valve Open/Close Status and Control
Pump/Motor Start/Stop, Status, and Speed Control
Analog Inputs and Alarms
Wetwell Level Sensing and Alarms
Offsite SCADA Communication
Pump Sequencing Control Strategy
Force Main Valve Control Strategy
Influent/Effluent Valve Control strategy
Motor Run-time Accumulators
Flow Totalizers
PID Loops
PLC Accepts/Sheds Level Control
Maintenance of Timers, Counters, and PID tuning parameters
Facility Power-Fail and Power-On Restart routines.
3-7
7/18/10
PLC Guidelines
The above list is not complete. As additional program modules are developed, they shall be
added to the library.
Some of the functions in the above list are further defined in the following text.
3.5.2 Valve Open/Close Control and Status Monitor
Each valve may have an OPEN/CLOSE/REMOTE hand switch and VALVE OPEN and VALVE
CLOSED limit switches. Provide facility-specific logic as specified by the contract documents to
send OPEN or CLOSE commands to the valve when the O-C-R switch is in REMOTE.
Provide timers to determine if the valve has Failed to open or close within an adjustable limit
time from receiving an OPEN or CLOSE command from the PLC. Transmit the valve FAIL
alarm to the Offsite SCADA system and to the Operator Interface panel. Use the valve FAIL
alarm for interlock purposes in the PLC program as required. Reset the valve Fail alarm when
the O-C-R switch is switched out of REMOTE or by another method, as specified.
Display valve status on the Operator Interface panel. Refer to Appendix D for standard graphic
display color codes.
3.5.3 Pump/Motor Start/Stop and Speed Control
Each pump or motor may have a HAND/OFF/AUTO switch and may have one or more of the
following status and alarm contacts: READY, RUNNING, FAIL, TROUBLE and OVERTEMP.
Provide timers to determine if the motor has failed to start or stop within a programmable limit
time from receiving a START or STOP command from the PLC. The motor FAIL alarm shall
reset by cycling the H-O-A switch out of AUTO or by another method, as required. The motor
statuses shall be transmitted to the Offsite SCADA system and used by the PLC program for
interlock purposes as required. STOP the motor in the event of a motor FAIL alarm.
Display motor status on the Operator Interface panel as required. Refer to Appendix D for
standard graphic display color codes.
Provide Speed control for variable-speed motors with programmable acceleration and
deceleration rates, and minimum and maximum speed limits. Depending on the specific speed
control hardware at each facility, one or more of these limits may also be programmed in the
variable speed drive (VSD). The programmed limits in the PLC shall back up the primary limits
in the VSD, if they exist.
King County
Rev. H.3
3-8
7/18/10
PLC Guidelines
3.5.4 Equipment Sequence Monitoring and Control
This function module shall be facility-specific. At a minimum, monitor equipment sequencing as
executed by external logic and transmit status to Offsite SCADA system and Operator Interface
panel.
Two basic strategies are available for pump sequencing in the PLC program:
1) Speed Ramp sequencing
2) Level controller output sequencing
King County shall specify which strategy is to be used at each facility, and shall provide
specifics for implementation of the strategy. Refer to King County “Standard Pump Station
Guideline”.
3.5.5 Force Main Valve Control Strategy
Implement facility-specific valve control strategy as specified by contract documents.
3.5.6 Influent/Effluent Valve Control strategy
Implement facility-specific valve control strategy as specified by contract documents.
3.5.7 Analog Inputs and Alarms
Sample analog inputs no less than once every five seconds, preferably every second.
Filter each analog input with a digital low-pass filter having a programmable time constant of 5
to 30 seconds to eliminate noise.
Check each analog input for valid signal. Analog signals are assumed to be 1 – 5 V signals. Valid
signal range shall be –5% FSR (Full scale range) to 105% FSR (0.8 V to 5.2 V) for most analog
inputs. Input readings outside of this range shall be declared invalid and shall be alarmed as
SIGNAL LOSS for the analog input. Clamp engineering unit range at 0% and 100% FSR.
Certain analog inputs may require special valid signal ranges. For example, bubbler-tube level
transmitters must have a lower limit for the valid signal range substantially above 0% FSR, in
order to detect loss of airflow to the bubbler.
Transmit the filtered analog input signal and the SIGNAL LOSS alarm to the Offsite SCADA
system and use in the PLC program as required. The SIGNAL LOSS alarm shall automatically
reset when the analog input returns to the valid signal range.
King County
Rev. H.3
3-9
7/18/10
PLC Guidelines
Provide analog alarms for each analog input. Program HIGH-HIGH, HIGH, LOW, and LOWLOW alarms for each analog input. Provide a deadband of at least 2% FSR to prevent nuisance
alarms. Provide all analog alarms with an on-delay timer having a programmable delay of 0 to 180
seconds (5-sec default).
Transmit alarm statuses to the Offsite SCADA system and to the Operator interface panel and
use in the PLC for interlocking and other purposes as required. Retransmit analog alarms to local
annunciator panel as required by contract documents.
3.5.8 Wetwell Level Sensing and Alarms
In addition to analog input processing listed above, provide the following special processing for
the Wetwell level transmitter input:
Sample level transmitter input at least once per second and convert to engineering units
referenced to County-specified reference datum. Set minimum valid signal limit to +2%
FSR unless otherwise specified.
Monitor level switches connected to discrete inputs as required at each facility. Buffer level
switch alarms with on- and off-delay timers having a programmable delay of 0 to 30 seconds (5sec default).
Display level switch alarms on the Operator Interface panel as specified for each facility and
utilize for sequencing and interlocking of pumps and other systems as required.
3.5.9 Offsite SCADA Communication Status
Monitor progress of Offsite SCADA communications as specified in Appendix B. Set an alarm
on loss of communications. Display alarm on the Operator Interface panel and transmit alarm to
local annunciator panel as required.
3.5.10 Accumulators and Totalizers
Provide each monitored motor with a run-time accumulator having a resolution of 0.1 hours and
automatic rollover at 1000.0 hours of operation, or as specified. Display the run-time
accumulator values on the Operator Interface panel and transmit to the Offsite SCADA system as
required.
Totalize flow through each flow transmitter individually, and totalize combined facility flow.
Flow totals shall have a minimum resolution of 1.0 kgal and shall roll over at 10,000 kgal., or as
specified. Display flow totalizer values on the Operator interface panel and transmit to the
Offsite SCADA system as required.
King County
Rev. H.3
3-10
7/18/10
PLC Guidelines
Update accumulators/totalizers at least once every 5 seconds to ensure accuracy of better than
5% of minimum resolution.
3.5.11 PID Loops
Control Loops shall be controlled by the PLC with backup from a Local loop controller. Only
one of the controllers can operate the loop at a given time. The Control Mode selector switch on
the control panel designates the primary controller (PLC or Local controller).
Synchronize the PLC PID controller with the Setpoint and Command Output of the Local loop
controller while the Local controller is in control of the loop. Prevent a rapid change in the
Command Output when switching between the Local loop controller and the PLC PID loop
controller (bumpless transfer).
Provide AUTO and MANUAL modes of operation for each PLC PID loop. Provide CASCADE
mode as required by the contract documents. Provide bumpless transfer among the control modes
of the PLC PID controller.
Monitor PLC PID loops for Fatal and Non-fatal Errors. Transmit PID loop alarms to the Offsite
SCADA system and to the local annunciator as required. Fail over from the PLC to the Local
loop controller on fatal PLC PID errors as specified by the contract documents.
Transmit the loop Process Value, Setpoint, and Command Output to the Offsite SCADA system
and to the Operator Interface Panel (PID Faceplate display screen).
Indicate the PLC PID controller mode (Auto/Manual) on the Operator Interface panel. Provide
for adjustment of AUTO/MANUAL mode, Setpoint value (in AUTO), and Command Output
value (in MANUAL) from the Operator Interface panel (PID Faceplate display screen). See
appendix D for details of Operator Interface screens.
Display Loop tuning parameters on a password-protected screen on the Operator Interface panel
and provide for modification of the loop tuning parameters by authorized personnel from the
Operator Interface panel (PID Maintenance display screen). See appendix D for details of
Operator Interface screens.
3.5.12 PLC Accepts/Sheds Level control
Provide logic in the PLC to select among the PLC, the Local level controller and the standby
level control switches for control of Wetwell level. This logic may be facility-specific, requiring
controller and/or sensor validity checks and other interlocks, as required by the contract.
King County
Rev. H.3
3-11
7/18/10
PLC Guidelines
Indicate the facility Level Control Mode (i.e., PLC/LOCAL/STANDBY) on the Operator
Interface panel (Overview display screen).
3.5.13 Facility Power Failure and Power On Restart Routines
A UPS will keep the PLC operating during most facility power failures up to 30 minutes’
duration. The PLC shall sense that facility power has failed and take appropriate action as
described below. A programmable timer in the PLC shall distinguish between power Dropout (010 sec) and Significant Power-failure intervals (>10 sec).
In the event of power Dropout, the PLC shall not change the state of its outputs, and shall resume
control exactly as it was prior to the power Dropout.
Upon detection of a Significant Power-failure, the PLC shall turn off its outputs that command
equipment to run.
When power is restored after a Significant Power-failure, the PLC shall re-start the facility
equipment in a pre-defined systematic order as specified by the contract documents. The PLC
will start processing as soon as power is restored to the facility and shall be allowed 10 seconds
to complete its Power-ON error checks before proceeding with the systematic restart.
If a Fatal Error is detected during the Power On restart sequence, the facility control mode shall
fail over to the Local loop controller. Manual operator intervention shall be required to restore
the facility to PLC control in the event of a Fatal Error during Power-ON Restart.
3.6 OPERATOR INTERFACE PANEL
3.6.1 General
See Appendix D for details on Operator Interface screens.
3.6.2 Overview and Status Screens
Each Operator Interface shall include one or more Overview and Status screens with process
variables identified by tag name and/or description. Create text and/or graphics screens to display
and/or modify process variables, PID loop operating parameters (i.e., Auto/Manual, Setpoint,
Output), and others via the Operator Interface panel.
3.6.3 Alarm Screens
Each facility shall include one or more alarm history screens that shall list all past and current
alarms. Each alarm shall have a tag number, description, and a time and date stamp for
King County
Rev. H.3
3-12
7/18/10
PLC Guidelines
occurrence and acknowledgement. Two classes of alarms shall be defined, Critical alarms and
Non-critical alarms.
All alarms shall be displayed on the alarm history screen(s). Acknowledged alarms shall be
distinguished from un-acknowledged alarms.
Current alarms shall be displayed on an alarm banner at the bottom of all Overview and Status
screens. Acknowledged alarms shall be distinguished from un-acknowledged alarms.
[Optional] An alarm beeper shall be sounded if any unacknowledged alarms exist on any screen.
The operator shall acknowledge alarms with a dedicated button on the alarm banner and alarm
history screen. Alarms that return to normal state shall disappear from the alarm banner after
being acknowledged.
3.6.7 Maintenance Screens
Each Operator Interface shall include one or more password-protected Maintenance screens.
Create text and/or graphics screens to display and modify maintenance variables, timer
parameters, PID loop tuning parameters, and other variables as required.
Provide for a 4-digit numeric password login to these pages, and a login timeout of 10 minutes
nominal.
3.7 DOCUMENTATION AND PROGRAM STRUCTURE
3.7.1 Functional Descriptions
Functional descriptions of the major control loops for each facility in the form of Loop
Descriptions shall be provided. The Loop Descriptions shall be formatted as follows:
A. Hardwired Functions:
Describes function of the hardwired relays and control equipment.
B. PLC Functions:
Describes function of the programmed PLC controls and interaction with the
hardwired logic and Operator Interface panels.
C. Reference Documents:
PID diagrams, Control diagrams, etc.
King County
Rev. H.3
3-13
7/18/10
PLC Guidelines
D. Revisions:
Identifies date and maker of revisions, with a brief description.
3.7.2 Databases
The following databases shall be provided for each facility:
A. Local I/O point list
B. SCADA database
C. Metrotel point list.
3.7.3 Block Diagrams
Programmer shall provide block diagrams of all PLC program functions. The format of the block
diagrams shall be as follows:
A. Structural outline of the program (top level diagram) dividing the program into
logical sections by process or unit operation.
B. Detail block diagrams (second level diagrams) for each logical section, showing
major functional blocks such as START/STOP, Alarms and Fault monitoring, Status
monitor, Accumulator or Totalization, Operator and SCADA Interfaces.
C. Detail of the functional blocks as necessary for clarity.
D. Use standard flowchart symbols for decision blocks, I/O blocks, etc.
E. Document with a software package such as AutoCAD, Micrografx FLOWCHARTER, or Microsoft VISIO or WORD.
3.7.4 Program Structure
Follow the structure outlined in the block diagrams for creation of the program code. Organize
programs in sections and blocks, with each section and block marked by a unique task or routine
designation to allow rapid access to that part of the program. Provide an index to the section
task/subtask designations in the comments at the beginning of the program and provide a subindex to the blocks in each section in the comments at the beginning of each section.
There should be a one-to-one correspondence between blocks of the block diagram and
tasks/routines of application code.
3.7.5 Comments:
In addition to the indexes mentioned above, provide a brief but complete description of the
function of each block in the program comments at the beginning of the block. If a network is
complex or not self-evident as to its operation, include a comment explaining its operation.
King County
Rev. H.3
3-14
7/18/10
PLC Guidelines
An example of section comments is shown below:
WETWELL LEVEL CONTROL
LVL_CTRL
A proportional-only controller that varies the speed of the Raw Sewage pumps to
match the flow into the offsite facility. The Controller maintains setpoint level
control of the wetwell. Pumps are sequenced on and off by the hardwired relay
controls located in the MCP. Pump status is monitored by the PLC. Flow from the
facility is totalized.
Blocks:
1.
PID Loop – Level Controller
2.
Pump #1 Controls
3.
Pump #2 Controls
4.
Flow Totalizer
Task/.Routine name:
WW_Lvl_PID
Pump1_Ctrls
Pump2_Ctrls
Flow_Total
3.7.6 Tag Names and Descriptors:
Provide each input, output, coil, input register, and data register with a unique alphanumeric tag
name and a descriptive label identifying its function. Include a list of legal values and their
meaning and the tag number in the label comments.
3.7.7 Documentation
Hard-copy documentation for the program shall include:








Network listings with comments, tag names and descriptors
Cross-reference including all tag names and structures
Changes logbook
Processor configuration data and task schedule
I/O configuration
Data register contents, if applicable
ASCII messages, if any
Descriptors for all program elements.
Program and documentation shall also be supplied in electronic media form, complete with all
comments and descriptors, formatted for the RSLogix 5000 and FactoryTalk ME programming
software packages.
King County
Rev. H.3
3-15
7/18/10
4.0 PLC INSTALLATION GUIDELINE
4.1 SUMMARY
This Section defines the requirements for installing the PLC’s in the offsite facilities. The
guideline is intended to provide a common installation appearance, thereby increasing the
effectiveness of the maintenance department in maintaining the equipment and improving
operational uniformity.
This Section presents the minimum requirements for installation of a PLC at a King County
Offsite Facility. Project documents will provide additional requirements specific to each project.
4.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
4.2.1 Enclosure Requirements
Install the PLC and its I/O racks as described in the PLC Equipment Guideline within a new or
existing enclosure, as specified in the contract documents. Mount the PLC equipment on a rigid
back panel(s) that may be mounted in the cabinet after any existing PLC and its I/O modules are
removed. The dimensions of the back panel shall be subject to the approval of the Project
Representative.
The completed PLC enclosure assembly must be certified and labeled as compliant with UL508A.
The back panel shall meet the following minimum requirements:





Fabricated from minimum 12 gauge steel, braced as required to prevent buckling
Mounting hardware shall be 316 stainless steel
Surface shall be prepared, primed and finish coated in accordance with the coating
manufacturer’s recommendations.
Finish coat shall be air-dry polyurethane or epoxy enamel
Color shall be Federal Standard 595 - Color 27722, white.
Mount the PLC racks to the back panel(s) in accordance with the PLC manufacturer’s
recommendations. Locate the PLC racks on the back panel(s) allowing adequate space for
installation of plastic wireways to route the I/O module cables and Remote I/O cables to the
existing terminal blocks, plastic wireways, and other PLC racks. Ensure that the minimum
bending radius of all cables is not violated.
4.2.2 Environmental Requirements
The PLC and its I/O racks are to be installed in a dry, well-ventilated electrical room. The
environmental conditions in the electrical room will be:
King County
Rev. H.3
4-1
7/18/10
Temperature: 55 to 104 °F (10 to 40 ºC)
Humidity:
0% to 90% RH
Altitude:
0 to 500 ft above mean Sea Level
No other special environmental considerations are required.
4.2.3 Electrical Requirements
Power Supply
The PLC power supply and 120 VAC I/O modules will be operated from an uninterruptable
power supply with the following characteristics:
Output voltage
Frequency
Total Harmonic Distortion
115 VAC 10%
60 Hz ±1 Hz
Less than 5 %
4.2.4 Grounding
Guidelines for setting up grounds for I/O racks containing analog and discrete signals are:
a.
Each PLC back panel shall have an isolated signal ground bus, 1-inch wide by
1/4-inch thick, running across the bottom of each back panel. Provide the signal
ground bus with 10-32 tapped holes to accommodate ground connections from
various instruments and low level signal devices in the rack. Connect the signal
ground bus to the system ground bus at only one point via a stranded, insulated
copper wire of #8 AWG or larger.
b.
The PLC rack frame(s) must be connected to the facility electrical system ground
and to the PLC back panel via a connection that is isolated from the signal ground
bus. Provide a separate electrical system ground bus, 1-inch wide by 1/4-inch
thick, running across the bottom of each back panel. Provide the electrical system
ground bus with 10-32 tapped holes to accommodate ground connections.
Connect the electrical system ground bus to the back panel and the facility
electrical ground in accordance with NEC.
c.
Each discrete I/O module or panel in a rack should have internal grounding lines
that connect to the electrical system ground bus. Connections should be via ring
terminals that bolt to the bus. Provide separate signal return connections for each
I/O module (or section thereof) in the I/O rack. Do not share the same ground
return line with circuits of different voltage types (24 VDC vs 120 VAC, etc.).
d.
Refer to Appendix A Drawings for grounding recommendations for analog input
and output modules used in conjunction with Local loop controllers.
King County
Rev. H.3
4-2
7/18/10
4.3 I/O MODULE WIRING GUIDELINES
4.3.1 Input Module and Relay Module Wiring
Provide each I/O module with a removable edge connector and wiring. Terminate all I/O points,
whether used or not, on new or existing terminal strips, as specified by project drawings. Use
IEC 4.0 mm2 series 600 Volt, 30-Amp rated terminals. Locate new terminal strips within the
MCP cabinet or on the PLC back panel, as specified by the project drawings.
4.3.2 Output Module Wiring
For output modules, provide terminal strips with integral indicating fuse holders. Use IEC 4.0
mm2 600V series fuse blocks with socket for 5 X 20 mm fuse, and blown fuse indicators, as
required. Provide fuse sizes as specified below.
4.4 WIRING
4.4.1 General
Provide each piece of equipment requiring AC power with an NFPA No. 70 Type SJ cord with
molded-on grounding type plug for AC power connection.
4.4.2 Panel Connection Wire
These paragraphs specify power, control, and signal connection wiring within the PLC panel.
The term "connection wiring" refers to all wires that have both ends terminated within the same
panel or enclosure.
Size power and control wiring to meet all codes.
Discrete signals: Provide stranded copper wire, minimum 16 AWG, UL type MTW.
Analog signals: Provide stranded copper twisted pair cable, minimum 18 AWG, 80 C rated, UL
listed, 0.25 inches maximum outside diameter, with 100 percent coverage aluminum foil mylarlined shield and 22 AWG (minimum) stranded tinned copper drain wire.
4.4.3 Wire Tagging
Tag all panel connection wiring at terminations with machine-printed shrink-fitted plastic
sleeves.
Tag 120 VAC power circuit wires as with the prefixes L, N, or PG as appropriate.
Tag 24 VDC power circuit wires as with the prefixes 24P, 24C, or SG as appropriate.
King County
Rev. H.3
4-3
7/18/10
4.4.4 Wire Colors and Codes
Provide conductors in panels in accordance with UL-508A using the following code letters and
color codes:
WIRE CODES
CODE
S1
S2
SG
S1
S2
S3
SG
24P
24C
D
125P
125C
B
L
N
PG
SG
UL
UC
UN
A
TYPE
TSP
TSP
TSP
TRIAD
TRIAD
TRIAD
TRIAD
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
SINGLE
USE
SIGNAL (+)
SIGNAL (-)
SHIELD
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SIGNAL
SHIELD
POWER
RETURN (GND)
CONTROL
POWER
RETURN (GND)
CONTROL
POWER
NEUTRAL
POWER GROUND
SIGNAL GROUND
POWER
CONTROL
NEUTRAL
ANNUNCIATOR
SINGLE
COLOR (typ.)
BLACK
WHITE
BARE
BLACK
WHITE
RED
BARE
BLUE
WHITE/BLUE
BLUE
BLUE
WHITE/BLUE
BLUE
BLACK
WHITE
GREEN
GREEN/YEL
BLACK/WHITE
BLACK/WHITE
WHITE/BLK
BLK or
BLUE
BLK
BLK or
BLUE
YELLOW
C
I/O
SINGLE
SINGLE
M
MN
SINGLE
WHITE/YEL
FOREIGN NEUTRAL
R
IS
SINGLE
SINGLE
BLUE
LIGHT BLUE
RTU
INTRINSICALLY SAFE
CONTROL
ISOL I/O IN
FOREIGN POWER
VOLTAGE
<50 VDC
<50 VDC
<50 VDC
<50 VDC
<50 VDC
24 VDC
125 VDC
120 VAC
UPS 120 VAC
120VAC
24 VDC
120 VAC
120VAC
24VDC
120 VAC
or Above
120 VAC
or Above
12 VDC
LOW
4.4.5 Wire Numbers
Provide wire labels as specified in Section 17110-2.04.B
The third part of the wire label identifies wires in a circuit that are electrically identical.
Example: Tag Number = 110- S-25
Where: 110= loop number or equipment number
S = code letter (S=signal, C=discrete events or low voltage control, etc.)
King County
Rev. H.3
4-4
7/18/10
25 = electrical identity wire number (sequential numbers).
4.4.6 Terminal Blocks
Provide terminal blocks as required to complete the installation as specified in Section 171102.04.D
4.4.7 Terminal Tags, Covers And Markers
Mark each terminal strip with a unique identifying alphanumeric code (e.g., TB-3) at one end
and with a plastic marking strip running the entire length marked with a unique number for each
terminal (e.g., 1-50). Terminal strip and terminal markings shall be machine printed with
minimum 1/8-inch high numbers. Terminal blocks carrying power circuits shall include a
transparent cover for personnel protection and accessibility (finger guard).
4.4.8 Fuses
On 120VAC discrete circuits: Time delay 5 x 20 mm tube type fuses with 10,000 amperes
interrupting capacity at 125 VAC, Bussman model GMD or approved equal. Provide neon blown
fuse indicator lamps on fuse holders.
For 24V DC discrete circuits: Fast acting 5 x 20 mm tube type fuses with 10,000 amperes
interrupting capacity at 125 VAC, Bussman model GMA or approved equal. Provide LED blown
fuse indicator lamps on fuse holders.
Provide UL listed fuses for all outputs, sized as follows:
120 VAC power circuits
120 VAC discrete outputs
24 VDC discrete outputs
4-20 mA analog outputs
-
5A
1A
1A
0.1 A
4.4.9 Plastic Wireway
Slotted plastic wiring duct with dust cover, Panduit Type E or NE, shall be used between the
PLC I/O racks, and wherever new wiring duct is required to complete the installation.
4.4.10 Relays
The Relay Output module has a specified minimum load current of 10 mA. If the load current
required for any of the outputs is less than this value, miniature plug-in interposing relays may be
used, as follows:
1.
The contacts shall be bifurcated gold-flashed fine silver and rated for up to 3
amperes at 28V DC, and down to 1 mA at 12 VDC.
2.
The relay coils shall be 120V AC or 24V DC, as specified. The relay action shall
be 4-pole double throw (NEMA form-C). The relay shall be enclosed in a
King County
Rev. H.3
4-5
7/18/10
3.
transparent dust cover and shall have 14-pin, tab-type plug for socket mounting.
Relays shall be Potter & Brumfield, Type KHAU-17, or approved equal.
Miniature plug-in relay sockets shall be 14-pin, tab-type with pressure wire screw
terminals. Sockets shall be Potter & Brumfield 27E894, or approved equal.
4.4.11 Wiring Methods
The drawings in Appendix A show typical wiring diagrams for I/O modules.
4.5 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACES
4.5.1 Communications to the Offsite SCADA System
Communications between the PLC and the Offsite SCADA system shall be over a dedicated
leased telephone circuit using a Bell 202-compatible modem. Supply the following components:



A Modbus communications interface adapter for the ControlLogix PLC - ProSoft model
MV156-MCM, no exceptions.
An RS-232 compatible cable with appropriate connectors, to connect from the Modbus
port on the Prosoft module to the modem
Four-wire telephone cable with a RJ-11 plug to connect from the TEL LINE socket on
the modem to King County’s designated telephone service panel.
King County will supply the Bell 202-compatible modem and any necessary telephone service
equipment not included in the three items above. King County will arrange for the telephone
cable supplied by the contractor to be terminated at the telephone service panel.
4.5.2 Communications to Local High Speed Serial Devices
Provide a 5-port Ethernet switch as specified in Section 17803-2.03.E for the connection of at
least two local devices to the Ethernet/IP port on the PLC system. These two devices are an
Operator Interface panel, and a programming laptop computer.
The Operator Interface panel shall be the first local device on the high speed serial network, and
shall be designed to be permanently connected to the PLC. The programming laptop connection
shall be designed to be temporary, with easy removal and replacement of the cable. The cable
extension to the programming laptop shall be not more than fifty feet in length. It shall not be
necessary to disconnect the Operator Interface panel to connect or use the programming laptop.
4.6 TESTING REQUIREMENTS
4.6.1 General
Testing requirements shall be part of every PLC installation contract developed by King County.
The testing requirements shall demonstrate that the system was fully tested during assembly and
King County
Rev. H.3
4-6
7/18/10
installation, and is a functioning, integrated, and reliable control system before final payments
are released. The testing requirements shall include a comprehensive series of contractorconducted tests witnessed by King County, and contractor certifications.
Provide tests for all equipment and software. If equipment or software does not have specific
tests defined in the contract, then develop testing procedures.
Prepare and submit for review and approval:






Acceptance Test Schedules
Factory Acceptance Test Plan and procedure
Factory Acceptance Test Reports
Site Acceptance Test Plan and procedure
Site Acceptance Test Reports
Final PLC program documentation.
4.6.1 Test Plans
Prepare and document a separate test plan for each of the Factory Acceptance Test and Site
Acceptance Test. The actual test procedures shall be a formal submittal delivered to King County
for review and approval before the start of the tests.
Structure the test procedures in a step-by-step, building block manner with checkpoints at critical
functions. The procedures facilitate the reporting of test results and the re-creation of error
conditions.
Record on the test data sheets applicable drawing numbers, test equipment, discrepancies,
corrective action(s) required, and test data. Reference data entries to the applicable procedures
and indicate allowable limits for each entry on the data sheets.
4.6.2 Test Reports
Develop, maintain, and update Test Reports of all test results and conditions that were recorded
during the course of the testing. Include:










King County
Rev. H.3
Identification of test being conducted
Date and time of test
Prerequisite tests and demonstrations
Brief statement of test objective(s) and scope
Brief test description
List of test and monitoring equipment required to perform test
Test results
List of test deficiencies and resolutions
Re-testing requirements (if any)
Failure events
4-7
7/18/10

Contractor's certification .
4.6.3 Factory Acceptance Test
Perform a witnessed Factory Acceptance Test and verification for all deliverable equipment,
programs, and associated documentation prior to shipment of the system. The test shall verify
that the equipment is manufactured and assembled correctly, is operating as designed, and is in
compliance with the contractual requirements. The test shall also verify that the software and
hardware meet the functional and performance requirements of the project.
Include the following major test and verification activities:
4.6.3.1 System Configuration Verification
Inspect and verify the system configuration is in accordance with the approved drawings
prior to beginning the Factory Acceptance testing. Include a copy of the verified
configuration with the Factory Acceptance Test Report. No equipment replacement or
substitutions are permitted without written approval by the Project Representative,
rigorous quality control accounting, and retesting of the affected equipment.
4.6.3.2 Equipment Test and Verification
Inspect and verify all hardware enclosures with respect to structural integrity. As a
minimum, inspect and verify the following:



Equipment layout
Paint work and finish
Dimensions.
Perform the following verification of wiring and connections, as a minimum:




Wires: Correct type, connection, insulation preparation, labeling, and secure
installation in terminal block
Cables: Correct type, shielding, routing, supports, wireway design, and
labeling and termination of conductors
Fuses and breakers: Correct rating, location and connection
Grounding strips: Layout, size, connections, and security.
Perform the following inspection checks, at a minimum:







King County
Rev. H.3
Module wiring support
I/O rack clearances
I/O and equipment labeling
I/O module type verification
I/O module layout
Power supply mounting
Power cable routing
4-8
7/18/10

Data cable routing.
4.6.3.3 Functional Test
The functional test shall exercise every specified system function and shall include, but
not be limited to, the following:
1. Exercise all inputs and outputs both individually and collectively.
2. Demonstrate analog input and analog output accuracy at a minimum of three
points (e.g. 10%, 50%, 90%)
3. Test all operator interface functions.
4. Verify correct sequence of operation for all control operations.
5. Simulate PLC communication error conditions and demonstrate error detection
and handling.
6. Demonstrate PLC power supply failure and recovery.
7. Provide certified test results for the deliverable equipment
8. Demonstration of correct calculation of totalized quantities.
9. Demonstrate the proper operation of all application programs and control
strategies using whatever simulations are necessary. Include typical and worst
case scenarios that would arise in the use of the system.
4.6.4 Site Acceptance Test
After the Factory Acceptance Tests are complete, the system may be packaged and shipped to
the offsite facility for installation. Perform the following tests once the system is installed:




System installation test: Verify correct connection to all field devices, and calibration of
analog inputs and outputs.
System operational test: Verify correct operation of all system control functions.
Control loop tuning: As required
30-day Commissioning test.
Together, these activities form the Site Acceptance Test.
4.6.5 Final Documentation Acceptance
Final acceptance of any work is linked to the proper operation and documentation of the PLC
control system installed by the contractor. The following actions shall be defined in the contract
documents and shall be a prerequisite for final acceptance of the control system:
King County
Rev. H.3
4-9
7/18/10




Successful completion of the Commissioning Test
Delivery of all “as-built” documentation and drawings
Resolution of all outstanding system deficiencies
Delivery of the “as-built” PLC program documentation in hard copy form and on
electronic media.
King County
Rev. H.3
4-10
7/18/10
APPENDIX A
DRAWINGS
Drawing No.
Drawing Title
A-1 Sht. 1
PLC Card Layout – East Division Typical
A-1 Sht. 2
PLC Card Layout – West Division Typical
A-2
PLC Analog Input & Output Wiring
A-3
24 VDC Discrete Input & Output Wiring
A-4
120 VAC Discrete Input & Output Wiring
A-5
PLC Relay Discrete Output Wiring
King County
Rev. H.3
Appendix A-1
7/18/10
APPENDIX B
OFFSITE SCADA NETWORK PROGRAMMING
Network Configuration
The Master Terminal Unit (MTU) is the existing Offsite SCADA system (HF Controls model
ESC 1200).
The MTU communicates with the Offsite PLC Remote Terminal Units (RTU’s) via voice-grade
phone lines and low speed modems. The phone lines are VG-36 quality, 4-wire leased lines and
may bridge across the Qwest and Verizon jurisdictions. Modems are Telenetics MOT202T, rack
mounted at the MTU location and stand-alone at the RTU locations. Owner shall furnish the
phone lines and modems for the communications network.
The network is configured to accept at least 4 RTU’s per MTU serial port in a multi-drop
arrangement. The MTU is capable of supporting up to 10 RTU serial ports. Communications
with the RTU’s is via Modbus RTU protocol. Line parameters are 1200 Baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop
bit, ODD parity. The MTU is configured as a Modbus master with station address 1 on each
RTU serial port. The RTU’s are configured as Modbus slaves with unique station addresses in
the range of 2 - 64.
MTU memory Allocation
The MTU acts as a data repository for the network, with its network memory partitioned and
allocated to each RTU in service. Each RTU may have up to 500 16-bit words reserved in MTU
memory for its data. Each RTU’s memory shall be configured as 400 Read registers, and 100
Write registers. The Read registers and the Write registers for the RTU’s shall be contiguous
with each other. The MTU is capable of supporting up to 40 RTU’s.
RTU Memory Allocation
The RTU’s shall each have a block of 1000 16-bit words of pseudo-Modbus memory reserved
for communication with the MTU. This block of memory shall be contiguous and partitioned
into 600 words of Read memory and 400 words of Write memory (viewed from the MTU).
Modbus MEMORY
Read registers
Write registers
Start End Size
41000 41599 600
41600 41999 400
Messages
In order to optimize data traffic on the network, each RTU shall typically have seven queries sent
to it by the MTU as shown in the following table:
King County
Rev. H.3
Appendix B-1
7/18/10
Query
Estimated size (16-bit words)
1. Read Watchdog Data
2. Read Discrete Alarm Points
3. Read Discrete Status Points
4. Read Analog Points
5. Write Discrete Points
6. Write Analog Points
7. Write Watchdog Data
Example Query String
1. Watchdog Read
2. Read Discrete Alarms
3. Read Discrete Statuses
4. Read Analog Words
5. Write Discrete Words
6. Write Analog Words
7. Watchdog Write
1
1-10
1-50
1-100
0-10
0-20
1
Start
41000
41001
41101
41401
41601
41701
41990
End
41011
41121
41421
41611
41721
Size
1
10
20
20
10
20
1
Telemetry Watchdog
The Offsite SCADA system periodically checks the validity of the telemetry link with each
RTU. This is accomplished by writing a 16-bit number to a specific Write register location in the
RTU, and reading back a copy of this number from a specific, but different, Read register
location in the RTU. A normally functioning RTU will copy the number from the Watchdog
Write register to the Watchdog Read register. The number is updated with a period of between
10 and 60 seconds for each RTU, and is read back on the next update. If the number read back
does not agree with the number written on the previous update, a telemetry fault counter in the
Offsite SCADA system is incremented. When this counter exceeds a predetermined value, a
telemetry failure alarm for that RTU is logged. If the read-back number agrees with the number
written on the previous update, the telemetry fault counter is reset, and the alarm is cleared if it
has been acknowledged.
The values programmed in the Offsite SCADA system currently are:
Update interval:
Telemetry Fault alarm preset:
King County
Rev. H.3
15 sec
5 faults
Appendix B-2
7/18/10
APPENDIX C
SOFTWARE SUBMITTALS
Preliminary Software Submittal (30%)
Provide detailed database and program structure information:
1. Memory Map and I/O Configuration print-outs: Shows organization of memory usage
2. Complete List of Synonyms and Descriptors for I/O points and Forney communications
words
3. Program Block diagram – with keyed long comments on networks.
4. Key to program sections in the long comments of the first network.
Provide list of proposed display pages for Operator Interface panel and sketches of layout for display
pages.
Submit in hardcopy format or electronic media format compatible with Microsoft Office 97.
Intermediate Software Submittal (60%)
Provide first draft of program code, including:
1. Discrete Alarms and interlocks
2. Analog inputs and alarms
3. PID loops
4. Equipment sequencing logic
5. Runtime accumulators and flow integrators
6. SCADA Interface logic
7. Watchdog timer and failover logic
8. Power-Fail and Power-On restart logic
Submit in electronic media format, compatible with approved version of RSLogix 5000 development
software.
Provide first draft of Operator Interface display pages, including the following required pages:
1. Overview Graphic page(s)
2. Setpoint and Data Entry page(s)
3. Alarm History page(s) and Alarm Banner
4. Maintenance page(s)
5. Mode control page(s) ( REMOTE/AUTO/MANUAL for each subsystem), as required.
Submit in electronic media format compatible with Operator Interface development package.
Final Software Submittal (90%)
Provide final draft of program code and Operator Interface display pages.
Provide complete code listings and printouts of Operator Interface display pages.
Provide proposed test plan for Factory Acceptance Test of Software
Submit in hardcopy and electronic media format as above.
King County
Rev. H.3
Appendix C-1
7/18/10
APPENDIX D
GRAPHIC REPRESENTATIONS
Screens, General:
Provide Local Operator Interface with Graphic Screens conforming to the following:
 Resolution: 640 x 480 pixels, minimum
 Colors: Black (BLK), White (WHT), RED, Green (GRN), Yellow (YEL), Blue
(BLU), CYAN, Magenta (MGN), GREY (25%) and GREY (50%), minimum
 Text, Character font and minimum size: Ariel or Helvetica, 8 pt (0.10 in.).
 Screen Background: GREY (25%)
Provide navigation touch panels at the bottom of each screen to navigate directly to the following
screens:
 Overview 1
 Equipment Status1
 Faceplate1 (if present)
 Alarm History
 Maintenance Login
If there are more than three Overview or Equipment Status screens, provide a top-level MENU
screen with navigation panels to access each of the Overview and Status screens, and include a
return panel on each screen to return to the MENU screen.
Provide a touch panel with confirmation dialog on the first maintenance screen to EXIT the HMI
program.
Overview Screens:
Provide one or more Overview screens which represent all of the major systems in the Station
graphically. Illustrate main process connections, vessels, and equipment as shown on a Process
and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID) even if not monitored by PLC. Co-ordinate with King
County on what must be shown.
Follow the rules below as closely as possible.
Pumps/Fans/Motorized equipment:
Display an ISA symbol for each Raw Sewage pump or other major pump/fan/motor.
Use the following color schemes to represent the status of pumps/fans/motors:
 GRN - Ready, Not Running
 RED - Running normally
 YEL - Failed
 BLU - Unavailable (Power OFF or VFD FAILED)
King County
Rev. H.3
Appendix D-1
7/18/2010
Place a small text box near the equipment indicating (A)uto or (M)anual status. Use the
following color schemes: Auto: BLK on YEL; Manual: BLK on WHT
Place a small text box near the equipment indicating equipment service (LEAD, 1st FOL,
2nd FOL, STDBY, etc.). Use BLK on WHT color scheme.
Display the motor speed digitally above or below the equipment with a resolution of 1
RPM. Use YEL on BLU color scheme.
Valves:
Display an ISA symbol for each major control valve.
Use the following color schemes to represent the status of control valves:
 GRN - Closed
 RED - Open
 YEL - Failed
 BLU - In transition
Place a small text box near the valve indicating (A)uto or (M)anual status. Use the
following color schemes: Auto: BLK on YEL; Manual: BLK on WHT
Wetwell or Tank Level:
Place a bargraph display of the wetwell level at the left of the first overview screen.
Provide a bar-graph level display of tank or other levels within or adjacent to the tank or
other vessel.
If two level transmitters (A & B) are present, display the output of both level transmitters.
Indicate which transmitter is selected by high-lighting a small text box label (A or B) at
the top of the bargraph.
Use the following color schemes: Selected: BLK on GRN; De-selected: BLK on GREY
(50%)
Scale the bargraph in FEET of water or other engineering units as specified. Display the
level digitally at the bottom of the bargraph in specified engineering units, and for
wetwell levels in feet of elevation (Metro datum) to 0.01 feet. Use YEL on BLU color
scheme for the digital display.
Facility Status:
Place a small text box near the top center of the first Overview screen indicating the
facility mode (LOCAL, PLC, or REMOTE).
Use the following color schemes:
King County
Rev. H.3
Appendix D-2
7/18/2010



Local: BLK on YEL;
PLC: BLK on GRN;
Remote: WHT on RED
Standby Generator, Automatic Transfer Switch Status:
Place small text boxes near the top left of the first Overview screen indicating the standby
generator status (READY, RUN, or FAIL) and the ATS status (GEN, OFF, UTIL) .
Use the following color schemes:
 READY or UTIL: BLK on GRN;
 RUN or GEN: WHT on RED;
 FAIL or OFF: BLK on YEL
Flows & Pressures:
Display flows digitally with a resolution of 0.01 MGD, 1 GPM, or as specified.
Display pressures digitally with a resolution of 0.01 PSI or 0.1 FT WC, or as specified.
Use the following color scheme for numeric displays: YEL on BLU
Equipment Status Screens:
Pumps:
Provide a table indicating the status of the Raw Sewage pumps and any other major
pumps:
Indicate pump speed and the following statuses:
 AUTO / MANUAL
 READY / RUN / FAIL / UNAVAILABLE or ON / OFF / FAIL
 LEAD / 1st FOL / 2nd FOL / STDBY / ERROR.
Use the following color schemes:
 AUTO: BLK on YEL;
MANUAL: BLK on WHT;
 READY or OFF: BLK on GRN; RUNning or ON: WHT on RED
 FAIL or ERROR: BLK on YEL; UNAVailable: WHT on BLU;
 Service and Speed: YEL on BLU.
Valves and other major pieces of equipment:
Indicate the following statuses in tabular format:
 AUTO / MAN
 OPEN / CLOSED / FAIL / TRANS
Use the following color schemes:
 AUTO: BLK on YEL;
 OPEN or ON: WHT on RED;
King County
Rev. H.3
MANUAL: BLK on WHT
CLOSED or OFF: BLK on GRN
Appendix D-3
7/18/2010

Fail: BLK on YEL;
Transfer: WHT on BLU
Faceplate Display Screens:
Provide faceplate display screens for all PID loops. Up to two PID loops may be
displayed per screen.
Provide Faceplate displays with the following at a minimum:
 Bargraph displays of Process Value and Setpoint scaled in Engineering units and
Output scaled 0 - 100%.
 Digital displays of PV, SP, and Output scaled as above.
 Indication of AUTO/MANUAL status and a means of toggling it.
 Data entry window for changing setpoint in AUTO mode.
 Data entry window to change Output in MANUAL mode.
 Password protected access to Loop tuning screens for maintenance personnel.
Alarm History Screen:
Provide an alarm history screen with the following features at a minimum:
For each alarm occurrence (one line per occurrence):
 Time and date stamp of occurrence of alarm.
 Time and date stamp for acknowledgement of alarm
 Acknowledgement tag
 Title of alarm (32 characters maximum).
Provide a FIFO alarm history queue of at least 256 alarm occurrences.
Provide a means of selecting any alarm occurrence by scrolling through the alarm queue.
Provide a means of acknowledging the selected alarm occurrence, and of acknowledging
all unacknowledged alarms.
Provide a means of erasing the entire alarm queue, with a confirmation query.
Current Alarms Banner:
Provide a current alarm banner at the bottom of each overview/status screen. Provide a
list of medium-sized (20 char) text messages with the text of current alarms in the alarm
banner. Distinguish un-acknowledged alarms (flashing) from acknowledged alarms
(steady). Acknowledged alarms which have returned to normal should disappear from the
alarm banner display. Display all alarms on Alarm History screen also.
Provide a means of scrolling, selecting and acknowledging current alarms.
King County
Rev. H.3
Appendix D-4
7/18/2010
Maintenance Screens:
Provide password protected maintenance screens of the following types:
 Control Parameter screens
 Counter/Timer tuning screens
 PID Loop Tuning screens
Control Parameter Screen
Provide Control Parameter screen(s) with the following at a minimum:
 Elevations for equipment START and STOP for each control mode
 SETPOINT for level control in each control mode, if used.
 Other setpoints for auxiliary equipment control
 Provide data entry screens to edit each parameter
Counter/Timer Tuning
Provide counter/timer tuning screens with the following at a minimum:
 Counter number display panel and data entry window to change it.
 Counter preset display panel and data entry window to change it.
 Timer number display panel and data entry window to change it.
 Timer preset display panel.
 Provide data entry screens to edit each parameter and data entry windows to
change them.
PID Loop Tuning
Provide PID Loop tuning screens with the following at a minimum:
 PID Loop number display panel and data entry window to change it.
 Proportional Gain display panel and data entry window to change it.
 Integral time display panel and data entry window to change it.
 Derivative time display panel and data entry window to change it.
 Output Bias display panel and data entry window to change it.
 Output high clamp display panel and data entry window to change it.
 Output low clamp display panel and data entry window to change it.
King County
Rev. H.3
Appendix D-5
7/18/2010
SECTION 17803
COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACES
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Communications between the facilities and the Treatment Plant is by King County. The modem
equipment at the facilities and the Treatment Plant will be supplied by King County. The
Contractor is responsible for installing the modem, connecting the PLC SCADA interface to the
modem, and program development in the PLC for the SCADA interface.
B. The Contractor is responsible for installing communications between the Operator Interface panel
and the PLC.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED)
1.03 LISTING AND LABELING
A. Communication equipment and material shall be listed and labeled for the purpose for which it is
used by Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual, CSA, or equivalent nationally recognized
testing laboratory.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide in accordance with Section 01300.
B. Product Data sheets and catalog cuts.
C. Communications drawing.
D. Operation and Maintenance information per Section 01730.
1.05 DRAWINGS
A. Provide drawings and schematics diagrams showing each active device, all connections, all
junction boxes, and all communication lines including spares and the associated phone numbers
for each of the facilities. Show how a component is connected to other unit components or
systems. Show how systems or units are connected to each other. In each case, every
conductor and terminal shall be identified.
B. The Project Representative will provide information acquired from the phone company during
installation of the new phone lines. Incorporate the information into drawing(s) showing
components.
C. The communication drawing shall contain information commencing with the phone company
demarcation point at the street to the connection to the PLC.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 SCADA INTERFACE
A. Communications between the Storage Facility PLC and the Treatment Plant SCADA system shall
be over a dedicated leased telephone circuit using a Bell 202 compatible modem. King County
will furnish the modems. Provide the following components:
1. SCADA Interface modules: Prosoft Model MVI56E-MCM - no exceptions
2. An RS-232 compatible cable with appropriate connectors, to connect from the serial port on
the PLC SCADA Interface to the modem.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17803 - 1
C00822C13
3. The cable and conduit required to connect the modem to the demarcation point. The distance
between the modem and the demarcation point shall be determined for each station, but shall
not be more than fifty cable feet from the PLC controller.
4. Internal four-wire telephone cable with a RJ-11 plug to connect from the TEL LINE socket on
the modem, through a county furnished surge suppression device, to King County's
designated telephone service panel.
B. Communications between the Storage Tank PLC and the Upper Diversion Structure PLC (or
Existing Diversion Structure PLC) shall be over a dedicated leased telephone circuit using a Bell
202 compatible modem using DF1 protocol. King County will furnish the modems. Provide the
following components:
1. Modem shall be connected to the onboard serial port of the ControlLogix PLCs.
2. An RS-232 compatible cable with appropriate connectors, to connect from the serial port on
the PLC to the modem.
3. The cable and conduit required to connect the modem to the demarcation point. The distance
between the modem and the demarcation point shall be determined for each station, but shall
not be more than fifty cable feet from the PLC controller.
4. Internal four-wire telephone cable with a RJ-11 plug to connect from the TEL LINE socket on
the modem, through a county furnished surge suppression device, to King County's
designated telephone service panel.
C. King County will furnish telephone service equipment not included in the three items above. King
County will arrange for the internal telephone cable supplied by the Contractor to be terminated at
the telephone service panel.
2.02 CONTROLNET NETWORK DEVICES
A. Provide ControlNet interface modules: Allen-Bradley model 1756-CNB - no exceptions.
B. Provide for the connection of the remote I/O racks and two additional local devices to the
ControlNet Network interface on the PLC. These two additional devices are [the Operator
Interface panel, and a] future device(s).
C. The remote I/O rack(s) shall be the first device(s) on the ControlNet Network, followed [by the
Operator Interface and] the future device(s). The I/O rack(s) [and the Operator Interface] shall be
permanently connected to the PLC. The future device shall be considered to be temporary, and
their network connection shall be configured for easy insertion and removal of its network cable
connector. The network cable extending to the future device(s) shall be not more than fifty feet
and it shall not be necessary to disconnect the permanent ControlNet devices to connect or use
the future device(s).
D. Provide ControlNet backbone cables, network taps, and terminators as required to meet the
above specifications.
2.03 ETHERNET/IP NETWORK DEVICES
A. Ethernet/IP Interfaces: Allen-Bradley model 1756-EN2T - no exceptions.
B. Modbus TCP/IP Interface: ProSoft MVI56E-MNETC- no exceptions
C. Connection of additional local devices to the Ethernet/IP Network interface on each PLC. These
additional devices include the Operator Interface panel, the VFDs, the Ethernet switch in the
MCC (in turn connected to the electronic motor overloads and power monitor) and future
device(s).
D. The Operator Interface shall be the first device on the Ethernet/IP Network, followed by the future
device(s). The Operator Interface shall be permanently connected to the PLC. The future
device(s) shall be considered to be temporary, and its network connection shall be configured for
easy insertion and removal of its network cable connector(s). The network cable extending to the
future device shall be not more than fifty feet and it shall not be necessary to disconnect the
Operator Interface panel to connect or use the future device(s).
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17803 - 2
C00822C13
E. Ethernet/IP cables – CAT-6E,
F. A10-port 10/100 Mb Ethernet switch as required to meet these specifications.
G. Managed Ethernet Switch:
1. Protocols: IEEE-802.3, 802.3u, 802.3x.
2. Line: 10BaseT/100BaseT, Full- or half-duplex, auto-generated.
3. Connectors:
a. 10/100BaseTX: Eight (8) RJ-45 Copper Ports 1000BaseSX: Up to Two (2) LC Duplex
Gigabit Fiber Ports (optional).
b. ESD and Surge Protection Diodes on all Ports.
c. Auto Sensing 10/100BaseTX, Duplex, and MDIX.
4. Environmental:
a. Temperature: -40ºC to 70ºC Operating temperature.
b. Humidity: 5%-95% RH, non-condensing.
5. Power: 10-49 VDC (Regulated) Input Current (max): 410mA max.@24VDC:
a. Power supply: NTPS-24-1.3 (1.3A @ 24V).
b. Redundant Power Inputs (10-49 VDC).
6. Reliability: MTBF: >2 Million Hours.
7. Regulatory Approvals:
a. FCC Title 47, Part 15, Subpart B - Class A; ICES-003 - Class A.
b. GOST-R Certified, RoHS Compliant.
c. UL/cUL: UL 508 and ANSI/ISA-12.12.01-2007, Class I, Div 2, Groups A, B, C, and D; T4.
8. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. N-tron model 7010TX with N-View option.
b. Hirshmann.
c. Or Approved Equal.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION
A. Install the telephone cable within the facility. The telephone service panel will be within 50 feet of
the PLC cabinet. Connect the PLC to the Modems with the serial RS-232 cable.
B. Test the communications between the PLC and the SCADA system and the PLC and the
UDS/EDS PLC and verify proper communications before commencing the tests associated with
installation at the facility. See Section 17804.
C. Install the ControlNet network cables, taps, and terminators to connect all ControlNet devices as
specified above. Configure and test the ControlNet connection to all devices in accordance with
Section 17804.
D. Install the Ethernet/IP network cables and an Ethernet switch to connect all Ethernet/IP devices
as specified above. Configure and test the Ethernet/IP connection to all devices in accordance
with Section 17804.
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17803 - 3
C00822C13
SECTION 17804
PLC TESTING
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. All PLC installations shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of this Section.
B. The Contractor shall demonstrate that each PLC system was fully tested during development and
installation and is a functioning, integrated, reliable, control system before final payments are
released.
C. The basic testing requirements shall require a comprehensive series of Contractor conducted tests
witnessed by King County, and Contractor certifications.
D. The Contractor shall provide tests for all equipment and software. If equipment or software does not
have specific tests defined in the contract, then the Contractor shall develop testing procedures.
All software and all equipment related to the PLC shall be tested.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED)
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedures: Section 01300.
B. Test Schedules: Per this Section and Section 01660.
C. Test Plans: Per this Section and Section 01660.
D. Test Results: Per this Section and Section 01660.
1.04 DOCUMENTATION
A. Provide complete documentation of all test plans.
B. Documentation shall utilize software for tracking progress for each PLC. The tracking software
shall include all tests, outcome of each test and provide narrative about any failures, the reason for
the failure and the remedies used to correct the failure.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 TEST PLANS AND REPORTS
A. Prepare and submit for review and approval:
1. Factory Acceptance Test Plan and procedures.
2. Site Acceptance Test Plan and procedures.
3. Test Schedules.
4. Test Reports.
5. PLC program documentation.
B. Prepare and document a separate test plan for each of the Factory Acceptance Test and Site
Acceptance Test. The test procedures shall be a formal submittal delivered to King County for
review and approval before the start of the test.
C. Structure the test procedures in a step-by-step, building block manner with checkpoints at critical
functions. The procedures shall facilitate the reporting of test results and the re-creation of error
conditions.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17804 - 1
C00822C13
D. Test data sheets shall be used to record applicable drawing numbers, test equipment,
discrepancies, corrective action(s) required, and test data. Data entries shall be referenced to the
applicable procedures and allowable limits for each entry shall be indicated on the data sheets.
E. Develop, maintain, and update Test Reports of all test results and conditions that were recorded
during the course of the testing. The test results shall include:
1. Identification of test being conducted.
2. Date and time of test; Tester name, Witness name.
3. Prerequisite tests and demonstrations.
4. Brief statement of test objective(s) and scope.
5. Brief test description.
6. List of test and monitoring equipment required to perform test.
7. Test results.
8. List of test deficiencies and their resolutions.
9. Retesting requirements (if required).
10. Failure events.
11. Contractor's certification (as applicable).
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST
A. Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) and verification for all deliverable equipment, programs, and
associated documentation shall be performed prior to shipment of the system to the site. The
tests shall verify that the PLC equipment is manufactured and assembled correctly, is operating as
designed, and is in compliance with the contractual requirements. The tests shall verify that the
software and hardware meet the functional and performance requirements of the project.
B. The Factory Acceptance Test shall include the following major test and verification activities:
1. System Configuration Verification: Prior to beginning of the Factory Acceptance testing, the
system shall be subjected to system deliverable configuration verification. A copy of the
configuration and record of quantities of part numbers are to be included in the Factory
Acceptance Test Report. No equipment replacement or substitutions are permitted without
rigorous quality control accounting and retesting of affected equipment.
2. Equipment Test and Verification: The FAT for the equipment consists of visual inspection and
verification that the equipment is assembled in accordance with the drawings. All hardware
enclosures shall be verified to determine the structural integrity. Inspect and verify the
following at a minimum:
a. Mounting configuration.
b. Paint work and finish.
c. Dimensions.
3. Verify the following wiring and connections at a minimum:
a. Wire in terminal block, including correct connection and labeling, wiring installation and
wire stripping.
b. Cable runs, including correct connection and labeling, supports, routing, shielding,
wire-way design, and terminal security.
c. Fuse and breakers for correct rating and placement.
d. Grounding strips, including layout, cables, connection security, and correct size.
4. Perform the following inspection checks:
a. Card wiring support.
b. I/O rack clearances.
c. I/O and equipment labeling.
d. I/O card type verification.
e. I/O card layout.
f. Power supply mounting.
g. Power cable routing.
h. Data cable routing.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17804 - 2
C00822C13
5. Functional Test:
a. Exercise every specified system function and include the following at a minimum:
b. Rigorously exercise all inputs and outputs both individually and collectively.
c. Demonstrate analog input and analog output accuracy.
d. Test all operator interface functions.
e. Verify all control operations to ensure they result in the correct sequence of operation at the
PLC.
f. Simulate PLC communication error conditions and demonstrate error detection and
handling.
g. Demonstrate PLC power supply failure and recovery.
h. Provide certified test results for the deliverable equipment.
i. Demonstrate correct calculation of totalized quantities.
j. Demonstrate proper operation of application programs and control strategies using
whatever simulations are necessary. The test shall include typical and worst case
scenarios that would arise in the use of the system.
C. The system may be shipped to the site only after the Factory Acceptance Test has been completed
satisfactorily and approved by the Project Representative.
3.02 SYSTEM TEST PHASE - SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A. Communications Test: Temporarily connect the PLCs inputs to the facility and connect the PLC via
modems to a dedicated phone lines installed to the SCADA Host at West Point Treatment Plant
and the Upper Diversion Structure (UDS) /Existing Diversion Structure (EDS).
1. Demonstrate the following:
a. Proper communications to the SCADA system.
b. Proper communication to the UDS/EDS.
c. Accurate bi-directional data transfer of all required analog and discrete signals between the
PLC and the SCADA system and UDS/EDS (coordinate with the Conveyance Contractor).
d. Test duration shall be a minimum of three 24-hour days.
B. Installed System Test: Install new PLC system, complete. Demonstrate:
1. Conformance with System configuration drawings.
2. Proper connection and labeling of field wiring for Inputs and Outputs.
3. Analog Inputs: Calibrated monitoring of all analog inputs.
4. Control Outputs: Exercise each facility system component connected to the PLC control
outputs (valve, motor, etc.) and demonstrate PLC or manual control and correct status
indication on the Operator Interface and SCADA system.
5. Status Inputs: Exercise each individual facility system component connected to the PLC
(motors, valves, etc.) and demonstrate correct status indication on the Operator Interface and
SCADA system.
6. Alarm Inputs: Exercise each alarm input to the PLC from the field device and demonstrate
correct indication on the Operator Interface and SCADA system.
7. Alarm Outputs: Exercise each alarm output from PLC and demonstrate correct indication on
Annunciator, SCADA and/or Metrotel.
8. Computed Alarms: Demonstrate computed alarms in the PLC and correct indication on
Operator Interface and SCADA system.
C. Operational Test: Following accepted System Testing, conduct stepwise test of all functions
existing in the PLC program. Demonstrate:
1. PLC Automatic control of Wetwell influent or effluent gate valves, if present.
2. PLC Wetwell level controls, pump sequencing controls, and pump speed controls, if present.
3. PLC Automatic controls of Dewatering Pump suction and discharge valves, if present.
4. PLC Automatic control of Force Main valves, if present.
5. Any other PLC Automatic controls.
6. PLC SCADA communications failure and recovery.
7. PLC controlled shutdown and re-start on Utility Power Failure.
8. PLC Major and Minor Error detection and reporting.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17804 - 3
C00822C13
9. Manual and automatic operation of PID loops.
10. Stability and tuning of PID loops.
11. Password-protected tuning of counter and timer presets and PID loop tuning parameters from
Operator Interface.
12. All communication between the SCADA System and the Storage Tank PLC, the Storage Tank
PLC and the UDS/EDS PLC and the UDS/EDS PLC and the SCADA System (coordinate with
the Conveyance Contractor).
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17804 - 4
C00822C13
SECTION 17900
SCHEDULES
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section describes the purpose and content of the following schedules contained in Sections
17901 through 17906:
1. Section 17901: Instrument Schedule
2. Section 17902: Alarm Schedule
3. Section 17903: PLC I/O Schedule
4. Section 17904: Metrotel I/O Schedule
5. Section 17905: SCADA Signal Schedule
6. Section 17906: Relay Schedule
B. Information on equipment with identification numbers and other attributes which may relate to and
may require coordination with items in these schedules is found in Section 11009 and on the
drawings.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 SCHEDULES
A. General:
1. These schedules briefly describe major discrete devices required by the control system.
Scheduled devices shall be provided as described in the schedules and in the referenced
specification paragraph. Each instrument is located by a panel reference or electrical or
mechanical plan drawing reference (if field mounted).
2. These schedules shall not be interpreted as a set of complete data sheets for the devices but
only as a listing of instruments with certain salient features described. Additional elements
such as power supplies, current repeaters or isolators, mounting hardware, cord sets, and
other such elements as may be required by a particular vendor in order to complete the
system shall be provided even though not listed. The Contractor shall create complete
ordering information for all instruments and shall submit this information to the Project
Representative for review prior to manufacture.
B. Schedule column descriptions:
1. Function code number: These are instrument tag numbers which include the 3-digit
instrument loop (IL) numbers and individual instrument prefixes and suffixes, or component
name or circuit designation
2. Description: Defines application of the loop or identifies the type of individual instrument
within the loop.
3. Specification number: Numbers refer to specification requirements for new instruments
which shall be provided.
4. Process drawing: Numbers refer to basic process flow drawings showing the schematic
locations of primary measuring elements and final control devices within the process.
5. Mechanical drawing: Numbers refer to mechanical drawings showing locations or installation
details for individual field mounted instruments.
6. Electrical drawing: Numbers refer to electrical drawings showing field instrument locations
and interconnecting raceway numbers and conductors. The raceway schedule in Division 16
defines the actual raceway and conductors required.
7. Instrument drawing: Used for loop headings only, the numbers refer to instrument drawings
showing the functional diagrams.
8. Item numbers show the location of devices on main control panel (MCP), Drawing I-201.
Engraving schedules are referenced by item numbers on Drawing I-201.
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17900 - 1
C00822C13
PART 3
EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17900 - 2
C00822C13
SECTION 17901
INSTRUMENT SCHEDULE
COLUMN HEADINGS TO INCLUDE:
1.01 TAG NUMBER
1.02 DESCRIPTION
1.03 P&ID DRAWING NUMBER
1.04 INSTRUMENT DRAWING NUMBER
1.05 PHYSICAL LOCATION
1.06 FIELD POWER VIA
1.07 SPECIFICATION NUMBER
1.08 SPECIFICATION SYMBOL
1.09 CALIBRATION RANGE
1.10 ZERO SUPPRESSION
1.11 INPUT/OUTPUT
1.12 APPLICATION NOTES
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17901 - 1
C00822C13
851113
851113
851113
851113
851113
851114
851114
851114
851114
851114
LY
LY
LIT
PSL
LIT
LIT
PSL
LIT
LE
LE
Intrusion
Limit Switch (intrusion)
Limit Switch (intrusion)
Limit Switch (intrusion)
Limit Switch (intrusion)
Limit Switch (intrusion)
Limit Switch (intrusion)
Storage Tank Level
Float Switch High High Level
Float Switch High Level
Bay 1 Level Element 1 (Bubbler Tube)
Bay 1 Level Element 2 (Bubbler Tube)
Bay 1 Bubbler Panel guages
Intrinsic Safety Relay
Intrinsic Safety Relay
Level Indicating Transmitter
Low Pressure Switch
Level Indicating Transmitter
Level Indicating Transmitter
Low Pressure Switch
Level Indicating Transmitter
Bays 2-4 Level Element 1 (Bubbler Tube)
Bays 2-4 Level Element 2 (Bubbler Tube)
Bays 2-4 Bubbler Panel guages
A
A
851105
851105
851105
851105
851105
851105
851105
851105
851114
PSH
PSL
PSLL
PSLA
PI
HS
HS
HS
LSH
Alternation Mode Selector Switch
Mechanical Room Flood Switch
Mechanical Room Level Switch (high)
Pump 1 Temperature
Selector Switch
Selector Switch
Pressure Switch (low low alarm)
Pressure Indicator
Pressure Switch (low low)
Pressure Switch (low)
Pressure Switch (high)
Pressure Switch (high, high)
South Magnolia Storage Facility
C
B
A
A
A
A
A
851105
PSHH
FC Selector Switch
Emergency Valve Vault Flood Switch
Emergency Valve Vault Level Switch (high)
Intrinsic Safety Relay
Instrument Air System
851101
851116
851116
HS
LSHH
LY
FB Selector Switch
851101
HS
FA Selector Switch
A
851101
851115
851115
851115
851115
HS
LSHH
LSH
LSL
LSLL
LSH
LSL
PIT
PI
LIT
B
A
B
B
A
A
B
A
A
B
A
B
A
BA
BB
C
D
E
Description
Diversion Structure Level
Level Indicating Transmitter
Low Pressure Switch
A Diversion Structure Level Element 1 (Bubbler Tube)
B Diversion StructureLevel Element 2 (Bubbler Tube)
Diversion Structure Bubbler Panel guages
851115 B Level Indicating Transmitter
Conveyance Pipeline Pressure
851101 V Conveyance Pipeline Pressure Indicating Xmtr
851101 V Conveyance Pipeline Pressure Indicator
C2 Water System
851101 G Air Gap Tank Level Switch High
851101 GA Air Gap Tank Level Switch Low
851101
Emergency Valve Vault Sump Pump System
851101 F Level Switch (high high)
851101 F Level Switch (high)
851101 F Level Switch (low)
851101 F Level Switch (low low)
851113
851113
851113
851113
LSHH
LSH
LE
LE
LIT
PSL
LE
LE
851120
851120
851120
851120
851120
851120
ZS
ZS
ZS
ZS
ZS
ZS
Tag Number
P302
P304
P304
P304
P304
P304
P304
P304
P304
P304
P304
P304
P304
P304
P304
P304
P304
P304
P304
P302
P302
P101
P101
P101
P101
P101
P101
P101
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P305
P305
P305
P305
P305
P305
I213
I241
I241
I212
I212
I219
I219
I219
I219
I213
I219
I219
I241
I241
I217
I213
I217
I218
I213
I218
I218
I218
I241
I241
I217
I217
I213
I213
I213
I213
I213
I213
Inst. Dwg.
P&ID
Dwg No.
No.
E303
E204
E204
E204
E204
E204
E303
E303
E204
E308
E308
E308
E201
E201
E308
E308
E308
E308
E308
E308
E303
E303
E303
E303
E303
E303
E303
E303
E303
E303
E308
E303
Physical
Location
MCP851101
PNL851105
PNL851105
PNL851105
PNL851105
PNL851105
PNL851105
PNL851105
PNL851105
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
Field Power
VIA
17216-3.03
17272-3.03
17272-3.03
17272-3.03
17216-3.03
17211-3.03
17216-3.03
17216-3.03
17216-3.03
17216-3.03
17216-3.03
17216-2.02
17272-3.03
17272-3.03
17272-3.03
17216-3.03
17216-3.03
17216-3.03
17216-3.03
17216-3.03
17216-3.03
17216-3.03
17274-3.03
17212-3.03
17216-3.03
17211-3.03
17211-3.03
17211-3.03
17212-3.03
17216-3.03
17216-3.03
17211-3.03
17211-3.03
17211-3.03
17216-2.02
17216-2.02
17212-3.03
17216-3.03
17212-3.03
17212-3.03
17216-3.03
17212-3.03
17211-3.03
17211-3.03
17211-3.03
17216-3.03
17216-3.03
17216-3.03
17216-3.03
17216-3.03
17216-3.03
Spec. No.
LFS
XXS
XXS
XXS
PS
PG
PS
PS
PS
PS
LFS
XXS
XXS
XXS
LFS
LFS
LFS
LFS
LFS2
LFS2
PGT
XI2
PDT
PDS
LBE
LBE
LBE
PDT
PDT
PDS
PDT
PDT
PDS
PDT
LBE
LBE
LBE
LFS
LFS
LBE
LBE
LBE
ZS
ZS
ZS
ZS
ZS
ZS
17901-1
2" ab. floor
2" ab. floor
25PSI
25PSI
25PSI
El. 107
El. 105.5
Spec Symbol Setpoint
1.45-29 PSI
0-15 ft
0-15 Ft
0-15 Ft
0-30 ft
0-30 Ft
0-35 Ft
0-30 Ft
0-35 Ft
0-35 ft
Calib.
Range
SECTION 17901
INSTRUMENT SCHEDULE
Zero
Suppression
Contact
Contact
Contact
Contact
Contact
Contact
Contact
Contact
Contact
Contact
Contact
Contact
High Alarm PS. Provided with the instrument air compressor per section
11366.
Stop All Compressor PS (hard wire control). Provided with the instrument
air compressor per section 11366.
Lead Compressor PS (hard wire control). Provided with the instrument air
compressor per section 11366.
Lag Compressor PS (hard wire control). Provided with the instrument air
compressor per section 11366.
Low Alarm PS (hard wire control). Provided with the instrument air
compressor per section 11366.
Provided with the instrument air compressor per section 11366.
Hand/Off/Auto selector switch. Provided with the instrument air
compressor per section 11366.
Hand/Off/Auto selector switch. Provided with the instrument air
compressor per section 11366.
1-2/Alternate/2-1 selector switch. Provided with the instrument air
compressor per section 11366.
In MCP851101
Provided with the submersible sump pump per section 11324.
Provided with the submersible sump pump per section 11324.
Provided with the submersible sump pump per section 11324.
Provided with the submersible sump pump per section 11324.
Hand/Off/Auto selector switch. Provided with the submersible sump
pump per section 11324.
Hand/Off/Auto selector switch. Provided with the submersible sump
pump per section 11324.
1-2/Alternate/2-1 selector switch. Provided with the submersible sump
pump per section 11324.
Contact
Contact
Contact
Contact
Contact
Air Gap Level Measurement
Air Gap Level Measurement
Elevation at 0 is 97.4ft.
at PNL851115
at PNL851115
Installed on PNL851115
Elevation at 0 is 83.25ft.
Elevation at 0 is 79.25ft.
In MCP851101
In MCP851101
at PNL851113
Installed on PNL851113
at PNL851113
at PNL851114
Installed on PNL851114
at PNL851114
Odor Control Room Entrance
Dewatering Pump Room Roll Up Door
Dewatering Pump Room Entrance
Mechanical Room Entrance
Electrical Room Entrance
Generator Room Entrance
Application Notes
Contact
Contact
4-20mA
4-20mA
4-20mA
Contact
4-20mA
Contact
4-20mA
4-20mA
Contact
4-20mA
Contact
Contact
Contact
Contact
Contact
Contact
Contact
Contact
Input/
Output
alarm
alarm
alarm
alarm
alarm
alarm
open
open
open
open
open
open
C00822C13
7/11/2013
851103
851103
TS
MS
851104
851104
851102
851102
ZS
ZY
ZS
ZY
851102
851102
851102
851102
851102
CGD
AE
TBK
ZSC
ZSO
851104
851104
851102
851102
851102
851102
AET
AET
AET
FSL
ZSC
ZSO
851102
ZSC
851103
851103
851102
MS
ZS
ZY
851102
TS
851103
851103
851101
FS
ZSC
ZSO
851101
851101
851101
FE
FIT
EF
851103
851101
851101
851101
851101
851101
851101
ZS
ZY
SLG
ZSC
ZSO
HS
851103
851103
851103
851103
851101
851101
851101
851101
851101
851101
851101
851101
ZSC
PLV
ZSC
ZSO
HS
TBK
ZSC
ZSO
AET
AET
FSL
AE
851101
MS
ZSC
851101
TS
Flow Switch (flow verification)
Pump 2 Temperature
AA Moisture Switch
Pump 3 Discharge Check Valve
AA Limit Switch (closed)
Odor Control Room Gas Detection & Analysis
BA Combustible Gas Sensor (LEL)
BC Combustible Gas Sensor (02)
BC Gas Sampler Low Flow Switch
Gas sampler
Tipping Bucket Bay 3 Valve
CA Limit Switch (closed)
CA Limit Switch (open)
Tipping Bucket 3 Position
CA Limit Switch
CA Intrinsic Safety Relay
Tipping Bucket Bay 4 Valve
CA Limit Switch (closed)
CA Limit Switch (open)
Tipping Bucket 4 Position
CA Limit Switch
CA Intrinsic Safety Relay
AA Temperature Switch
Pump 3 Seal Leakage
BA Multi Channel Gas Detector
Gas sampler
Tipping Bucket Bay 2 Valve
CA Limit switch (closed)
CA Limit switch (open)
Tipping Bucket 2 Position
CA Limit Switch
CA Intrinsic Safety Relay
Pump 3 Temperature
AA Moisture Switch
Pump 2 Discharge Check Valve
AA Limit switch (closed)
Storage Tank Gas Detection & Analysis
BA Combustible Gas Sensor (LEL)
BB Combustible Gas Sensor (H2S)
BC Combustible Gas Sensor (02)
BC Gas Sampler Low Flow Switch
AA Temperature Switch
Pump 2 Seal Leakage
G
AA Moisture Switch
Pump 1 Discharge Check Valve
AA Limit switch (closed)
Emergency Motorized Plug Valve
BA Limit Switch (closed)
BA Limit Switch (open)
BB Selector Switch
Tipping Bucket Bay 1 Valve
CA Limit switch (closed)
CA Limit switch (open)
Tipping Bucket 1 Position
CA Limit Switch
CA Intrinsic Safety Relay
Bay 1 to 2-4 Isolation Slide Gate
DA Limit switch (closed)
DA Limit switch (open)
DB Selector Switch
Flowmeter
E Flow Tube
E Flow Transmitter
G Odor Control Fan
AA Temperature Switch
Pump 1 Seal Leakage
Description
South Magnolia Storage Facility
Tag Number
P201
P201
P302
P302
P201
P201
P302
P302
P306
P306
P306
P301
P202
P202
P202
I241
I241
I228
I228
I241
I241
I227
I227
I240
I240
I240
I231
I212
I212
I241
I241
I226
I226
P302
P302
P201
P201
I240
I240
I240
I240
I240
I230
I211
I211
I212
I217
I217
P306
P201
P306
P306
P306
P306
P202
P202
P202
P301
P202
P202
I224
I224
I224
P201
P201
P101
I225
I225
P302
P302
I241
I241
I223
I223
I223
P101
P101
P101
P201
P201
I229
I211
I211
P202
P202
P202
Inst. Dwg.
P&ID
Dwg No.
No.
E201
E308
E303
E303
E201
E308
E303
E303
E303
E303
E303
E303
E303
E204
E204
E201
E308
E303
E303
E303
E303
E303
E303
E303
E303
E303
E204
E204
E303
E303
E303
E303
E303
E303
E201
E308
E303
E303
E204
E204
E204
E303
E204
E204
Physical
Location
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
Field Power
VIA
17216-3.03
17216-2.02
15140-2.04
15140-2.04
17216-3.03
17216-2.02
15140-2.04
15140-2.04
17212-3.03
17212-3.03
17212-3.03
17216-3.03
11347-2.03. J
11347-2.03. J
17216-3.03
17216-2.02
15140-2.04
15140-2.04
17212-3.03
17212-3.03
17212-3.03
17212-3.03
17212-3.03
17216-3.03
11347-2.03. J
11347-2.03. J
17216-3.03
17212-3.03
17212-3.03
17216-3.03
17216-3.03
15140-2.03
17216-3.03
17216-2.02
15140-2.04
15140-2.04
17216-3.03
17216-3.03
15140-2.03
17216-3.03
11347-2.03. J
11347-2.03. J
Spec. No.
ZS
ZS
AE/AIT1
AE/AIT3
ZS
MS
TS
ZS
AI/AAS
AE/AIT1
AE/AIT2
AE/AIT3
ZS
MS
TS
PDS
FM
FM
ZS
ZS
ZS
ZS
ZS
ZS
MS
TS
17901-2
Spec Symbol Setpoint
0-100%
0-25%
0-100%
0-100%
0-25%
0.2-10 PSIG
0-10 MGD
0-10 MGD
Calib.
Range
SECTION 17901
INSTRUMENT SCHEDULE
Zero
Suppression
Pump 1 Discharge Check Valve Closed
Local/Remote switch. Integral to Actuator
Contact
Contact
Contact
Contact
mV
4-20mA
Pump 2 Discharge Check Vlave Closed
Contact
Contact
Contact
Contact
Contact
Contact
Contact
Contact
In MCP851101
In MCP851101
Per Detail on I603
Pump 3 Discharge Check Vlave Closed
Contact
4-20mA
4-20mA
Contact
Pump 3 seal leak detector relay. Provided by motor vendor, install in
VFD enclosure.
Contact
In MCP851101
Pump 3 winding temperature relay Provided by motor vendor, install in
VFD enclosure.
Contact
Contact
Contact
Per Detail on I603
Pump 2 seal leak detector relay Provided by motor vendor, install in VFD
enclosure.
Contact
4-20mA
4-20mA
4-20mA
Contact
4-20mA/
Contact
Pump 2 winding temperature relay Provided by motor vendor, install in
VFD enclosure.
Contact
Odor control exhaust fan flow verification. Setpoint to be field verified to
determine positive flow.
Local/Remote switch. Integral to Actuator
Krohne Flow Tube
Krohne Signal Converter
Contact
Contact
Contact
Contact
In MCP851101
Pump 1 seal leak detector relay Provided by motor vendor, install in VFD
enclosure.
Contact
Contact
Contact
Pump 1 winding temperature relay. Provided by motor vendor, install in
VFD enclosure.
Application Notes
Contact
Input/
Output
C00822C13
7/11/2013
851,104
Odor Control Room Exhaust Fan Low Flow Switch
851, 103 G Odor Control Room GO Light
851, 103 NG Odor Control Room NO GO Light
851, 103
Odor Control Room Alarm Horn
Odor Control Vault Gas Detection & Analysis
851117 BA Combustible Gas Sensor (LEL)
851117 BC Combustible Gas Sensor (02)
851117
Gas Sampler Low Flow Switch
851117
Gas sampler
FSL
YL
YL
QA
AET
AET
FSL
AE
851,101
851,102
851,101
851,101
PI
PI
HS
HS
South Magnolia Storage Facility
G
F
F
B
851104
851104
851104
851104
851104
851104
851104
851104
QL
LI
LS
LSH
LT
LSL
LS
QA
A
851135
Rain Gauge
Rain Gauge
Fuel Leak and Inventory Panel
Quanity Light
Level Indicator
Level Switch
Level Switch High
Level Transmitter
Level Switch Low
Level Detector (Leak)
Alarm Horn
Misc. Devices
Mist Eliminator Pressure Indicator
Odor Control Vessel Pressure Indicator
Remote Generator Stop Button
Odor Control Exhaust Fan On/Off Switch
Description
GQS
Tag Number
P306
P306
P306
P301
P306
P306
P306
P306
P301
P301
P303
P301
P303
P303
P303
P303
P303
P303
P303
P303
P305
I240
I240
I240
I241
I241
I241
I241
I218
I 213
Inst. Dwg.
P&ID
Dwg No.
No.
E303
E303
E303
E303
E303
E303
E303
E303
E308
E303
E303
E303
E303
E303
E303
E303
E303
E303
E303
Physical
Location
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
LCP851101
MCC851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
MCP851101
Field Power
VIA
17212-3.03
17212-3.03
17212-3.03
17216-3.03
17120-2.02
17120-2.02
17120-2.03
15095-2.03
15095-2.03
17272-3.03
17272-3.03
16621
16621
16621
16621
16621
16621
16621
16621
17216-3.03
Spec. No.
AE/AIT1
AE/AIT3
PDS
XXS
XXS
LS
LT
LS
LI
GQS
17901-3
Spec Symbol Setpoint
0-100%
0-25%
0.2-10 PSIG
Calib.
Range
SECTION 17901
INSTRUMENT SCHEDULE
Zero
Suppression
4-20mA
4-20mA
Contact
Contact
Input/
Output
Per Detail on I603
Flow verification for GO / NO GO. Setpoint to be field verified to
determine positive flow.
Supplied in Vendor PackageSupplied in Vendor PackageSupplied in Vendor PackageSupplied in Vendor PackageSupplied in Vendor PackageSupplied in Vendor PackageSupplied in Vendor PackageSupplied in Vendor Package-
Application Notes
C00822C13
7/11/2013
SECTION 17902
ALARM SCHEDULE
COLUMN HEADINGS TO INCLUDE:
1.01 TAG NUMBER
1.02 DESCRIPTION
1.03 P&ID DRAWING NUMBER
1.04 INSTRUMENT DRAWING NUMBER
1.05 ANNUNCIATOR
1.06 WINDOW
1.07 APPLICATION NOTES
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17902 - 1
C00822C13
South Magnolia Storage Facility
Description
Emergency Valve Fault
Fuel Tank Leak
Fuel Tank Low Level
Odor Control Fan Failure
Fire Alarm
PLC Failure
Isolation Gate Fault
Generator Trouble
Generator Failure
Air Gap Tank High Level
ATS Fault
Telemetry Failure
Pump Sequence Fault
Air Gap Tank Low Level
SPARE
LAHH-851,114
Mech. Room Flood
LAHH-851,116
Diversion Structure Vault Flood
SPARE
NDX-851,101
VFD 1 Fault
MAH-851,101 AA Pump 1 Seal Fail
TAH-851,101 AA Pump 1 High Temp
ZA-851,101 AA
Pump 1 Check Valve Failure (FTO)
AAH-851,103 BA Odor Control Room High LEL Alarm
AAH-851,102 BA Storage Tank High LEL Alarm
NDXA-851-102
VFD 2 Fault
MAH-851,102 AA Pump 2 Seal Fail
TAH-851,102 AA Pump 2 High Temp
ZA-851,102 AA
Pump 2 Check Valve Failure (FTO)
AAL-851,103 BC Odor Control Room Low O2 Alarm
AAH-851,102 BB Storage Tank High H2S Alarm
NDX-851-103
VFD 3 Fault
MAH-851,103 AA Pump 3 Seal Fail
TAH-851,103 AA Pump 3 High Temp
ZA-851,103 AA
Pump 3 Check Valve Failure (FTO)
AHH-851,117BA Odor Control Vault High LEL Alarm
AAL-851,102 BC Storage Tank Low O2 Alarm
LAH-851,113 B
Storage Tank High Level
LAHH-851,113 A Storage Tank High High Level
YA-851,105 A
Instrument Air Trouble
Tag Number
ZA-851,101 B
YA-851,104
LAL-851,104
YA-851,101 G
YA-851,118
YA-851,101D
ZA-851,101 D
YA-851,101 A
YA-851,101 B
LAH-851,101 G
YA-851,101 C
YA-851,131
YA-851,126
LAL-851,101 GA
17902-1
P202
P202
P202
P202
P306
P306
P202
P202
P202
P202
P306
P306
P203
P203
P203
P202
P306
P306
P201
P201
P304
P302
P304
P&ID
Drawing
Number
P101
P303
P303
P301
P305
P306
P201
P303
P303
P302
P303
P305
P203
P302
SECTION 17902
ALARM SCHEDULE
Instrument
Drawing
Number
Annunciator
I220
1
I220
1
I220
1
I220
1
I220
1
I220
1
I220
1
I220
1
I220
1
I220
1
I220
1
I220
1
I221
1
I220
1
I220
1
I220
1
I220
1
I220
1
I220
1
I220
1
I220
1
I220
1
I240
1
I240
1
I221
1
I221
1
I221
1
I221
1
I221
1
I221
1
I221
1
I221
1
I221
1
I221
1
I221
1
I221
1
I221
1
I221
1
I221
1
Window
R1C1
R1C2
R1C3
R1C4
R1C5
R1C6
R2C1
R2C2
R2C3
R2C4
R2C5
R2C6
R3C1
R3C2
R3C3
R3C4
R3C5
R3C6
R4C1
R4C2
R4C3
R4C4
R4C5
R4C6
R5C1
R5C2
R5C3
R5C4
R5C5
R5C6
R6C1
R6C2
R6C3
R6C4
R6C5
R6C6
R7C1
R7C2
R7C3
C00822C13
Application
Notes
7/11/13
Description
DDC Trouble
Odor Control Vault Low O2 Alarm
UPS Trouble Alarm
Gas Detector Panel PNL 851,102 Low Flow
Gas Detector Panel PNL 851,103 Low Flow
Gas Detector Panel PNL 851,117 Low Flow
SPARE
SPARE
Intrusion Station Exterior Doors
South Magnolia Storage Facility
YA-851,120
YA-851,106
AAL-851,117BC
YA-851,130
FAL-851,102
FAL-851,103
FAL-851,117
Tag Number
17902-2
P305
P305
P306
P303
P306
P306
P306
P&ID
Drawing
Number
SECTION 17902
ALARM SCHEDULE
I221
I221
I221
I221
I221
I221
I221
I221
I221
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Instrument
Drawing
Number
Annunciator
R7C4
R7C5
R7C6
R8C1
R8C2
R8C3
R8C4
R8C5
R8C6
Window
C00822C13
Application
Notes
7/11/13
SECTION 17903
PLC I/O SCHEDULE
COLUMN HEADINGS TO INCLUDE:
1.01 TAG NUMBER
1.02 DESCRIPTION
1.03 P&ID DRAWING NUMBER
1.04 INSTRUMENT DRAWING NUMBER
1.05 PHYSICAL LOCATION
1.06 SPECIFICATION NUMBER
1.07 I/O TYPE
1.08 MODULE TYPE
1.09 RACK
1.10 SLOT
1.11 POINT
1.12 APPLICATION NOTES
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17903 - 1
C00822C13
Description
Storage Tank Bay 1 Level A
Storage Tank Bays 2-4 Level A
Diversion Structure Level A
Pump 1 Speed Feedback
Odor Control Room Gas - % LEL
Odor Control Room Gas - O2 Level
Odor Control Vault Gas - % LEL
Odor Control Vault Gas - O2 Level
Storage Tank Bay 1 Level B
Storage Tank Bays 2-4 Level B
Diversion Structure Level B
Pump 2 Speed Feedback
Dewatering Flow
Storage Tank Gas - % LEL
Storage Tank Gas - H2S Level
Storage Tank Gas - O2 Level
Fuel Tank Level
Conveyance Pipeline Pressure
Spare
Pump 3 Speed Feedback
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Pump 1 Speed Setpoint
Spare
Spare
Spare
Pump 2 Speed Setpoint
Pump 3 Speed Setpoint
Spare
Spare
SPACE
SPACE
PLC Failure
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
South Magnolia Storage Facility
YA-851,101 D
SY-851,102
SY-851,103
SY-851,101
SX-851,103
LI-851,113 A
LI-851,114 A
LI-851,115 A
SX-851,101
AI-851,103 BA
AI-851,103 BC
AI-851,117 BA
AI-851,117 BC
LI-851,113 B
LI-851,114 B
LI-851,115 B
SX-851,102
FIT-851,101 E
AI-851,102 BA
AI-851,102 BB
AI-851,102 BC
LI-851,104
PI-851,101V
Tag Number
17903-1
P&ID Instrument
Drawing Drawing
Physical
Spec
I/O Module
Number Number
Location
Section Type Type Rack Slot Point
MCP 851,101 17212
IF8
P201
I206
AI
1
5
0
MCP 851,101 17212
IF8
P201
I206
AI
1
5
1
MCP 851,101 17212
IF8
P101
I206
AI
1
5
2
MCP 851,101 16158
IF8
P202
I206
AI
1
5
3
P306
MCP 851,101 17212
IF8
I206
AI
1
5
4
P306
MCP 851,101 17212
IF8
I206
AI
1
5
5
P306
MCP 851,101 17212
IF8
I206
AI
1
5
6
P306
MCP 851,101 17212
IF8
I206
AI
1
5
7
MCP 851,101 17212
IF8
P201
I206
AI
1
6
0
MCP 851,101 17212
IF8
P201
I206
AI
1
6
1
MCP 851,101 17212
IF8
P101
I206
AI
1
6
2
MCP 851,101 16158
IF8
P202
I206
AI
1
6
3
MCP 851,101 17212
IF8
P202
I206
AI
1
6
4
MCP 851,101 17212
IF8
P306
I206
AI
1
6
5
MCP 851,101 17212
IF8
P306
I206
AI
1
6
6
MCP 851,101 17212
IF8
P306
I206
AI
1
6
7
MCP 851,101 16621
IF8
P303
I207
AI
1
7
0
MCP 851,101 17216
IF8
P101
I207
AI
1
7
1
MCP 851,101
IF8
I207
AI
1
7
2
MCP 851,101 16158
IF8
P203
I207
AI
1
7
3
MCP 851,101
IF8
I207
AI
1
7
4
MCP 851,101
IF8
I207
AI
1
7
5
MCP 851,101
IF8
I207
AI
1
7
6
MCP 851,101
IF8
I207
AI
1
7
7
MCP 851,101 17802
OF4
P202
I208
AO
1
8
0
MCP 851,101
OF4
I208
AO
1
9
1
MCP 851,101
OF4
I208
AO
1
8
2
MCP 851,101
OF4
I208
AO
1
8
3
MCP 851,101 17802
OF4
P202
I208
AO
1
9
0
MCP 851,101 17802
OF4
P203
I209
AO
1
9
1
MCP 851,101
OF4
I208
AO
1
9
2
MCP 851,101
OF4
I208
AO
1
9
3
MCP 851,101
1
10
MCP 851,101
1
11
P306
MCP 851,101 17802
OX8I
I210
DO
1
12
0
MCP 851,101
OX8I
I210
DO
1
12
1
MCP 851,101
OX8I
I210
DO
1
12
2
MCP 851,101
OX8I
I210
DO
1
12
3
MCP 851,101
OX8I
I210
DO
1
12
4
MCP 851,101
OX8I
I210
DO
1
12
5
MCP 851,101
OX8I
I210
DO
1
12
6
MCP 851,101
OX8I
I210
DO
1
12
7
SECTION 17903
PLC I/O SCHEDULE
C00822C13
Application Notes
07/11/13
Description
South Magnolia Storage Facility
VFD 1 Ready
VFD 1 Running
VFD 1 Fault
Pump 1 in Auto
Pump 1 Seal Fail
Pump 1 High Temp
Pump 1 Check Valve Not Closed
Tipping Bucket 1 Position
Tipping Bucket 2 Position
Tipping Bucket 3 Position
Tipping Bucket 4 Position
Tank Isolation Gate Open
Tank Isolation Gate Closed
Tank Isolation Gate Fault
Tank Isolation Gate In Remote
Maintenance Mode
VFD 2 Ready
VFD 2 Running
VFD 2 Fault
Pump 2 in Auto
Pump 2 Seal Fail
Pump 2 High Temp
Pump 2 Check Valve Not Closed
C2 Water Trouble
VFD 1 in Remote
VFD 2 in Remote
VFD 3 in Remote
Spare
Spare
LAHH-851,113 A Storage Tank High High Level
LAH-851,113 B
Storage Tank High Level
Spare
NDG-851,103
VFD 3 Ready
NDJ-851,103
VFD 3 Running
VFD 3 Fault
NDX-851,103
Pump 3 in Auto
NDA-851,103
MAH-851,103 AA Pump 3 Seal Fail
TAH-851,103 AA Pump 3 High Temp
ZSC-851,103 AA Pump 3 Check Valve Not Closed
LAH-851,101 G
Air Gap Tank High Level Alarm
YA-851,105 A
Instrument Air Trouble
ZSO-851,101 BA Emergency Plug Valve PLV851,101 Open
NDG-851,101
NDJ-851,101
NDX-851,101
NDA-851,101
MAH-851,101 AA
TAH-851,101 AA
ZSC-851,101 AA
ZS-851,101 CA
ZS-851,102 CA
ZS-851,103 CA
ZS-851,104 CA
ZSO-851,101 DA
ZSC-851,101 DA
ZA-851,101 D
YI-851,101 DC
NAX-851,101F
NDG-851,102
NDJ-851,102
NDX-851,102
NDA-851,102
MAH-851,102 AA
TAH-851,102 AA
ZSC-851,102 AA
YA-851,116
YI-851,101AE
YI-851,102AE
YI-851,103AE
Tag Number
P203
P203
P203
P203
P203
P203
P202
P302
P304
P101
P201
P201
P202
P202
P202
P202
P202
P202
P202
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P305
P202
P202
P202
P202
P202
P202
P202
P302
P202
P202
P203
Physical
Spec
I/O Module
Location
Section Type Type Rack Slot Point
MCP 851,101 16158
DI
IA16
1
0
2
MCP 851,101 16158
DI
IA16
1
1
2
MCP 851,101 16158
DI
IA16
1
2
2
MCP 851,101 16158
DI
IA16
1
3
2
MCP 851,101 11347
DI
IA16
1
4
2
MCP 851,101 11347
DI
IA16
1
5
2
MCP 851,101 17216
DI
IA16
1
6
2
MCP 851,101 17216
DI
IA16
1
7
2
MCP 851,101 17216
DI
IA16
1
8
2
MCP 851,101 17216
DI
IA16
1
9
2
MCP 851,101 17216
IA16
1
10
DI
2
MCP 851,101 15140
IA16
1
11
DI
2
MCP 851,101 15140
IA16
1
12
DI
2
MCP 851,101 15140
IA16
1
13
DI
2
MCP 851,101 15140
IA16
1
14
DI
2
MCP 851,101 17272
IA16
1
15
DI
2
MCP 851,101 16158
DI
IA16
2
0
2
MCP 851,101 16158
DI
IA16
2
1
2
MCP 851,101 16158
DI
IA16
2
2
2
MCP 851,101 16158
DI
IA16
2
3
2
MCP 851,101 11347
DI
IA16
2
4
2
MCP 851,101 11347
DI
IA16
2
5
2
MCP 851,101 17216
DI
IA16
2
6
2
MCP 851,101 11710
DI
IA16
2
7
2
MCP 851,101 16158
DI
IA16
2
8
2
MCP 851,101 16158
DI
IA16
2
9
2
MCP 851,101 16158
IA16
2
10
DI
2
MCP 851,101
IA16
2
11
DI
2
MCP 851,101
IA16
2
12
DI
2
MCP 851,101 17216
IA16
2
13
DI
2
MCP 851,101 17216
IA16
2
14
DI
2
MCP 851,101
IA16
2
15
DI
2
MCP 851,101 16158
DI
IA16
2
3
0
MCP 851,101 16158
DI
IA16
2
3
1
MCP 851,101 16158
DI
IA16
2
3
2
MCP 851,101 16158
DI
IA16
2
3
3
MCP 851,101 11347
DI
IA16
2
3
4
MCP 851,101 11347
DI
IA16
2
3
5
MCP 851,101 17216
DI
IA16
2
3
6
MCP 851,101 17216
DI
IA16
2
3
7
MCP 851,101 11366
DI
IA16
2
3
8
MCP 851,101 15140
DI
IA16
2
3
9
17903-2
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I212
I212
I212
I212
I212
I212
I212
I212
I212
I212
P&ID Instrument
Drawing Drawing
Number Number
SECTION 17903
PLC I/O SCHEDULE
C00822C13
Application Notes
07/11/13
Emergency Plug Valve PLV851,101 Closed
Emergency Plug Valve Fault
Emergency Plug Valve PLV851,101 In Remote
Odor Control Fan Running
Odor Control Fan- Flow Verification
Spare
Odor Control Gas- O2 Alarm
Odor Control Gas- LEL Alarm
Air Gap Tank Low Level Alarm
Storage Tank Gas- O2 Alarm
Storage Tank Gas- LEL Alarm
Storage Tank Gas- H2S Alarm
Generator Ready
Generator Running
Generator Trouble
Generator Auto Mode
Generator Failure
Fuel Tank Low Level
Fuel Tank Leak
Spare
Odor Control Vault LEL Alarm
Odor Control Vault O2 Alarm
ATS Not In Auto
ATS Normal Position
ATS Standby Position
ATS Normal Source Available
ATS Standby Source Available
ATS Fault
DDC Trouble
Spare
Fire Alarm
Fire Alarm Control Panel Trouble
Gas Detedtion Panel PNL851,102 Low Flow
Gas Detedtion Panel PNL851,103 Low Flow
Gas Detedtion Panel PNL851,117 Low Flow
Rain Gauge
Dewatering Flow Total
Spare
Odor Control Room Intrusion
Pump Room Intrusion
Mechanical Room Intrusion
Electrical Room Intrusion
ZSC-851,101 BA
ZA-851,101 B
YI-851,101 BA
NDJ-851,101G
FSL-851,101 G
South Magnolia Storage Facility
ZS-851,120 A
ZS-851,120 B
ZS-851,120 C
ZS-851,120 D
YA-851,118 A
YA-851,118 A
FAL-851,102
FAL-851,103
FAL-851,117
GQS-851,135
QA-851,101 E
AAH-851,117BA
AAL-851,117BA
YI-851,101 F
HXI-851,101 A
HXI-851,101 B
YI-851,101 D
YI-851,101 E
YA-851,101 C
YA-851,106
AAL-851,103 BC
AAH-851,103 BA
LAL-851,101GA
AAL-851,102 BC
AAH-851,102 BA
AAH-851,102 BB
NDG-851,101 A
NDJ-851,101 C
YA-851,101 A
NDA-851,101 B
NDX-851,101 B
LAL 851,104
YA-851,104
Description
Tag Number
P305
P305
P305
P305
P305
P305
P306
P306
P306
P305
P202
P306
P306
P303
P303
P303
P303
P303
P303
P305
P306
P306
P302
P306
P306
P306
P303
P303
P303
P303
P303
P303
P303
P101
P101
P101
P301
P301
Physical
Spec
I/O Module
Location
Section Type Type Rack Slot Point
MCP 851,101 15140
IA16
2
3
10
DI
MCP 851,101 15140
IA16
2
3
11
AI
MCP 851,101 15140
IA16
2
3
12
DI
MCP 851,101 16920
IA16
2
3
13
DI
MCP 851,101 17216
IA16
2
3
14
DI
MCP 851,101
IA16
2
3
15
DI
MCP 851,101 17212
IA16
2
4
0
DI
MCP 851,101 17212
IA16
2
4
1
DI
MCP 851,101 17216
IA16
2
4
2
DI
MCP 851,101 17212
IA16
2
4
3
DI
MCP 851,101 17212
IA16
2
4
4
DI
MCP 851,101 17212
IA16
2
4
5
DI
MCP 851,101 11083
IA16
2
4
6
DI
MCP 851,101 11083
IA16
2
4
7
DI
MCP 851,101 11083
IA16
2
4
8
DI
MCP 851,101 11083
IA16
2
4
9
DI
MCP 851,101 11083
IA16
2
4
10
DI
MCP 851,101 16621
IA16
2
4
11
DI
MCP 851,101 16621
IA16
2
4
12
DI
MCP 851,101
IA16
2
4
13
DI
MCP 851,101 17212
2
4
14
IA16
DI
MCP 851,101 17212
IA16
2
4
15
DI
MCP 851,101 16250
IA16
2
5
0
DI
MCP 851,101 16250
IA16
2
5
1
DI
MCP 851,101 16250
IA16
2
5
2
DI
MCP 851,101 16250
IA16
2
5
3
DI
MCP 851,101 16250
IA16
2
5
4
DI
MCP 851,101 16250
IA16
2
5
5
DI
MCP 851,101 15950
IA16
2
5
6
DI
MCP 851,101
IA16
2
5
7
DI
MCP 851,101 16660
IA16
2
5
8
DI
MCP 851,101 16660
IA16
2
5
9
DI
MCP 851,101 17212
IA16
2
5
10
DI
MCP 851,101 17212
IA16
2
5
11
DI
MCP 851,101 17212
IA16
2
5
12
DI
MCP 851,101 17211
IA16
2
5
13
DI
MCP 851,101 17212
IA16
2
5
14
DI
MCP 851,101
IA16
2
5
15
DI
MCP 851,101 17216
IA16
2
6
0
DI
MCP 851,101 17216
IA16
2
6
1
DI
MCP 851,101 17216
IA16
2
6
2
DI
MCP 851,101 17216
2
6
3
IA16
DI
17903-3
I213
I213
I213
I213
I212
I212
I212
I212
I212
I212
I212
I212
I212
I212
I212
I212
I212
I212
I212
I212
I212
I212
I212
I212
I212
I212
I213
I213
I213
I213
I213
I213
I213
I213
I213
I213
I213
I213
I213
I213
I213
P&ID Instrument
Drawing Drawing
Number Number
SECTION 17903
PLC I/O SCHEDULE
C00822C13
Application Notes
07/11/13
Description
Generator Room Intrusion
UPS Trouble
AC Power Fail
Mechanical Room Flood
Diversion Vault Flood
Low IA Pressure Bay 1
Low IA Pressure Bay 2 - 4
Low IA Pressure Diversion Structure
Spare
Spare
DC Power Supply Failure
Sump Pump Panel Trouble Alarm
Tipping Bucket Fill Valve 1 Fully Open
Tipping Bucket Fill Valve 1 Fully Closed
Tipping Bucket Fill Valve 2 Fully Open
Tipping Bucket Fill Valve 2 Fully Closed
Tipping Bucket Fill Valve 3 Fully Open
Tipping Bucket Fill Valve 3 Fully Closed
Tipping Bucket Fill Valve 4 Fully Open
Tipping Bucket Fill Valve 4 Fully Closed
Tipping Bucket Fill Valve 1 In Auto
Tipping Bucket Fill Valve 2 In Auto
Tipping Bucket Fill Valve 3 In Auto
Tipping Bucket Fill Valve 4 In Auto
Alarm Reset
Pump 1 Lead
Pump 2 Lead
Pump 3 Lead
PNL 851,113 Bubbler A Selected
PNL 851,113 Auto Selected
PNL 851,113 Bubbler B Selected
PNL 851,114 Bubbler A Selected
PNL 851,114 Auto Selected
PNL 851,114 Bubbler B Selected
PNL 851,115 Bubbler A Selected
PNL 851,115 Auto Selected
PNL 851,115 Bubbler B Selected
Pump 1 First Follow
Pump 2 First Follow
Pump 3 First Follow
Pump 1 Second Follow
Pump 2 Second Follow
South Magnolia Storage Facility
EA-851,102
YA-851,101 F
ZSO-851,101 CA
ZSC-851,101 CA
ZSO-851,102 CA
ZSC-851,102 CA
ZSO-851,103 CA
ZSC-851,103 CA
ZSO-851,104 CA
ZSC-851,104 CA
YI-851,101 CA
YI-851,102 CA
YI-851,103 CA
YI-851,104 CA
HS-851,101 EB
NDG-851126 A
NDG-851126 B
NDG-851126 C
YI-851.113 A
YI-851.113 C
YI-851.113 B
YI-851.114 A
YI-851.114 C
YI-851.114 B
YI-851.115 A
YI-851.115 C
YI-851.115 B
NDG-851127 A
NDG-851127 B
NDG-851127 C
NDG-851128 A
NDG-851128 B
ZS-851,120 E
YA-851,130
EA-851,101
LSH-851,114
LAHH-851,116
PAL-851,113
PAL-851,114
PAL-851,115
Tag Number
P305
P304
P302
P302
P302
P302
P302
P302
P302
P302
P302
P302
P302
P302
P305
P203
P203
P203
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P101
P101
P101
P203
P203
P203
P203
P203
P305
P303
P305
P302
P304
P201
P201
P101
Physical
Spec
I/O Module
Location
Section Type Type Rack Slot Point
MCP 851,101 17216
IA16
2
6
4
DI
MCP 851,101 17132
IA16
2
6
5
DI
MCP 851,101 17802
IA16
2
6
6
DI
MCP 851,101 17216
IA16
2
6
7
DI
MCP 851,101 17216
IA16
2
6
8
DI
MCP 851,101 17216
IA16
2
6
9
DI
MCP 851,101 17216
IA16
2
6
10
DI
MCP 851,101 17216
IA16
2
6
11
DI
MCP 851,101
IA16
2
6
12
DI
MCP 851,101
IA16
2
6
13
DI
MCP 851,101 17130
IA16
2
6
14
DI
MCP 851,101 11324
IA16
2
6
15
DI
MCP 851,101 17216
IA16
2
7
0
DI
MCP 851,101 17216
IA16
2
7
1
DI
MCP 851,101 17216
IA16
2
7
2
DI
MCP 851,101 17216
IA16
2
7
3
DI
MCP 851,101 17216
IA16
2
7
4
DI
MCP 851,101 17216
IA16
2
7
5
DI
MCP 851,101 17216
IA16
2
7
6
DI
MCP 851,101 17216
IA16
2
7
7
DI
MCP 851,101 17216
IA16
2
7
8
DI
MCP 851,101 17216
IA16
2
7
9
DI
MCP 851,101 17216
IA16
2
7
10
DI
MCP 851,101 17216
2
7
11
IA16
DI
MCP 851,101 17272
IA16
2
7
12
DI
MCP 851,101 17272
IA16
2
7
13
DI
MCP 851,101 17272
IA16
2
7
14
DI
MCP 851,101 17272
IA16
2
7
15
DI
MCP 851,101 17272
IA16
2
8
0
DI
MCP 851,101 17272
IA16
2
8
1
DI
MCP 851,101 17272
IA16
2
8
2
DI
MCP 851,101 17272
IA16
2
8
3
DI
MCP 851,101 17272
IA16
2
8
4
DI
MCP 851,101 17272
IA16
2
8
5
DI
MCP 851,101 17272
IA16
2
8
6
DI
MCP 851,101 17272
IA16
2
8
7
DI
MCP 851,101 17272
IA16
2
8
8
DI
MCP 851,101 17272
IA16
2
8
9
DI
MCP 851,101 17272
IA16
2
8
10
DI
MCP 851,101 17272
IA16
2
8
11
DI
MCP 851,101 17272
2
8
12
IA16
DI
MCP 851,101 17272
IA16
2
8
13
DI
17903-4
I213
I213
I213
I213
I213
I213
I213
I213
I213
I213
I213
I213
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
P&ID Instrument
Drawing Drawing
Number Number
SECTION 17903
PLC I/O SCHEDULE
C00822C13
Application Notes
07/11/13
Description
Pump 3 Second Follow
Spare
Lead Pump Start
Tank Isolation Gate Open Command
Tank Isolation Gate Close Command
Odor Control Fan Failure
Telemetry Failure
Spare
Exterior Doors Open
Maintenance Light Normal Mode
Maintenance Light Maintenance Mode
Pump Sequence Fault
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
First Follow Pump Start
Emergency Plug Valve PLV851,101 Open Cmd
Emergency Plug Valve PLV851,101 Close Cmd
Second Follow Pump Start
Tipping Bucket 1 C2 Valve Open Cmd
Spare
Tipping Bucket 2 C2 Valve Open Cmd
Spare
Tipping Bucket 3 C2 Valve Open Cmd
Spare
Tipping Bucket 4 C2 Valve Open Cmd
Bubbler Panel PNL851,113 Active Bubbler A/B
Bubbler Panel PNL851,114 Active Bubbler A/B
Bubbler Panel PNL851,115 Active Bubbler A/B
Spare
Spare
SPACE
SPACE
South Magnolia Storage Facility
ZXO-851,104 CA
YI-851,113
YI-851,114
YI-851,115
ZXO-851,103 CA
ZXO-851,102 CA
MNJ-851,102
ZXO-851,101 BA
ZXC-851,101 BA
MNJ-851.103
ZXO-851,101 CA
YA 851,120
YL-851,101FN
YL-851,101FM
YA-851,126
MNJ-851,101
ZXO-851,101 DA
ZXC-851,101 DB
YA-851,101G
YA-851,131
NDG-851128 C
Tag Number
17903-5
P&ID Instrument
Drawing Drawing
Physical
Spec
I/O Module
Number Number
Location
Section Type Type Rack Slot Point
P203
MCP 851,101 17272
IA16
2
8
14
I214
DI
MCP 851,101
IA16
2
8
15
I214
DI
MCP 851,101 16158
2
9
0
P203
I215
DO OA16I
P201
MCP 851,101 17802
2
9
1
I215
DO OA16I
P201
MCP 851,101 17802
2
9
2
I215
DO OA16I
MCP 851,101 17802
2
9
3
P301
I215
DO OA16I
MCP 851,101 17802
2
9
4
P305
I215
DO OA16I
MCP 851,101
2
9
5
I215
DO OA16I
MCP 851,101 17802
2
9
6
P305
I215
DO OA16I
MCP 851,101 17272
2
9
7
P305
I215
DO OA16I
MCP 851,101 17272
2
9
8
P305
I215
DO OA16I
MCP 851,101 17802
2
9
9
P203
I215
DO OA16I
MCP 851,101
2
9
10
I215
DO OA16I
MCP 851,101
2
9
11
I215
DO OA16I
MCP 851,101
2
9
12
I215
DO OA16I
MCP 851,101
2
9
13
I215
DO OA16I
MCP 851,101
2
9
14
I215
DO OA16I
MCP 851,101
2
9
15
I215
DO OA16I
MCP 851,101 16158
2
10
0
P203
I215
DO OA16I
MCP 851,101 17802
2
10
1
P101
I215
DO OA16I
MCP 851,101 17802
2
10
2
P101
I215
DO OA16I
MCP 851,101 16158
2
10
3
P203
I215
DO OA16I
MCP 851,101 17802
2
10
4
P302
I215
DO OA16I
MCP 851,101
2
10
5
I215
DO OA16I
MCP 851,101 17802
2
10
6
P302
I215
DO OA16I
MCP 851,101
2
10
7
I215
DO OA16I
MCP 851,101 17802
2
10
8
P302
I215
DO OA16I
MCP 851,101
2
10
9
I215
DO OA16I
MCP 851,101 17802
2
10
10
P302
I215
DO OA16I
MCP 851,101 17272
2
10
11
P201
I215
DO OA16I
MCP 851,101 17272
2
10
12
P201
I215
DO OA16I
MCP 851,101 17272
2
10
13
P101
I215
DO OA16I
MCP 851,101
2
10
14
I215
DO OA16I
MCP 851,101
2
10
15
I215
DO OA16I
MCP 851,101
XXX
2
11 XXX
I216
XXX
MCP 851,101
XXX
2
12 XXX
I216
XXX
SECTION 17903
PLC I/O SCHEDULE
C00822C13
Application Notes
07/11/13
SECTION 17904
METROTEL SCHEDULE
COLUMN HEADINGS TO INCLUDE:
1.01 TAG NUMBER
1.02 DESCRIPTION
1.03 P&ID DRAWING NUMBER
1.04 INSTRUMENT DRAWING NUMBER
1.05 I/O TYPE
1.06 I/O SEQUENCE NUMBER
1.07 APPLICATION NOTES
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17904 - 1
C00822C13
Description
Diversion Structure Level A
Diversion Structure Level B
Storage Tank Bay 1 Level A
Storage Tank Bay 1 Level B
Storage Tank Bay 2 - 4 Level A
Storage Tank Bay 2 - 4 Level B
Metrotel Test
Odor Control Room Gas- O2 Alarm
Generator Failure
Instrument Air Trouble
Diversion Structure Vault Flood
AC Power Fail
DC Power Supply Failure
UPS Trouble Alarm
Telemetry Failure
PLC Failure
Odor Control Room Gas- LEL Alarm
Odor Control Room Gas- O2 Alarm
Storage Tank Gas- LEL Alarm
Storage Tank Gas- O2 Alarm
Storage Tank Gas- H2S Alarm
Intrusion-Station Exterior Doors
ATS Normal Source Not Available
ATS Not In Auto
Fire Alarm
Generator Running
VFD 1 Fault
VFD 2 Fault
VFD 3 Fault
Odor Control Room Gas- LEL Alarm
South Magnolia Storage Facility
LIT-851,115 A
LIT-851,115 B
LI-851,113 A
LI-851,113 B
LI-851,114 A
LI-851,114 B
YI-851,101 M
AAL-851,103BC
NDX-851,101 B
YA-851,105 A
LAHH-851,116
EA-851,101
EA-851,102
YA-851,130
YA-851,131
YA-851,101 D
AAH-851,117BA
AAL-851,117BC
AAH-851,102BA
AAL-851,102BC
AAH-851,102BB
YA -851,120
YI-851,101D
YI-851,101F
YA-851,118A
NDJ-851,101C
NDX-851,101
NDX-851,102
NDX-851,103
AAH-851,103BA
Tag Number
P&ID
Drawing
Number
P101
P101
P201
P201
P201
P201
P305
P306
P303
P304
P304
P305
P305
P303
P305
P306
P306
P306
P306
P306
P306
P305
P303
P303
P305
P303
P202
P202
P203
P306
17904-1
Instrument
Drawing I/O Type
Number
I206
AI
I206
AI
I206
AI
I206
AI
I206
AI
I206
AI
I234
DI
I240
DI
I212
DI
I212
DI
I213
DI
I213
DI
I213
DI
I213
DI
I215
DI
I210
DI
I240
DI
I240
DI
I240
DI
I240
DI
I240
DI
I215
DI
I213
DI
I213
DI
I213
DI
I212
DI
I211
DI
I211
DI
I212
DI
I240
DI
5
6
5
6
5
6
4
4
3
6
6
6
6
9
12
4
4
4
4
4
9
5
5
5
4
1
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
0
10
8
8
6
14
5
4
0
14
15
4
3
5
6
3
0
9
7
2
2
2
1
2
2
0
0
1
1
PLC I/O Sequence Number (rack.slot.point)
SECTION 17904
METROTEL SCHEDULE
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Base
Expansion
Expansion
Expansion
Expansion
Expansion
Expansion
Expansion
Expansion
Expansion
Expansion
Expansion
Expansion
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AI5
AI6
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8
DI9
DI10
DI11
DI12
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8
DI9
DI10
DI11
DI12
Metrotel
Sequence
Number
C00822C13
Application Notes
07/11/13
SECTION 17905
SCADA SIGNAL SCHEDULE
COLUMN HEADINGS TO INCLUDE:
1.01 TAG NUMBER
1.02 DESCRIPTION
1.03 P&ID DRAWING NUMBER
1.04 INSTRUMENT DRAWING NUMBER
1.05 I/O TYPE
1.06 I/O SEQUENCE NUMBER
1.07 APPLICATION NOTES
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17905 - 1
C00822C13
Description
Diversion Structure Level A
Diversion Structure Level B
Emergency Plug Valve PLV851,101 Open
Emergency Plug Valve PLV851,101 Closed
Emergency Plug Valve Fault
Emergency Plug Valve PLV 851,101 In Remote
Low IA Pressure Diversion Structure
PNL 851,115 Bubbler A Selected
PNL 851,115 Auto Selected
PNL 851,115 Bubbler B Selected
Diversion Structure Bubbler Out of Range A
Diversion Structure Bubbler Out of Range B
Emergency Plug Valve PLV851,101 Open Cmd
Emergency Plug Valve PLV851,101 Close Cmd
Conveyance Pipeline Pressure
Storage Tank Bay 1 Level A
Storage Tank Bays 2-4 Level A
Storage Tank Bay 1 Level B
Storage Tank Bays 2-4 Level B
Tipping Bucket 1 Position
Tipping Bucket 2 Position
Tipping Bucket 3 Position
Tipping Bucket 4 Position
Tank Isolation Gate Open
Tank Isolation Gate Closed
Tank Isolation Gate Fault
Tank Isolation Gate In Remote
Storage Tank High High Level
Storage Tank High Level
Low IA Pressure Bay 1
Low IA Pressure Bay 2 - 4
PNL 851,113 Bubbler A Selected
PNL 851,113 Auto Selected
PNL 851,113 Bubbler B Selected
PNL 851,114 Bubbler A Selected
PNL 851,114 Auto Selected
PNL 851,114 Bubbler B Selected
Bay 1 Bubbler Out of Range A
Bay 1 Bubbler Out of Range B
Bay 2-4 Bubbler Out of Range A
Bay 2-4 Bubbler Out of Range B
Tank Isolation Gate Open Command
Tank Isolation Gate Close Command
Dewatering Flow
VFD 1 Ready
VFD 1 Running
VFD 1 Fault
Pump 1 in Auto
Pump 1 Seal Fail
Pump 1 High Temp
Pump 1 Check Valve Not Closed
VFD 2 Ready
VFD 2 Running
South Magnolia Storage Facility
LI-851,115 A
LI-851,115 B
ZSO-851,101 BA
ZSC-851,101 BA
ZA-851,101 B
YI-851,101 BA
PAL-851,115
YI-851.115 A
YI-851.115 C
YI-851.115 B
LYA-851,115A
LYA-851,115B
ZXO-851,101 BA
ZXC-851,101 BA
PI-851,101V
LI-851,113 A
LI-851,114 A
LI-851,113 B
LI-851,114 B
ZS-851,101 CA
ZS-851,102 CA
ZS-851,103 CA
ZS-851,104 CA
ZSO-851,101 DA
ZSC-851,101 DA
ZA-851,101 D
YI-851,101 DC
LAHH-851,113 A
LAH-851,113 B
PAL-851,113
PAL-851,114
YI-851.113 A
YI-851.113 C
YI-851.113 B
YI-851.114 A
YI-851.114 C
YI-851.114 B
LYA-851,113A
LYA-851,113B
LYA-851,114A
LYA-851,114B
ZXO-851,101 DA
ZXC-851,101 DB
FIT-851,101 E
NDG-851,101
NDJ-851,101
NDX-851,101
NDA-851,101
MAH-851,101 AA
TAH-851,101 AA
ZSC-851,101 AA
NDG-851,102
NDJ-851,102
Tag Number
P101
P101
P101
P101
P101
P101
P101
P101
P101
P101
P101
P101
P101
P101
P101
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P201
P202
P202
P202
P202
P202
P202
P202
P202
P202
P202
P&ID
Drawing
Number
I206
I206
I212
I212
I212
I212
I213
I214
I214
I214
I210
I210
I215
I215
I207
I206
I206
I206
I206
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I213
I213
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I210
I210
I210
I210
I215
I215
I206
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
17905-1
AI
AI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DO
DO
DO
DO
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
DO
AI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
5
6
3
3
3
3
6
8
8
8
5
5
10
10
7
5
5
6
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
6
6
8
8
8
8
8
8
5
5
5
5
9
9
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
9
10
11
12
11
6
7
8
5
6
1
2
1
0
1
0
1
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
13
14
9
10
0
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
1
2
4
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
I/O Sequence
Instrument
Number Drawing I/O Type
(rack.slot.point)
Number
SECTION 17905
SCADA SIGNAL SCHEDULE
PLC Derived
PLC Derived
PLC Derived
PLC Derived
PLC Derived
PLC Derived
Application Notes
C00822C13
7/11/2013
Description
VFD 2 Fault
Pump 2 in Auto
Pump 2 Seal Fail
Pump 2 High Temp
Pump 2 Check Valve Not Closed
VFD 1 in Remote
VFD 2 in Remote
Pump 3 Check Valve Not Closed
Dewatering Flow Total
VFD 3 Ready
VFD 3 Running
VFD 3 Fault
Pump 3 in Auto
Pump 3 Seal Fail
Pump 3 High Temp
VFD 3 in Remote
Odor Control Fan Running
Odor Control Fan- Flow Verification
Odor Control Fan Failure
C2 Water Trouble
Air Gap Tank High Level Alarm
Air Gap Tank Low Level Alarm
Mechanical Room Flood
Tipping Bucket Fill Valve 1 Fully Open
Tipping Bucket Fill Valve 1 Fully Closed
Tipping Bucket Fill Valve 2 Fully Open
Tipping Bucket Fill Valve 2 Fully Closed
Tipping Bucket Fill Valve 3 Fully Open
Tipping Bucket Fill Valve 3 Fully Closed
Tipping Bucket Fill Valve 4 Fully Open
Tipping Bucket Fill Valve 4 Fully Closed
Tipping Bucket Fill Valve 1 In Auto
Tipping Bucket Fill Valve 2 In Auto
Tipping Bucket Fill Valve 3 In Auto
Tipping Bucket Fill Valve 4 In Auto
Tipping Bucket 1 C2 Valve Open Cmd
Tipping Bucket 2 C2 Valve Open Cmd
Tipping Bucket 3 C2 Valve Open Cmd
Tipping Bucket 4 C2 Valve Open Cmd
Fuel Tank Level
Generator Ready
Generator Running
Generator Trouble
Generator Auto Mode
Generator Failure
Fuel Tank Low Level
Fuel Tank Leak
ATS Not In Auto
ATS Normal Position
ATS Standby Position
ATS Normal Source Available
ATS Standby Source Available
ATS Fault
South Magnolia Storage Facility
NDX-851,102
NDA-851,102
MAH-851,102 AA
TAH-851,102 AA
ZSC-851,102 AA
YI-851,101AE
YI-851,102AE
ZSC-851,103 AA
QA-851,101 E
NDG-851,103
NDJ-851,103
NDX-851,103
NDA-851,103
MAH-851,103 AA
TAH-851,103 AA
YI-851,103AE
NDJ-851,101G
FSL-851,101 G
YA-851,101G
YA-851,116
LAH-851,101 G
LAL-851,101GA
LSH-851,114
ZSO-851,101 CA
ZSC-851,101 CA
ZSO-851,102 CA
ZSC-851,102 CA
ZSO-851,103 CA
ZSC-851,103 CA
ZSO-851,104 CA
ZSC-851,104 CA
YI-851,101 CA
YI-851,102 CA
YI-851,103 CA
YI-851,104 CA
ZXO-851,101 CA
ZXO-851,102 CA
ZXO-851,103 CA
ZXO-851,104 CA
LI-851,104
NDG-851,101 A
NDJ-851,101 C
YA-851,101 A
NDA-851,101 B
NDX-851,101 B
LAL 851,104
YA-851,104
YI-851,101 F
HXI-851,101 A
HXI-851,101 B
YI-851,101 D
YI-851,101 E
YA-851,101 C
Tag Number
P202
P202
P202
P202
P202
P202
P202
P202
P202
P203
P203
P203
P203
P203
P203
P203
P301
P301
P301
P302
P302
P302
P302
P302
P302
P302
P302
P302
P302
P302
P302
P302
P302
P302
P302
P302
P302
P302
P302
P303
P303
P303
P303
P303
P303
P303
P303
P303
P303
P303
P303
P303
P303
P&ID
Drawing
Number
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I211
I212
I213
I212
I212
I212
I212
I212
I212
I211
I212
I212
I215
I211
I212
I212
I213
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I214
I215
I215
I215
I215
I207
I212
I212
I212
I212
I212
I212
I212
I213
I213
I213
I213
I213
I213
17905-2
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DO
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DO
DO
DO
DO
AI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
3
3
9
2
3
4
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
10
10
10
10
7
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
6
14
0
1
2
3
4
5
10
13
14
3
7
7
2
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
4
6
8
10
0
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
0
1
2
3
4
5
I/O Sequence
Instrument
Number Drawing I/O Type
(rack.slot.point)
Number
SECTION 17905
SCADA SIGNAL SCHEDULE
Application Notes
C00822C13
7/11/2013
Description
UPS Trouble
Instrument Air Trouble
Sump Pump Panel Trouble Alarm
Diversion Vault Flood
Maintenance Mode
DDC Trouble
Fire Alarm
Fire Alarm Control Panel Trouble
Rain Gauge
AC Power Fail
DC Power Supply Failure
Telemetry Failure
Exterior Doors Open
Odor Control Room Gas - % LEL
Odor Control Room Gas - O2 Level
Odor Control Vault Gas - % LEL
Odor Control Vault Gas - O2 Level
Storage Tank Gas - % LEL
Storage Tank Gas - H2S Level
Storage Tank Gas - O2 Level
Odor Control Gas- O2 Alarm
Odor Control Gas- LEL Alarm
Storage Tank Gas- O2 Alarm
Storage Tank Gas- LEL Alarm
Storage Tank Gas- H2S Alarm
Odor Control Vault LEL Alarm
Odor Control Vault O2 Alarm
Gas Detedtion Panel PNL851,102 Low Flow
Gas Detedtion Panel PNL851,103 Low Flow
Gas Detedtion Panel PNL851,117 Low Flow
C2 Pump 1 kW
C2 Pump 1 kVAR
C2 Pump 1 PF (Power Factor)
C2 Pump 1 VLTS
C2 Pump 1 AMPS
C2 Pump 2 kW
C2 Pump 2 kVAR
C2 Pump 2 PF (Power Factor)
C2 Pump 2 VLTS
C2 Pump 2 AMPS
Sump Pump 1 kW
Sump Pump 1 kVAR
Sump Pump 1 PF (Power Factor)
Sump Pump 1 VLTS
Sump Pump 1 AMPS
Sump Pump 2 kW
Sump Pump 2 kVAR
Sump Pump 2 PF (Power Factor)
Sump Pump 2 VLTS
Sump Pump 2 AMPS
Air Compressor 1 kW
Air Compressor 1 kVAR
Air Compressor 1 PF (Power Factor)
South Magnolia Storage Facility
YA-851,130
YA-851,105 A
YA-851,101 F
LAHH-851,116
NAX-851,101F
YA-851,106
YA-851,118 A
YA-851,118 A
GQS-851,135
EA-851,101
EA-851,102
YA-851,131
YA 851,120
AI-851,103 BA
AI-851,103 BC
AI-851,117 BA
AI-851,117 BC
AI-851,102 BA
AI-851,102 BB
AI-851,102 BC
AAL-851,103 BC
AAH-851,103 BA
AAL-851,102 BC
AAH-851,102 BA
AAH-851,102 BB
AAH-851,117BA
AAL-851,117BA
FAL-851,102
FAL-851,103
FAL-851,117
NX-851,106AA
NX-851,106AB
NX-851,106AC
NX-851,106AD
NX-851,106AE
NX-851,107AA
NX-851,107AB
NX-851,107AC
NX-851,107AD
NX-851,107AE
NX-851,104AA
NX-851,104AB
NX-851,104AC
NX-851,104AD
NX-851,104AE
NX-851,105AA
NX-851,105AB
NX-851,105AC
NX-851,105AD
NX-851,105AE
NX-851,105AAA
NX-851,105AAB
NX-851,105AAC
Tag Number
P303
P304
P304
P304
P305
P305
P305
P305
P305
P305
P305
P305
P305
P306
P306
P306
P306
P306
P306
P306
P306
P306
P306
P306
P306
P306
P306
P306
P306
P306
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P&ID
Drawing
Number
I213
I212
I213
I213
I211
I213
I213
I213
I213
I213
I213
I215
I215
I206
I206
I206
I206
I206
I206
I206
I212
I212
I212
I212
I212
I212
I212
I213
I213
I213
17905-3
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DO
DO
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
DI
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
6
3
6
6
1
5
5
5
5
6
6
9
9
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
8
15
8
15
6
8
9
13
6
14
4
6
4
5
6
7
5
6
7
0
1
3
4
5
14
15
10
11
12
I/O Sequence
Instrument
Number Drawing I/O Type
(rack.slot.point)
Number
SECTION 17905
SCADA SIGNAL SCHEDULE
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Application Notes
C00822C13
7/11/2013
P&ID
Drawing
Number
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
P307
Description
Air Compressor 1 VLTS
Air Compressor 1 AMPS
Air Compressor 2 kW
Air Compressor 2 kVAR
Air Compressor 2 PF (Power Factor)
Air Compressor 2 VLTS
Air Compressor 2 AMPS
Odor Control Fan kW
Odor Control Fan kVAR
Odor Control Fan PF (Power Factor)
Odor Control Fan VLTS
Odor Control Fan AMPS
Odor Control Room Exhaust Fan kW
Odor Control Room Exhaust Fan kVAR
Odor Control Room Exhaust Fan PF (Power Factor)
Odor Control Room Exhaust Fan VLTS
Odor Control Room Exhaust Fan AMPS
Dewateringl Room Exhaust Fan kW
Dewateringl Room Exhaust Fan kVAR
Dewateringl Room Exhaust Fan PF (Power Factor)
Dewateringl Room Exhaust Fan VLTS
Dewateringl Room Exhaust Fan AMPS
Power Monitor kW
Power Monitor kVAR
Power Monitor PF (Power Factor)
Power Monitor VLTS
Power Monitor AMPS
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
South Magnolia Storage Facility
17905-4
0
1
2
3
4
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
0
1
I/O Sequence
Instrument
Number Drawing I/O Type
(rack.slot.point)
Number
Representative list of signal to be relayed to the SCADA System from the UDS/EDS
Final signal list shall be coordinated with the South Magnolia Conveyance Pipeline Contractor.
EDS Gate Position Feedback
AI
ZI-851,152
1
4
Upper Diversion Structure Level A
AI
LI-851,151A
1
4
Upper Diversion Structure Level B
AI
LI-851,151B
1
4
Existing Diversion Structure Level A
AI
LI-851,152A
1
4
Existing Diversion Structure Level B
AI
LI-851,152B
1
4
EDS Gate Position Signal
AO
ZX-851,152
1
6
Storage Gate Open
DI
ZSO-851,151
1
8
Storage Gate Closed
DI
ZSC-851,151
1
8
Storage Gate In Remote
DI
YI-851,151
1
8
Storage Gate Fault
DI
ZA-851,151
1
8
EDS Gate Open
DI
ZSO-851,152
1
8
EDS Gate Closed
DI
ZSC-851,152
1
8
EDS Gate High Torque
DI
WH-851,152
1
8
EDS Gate Fault
DI
ZA-851,152
1
8
EDS Gate In Auto
DI
YI-851,152
1
8
AC Power Fail
DI
EA-851,151
1
8
UPS Trouble
DI
YA-851,151
1
8
Storage Gate Open CMD
DO
ZXO-851,151
1
10
Storage Gate Close CMD
DO
ZXC-851,151
1
10
CSO Flow
FI--851,152
NX-851,105AAD
NX-851,105AAE
NX-851,105BAA
NX-851,105BAB
NX-851,105BAC
NX-851,105BAD
NX-851,105BAE
NX-851,101AA
NX-851,101AB
NX-851,101AC
NX-851,101AD
NX-851,101AE
NX-851,102BA
NX-851,102BB
NX-851,102BC
NX-851,102BD
NX-851,102BE
NX-851,103AA
NX-851,103AB
NX-851,103AC
NX-851,103AD
NX-851,103AE
NX-851,102AA
NX-851,102AB
NX-851,102AC
NX-851,102AD
NX-851,102AE
Tag Number
SECTION 17905
SCADA SIGNAL SCHEDULE
Calculated from EDS Level
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Ethernet Power Monitoring
Application Notes
C00822C13
7/11/2013
SECTION 17906
RELAY SCHEDULE
COLUMN HEADINGS TO INCLUDE:
1.01 TAG NUMBER
1.02 DESCRIPTION
1.03 MNEMONIC CODE
1.04 TIME DELAY TYPE
1.05 TIME DELAY RANGE
1.06 TIME DELAY SETPOINT
1.07 SPECIFICATION
1.08 TYPE
1.09 LOOP DWG
1.10 NOTES
END OF SECTION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
July 2013
17906 - 1
C00822C13
Description
PANEL FAN
AC POWER FAIL
POWER SUPPLY 1 FAILURE
POWER SUPPLY 2 FAILURE
PLC FAILURE
PUMP 1 SEAL FAIL
PUMP 1 HIGH TEMP
PUMP 2 SEAL FAIL
PUMP 2 HIGH TEMP
C2 WATER TROUBLE
PUMP 3 SEAL FAIL
PUMP 3 HIGH TEMP
AIR GAP TANK HIGH LEVEL
INSTRUMENT AIR TROUBLE
ODOR CONTROL FAN RUNNING
ODOR CONTROL FAN FLOW VERIFICATION
AIR GAP TANK LOW LEVEL
GENERATOR READY
GENERATOR RUNNING
GENERATOR TROUBLE
GENERATOR AUTO MODE
GENERATOR FAILURE
FUEL TANK LOW LEVEL
FUEL TANK LEAK
ATS NOT IN AUTO
ATS NORMAL POSITION
ATS STANDBY POSITION
ATS NORMAL SOURCE AVAILABLE
ATS STANDBY SOURCE AVAILABLE
ATS FAULT
DDC TROUBLE
FIRE ALARM
FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL TROUBLE
RAIN GAUGE
DEWATERING FLOW TOTAL
ODOR CONTROL ROOM INTRUSION
PUMP ROOM INTRUSION
MECHANICAL ROOM INTRUSION
ELECTRICAL ROOM INTRUSION
GENERATOR ROOM INTRUSION
UPS TROUBLE
AC POWER FAIL
MECHANICAL ROOM FLOOD
LOW IA PRESSURE BAY 1
LOW IA PRESSURE BAY 2-4
LOW IA PRESSURE DIVERSION STRUCTURE
South Magnolia Storage Facility
Tag No
CR 205116
CR 205117
CR 205307
CR 205308
TR 210105
CR 211109
CR 211111
CR 211209
CR 211211
CR 211225
CR 212109
CR 212111
CR 212115
CR 212120
CR 212129
CR 212131
CR 212206
CR 212213
CR 212215
CR 212219
CR 212221
CR 212223
CR 212227
CR 212229
CR 213102
CR 213104
CR 213106
CR 213108
CR 213110
CR 213112
CR 213115
CR 213119
CR 213121
CR 213129
CR 213131
CR 213203
CR 213205
CR 213207
CR 213209
CR 213211
CR 213213
CR 213215
CR 213217
CR 213223
CR 213225
CR 213227
Mnemonic
Code
PFAN
ACF
PS1F
PS2F
PLCFAIL
P1SF
P1TA
P2SF
P2TA
C2T
P3SF
P3TA
AGTHL
IAT
FR
FV
AGTLL
GR
GRU
GT
GA
GF
FTLL
FTL
ATSNA
ATSNP
ATSSP
ATSNSA
ATSSSA
ATSF
DDCT
FA
FCPT
RG
PFT
OCRI
PRI
MRI
ERI
GRI
UPSA
ACPF
MRF
L1A1
L1A2
L1AD
TOF
Time
Delay
Setpoint
0-60SEC 10 SEC
Time
Delay
Range
17906-1
Time Delay
Type
17906 - Relay Schedule
Specification
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17273
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
Type Loop Dwg.
CR
I205
CR
I205
CR
I205
CR
I205
TR
I210
CR
I211
CR
I211
CR
I211
CR
I211
CR
I211
CR
I212
CR
I212
CR
I212
CR
I212
CR
I212
CR
I212
CR
I212
CR
I212
CR
I212
CR
I212
CR
I212
CR
I212
CR
I212
CR
I212
CR
I213
CR
I213
CR
I213
CR
I213
CR
I213
CR
I213
CR
I213
CR
I213
CR
I213
CR
I213
CR
I213
CR
I213
CR
I213
CR
I213
CR
I213
CR
I213
CR
I213
CR
I213
CR
I213
CR
I213
CR
I213
CR
I213
Notes
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
C00822C13
DCPSF
SPPT
LD
SLGOC
SLGCC
OCFF
TELFLT
INT
MLN
MLM
PSF
F1
PLVOC
PLVCC
F2
MV1OC
MV2OC
MV3OC
MV4OC
BPAB1
BPAB2
BPAB3
RST
HRN
PLVF
PLVO
PLVC
PLVR
SLGF
SLGOC
SLOC
SLGR
MV1O
MV1C
MV1O2
MV1T
MV2O
MV2C
MV2O2
MV2T
MV3O
MV3C
MV3O2
MV3T
MV4O
MV4C
Description
DC POWER SUPPLY FAILURE
SUMP PUMP PANEL TROUBLE
LEAD PUMP START
TANK ISOLATION GATE OPEN COMMAND
TANK ISOLATION GATE CLOSE COMMAND
ODOR CONTROL FAN FAILURE
TELEMETRY FAILURE
EXTERIOR DOORS OPEN
MAINTENANCE LIGHT- NORMAL MODE
MAINTENANCE LIGHT- MAINTENANCE MODE
PUMP SEQUENCE FAULT
FIRST FOLLOW START
EMERGENCY PLUG VALVE OPEN COMMAND
EMERGENCY PLUG VALVE CLOSE COMMAND
SECOND FOLLOW START
TIPPING BUCKET 1 C2 VALVE OPEN COMMAND
TIPPING BUCKET 2 C2 VALVE OPEN COMMAND
TIPPING BUCKET 3 C2 VALVE OPEN COMMAND
TIPPING BUCKET 4 C2 VALVE OPEN COMMAND
PNL851,113 ACTIVE BUBBLER
PNL851,114 ACTIVE BUBBLER
PNL851,115 ACTIVE BUBBLER
ALARM RESET
ALARM HORNS
PLUG VALVE 851,101 FAULT
PLV851101 OPEN
PLV851101 CLOSED
PLV851101 IN REMOTE
SLG VALVE 851,101 FAULT
SLG851101 OPEN
SLG851101 CLOSED
SLG851101 IN REMOTE
MV851101 OPEN
MV851101 CLOSED
MV851,101 OPEN/CLOSE RELAY
MV851,101 OPEN/CLOSE DELAY TIMER
MV851102 OPEN
MV851102 CLOSED
MV851,102 OPEN/CLOSE RELAY
MV851,102 OPEN/CLOSE DELAY TIMER
MV851103 OPEN
MV851103 CLOSED
MV851,103 OPEN/CLOSE RELAY
MV851,103 OPEN/CLOSE DELAY TIMER
MV851104 OPEN
MV851104 CLOSED
South Magnolia Storage Facility
Tag No
CR 213231
CR 213233
CR 215103
CR 215105
CR 215107
CR 215109
CR 215111
CR 215115
CR 215117
CR 215119
CR 215121
CR 215203
CR 215205
CR 215207
CR 215209
CR 215211
CR 215215
CR 215219
CR 215223
CR 215225
CR 215227
CR 215229
CR 222115
CR 222118
TR 223117
CR 223123
CR 223126
CR 223128
TR 224117
CR 224123
CR 224126
CR 224128
CR 225116
CR 225119
CR 225123
TR 225125
CR 226116
CR 226119
CR 226123
TR 226125
CR 227116
CR 227119
CR 227123
TR 227125
CR 228116
CR 228119
Mnemonic
Code
1-60 MIN 30 MIN
1-60 MIN 30 MIN
1-60 MIN 30 MIN
TON
TON
TON
17906-2
0-120SEC 70 SEC
TOF
Time
Delay
Setpoint
4-120SEC 70 SEC
Time
Delay
Range
TOF
Time Delay
Type
17906 - Relay Schedule
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
TR
CR
CR
CR
TR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
TR
CR
CR
CR
TR
CR
CR
CR
TR
CR
CR
I213
I213
I215
I215
I215
I215
I215
I215
I215
I215
I215
I215
I215
I215
I215
I215
I215
I215
I215
I215
I215
I215
I222
I222
I223
I223
I223
I223
I224
I224
I224
I224
I225
I225
I225
I225
I226
I226
I226
I226
I227
I227
I227
I227
I228
I228
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
Specification Type Loop Dwg. Notes
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
C00822C13
MV4O2
MV4T
P1
P1AUTO
P1AUTO2
P1CV
VFD1REM
VFD1RDY
VFD1RNG
P1TMR
VFD1FLT
P2
P2AUTO
P2AUTO2
P2CV
VFD2REM
VFD2RDY
VFD2RNG
P2TMR
VFD2FLT
P3
P3AUTO
P3AUTO2
P3CV
VFD3REM
VFD3RDY
VFD3RNG
P3TMR
VFD3FLT
TLEL
TH2S
GS FL1
TO2
OCVLEL
GS FL3
OCVO2
OCRLEL
OCRLEL2
OCRO2
OCRO22
GS FL2
OCRFS
VVFS
STHL
STHHL
T1P
Description
MV851,104 OPEN/CLOSE RELAY
MV851,104 OPEN/CLOSE DELAY TIMER
CALL PUMP 1
PUMP 1 IN AUTO
PUMP 1 IN AUTO
PUMP 1 CHECK VALVE
VFD IN REMOTE
VFD READY
VFD RUNNING
VFD RUNNING 10 SEC
VFD FAULT
CALL PUMP 2
PUMP 2 IN AUTO
PUMP 2 IN AUTO
PUMP 2 CHECK VALVE
VFD IN REMOTE
VFD READY
VFD RUNNING
VFD RUNNING 10 SEC
VFD FAULT
CALL PUMP 3
PUMP 3 IN AUTO
PUMP 3 IN AUTO
PUMP 3 CHECK VALVE
VFD IN REMOTE
VFD READY
VFD RUNNING
VFD RUNNING 10 SEC
VFD FAULT
STORAGE TANK HIGH LEL
STORAGE TANK HIGH H2S
GAS DETECTION PNL851,102 LOW FLOW
STORAGE TANK LOW O2
ODOR CONTROL VAULT HIGH LEL
GAS DETECTION PNL851,117 LOW FLOW
ODOR CONTROL VAULT LOW O2
ODOR CONTROL ROOM HIGH LEL
ODOR CONTROL ROOM HIGH LEL
ODOR CONTROL ROOM LOW O2
ODOR CONTROL ROOM LOW O2
GAS DETECTION PNL851,103 LOW FLOW
ODOR CONTROL ROOM EXHAUST FAN LOW FLOW
VALVE VAULT FLOOD SWITCH
STORAGE TANK HIGH LEVEL FLOAT SWITCH
STORAGE TANK HIGH HIGH LEVEL FLOAT SWITCH
TIPPING BUCKET 1 POSITION
South Magnolia Storage Facility
Tag No
CR 228123
TR 228125
CR 229103
CR 229108
CR 229109
CR 229123
CR 229222
CR 229224
CR 229226
TR 229228
CR 229230
CR 230103
CR 230108
CR 230109
CR 230123
CR 230222
CR 230224
CR 230226
TR 230228
CR 230230
CR 231103
CR 231108
CR 231109
CR 231123
CR 231222
CR 231224
CR 231226
TR 231228
CR 231230
CR 240109
CR 240115
CR 240120
CR 240121
CR 240127
CR 240134
CR 240135
CR 240209
CR 240211
CR 240215
CR 240217
CR 240220
CR 240225
CR 241105
CR 241109
CR 241113
CR 241117
Mnemonic
Code
0-60 SEC 10 SEC
0-60 SEC 10 SEC
TON
TON
17906-3
0-60 SEC 10 SEC
TON
Time
Delay
Setpoint
1-60 MIN 30 MIN
Time
Delay
Range
TON
Time Delay
Type
17906 - Relay Schedule
CR
TR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
TR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
TR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
TR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
I228
I228
I229
I229
I229
I229
I230
I229
I229
I229
I229
I230
I230
I230
I230
I230
I230
I230
I230
I230
I231
I231
I231
I231
I231
I231
I231
I231
I231
I240
I240
I240
I240
I241
I240
I242
I240
I240
I240
I241
I240
I240
I241
I241
I241
I241
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
Specification Type Loop Dwg. Notes
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17273
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17273
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
C00822C13
T2P
T3P
T4P
LT1
LT2
LT3
LT4
LT5
LT6
LT7
LT8
LT9
LT10
LT11
LT12
LT13
LT14
LT15
LT16
BSELA1
BSELAUTO1
BSELB1
BSELA2
BSELAUTO2
BSELB2
BSELA3
BSELAUTO3
BSELB3
P1L
P2L
P3L
P1F1
P2F1
P3F1
P1F2
P2F2
P3F2
Description
TIPPING BUCKET 2 POSITION
TIPPING BUCKET 3 POSITION
TIPPING BUCKET 4 POSITION
LAMP TEST
LAMP TEST
LAMP TEST
LAMP TEST
LAMP TEST
LAMP TEST
LAMP TEST
LAMP TEST
LAMP TEST
LAMP TEST
LAMP TEST
LAMP TEST
LAMP TEST
LAMP TEST
LAMP TEST
LAMP TEST
BUBBLER A SELECT
BUBBLER AUTO SELECT
BUBBLER B SELECT
BUBBLER A SELECT
BUBBLER AUTO SELECT
BUBBLER B SELECT
BUBBLER A SELECT
BUBBLER AUTO SELECT
BUBBLER B SELECT
CALL P1 LEAD
CALL P2 LEAD
CALL P3 LEAD
CALL P1 FIRST FOLLOW
CALL P2 FIRST FOLLOW
CALL P3 FIRST FOLLOW
CALL P1 SECOND FOLLOW
CALL P2 SECOND FOLLOW
CALL P3 SECOND FOLLOW
South Magnolia Storage Facility
Tag No
CR 241121
CR 241125
CR 241129
CR 241205
CR 241206
CR 241207
CR 241208
CR 241209
CR 241210
CR 241211
CR 241212
CR 241213
CR 241214
CR 241215
CR 241216
CR 241217
CR 241218
CR 241219
CR 241220
CR 241303
CR 241305
CR 241307
CR 241313
CR 241315
CR 241317
CR 241322
CR 241324
CR 241326
CR 242103
CR 242104
CR 242105
CR 242203
CR 242204
CR 242205
CR 243103
CR 243104
CR 243105
Mnemonic
Code
Time
Delay
Range
17906-4
Time Delay
Type
17906 - Relay Schedule
Time
Delay
Setpoint
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
I241
I241
I241
I241
I241
I241
I241
I241
I241
I241
I241
I241
I241
I241
I241
I241
I241
I241
I241
I241
I241
I241
I241
I241
I241
I241
I241
I242
I242
I242
I242
I242
I242
I242
I243
I243
I243
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
MAIN CONTROL PANEL
Specification Type Loop Dwg. Notes
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
17272
C00822C13